<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?><!-- generator="wordpress.com" -->
<rss version="2.0"
	xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"
	xmlns:wfw="http://wellformedweb.org/CommentAPI/"
	xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"
	>

<channel>
	<title>philosophytheory &amp;laquo; WordPress.com Tag Feed</title>
	<link>http://en.wordpress.com/tag/philosophytheory/</link>
	<description>Feed of posts on WordPress.com tagged "philosophytheory"</description>
	<pubDate>Wed, 19 Jun 2013 15:34:01 +0000</pubDate>

	<generator>http://en.wordpress.com/tags/</generator>
	<language>en</language>

<item>
<title><![CDATA[Philosophical Discourses: Beyond Power]]></title>
<link>http://cynicmeetshope.wordpress.com/2012/10/07/philosophical-discourses-beyond-power/</link>
<pubDate>Sun, 07 Oct 2012 09:19:54 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>C.J. Chanco</dc:creator>
<guid>http://cynicmeetshope.wordpress.com/2012/10/07/philosophical-discourses-beyond-power/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[A rather lengthy reply to a good friend, over the possibility of change in the Philippines. What fol]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<div></div>
<div>A rather lengthy reply to a good friend, over the possibility of change in the Philippines. What follows has been written in literary jest, and is not to be taken (too) seriously. The photos and the stories they tell, however, are real:</div>
<div></div>
<div></div>
<div><a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/File:EDSA_Revolution_pic1.jpg" target="_blank"><img class="zemanta-img-inserted zemanta-img-configured" title="An iconic photo of the EDSA Revolution in the ..." alt="An iconic photo of the EDSA Revolution in the ..." src="http://upload.wikimedia.org/wikipedia/en/3/3b/EDSA_Revolution_pic1.jpg" height="286" width="400" /></a></div>
<div></div>
<p>People  Power I. How soon we forget.</p>
<p>&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;</p>
<div>
<div id="id_50714786edf801583087349">The Joker is just as much a part of a System that spits at life, despises it, monetizes it, enthrones glory, profit and pride in the place of ordinary citizens just trying to survive the chaos it causes &#8211; as you and I.</div>
</div>
<div>
<div>The people who fight for a saner world are the people none of us would expect: not the billionaire, not the banker, nor even the politician &#8211; but the farmer, the teacher, the scientist, the street sweeper, who live their lives quietly, humbly, away from the spotlight, and who together form the foundations of our nation&#8217;s economy, and society.</div>
</div>
<div></div>
<div>
<div>That they do not give up is inspiration enough for us who ought to listen to their cries and fight alongside them.</div>
<div></div>
<div>Isn&#8217;t this why we should be against the Cybercrime Law? To speak out on their behalf when they are silenced &#8211; often brutally &#8211; in the parliament of the streets?</div>
<div></div>
</div>
<div>
<div>Let us not forget.</div>
</div>
<blockquote>
<div></div>
<div>HR ALERT-GITNANG LUSON:Kinokondena ng Anakpawis Partylist-Tarlac at Gitnang Luson ang pagpatay kay John Cali Lagrimas, 15 years old, sa isang demolisyon kaninang alas 8 ng umaga sa Block 7, Brgy. San Roque, Tarlac City. Kaugnay nito, mara&#8230;<a>See more</a></div>
<div><a href="https://www.facebook.com/photo.php?fbid=411773435539037&#38;set=a.187169261332790.42081.163357850380598&#38;type=1&#38;theater" target="_blank" rel="nofollow">https://www.facebook.com/photo.php?fbid=411773435539037&#38;set=a.187169261332790.42081.163357850380598&#38;type=1&#38;theater</a></div>
</blockquote>
<div>
<div></div>
<div></div>
<div><img alt="" src="https://fbcdn-sphotos-g-a.akamaihd.net/hphotos-ak-ash3/550875_411773435539037_126555131_n.jpg" /></div>
<div></div>
<div>
<p><a href="http://www.cenpeg.org/2012/issue_analysis/2012/Aquinos_Transformational_Presidency-What_Change.html">http://www.cenpeg.org/2012/issue_analysis/2012/Aquinos_Transformational_Presidency-What_Change.html</a></p>
<div>
<p><a href="http://www.redpepper.org.uk/the-financial-enclosure-of-the-commons/">http://www.redpepper.org.uk/the-financial-enclosure-of-the-commons/</a></p>
<p><a href="http://bulatlat.com/main/2012/07/24/sona-2012-a-chronicle-of-lies-foretold/" target="_blank">http://bulatlat.com/main/2012/07/24/sona-2012-a-chronicle-of-lies-foretold/</a></p>
</div>
</div>
<div></div>
<div></div>
<div>&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;&#8212;</div>
<div></div>
</div>
<p>What we require is a new kind of revolution.</p>
<p>One not founded on the convolutions of Western philosophers and their Eastern cronies who have done little to empathise with the realities of the Filipino people – how hard though we pretend, lest we fall into the same trap that dooms the Left to fail, as I will explain below.</p>
<p>But first we must understand its rage, its dissent, and immerse ourselves in the concrete lives of the oppressed masses for whom it says it exists,   to make sense of the reasons why its supporters cling to their strand of ideology with all the zeal of the followers of fundamentalist religion.</p>
<p>Fundamentalist religion, as are all forms of extremism, emerges out of chaos, out of people attempting to make sense of an existence <em>made</em> senseless.</p>
<p>The existence of the average Pinoy &#8211; long ignored by a tiny middle class – fits that definition.  Which is why a cheeky few go for Communism. Others settle for Catholicism. Some flee to foreign shores. The rest give up and indulge in the sultry illusions of commercial media, crime, drugs, sex and consumer culture. The elite, for their part,  blind at the top of the pyramid, see only springing skyscrapers and a booming economy; while ordinary people at the bottom see their children starve, their savings shrivelled and incomes slashed, their unions brutally busted, their rivers run in blood and toxic lead, their lands and livelihoods taken over by multinationals and their military backers,  their nominal democracy run on puppet-strings by the same  covetous clans who infest congress and  have dominated this country for centuries.</p>
<p>Poverty, inequality and destitution are not the inevitable results of incompetence and  ‘’bad governance’’ by the leadership of a corrupted system,  they <em>are</em> the System.</p>
<div id="attachment_1375" class="wp-caption alignnone" style="width: 620px"><a href="http://cynicmeetshope.files.wordpress.com/2012/10/577154_444070035629899_1711669278_n.jpg"><img class="size-full wp-image-1375" title="577154_444070035629899_1711669278_n" alt="" src="http://cynicmeetshope.files.wordpress.com/2012/10/577154_444070035629899_1711669278_n.jpg?w=610&#038;h=407" height="407" width="610" /></a><p class="wp-caption-text">&#8221;The younger aquinos don&#8217;t know that the first one was at least critical of capitalism.&#8221; &#8211; Luke E., PLM</p></div>
<p>After studying the traditional Left for some time, I understand now that it is literally the only alternative this country has to a system that has lost its legitimacy. It has been fighting for change, rightfully so, for decades. It is the only such movement to have placed itself consistently on the side of the majority of our people, both in parliament and the countryside.    So while I have my reservations, I refuse to dismiss it entirely.  I agree with some of its ends, if not its means. When the crises converge (and they will), the clamours for change will kick in from all flanks.</p>
<p>Still, I fear for its future. I fear how the revolution is destined to fail unless it changes tactics and revolutionizes itself.  I fear for the people  it intends to “free’’, who will end up on the losing end of it all, if all goes according to plan &#8211; or does not.  I fear  a final war of David-vs.-Goliath proportions; the last honest warriors of the Sick man of Asia, propped up  by  false hopes and sweet palliatives  promising &#8221;change and reform&#8221;, against an embattled world order held together by  a giant that will not yield.</p>
<p>My fear is not that it is too radical – but that it does not go far enough. New ways of challenging the <a href="http://www.thirdworldtraveler.com/Eduardo_Galeano/Upside_Down.html">System </a>are emerging, in <a href="http://www.redpepper.org.uk/a-different-way-of-doing-things/">new economic paradigms</a>, <a href="http://libcom.org/notes/about">participatory politics</a> and ways of <a href="http://www.redpepper.org.uk/the-coming-of-the-commons/">organising</a>, should it choose to pay attention to them and adapt accordingly. A new ‘’social order’’ cannot be imposed from above through violent means but must bubble up from below. The movement’s pseudo-radical, pseudo-scientific fundamentalist interpretation of the philosophical traditions  of a century long-gone- verging on <a title="Stalinism" href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stalinism" target="_blank" rel="wikipedia">Stalinist</a> – is as &#8221;conservative&#8221; as the petrified paradigms it seeks to overthrow.</p>
<p>For one, it continues to classify human beings into mechanistic sub-groups, with the fervour of an advertising executive pigeon-holing her audience into Classes A, B to E. This is of course necessary in Marxian analysis,  and may be no more than a sociological exercise to facilitate better understanding of the unique nature of Filipino society, but its willingness to reduce human beings to a  series of categories, without <em>fully </em>taking all their nuances into account, is telling of its capacity for &#8221;institutional coercion&#8221; (a.k.a. inhumanity of the kind exhibited by Stalin).</p>
<p>In Europe, <a href="http://links.org.au/node/3079" target="_blank">Latin America </a>and elsewhere similar movements have since moved on from such ideas; still this one insists on its own orthodoxy of salvation, following economic paradigms that have demonstrably failed in the past, based &#8221;upon the false assumption that Marx wishes to define where he only investigates, and that in general one might expect fixed, cut-to-measure, once and for all applicable definitions in Marx’s work&#8221; (Engels, in his preface to <em>Capital, III)</em>.</p>
<p>&#8221;It is self-evident&#8221;, Engels remarks to the contrary, &#8221;that where things and their interrelations are concerned, not as fixed, but as changing, their mental images, the ideas, are likewise subject to change and transformation; and they are not encapsulated in rigid definitions, but are developed in their historical or logical process of formation.&#8221;</p>
<p>And even if the revolution does, at first,  succeed in the emancipation of the masses whose interests it claims to serve, it may not do so for long. Though its vanguard ostensibly draws its support from the grass-roots, it will inevitably turn in on itself, crystallising its own power and mutating into the very Fascist incarnation it fears the most.</p>
<p>Again I speak out of ignorance,  and its future could very well end up differently, with  signs that the painful lessons of history are pushing the movement toward a clearer path.</p>
<p>But any reluctance to change condemns it to irrelevance, and leaves the working class few alternatives other than a choice between two  tyrannies: to accept oppression or to oppress itself.</p>
<p>The goal of any movement to upend a system hooked on the accumulation of wealth and power should be to rid the world of both (disperse and destroy all forms of control and oppression), not engage in their mere transferral from one social group (capitalists) to another (proletarians), or from one form (money in the control of a capitalist plutocracy) to another (money in the hands of proletarians who turn into corrupt, brutal bureaucrats themselves). After all, what we seek is a redress of grievances and a redistribution of power, of wealth and property, away from the corporate and financial elite, away from a parasitic capitalist class, away from large landholders &#8211; and toward everyday people.</p>
<p>Power concentrated in the hands of a few always corrupts. When monopolized by a small clique that has convinced itself that it alone knows what is right and just for all, with the consecration of age-old ideas rendered dogma (isn’t the free market ideal just as dogmatic and the current ruling oligarchy  just as self-righteous?), a Revolution waged in Democracy’s name inevitably devolves into Despotism.  Society then does indeed become equal, with “some more equal than others’’.</p>
<p>This is precisely why I draw attention to the need to move <em>beyond </em>the quest for power &#8211; beyond politics as it is presently waged, toward humanity-  which some would dismiss as bourgeois sentimentality and naive anarchism. But  I dare say the apathy and cynicism so fashionable among the youth of today and the converging crises we face require a certain naïveté.</p>
<p>What you call my &#8221;pointless platitudes&#8221; have always been directed at the tragedy of our Disconnection from one another. At the fact that radical change is possible -should we unite beyond rigid definitions of rich and poor and see ourselves as living beings of equal worth and dignity – at least to gain the critical mass necessary to turn things around. A unity which the movement, through its divisive tactics and paranoia,  largely prevents, but again I speak out of ignorance, and I certainly see its efforts to be more inclusive and democratic, reaching out to create a broader base of support.</p>
<p>But unless the people at the top and the middle, by some miracle, see sense and act on the interests of the poor majority (which is becoming increasingly unlikely), a violent revolution can and must ensue, that, by necessity, will stifle all attempts to find other ways for the world to unite under a common cause, widen the ravine between classes, and sharpen the distinctions that set them apart. I am bourgeois, you are my slave.  In such a world, a classless society can never be.</p>
<p>This is not to deny the reality of class struggle. We cannot condemn those  who seek from the world only the means to survive against those who seek the world for themselves.</p>
<p>How can we expect a farmer’s widow <em>not</em> to react in self-defence – even in outright violence (which is often the only way the ‘’least ‘’among us are ever paid attention to) &#8211; when forced off  her  land? So by all means, revolt and overthrow.</p>
<p>But do so with a mind to what happens next. Shall we overthrow oppression by enthroning oppression in its place? Are we to break the chains of our people’s slavish dependence on <a href="http://monthlyreview.org/commentary/the-face-of-empire">US Empire</a> only to strap them on to the likes of the next <a class="zem_slink" title="Khmer Rouge" href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Khmer_Rouge" target="_blank" rel="wikipedia">Khmer Rouge</a>?</p>
<p>There can be no peace without justice, and neither can be achieved through patchwork reforms or the clever obfuscations of couch philosophers. Nor, however, can liberty be attained through the same sort of violence that the powers-that-be have used to their great benefit to oppress the working class throughout history.  Militarism is at the heart of capitalism (and indeed partly gave rise to the money system itself,   to prop up large armies and ensure military efficiency, today reaching its climax in America&#8217;s <a href="http://www.npr.org/2011/01/17/132942244/ikes-warning-of-military-expansion-50-years-later" target="_blank">military-industrial Complex)</a>.</p>
<p>Regardless of its founding ideals,<em> any revolution that begins with violence will end in violence</em>, in the destruction of itself and the very people  it once sought to liberate. Who do we fight for, after all, if not for all of humanity and the Earth through which all derive their being?  To enthrone anyone over another, even for the dictatorship of the proletariat, is self-defeating, once the  vanguard of the proletariat itself becomes a new power-monger,  redefined capitalists-by-another-name, caught up as it will be in the inertia of the struggle for power.</p>
<p>So why not rid ourselves of the throne entirely?  Have we learned nothing from history?   Consider the bourgeois revolutions of France and America, for instance, which won freedoms for  a few white middle class men, perhaps, but  automatically denied blacks, slaves, women,  native Americans, and their colonies-to-be from the chance to live lives of equal dignity.  Or the Soviet Union, China, North Korea and Cambodia&#8230; these require no further elaboration. The same ethic  that  reduces people into  mechanistic actors without agency  in a universe of impersonal forces, to be fit into neat formulas  for ever greater control over the planet&#8217;s resources, that denies their intrinsic worth in favour of  unquestioned dogma that promises liberation or prosperity, feeds into the exploitation of the many by the few.</p>
<p>Yet along the same lines, the revolutions waged under the banner of ‘’peace’’ were nearly always co-opted and reversed by elite interests in the years that followed. Consider <a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/apartheid-never-died-in-south-africa-it-inspired-a-world-order-upheld-by-force-and-illusion/" target="_blank">South Africa </a>- which has replaced racial apartheid with an economic one &#8211; and our own People Power I. The results of these were no less violent, Gandhi would say. Poverty is the worst violence.</p>
<p>This leaves us a question by a man no less renowned: <a href="http://www.stwr.org/the-un-people-politics/when-will-ordinary-people-rise-up.html">‘’what is to be done?’</a></p>
<p>The task is to devise new ways of <a href="http://www.ascentofhumanity.com/text.php">Being </a>that discourage the blind accumulation and concentration of wealth and power: power for its own sake. The challenge is to engage in <em>creative destruction,</em> to build – or grow - new structures, physical, economic and social, that prevent the sort of chaos, apathy and inequality we see in late capitalist society. The challenge is to do away with what-is and <strong><em>create </em></strong> what-can-be over the ashes of the old. Shape non-hierarchical, small-scale, interconnected <a href="http://www.neweconomics.org/sites/neweconomics.org/files/Great_Transition_0.pdf" target="_blank">communities </a>that mimic the processes we see in Nature, in self-sufficiency, sustainability and solidarity, minus its brutality and ape-like struggles for dominance.  In other words, a System which does not deny human nature at its finest, or choke it through brutal repression, physical, political, economic or otherwise:  that values individual dignity as much it does the integrity of the Whole.</p>
<p>This process need not come in stages. It could begin now. Alongside our  street marches, let us pave the way toward<a title="Rio+20: The World We (Really) Want" href="http://cynicmeetshope.wordpress.com/2012/06/23/rio20-the-future-we-really-want/" target="_blank"> the future we want.</a></p>
<div>Imagine a slum in Tarlac  transform itself into an eco-city of the future, in the hands of its own inhabitants as inspired by a national network of community organisations - and a global movement for change. Imagine students, of all levels and all classes,  who helped them fund and build it, organising against its demolition, their arms locked with those of the local MMDA officer (who happens to live there too). Imagine thousands of rural farmers leaving the fields of their hacienderos (simultaneously leaving them bankrupt) to march straight to Manila, with the spontaneous support of just as many city-folk, as thousands did  in <a href="http://www.ektaparishad.com/" target="_blank">India</a>.</p>
<div></div>
<div>For now, much can be left to the imagination. The question still stands. What is to be done?</div>
<p>Let us make clear to the powers-that-be  that they have lost their legitimacy, that in our rejection of all that they stand for, we intend to create more than they destroy,  to unite more than they seek to divide,  to provide for our people what they will not.</p>
<h6 class="zemanta-related-title">Related articles</h6>
<ul class="zemanta-article-ul zemanta-article-ul-image" style="margin:0;padding:0;overflow:hidden;">
<li class="zemanta-article-ul-li-image zemanta-article-ul-li" style="padding:0;background:none;list-style:none;display:block;float:left;vertical-align:top;text-align:left;width:84px;font-size:11px;margin:2px 10px 10px 2px;"><a style="box-shadow:0 0 4px #999;padding:2px;display:block;border-radius:2px;text-decoration:none;" href="http://bulatlat.com/main/2012/10/03/14-year-old-shot-and-killed-in-demolition-in-tarlac-city/" target="_blank"><img style="padding:0;margin:0;border:0;display:block;width:80px;max-width:100%;" alt="" src="http://i.zemanta.com/116152892_80_80.jpg" /></a><a style="display:block;overflow:hidden;text-decoration:none;line-height:12pt;height:80px;padding:5px 2px 0;" href="http://bulatlat.com/main/2012/10/03/14-year-old-shot-and-killed-in-demolition-in-tarlac-city/" target="_blank">14-year old shot and killed in demolition in Tarlac City</a></li>
</ul>
</div>
<div class="zemanta-pixie" style="margin-top:10px;height:15px;"><a class="zemanta-pixie-a" title="Enhanced by Zemanta" href="http://www.zemanta.com/?px"><img class="zemanta-pixie-img" style="border:none;float:right;" alt="Enhanced by Zemanta" src="http://img.zemanta.com/zemified_e.png?x-id=c6d5f339-0e77-45eb-9c95-0ca979a38529" /></a></div>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[Guest Post: "On Intellectuals and Their Duties in the 21st Century"]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/09/05/guest-post-on-intellectuals-and-their-duties-in-the-21st-century/</link>
<pubDate>Wed, 05 Sep 2012 22:03:19 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/09/05/guest-post-on-intellectuals-and-their-duties-in-the-21st-century/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[The following is a guest post, originally published at What About Peace? by Devon DB: On Intellectua]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>The following is a guest post, originally published at <a href="http://whataboutpeace.blogspot.ca/2012/09/on-intellectualism.html">What About Peace?</a> by Devon DB:</p>
<p><strong>On Intellectuals and Their Duties in the 21st Century</strong></p>
<p><a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.files.wordpress.com/2012/09/the_thinker.jpg"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-825" title="the_thinker" src="http://andrewgavinmarshall.files.wordpress.com/2012/09/the_thinker.jpg?w=459&#038;h=600" alt="" width="459" height="600" /></a></p>
<p><em>“It is the responsibility of intellectuals to speak the truth and to expose lies.”</em><br />
<em>~Noam Chomsky [1]</em></p>
<p>Intellectuals have always played a major role in society, from the philosophers of old such Plato and Aristotle who articulated thoughts about government, science, and biology to modern intellectuals such as Noam Chomsky and Cornel West who go about speaking truth to power and working toward informing and empowering average people. Yet, the role of the intellectual has changed over time and thus the time has arisen to reexamine and redefine the duties and responsibilities of the intellectual for this new century.</p>
<p>Before going into what the duties of intellectuals are, one must first define what an intellectual is. The tem intellectual can be defined as “a person who primarily uses intelligence in either a professional or an individual capacity.” [2] This application of intelligence can be for almost anything, but it is more popularly viewed as applying intelligence to social, economic, and political issues. Furthermore, the intellectual goes beyond focusing on newsworthy items and goes into the realm of theory, from thinking and formulating theory to articulating as to how that theory would potentially work in reality.</p>
<p>Currently, it seems that intellectuals are split into three camps: public, private, and dual intellectuals.</p>
<p>The public intellectual is usually a university professor who goes about researching, writing, and sharing their ideas in the public sphere via books, conferences, and being guests on radio and television shows. While this may seem to be a positive occurrence, much of this information remains in the realm of academia or academia-related areas with little of it becoming truly disseminated to the mainstream public. The books may be published and the conferences occur, but the only people who know about them are mainly people who are either in that field professionally or already have an interest in that area of study. Of the little information that does get disseminated on a mass scale, it is mainly done by well-known intellectuals such as Chris Hedges. Thus, there is currently a problem concerning public intellectuals where the information isn’t truly getting out to the people at large and because of this the majority of people are unaware of what new theories or discoveries are occurring and thus more vulnerable to misinformation and less likely to become active and involved in the current economic, social, or political situation.</p>
<p>The private intellectual is one who uses their intellect for the benefit of private groups, foundations, or individuals. One such example is Martin L. Leibowitz, the managing director of the Rockefeller Foundation. Leibowitz uses his intellect for the betterment of the Foundation by managing its assets and investments in order to make the most profit, thus allowing the Foundation to continue its work.</p>
<p>Dual intellectuals are members of the intelligentsia that have one foot in both worlds, occupying the space of a public intellectual and also being or having been a private intellectual. Arguably the most prominent dual intellectual in American politics today is Zbigniew Brzezinski. While he has been a professor at Harvard and Columbia and is currently employed by John H. Hopkins University, Brzezinski was also the co-founder of the Trilateral Commission, which concerns itself with increased cooperation among the United States, Europe, and Japan. Intellectuals such as these are arguably the most powerful as not only do they have the connections and power that comes from being in the private sector, but they also have major sway over the collective consciousness of a society. Dual intellectuals can make their ideas public, put them out into the mainstream society, and because they also have a background as a public intellectual, the public is much more willing to trust them as they see such people as experts.</p>
<p>There are further differences between intellectuals when one breaks them down into their relationship with the current political, economic, and social system. There are three types: loyalist, reformist, and radical.</p>
<p>Loyalist intellectuals are those who uphold and are in favor of perpetuating the current structures. Intellectuals such as these are often deeply embedded within the system and hold government posts or are in think tanks that are quite instrumental in forming policies, such as the Council on Foreign Relations and its relation with the US State Department. Once again, an example of a mainstream loyalist intellectual would be Zbigniew Brzezinski. He has a history of favoring the current global political and economic system, atop which the United States is perched, and wanting to preserve that system for as a long as possible. Intellectuals such as these are highly touted in their societies and may command great influence and respect among the society at large and are used by elites to formulate policies that continue the present state of affairs.</p>
<p>Reformist intellectuals support the overall system but would prefer to see certain reforms to the current system as to promote certain values of equality, justice, and human rights. University professors appear to make up a large percentage of reformist intellectuals. Reformist intellectuals are used by the elites to produce new generations of intellectuals that support the status quo and can be co-opted by elites to promote policies that are favorable to them.</p>
<p>Radical intellectuals find fault with the system and criticize it, often offering alternatives that would break down the current structure. Intellectuals of this type tend to be the most useful in terms of going beyond what is spoon-fed to the public by elite-owned media that ignore, distort, and in many cases outright lie about ongoing situations, both domestic and international, and getting to the heart of the matter by telling what the true reasons policies are chosen and exactly whose interests are served. Radical intellectuals are often among those few intellectuals that have a moral conscience and believe in wholly changing the system if not uprooting and replacing it entirely. While most radical intellectuals are in the fringes, some have gained mainstream attention such as Cornel West and Chris Hedges.</p>
<p>While there are three main sets of ideological stances in relation to the current societal structure, there is a subset of intellectuals in the radical circle: underground radicals. These are intellectuals that are radicals (sometimes even more so than the mainstream radicals), but have had little mainstream notoriety. There are many current-day examples of these intellectuals such as Andrew Gavin Marshall and Allison Kilkenny. Underground radicals often harbor views that are outside the mainstream political system and have no trust whatsoever within the political elite to change society for the better. Such intellectuals are greatly needed as they are often independent voices, not tied to any organization or entity that would censor them and thus they are more likely to be committed to the truth.</p>
<p>While there are different types of intellectuals, they all have the same types of duties.</p>
<p>The intellectual first and foremost has a duty to themselves to be honest in their research and work, honesty being objectivity and avoiding distortion of facts. Objectivity plays a major role as if one is going to espouse policy ideas that are contrary to the actual reality of the situation, no one is helped as the policy will be incorrect and potentially make a situation even worse. This is not to say that intellectuals cannot have any political or ideological leanings, but rather when conducting research or proposing policy, one should keep such things separate.</p>
<p>Empowering ordinary people should be the overall goal of the intellectual. On the local level, intellectuals should work with community organizations with the goal of addressing the problems of the community in a constructive manner. If it requires working with the state, so be it, but one must be aware that the problems that are in a town are best known and felt by those who reside within it, thus working with the local populace and local organizations should be at the center of any plan to quell problems within a community.</p>
<p>On the national level, the intellectual class should work much more to put its research and findings out to the general public, as this increase in information access may allow the general public to become aware of political theory and policy and will allow them to make more informed political decisions. The empowerment of people has a different role in the economic and sociological spheres. The economist should aid in the creation of policies that create economic wealth for the nation, but not at the expense of the many to the benefit of the few. Depending on the situation as well, the economist should also push for policies that would free the nation from dependence on external sources of income such as the IMF or the World Bank and rather support policies of internal economic development which will enrich the nation in the long-term. The sociologist should work to dispel myths and stereotypes of minority races/ethnicities and work to understand different cultures.</p>
<p>The intelligentsia must also combat old and outdated ideologies that hold people back. The current societal structure of the United States is such where it favors heterosexual gender-conforming upper-class white men. This system ostracizes and ignores those who do not fit into that narrow framework. Intellectually, the conversation is twisted and distorted with outright fabrications and myths continuing about Native Americans, blacks, and other minorities while white men are upheld as essentially the creators of modern society and other thinkers, activists, and the like that rebelled against the system are either ignored entirely or viciously distorted. Thus, it is up for the intellectuals to work with other organized groups to combat not only the historical distortions and omissions in the general historical narrative, but also the very system itself that favors one group of people over another.</p>
<p>The intellectual has a duty to the youth, specifically to the students in the classroom. Professors must go beyond the dull repetitiveness of the classroom, from having students memorize facts and figures, to doing serious critical analysis and having them apply the skills they are learning to current, real-world problems. Intellectuals should be willing and ready to go off the set curriculum and tell students about the true history of their area of study; they should willingly reveal such important and relevant information such as that the educational system itself comes from a drive by the elites for social control [3] that is still being used today. [4] Revealing the true nature of the study will allow students to be even more critical in their thinking of current problems in the field and will be more inclined to speak truth to power as they know the underpinnings of the current social structure and how it has and continues to effect the lives of ordinary people.</p>
<p>The intellectual need to allow themselves to be challenged by students and ordinary people. Currently, there is so much trust in the intellectual elite that any ordinary person who challenges them is dismissed as a fool and uninformed. Such thinking leads to the public trusting rather unscrupulous people such as dual loyalist intellectual Henry Kissinger, a wanted war criminal. [5] Allowing intellectuals to be challenged will create an opportunity that will allow people to be exposed to those who have differing opinions and alternative viewpoints. It can foster discussion among individuals and allow people to learn from one another and in this vain of expanding knowledge and being open-minded, intellectuals should welcome challenges and critiques of their work from alternative viewpoints.</p>
<p>Intellectuals should be willing to aid in peaceful revolutionary political activity that advocates the transformation of the current social, economic, and political structures as to break down oppression and work towards true freedom and equality for all peoples, no matter race, sex, gender identity, socio-economic background, sexual orientation or any other form of oppression that holds people back. Yet, they must be careful in involving themselves in revolutions as they must be conscious of what they are doing as to ensure that they do not lead the revolution. The revolution cannot be led by the intellectual class, they can only guide it. Only the people can lead the revolution. However, this is not simply on the national level. We are living in a globalized society where revolutions against established elites have occurred all over the world [6] and grass-roots organizations have sprung up all over the world and are working together. A global revolution is occurring and, just like the protest groups are organizing and working together (to differing extents and success to be sure), intellectuals from all over the world should organize and work to think, research, and articulate a new system in which the current institutions of power and control are abolished and new systems that do not seek to dominate and oppress come into being.</p>
<p>The intellectual class has the responsibility to stand up for the people and against the systems of oppression for in doing this not only do they free others, but they also free themselves and allow the creation of a new world in which all peoples can be truly free. It is either that or aiding in the continuation of a system that oppresses, exploits, and controls the very many for the benefit of the very few. That is the choice intellectuals face in today’s world. Let us hope they make the right decision.</p>
<p>Endnotes</p>
<p>1: Noam Chomsky, “The Responsibility of Intellectuals,” Noam Chomsky, February 23, 1967 (<a href="http://www.chomsky.info/articles/19670223.htm" rel="nofollow">http://www.chomsky.info/articles/19670223.htm</a>)<br />
2: Wikipedia, Intellectual, <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Intellectual" rel="nofollow">http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Intellectual</a><br />
3: Andrew Gavin Marshall, “The Purpose of Education: Social Uplift or Social Control?” Andrew Gavin Marshall, April 8, 2012 (<a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/04/08/the-purpose-of-education-social-uplift-or-social-control/" rel="nofollow">http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/04/08/the-purpose-of-education-social-uplift-or-social-control/</a>)<br />
4: James F. Tracy, “The Technocratization of Public Education,” Global Research, June 14, 2012 (<a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#038;aid=31422" rel="nofollow">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#038;aid=31422</a>)<br />
5: Christopher Reilly, “Henry Kissinger, Wanted Man,” Counterpunch, April 28, 2002 (<a href="http://www.counterpunch.org/2002/04/28/henry-kissinger-wanted-man/" rel="nofollow">http://www.counterpunch.org/2002/04/28/henry-kissinger-wanted-man/</a>)<br />
6: Andrew Gavin Marshall, “Welcome to the World Revolution in the Global Age of Rage,” Andrew Gavin Marshall, July 30, 2012 (<a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/07/30/welcome-to-the-world-revolution-in-the-global-age-of-rage/" rel="nofollow">http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/07/30/welcome-to-the-world-revolution-in-the-global-age-of-rage/</a>)</p>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[Organize, Imagine, and Act: How a Student Movement Can Become a Revolution]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/08/18/organize-imagine-and-act-how-a-student-movement-can-become-a-revolution/</link>
<pubDate>Sat, 18 Aug 2012 08:37:02 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/08/18/organize-imagine-and-act-how-a-student-movement-can-become-a-revolution/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[Organize, Imagine, and Act: How a Student Movement Can Become a Revolution By: Andrew Gavin Marshall]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Organize, Imagine, and Act: How a Student Movement Can Become a Revolution</strong></p>
<p>By: <a href="http://www.andrewgavinmarshall.com">Andrew Gavin Marshall</a></p>
<div id="attachment_807" class="wp-caption alignnone" style="width: 660px"><a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.files.wordpress.com/2012/08/054086-london-student-protest1.jpg"><img class="size-full wp-image-807" title="054086-london-student-protest" src="http://andrewgavinmarshall.files.wordpress.com/2012/08/054086-london-student-protest1.jpg?w=650&#038;h=366" alt="" width="650" height="366" /></a><p class="wp-caption-text">From the London student protests, 2010</p></div>
<p>And so it seems that the student strike in Quebec <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/08/16/stand-strong-and-do-not-despair-some-thoughts-on-the-fading-student-movement-in-quebec/">is slowing down</a> and nearing an end, as the college &#8211; CEGEPs &#8211; in Quebec have voted to return to class, with roughly <a href="http://www.cbc.ca/news/canada/montreal/story/2012/08/17/quebec-student-strike-ends-cegep.html">10,000 students having voted to continue the strike</a>, a far reduction from the 175,000 students that were on strike in late April and early May. <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/04/30/the-quebec-student-strike-from-maple-spring-to-summer-rebellion/">The strike began in February of 2012</a> in opposition to a planned 75% increase in the cost of tuition. The students mobilized massive numbers, held mass protests, undertook picket lines at schools, expanded the issue into a wider social movement, and were consistently met with state violence in the form of riot police, pepper spray, tear gas, beatings with batons, being shot with rubber bullets, even being trampled by horses and driven into by police cars. The government enacted Bill 78, assaulting the rights to freely assemble and speak, and put a &#8216;pause&#8217; on the school semester to end picket actions. Now that the school semester is starting back up again, and an election looms in the coming weeks, the students are being led away from the streets and into voting booths. The &#8216;Maple Spring&#8217; has become the &#8216;Fall Election&#8217;.</p>
<p>Meanwhile, in Chile, where a student movement that began in May and June of 2011, mobilized against a highly privatized education system, is continuing with renewed energy. There had been ups and downs of actions and mobilizations within Chile over the past 15 months, but in mid-August of 2012, the resurgence was seen as students began occupying high schools, blocking streets, and undertaking mass protests. Students who took part in the occupations were <a href="http://www.vancouversun.com/news/Protesting+Chilean+students+occupy+schools+block+Santiago+streets/7088830/story.html">threatened with having their scholarships removed</a>. In over a year of protesting, the students have not seen any meaningful changes to their educational system, or even inclinations that those in power were listening to their demands with anything other than disdain and contempt. The students have long been met with state violence, from the oppressive apparatus of a former military dictatorship, fighting an educational system which was established near the end of the military dictatorship. Riot police would meet students with tear gas, water cannons, batons, mass arrests, and other forms of assault. Police have subsequently <a href="http://www.bbc.co.uk/news/world-latin-america-19291516">stormed the high schools</a> and arrested over a hundred students participating in the occupations. This caused the university students to get more involved, and they <a href="http://www.santiagotimes.cl/chile/education/25052-students-protesters-occupy-universidad-de-chiles-main-campus">occupied the Universidad de Chile</a>, which had not been occupied since the beginning of the movement the previous year (often known as the Chilean Winter).</p>
<p>In Chile, as in Quebec, protests and marches and even the right to demonstrate are frequently declared to be illegal. In both Chile and Quebec, when protests erupted into violence (which is more often than not incited by the police themselves), these are called &#8220;riots,&#8221; and they are used in the media and public discourse to portray the movements as violent, extremist, trouble-makers, vandals, and criminals. This is designed to reduce public support for the protests (which was far more successful in Quebec than Chile), and to subsequently dismiss the demands of the students. There are, in fact, a wider variety of similarities and interesting comparisons between <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/05/18/from-the-chilean-winter-to-the-maple-spring-solidarity-and-the-student-movements-in-chile-and-quebec/">the Chilean Winter and the Maple Spring</a>. Chilean students and academics have even <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/06/02/a-message-from-chile-the-struggles-of-quebec-students-academics-and-workers-are-also-our-struggles/">expressed solidarity</a> with the Quebec student movement.</p>
<p>We face an issue here. The student movements don&#8217;t seem to be getting anywhere substantial in terms of establishing some sort of meaningful change. This is not to say they have not achieved anything; quite the opposite, in fact. The student movements have been successful at mobilization large numbers of people, organizing protests and indeed, in <em>politicizing a generation</em>, which is their most sincere and important success to date. Students have suffered under propaganda campaigns, violent repression, legal intimidation, and, most of all, the determination of an elite who view <em>any and every minor concession</em> as the ultimate unthinkable sacrifice which would ruin all of society. In short, elites are more stubborn than students could ever seem to be, and they have the means to hold their position and tire the students out if they can&#8217;t simply scare them away or crush them down. So, while symbolic actions and political radicalization are necessary achievements, the will to continue taking actions and the hope to manifest radical ideas becomes worn down, demoralized, and sapped of its strength. This is incredibly challenging to revive if the circumstances and courses of action do not change.</p>
<p>So perhaps it is time for a new tactic. Instead of having radicalization follow mobilization, students could begin to have radicalization guide mobilization. For any social movement to advance, grow, and become something not simply demanding reforms, or demanding something <em>from</em> power, it needs to provide something to the students, to the communities, and the public at large; it needs to <em>create</em>. This is the difference between a reformist movement and a revolutionary movement. In this context, the word &#8216;revolutionary&#8217; is not used to imply a usurping of state power and violent overthrow of authority, but rather  to transform on a radical scale our conception and participation in specific or all sectors of society. Thus, it is essential to provide new ideas for action, rather than discussing and debating the new terms of capitulation. It can make all the difference between a question of how little students will get from their demands, to a question of how much we can get from a new educational structure itself. A discussion of new ideas must replace &#8211; or coincide with &#8211; the articulation of ignored demands.</p>
<p>How is this possible? What might this look like?</p>
<p>For students, the fundamental issue is education. For the student movements, growth came from expanding the issue into a wider social one, and linking up with other organizations and causes. This expands the scope, and thus, the base of support for a student movement. However, established unions played a large role in guiding (or attempting to guide), fund, and organize in cooperation with student movements. While the cause of workers is an issue that <em>must</em> be engaged with, the established unions that have survived to this point, roughly thirty years into the global neoliberal era, have survived only because they function on a basis of cooperating with the established powers of society, the state and corporations. They are corporatist institutions.</p>
<p>Over one hundred years ago, unions were extremely radical, organized, massive, and revolutionary. The actions and ideas of radically organized labour were the impetus for 8-hour work days, weekends, pensions, job security, benefits, an end to child labour, and much more. Unions subsequently faced roughly a century of battering, violence, co-optation, and destruction. Those which remain are not radical, but only slightly reformist. I say &#8216;slightly&#8217; because they do not mobilize to fight <em>for</em> new ideas or issues, but only to protect and preserve the reforms previously implemented as a result of radical labour agitation. Thus, union representative serve as a buffer for the blunt force of the state and organized capital and corporate interests which consistently seek to undermine and exploit labour. The major unions typically serve to soften the blow against workers as the elite bring down the hammer. Under this system, all rights, benefits, security and protections are slowly and inevitably worn down and thrown away. When the established unions provide funds and direction for the student movements, they tend to steer them away from radical or revolutionary paths, and promote a highly reformist direction, and which can only be undertaken through negotiation with and capitulation to the state and corporate interests. This gets us to where we are.</p>
<p>When it comes to engagement and interaction, solidarity, and cooperation with labour, it should, in fact, be the more radical &#8211; and radically organized &#8211; students who lead the unions back to a more radical direction, to take them back to their origins when they achieved successes instead of softened failures. If they refuse to follow a radical direction, then students should encourage and attempt to find means of supporting the organization of new labour organizations: provide assistance, direction, ideas and physical and moral support. Students could be mobilized into the streets for workers&#8217; rights as well as educational rights.</p>
<p>The main point here is that for a movement to radicalize and become revolutionary, it must cooperate with, support, and be supported by other radical and revolutionary organizations and movements. If the more dominant force is reformist, established, and corporatist (by which I mean its functioning ideology is accepting of the state and corporate dominated society), then these organizations will attempt to co-opt, direct, and steer your movement into an area &#8216;safe&#8217; for the elites, if not altogether undermined and eliminated. It is not necessarily done out of an insidious desire to destroy your student movements, but rather the result of an insidious ideology embedded within the very functions of their organizations. Thus, integration, mutual support, dependency and interaction with other social movements must take place at a radical and revolutionary level if you are to sustain that potential and desire within your own movement. It&#8217;s unfortunate, because it&#8217;s more difficult; but it&#8217;s true, all the same.</p>
<p>Therefore, what is required are radical ideas of organization: for the student associations and other associations they interact with to be more accountable, directly, to their constituents. Instead of elected delegates or representatives making all the decisions (which is how our governments function), the decisions must be made <em>by</em> the constituents, and the representatives merely carry them out and organize accordingly. The student associations in Quebec and elsewhere function more along these radical lines, while labour and other groups typically do not. If student associations do not function in this manner, that is the first issue which must be addressed: either demand the associations to change, or create new ones and thereby make the unrepresentative ones obsolete. Thus, for a student movement to become revolutionary, the first step is the <strong>radicalization of organization</strong>.</p>
<p>Now onto something more interesting: how to radicalize ideas and actions in education itself. This next step is about the <strong>radicalization of action</strong>. While the first step, in many instances &#8211; the radicalization of organization &#8211; had been achieved in several of the student movements, the actions themselves lacked radicalization. The actions were largely confined to mass demonstrations, picket lines, school occupations, and youth rebellion against state violence and repression. These are all important actions on their own: establishing solidarity, power in numbers, a public presence, a demonstration of will and power, the development of &#8216;self-esteem&#8217; for a social movement. These are necessary, but if the actions do not evolve, the movement itself cannot evolve. Thus, what is required at this point is a discussion of new ideas of action. Typically, as is the case at the moment in Quebec, students are being told to stay out of the streets and go to the voting booth, where &#8220;real&#8221; change can be made. This is illusory and useless. Unless there is a radical party, the best that can be hoped for is to delay the inevitable assault on education, or perhaps achieve a minor concession, which would likely be more of an insult than incentive.</p>
<p>New ideas of action must come from the students themselves, and there are a number of initiatives that could be discussed and undertaken. Fundamentally, instead of demanding <em>from</em> power, create something new. If education is what you want, begin to do it yourselves. In the case of a school occupations, why should the students not simply begin to have discussions on issues, share knowledge, invite professors, academics, and others who are supportive of the movement to come talk and share their knowledge?</p>
<p>This does not need to only take place in occupied schools, though that would be quite symbolic, but could essentially take place in any public space. It would function as a type of grassroots educational system, designed to share and expand knowledge, not to prepare you for the workforce. Job opportunities are already vanishing everywhere for youth, and they will continue to do so as the economic crisis gets worse. These types of educational forums could potentially be designed to educate and share knowledge on issues of relevance to the student movements themselves: the history of education, protest and social movement history, political power, repression, the economic system &#8211; Capitalism, neoliberalism, etc. This could &#8211; and should &#8211; expand into much larger issues and areas of knowledge, including arts, the sciences, philosophy, etc. There are already people within society who have gained their knowledge through educational institutions, and thus, there are already people from whom to draw this knowledge from in a new forum, and in a new way.</p>
<p>To give an example, imagine a &#8216;class&#8217; (or forum) on the history of social struggles. First, a physical space is required, so to set up in a park, public venue, rent a space, or occupy a space (such as a school lecture hall). The students should have previously discussed &#8211; likely through social media networks &#8211; which intellectuals and individuals they would like to invite to come speak to them about the issue. The invited speakers would share their knowledge on the history of social struggles, promote discussion, debate one another, and engage directly with the students. For every invited outside speaker, a student should be invited to speak also, to share their own knowledge and engage on an equal basis. The notion that students are there only to learn and not teach is an incorrect one, and it&#8217;s a misnomer that should be addressed and acted upon.</p>
<p>The public at large should also be accepted into these educational forums. The point should be to expand knowledge and discussion among the general population, not merely the students. But the students are the ones capable of providing this forum for the population at large. To add to this: such forums should be broadcast through social media, filmed and recorded, watched online both live and archived. Students could organize &#8216;subject collectives&#8217;, perhaps having a group of students organized along the lines of the larger student associations (through direct democracy), who would oversee the organization of each subject or issue: history of social movements, political economy, media studies, etc. Each &#8216;collective&#8217; could establish its own website, where the wider community would be encouraged to engage, support, recommend speakers and issues and venues, watch archived or live-feed forums, debate in online forums, be notified of events and speakers, and be provided with educational material, reading sources, etc. The students could write papers which would then be posted publicly on such sites, to promote discussion and to actually use the knowledge instead of writing papers for a grade, which is a rather absurd notion. These sites could have news sections, providing relevant news and developments from around the world related to their issue. The collective itself &#8211; both within the community and online &#8211; then becomes a forum for the development and extension of knowledge to a much larger sector of society, locally and globally.</p>
<p>This is where the actions become even more important. For a social movement to survive and expand into a revolutionary movement, it must not isolate itself, and must engage and interact directly with the wider population. The best way to do this, and one which has the added necessary effect of increasing the movement&#8217;s support among the population, is <em>to provide a service or need</em>. In the case of a student movement: that need is education. Merely &#8216;opening up&#8217; forums to the public may not be enough. Students or &#8216;subject collectives&#8217; could individually organize smaller meetings and discussions, in neighbourhoods and venues all over the city, region, or country, where students themselves speak with and to the public on issues in which they have been getting their education.</p>
<p>In Quebec, where students have been consistently framed by the media and elites as &#8220;entitled brats,&#8221; this tactic would be a means to share our so-called &#8216;entitlements&#8217; with the wider population, and at no cost to them. Thus, as students gain knowledge, they share knowledge with others. For example, a couple history students could hold a small forum at a cafe or in a small public location which they had promoted within the neighbourhood and on social media for people to freely come to listen and engage in a discussion about a particular history topic. Of course, knowledge in such circumstances should not simply be abstract or obtuse, but relevant to those who are engaging with it. So if the discussion is on a &#8216;history of social movements,&#8217; students should share knowledge on this, but make it relevant to the current social movement, to the social conditions of the wider population, and ask questions and engage with others in the venue: to promote discussion and debate. Thus, instead of the public viewing students as &#8216;entitled&#8217;, they may come to view students as &#8216;empowering.&#8217;</p>
<p>This type of tactic would especially have to be employed within poor communities, and oppressed communities, where students would have to be willing to <em>listen</em> and <em>learn</em> more than they would be inclined to <em>speak</em> and <em>teach</em>. This is because many student movements, simply by their position as being students, generally come from a more privileged sector of society than the really poor, minority, immigrant, or otherwise oppressed communities. These sectors largely remain in the sidelines of the student movements themselves. This must change, and for a very fundamental reason: there is a great deal to learn from these communities. Oppressed peoples have experienced and known for a much longer period of time what the majority of students are only just starting to learn and experience: the true nature and interest of power, the violent and oppressive state apparatus, the underbelly of the economic system, the reality of social existence for a great many people. In short, it would be a means through which to educate the students on deeper issues of social strife, by listening and speaking directly to and with those who exist within oppressed social spheres.</p>
<p>But there cannot be any taking without giving. So while oppressed communities may perhaps be willing to share their own knowledge with students and engage in discussion and debate, the students must provide something back to these communities. There is a <em>very simple</em> way to get this started: ask them what they need most in their communities. For example, if one community cited the cost and quality of food as a central issue, students could then leave the first meeting with the community with the intent to organize and plan around this issue. The students could hold their own discussions, meetings, debates, and share ideas on how to help resolve this specific issue within that specific community, and then propose various ideas to those community leaders. The ideas would be subject to critique, dismissal, support, etc, to go back to the drawing board with new suggestions or to get to work, putting action to the ideas.</p>
<p>So with the issue of food, for example, students could perhaps organize around the idea of establishing a community food garden, proposing it to the community, and, if approved and critiqued, they could find an area of land, get the support and materials they need, and work with members of that community to plant and establish such a garden, to help move toward some form of food sustainability, provided either free or cheap to those within that area. Potentially, there could be a student educational association which specialized in sharing knowledge about nutrition, horticulture, etc., and they could be brought in to share their knowledge, help in the endeavour, or even make it a staple feature of their functioning: to go to different communities to help establish food sustainability.</p>
<p>These are, of course, just ideas of actions, there is no reason to follow this specific outline. This is meant to merely promote the discussion of this concept: the actions, organizations, and objectives which would result from a <strong>radicalization of action</strong> are likely to be far more varied, interesting, and effective than these mere suggestions. However, I used these examples of actions and ideas to show how a student movement protesting <em>against</em> something (such as a tuition increase), can become a revolutionary movement <em>for</em> something.</p>
<p>These actions are revolutionary because they force people to question and reconsider their conceptions of education, its manifestation, its purpose, its institutionalization, philosophy, etc. The actions themselves engage directly with people, drawing from and providing to the population as a whole. This increases support among the population, but also greatly strengthens the ideas and actions of the students themselves. At such a conceivable point, it could not be called a &#8216;student movement,&#8217; but could only be identified as a much wider social movement, which would help radicalize the wider society itself, which would in turn provide new ideas and actions to the students; solidarity in both words and actions.</p>
<p>These actions are revolutionary because they attempt to maneuver around power structures instead of expending all of their energy on directly battling the power structure itself. By going around the power structure &#8211; around the state, the schools, the corporations, etc. &#8211; the students would create a parallel educational structure within society, making the existing one increasingly obsolete. As this is done, the bargaining power of the state and other structures is reduced, because the students no longer rely exclusively upon them for an education. The state would most certainly attempt to repress such a movement, or perhaps even to offer much larger incentives, concessions, or even meet the previous demands of students in order to get them back in the schools and within an educational system that power controls. The state is well-established to deal with direct confrontations: that&#8217;s what police, armies, guns, badges and lawyers are for. It doesn&#8217;t matter who you are, what you&#8217;re demanding, or where you are demanding it, the state can simply tear gas you, scare you, disperse you, and wait you out. But to move around the power structure, and to create and establish something new, not under the control or direction of established institutions of power, the power structures become very nervous and insecure.</p>
<p>It would be foolish to think that the power structures would not respond with more state violence than they have up until present, they most certainly would. The primary difference, however, would be that the public support for the movement would have conceivably exploded, and in the case of increased violence, it would explode in anger and opposition to the state. In short, while the state would be likely to increase its tactics of intimidation and violence, the public response would likely be far more powerful than anything we have seen thus far. We saw an example of this in Quebec, when the government passed the repressive Bill 78 and a much larger segment of the population was mobilized in opposition to the government. However, this has now largely faded, and again, it&#8217;s about the difference between mobilizing <em>against</em> something and mobilizing <em>for</em> something. It&#8217;s the difference between opposition and proposition, demand and action.</p>
<p>The fundamental idea which I am arguing is that for a student movement to become a revolutionary movement, it must transform its <em>demands of</em> education into <em>actions for</em> education. If the issue is education, the answer is education. The inability of the student movements to have their demands met reveals a deeply-ingrained flaw in our society: that an institution does not reflect or respond to the demands of its supposed constituents. This fact makes that institution illegitimate. This flaw further manifests itself across the entire society. If the government itself, which is supposedly &#8216;representative&#8217; of the people, does not reflect the intentions and interests of the population, then it is illegitimate. Most institutions do not even have a means for their constituents to have a say in who runs the institutions themselves. Some, such as governments or unions, may have elections in which people can choose candidates, but then all the other decisions are taken out of their hands. Other institutions, such as schools, corporations, banks, media, etc., do not even have a means for constituents to select leadership, let alone direction and action. University boards are populated with bankers, former government officials, corporate executives, foundation officials, and other established elites. Therefore, universities are geared toward meeting elite interests under their direction. This is flawed and wrong. Though, because most institutions function in this way across wider society, it tends to go unnoticed and is simply accepted as &#8220;the way it is.&#8221;</p>
<p>Students must now ask: Does it have to be this way? What other way could it be? What should change? How could that change? What is the intent of education? These questions lead to other, larger questions about the society as a whole, and, as a result, they make necessary the wider radicalization, organization, and revolution of society itself. It is a rather large idea, but I think it is also a logical one. As the economic and social circumstances for most people continue to deteriorate in the near future &#8211; <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/08/16/stand-strong-and-do-not-despair-some-thoughts-on-the-fading-student-movement-in-quebec/">and perhaps rapidly so as the global economic crisis accelerates</a> &#8211; such ideas and actions will become all the more necessary and will generate much more support.</p>
<p>Since the beginning of the global economic crisis in 2007 and 2008, the world has seen a rapid acceleration of resistance movements, protests, and revolutionary struggles. The world is rumbling awake from a long lost slumber of consumption and consent as the situation of crisis reveals deep flaws in the structures, ideology, and actions of power. We are witnessing <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/07/30/welcome-to-the-world-revolution-in-the-global-age-of-rage/">the rapid proliferation of global resistance movements</a>, but it requires much more for them to become global revolutionary movements. It has only begun, but it requires new ideas and actions to move forward. It would potentially be very challenging to begin such actions now, but in the very least, student movements should begin to advance the discussion, to debate the direction, and to incite new ideas. These are, after all, the skills that an education is supposed to provide us with.</p>
<p>Perhaps it is time to put our education to use.</p>
<p><a href="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr?cmd=_s-xclick&#38;hosted_button_id=TW4E6EGUH5HZJ"><img src="https://www.paypal.com/en_US/i/btn/btn_donateCC_LG.gif" alt="" /></a></p>
<p><em>Andrew Gavin Marshall is an independent researcher and writer living in Montreal, Canada. His website (<a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/08/16/stand-strong-and-do-not-despair-some-thoughts-on-the-fading-student-movement-in-quebec/www.andrewgavinmarshall.com">www.andrewgavinmarshall.com</a>) features a number of articles and essays focusing on an analysis of power and resistance in the political, social, and economic realms. He is Project Manager of <a href="http://www.thepeoplesbookproject.com">The People’s Book Project</a>, and is currently writing a book on the global economic crisis and resistance movements emerging around the world. To help this book come to completion, please consider donating through the website or on <a href="http://www.indiegogo.com/WritingRevolution?c=home">Indiegogo</a></em>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[A Revolution in Thinking: What is the People’s Book Project?]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/04/18/a-revolution-in-thinking-what-is-the-peoples-book-project/</link>
<pubDate>Thu, 19 Apr 2012 00:47:30 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/04/18/a-revolution-in-thinking-what-is-the-peoples-book-project/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[A Revolution in Thinking: What is the People’s Book Project? By: Andrew Gavin Marshall &#8220;I am]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>A Revolution in Thinking: What is the People’s Book Project?<br />
</strong></p>
<p>By: Andrew Gavin Marshall</p>
<p><a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.files.wordpress.com/2012/04/18-fred_hampton1.jpg"><img title="18.Fred_Hampton" src="http://thepeoplesbookproject.files.wordpress.com/2012/04/18-fred_hampton1.jpg?w=490&#038;h=428#38;h=428" alt="" width="490" height="428" /></a></p>
<p><em>&#8220;I am&#8230; a Revolutionary.&#8221; &#8211; Fred Hampton</em></p>
<p>Since September of 2011, I have been asking people – readers, activists, and others – to support my endeavour to write a comprehensive, critical examination of the individuals, institutions, and ideas of power, domination, and control in our society – both historically and presently. I have called this process <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/">‘The People’s Book Project.</a>’ The support I have asked for is in the form of financial donations, which have come from people around the world: Canada, the United States, Switzerland, the United Kingdom, Australia, New Zealand, Netherlands Antilles, Taiwan, Germany, the Netherlands, Japan, Sweden, Malaysia, and Norway.</p>
<p>According to the site statistics, the website for The People’s Book Project has reached people in the following countries: the U.S., Canada, U.K., Australia, Switzerland, Germany, France, India, Norway, Portugal, Sweden, Philippines, Finland, New Zealand, Saudi Arabia, Belgium, Denmark, Netherlands, Netherlands Antilles, Brazil, Ireland, Mexico, Thailand, Hungary, Greece, Malaysia, Costa Rica, Republic of Korea, Vietnam, Suriname, Taiwan, Spain, Romania, Italy, Turkey, Austria, Slovakia, South Africa, Qatar, Slovenia, Poland, Russia, Puerto Rico, Estonia, Pakistan, Singapore, Chile, Nigeria, Egypt, Argentina, Czech Republic, United Arab Emirates, Kenya, Peru, Uganda, Ukraine, Dominican Republic, Lithuania, Japan, Serbia, Bahamas, Jamaica, Bosnia, Fiji, Tanzania, Bangladesh, Trinidad and Tobago, Cyprus, Hong Kong, Nepal, Georgia, Israel, Benin, Luxembourg, Panama, Kuwait, Latvia, Iceland, Azerbaijan, Cote d’Ivoire, Jordan, Venezuela, Zambia, Bahrain, Aruba, Colombia, Morocco, Zimbabwe, Barbados, Armenia, Tunisia and Ecuador, among others.</p>
<p>The <a href="http://www.facebook.com/pages/The-Peoples-Book-Project/152637901492164">Facebook page for The People’s Book Project</a> has support from people all around the world: the United States, Canada, Dominican Republic, United Kingdom, Sweden, Philippines, Australia, Germany, Finland, Denmark, Portugal, Mexico, Indonesia, Netherlands, Ireland, France, Chile, Estonia, Italy, and Brazil. According to the Facebook stats for the page, 57.7% of those who the page reaches are between the ages of 18 and 34. Many of those who cannot financially support the Project have done so in other ways: re-posting my articles through social media, posting them on blogs, translating them, and spreading the word through other means. Both financially and fundamentally, all of this support has been of immense importance, and both are of equal necessity.</p>
<p>Why is this support necessary?</p>
<p>The People’s Book Project relies upon grassroots support from people around the world in order to remain independent, focused, active, advancing, critical, dedicated, and driven. The avenues for truly independent research and writing is lacking; free to discover itself and its own truths instead of being directed by the purse strings and for the purpose of institutions – whether think tanks, foundations, universities, government, industry, or otherwise. My research and writing is outside the oversight, control, direction, funding and suppression of any institution. It is precisely that which makes this Project have both a great deal of potential, and a great deal of problems. The potential, because the research can take – as it should – its own course to discover knowledge and truth: it is not directed, but instead, it directs me. The sheer volume of research and writing that has already been undertaken presents a great opportunity for a wider audience to receive important knowledge which may inform their ideas and actions: it is knowledge designed not to conform, but to inform; not to indoctrinate, but to liberate; not to overpower, but to empower. Because these are my intentions, and because I ask for support from people – individuals like you – to aid in these efforts, I think it’s only fair if I elaborate on the process of The People’s Book Project, and on my role in it.</p>
<p>What is The People’s Book Project?</p>
<p>I have elaborated on this central question for a great deal of time in many places and forms. Whenever I am asked – “What is the book about?” – I let out a sigh, and think to reply, “What isn’t it about?” I think this, because the more research I do, the more I write, the more I come across, the more stories, individuals, institutions, and ideas I feel the need to discuss and examine and explain; to understand and illuminate the interactions, exchanges, relationships and reactions of these ‘new’ ideas to the ones I have already been spending so much time researching and writing about. As a result, it seems the Project continually gets larger, the scope grows wider, the subject matter swells and expands, the ideas change and evolve. It is precisely because of this last point – that the ideas change and evolve – which pushes the process further: why wouldn’t we want our ideas to change and evolve? It is for this reason that the scope expands and develops, the time it takes to write and research grows, and the efforts increase, and with that, so does the need for support.</p>
<p>Since I have asked for – and received – a great deal of support, and since I will continue to need that support in the future, it is important for me to explain not only an idea of a ‘finished product’ – a series of books – which is being supported, but also the process of getting to that finished product. I also must acknowledge that it is me individually who is being supported in this situation, and therefore it is perhaps appropriate if I explain a little bit about myself and what I am doing. This Project is almost the entire means through which I support myself, I have no other job – (other than a weekly <a href="http://www.boilingfrogspost.com/tag/agm-podcast/">podcast at BoilingFrogsPost</a>) – and I come from a family who are very much among the rapidly-vanishing middle class of Canada. I have just this past January returned to school after more than three years out of school to continue a Bachelors degree, but I am only taking one class in order to dedicate most of my time and efforts to the book. Currently, the students in my province of Québec are on strike, protesting a doubling of tuition fees, which I would certainly not be able to afford.</p>
<p>I have hesitated to write myself into the narrative of the process of the book’s evolution, instead focusing on the subject matter itself. But as the people – you and others – are supporting not only a product, but a process, and a person, it is important that I elaborate on the process and my part in it. In short, to truly explain an end product, one must also examine the process and persons involved.</p>
<p>What is the Process of the People’s Book Project?</p>
<p>I have approached the research and writing of The People’s Book Project in a way unfamiliar to those who have undertaken the task of writing a book on a specific subject. When I began writing this book, the scope of it was comparatively small and narrow, the length was supposed to be short and confined, and the subject was based upon a foregone conclusion. It was to be the product of an institution, not an idea; it was directed and defined as to what it should be and what it should not be. For myself at the time, I was struggling to keep it within the confines of what it was “supposed” to be, for the more research I did, the more I discovered and learned, the more the book – and its ideas – evolved and changed with me. As a result, I could not find it within myself to be moved to – or be proud of – producing a book which began with a preordained conclusion, that the research was simply meant to conform to an idea which was already decided upon. If I were to do that, I would write a book in which I could not agree with nor support its conclusions, nor could I promote it or pretend that it speaks to some great truths when it does not stand up to the scrutiny of my own truths. For this reason, I decided to change my situation and leave my job to pursue my passion. I left behind all that I had written, and started anew, letting the process dictate the product.</p>
<p>Frequently, I find myself even trying to restrict the content and flow and direction of the book. A writer and researcher must, after all, make choices: choices about what to research, what to write, how to write it, why to write it, what to leave out, why to leave it out, etc. Without choices, nothing would get finished (or started, for that matter), and the results would speak for the lack of choices. In spite of my own choices on what subjects I will pursue, what angles I will examine, what I will leave out, what direction I want to go, and even what conclusions I have in mind, I all too often find myself facing this ever-present, persistent, and pervasive power which seems to suggest to me that the only choice I truly have at the moment, is to decide to let the process take on a life of its own.</p>
<p>How does this work?</p>
<p>I will give you a recent example. I have set about – and received a great deal of support – to write a series of chapters on a radical history of race and poverty, specifically focusing on the United States. I wrote a “brief” 20-page essay on the subject, covering its broad focus and ideas, thinking that my efforts would be emphasized on elaborating on the concepts already mentioned in what I wrote, that it would be about filling in the details, connecting the missing dots, and better explaining the circumstances and situations. I often don’t write and research a subject in its exact sequence of events; rather, I approach a subject by focusing in on one aspect, one event, one individual, idea, or institution which has caught my interest and fascination. I use that specific point of interest to act as inspiration; in fact, I cannot help but allow it to inspire. In seeking to learn all that I can about the particular individual, institution, or idea, I must examine its relationship, interaction, and interdependence with other individuals, institutions, and ideas of that particular time, and from there I must go into its history: where did these individuals, institutions, and ideas come from? From there, I follow the path as to where they went: what were the repercussions, results, reactions to and of these individuals, institutions, and ideas, and where do they exist (or not) today? And then of course, the big question: Why?</p>
<p>So for my current subject – a radical history of race and poverty – my point of entry at present into the subject was brought about as a result of the recent anniversary of Martin Luther King Jr.’s assassination. I have researched and read about King and his assassination, and how the King we idolize today is not the King who died in 1968. When MLK Day passes, the media, commentators, images, and sounds we hear are about the MLK that existed up until 1965, with the passing of the Voting Rights Act of 1965, the “I Have a Dream” speech, and the non-violence of the “Civil Rights Movement.” In the last years of his life, however, King became increasingly revolutionary: he was speaking out against the Vietnam War, the American empire, poverty and economic exploitation, and was even organizing a major national poor people’s campaign to end poverty in the United States. The King up until 1965 was a reformer. The King thereafter was a revolutionary. This is why, when today we “remember” King, we purposely neglect the memory of the man who he was – and was becoming – when he was murdered. By doing so, we are able to forget the issues he was talking about, and how they are even more relevant today than they were in the time in which he spoke, and we can congratulate ourselves on “giving freedom” to black people in the United States. With a black president, many have declared a “post-racial” America. The discourse of race and poverty, discrimination, racism, segregation and exploitation is no longer seen as valid or useful. Naturally, this is wrong.</p>
<p>However, another thing happened to me as I began reading about King and his anti-poverty campaign: I was exposed to new ideas, individuals, and institutions. Specifically, I have been exposed to the ‘Black Power’ movement, organizations like the Black Panthers, individuals like Stokely Carmichael, Huey Newton, Angela Davis, Fred Hampton, and others. I began reading about these individuals, listening to their speeches, researching their ideas, learning about their organizations and actions and objectives and then suddenly, it happened, the process took on a life of its own. I have been utterly and completely inspired by the ideas, individuals, and actions of the Black Power movement. I realized that the revolutionary Martin Luther King that I so admire in the last years of his life, was not the only person speaking about such profound issues related to race, exploitation, history, and empire. What King was talking about in the last year of his life, a younger generation of black leaders had been talking about and acting on for years.</p>
<p>Suddenly, I had to know as much as I possibly could about Black Power, about the individuals involved, and about the ideas and their emergence, evolution, and relevance for today. When people typically hear the words ‘Black Power’ or ‘Black Panthers’ today, there are pre-programmed images and ideas which come into mind (especially if, like myself, you have lived most of your life in a predominantly white community and society): you see the images of leather-jacket and beret-wearing black men with sunglasses and guns, you think of violence and reactionary ideas, and even the concept of “reverse racism” – racism by blacks against whites. Like most things, the pre-packaged conceptions are a far cry from reality.</p>
<p>Black Power was not about hatred of whites, it was about empowerment of black people. The Black Power leaders – like Stokely Carmichael – understood that “integration” into white society would not liberate black people, because the solution was not one of repealing segregationist laws and then suddenly the scourge of racism would be erased from society and history. Black Power leaders and ideas were grounded in a significant historical understanding: they understood that racism was institutionalized in society, in all of its institutions and structures of power, not merely in the specific segregation laws of the South. Thus, what was needed in order to eradicate racism was to remake the institutions and ideas of society, not to simply step into the corridors of power (as Obama has) and proclaim a “post-racial” America. Black Power was not about dealing with the symptoms of racism (such as segregation, voting rights), but rather, in addressing the root causes of racism: found in the socio-political and economic system itself.</p>
<p>Racism was born out of class struggle, economic exploitation, imperialism, and poverty. It has remained a central feature of these issues right to the present day. The Black Power movement sought to challenge the root causes of racism. To do so, it was argued, black people themselves had to organize, mobilize and create their own source of power in society, they had to empower their own community and create their own institutions and articulate their own ideas – not against white people – but <em>for</em> black people. The understanding was that since integration would not solve the root causes of the problem at hand (institutionalized racism, as Stokely Carmichael wrote and spoke about), it was not a solution. Instead, black communities had to build their own power base in creating a new society with a new vision, free of racism (thus, those who equate Black Power with “white racism” do not understand Black Power). With its own power, vision, and objectives, Black Power would not have to conform or submit to the institutionalized power structure which already existed in society, and which had repressed black people for over four hundred years.</p>
<p>The Black Power movement was not about <em>destruction</em> or <em>violence</em>, it was about <em>creation</em> and <em>protection</em>. The Black Panther Party became a prominent symbol of Black Power. It was founded as the Black Panther Party for Self Defense, and its initial objective and the ideas behind arming themselves were not based upon an aggressive idea, or one which aimed to “overthrow” the government (as was the media and government portrayal of the Black Panthers at the time, and up until present). Rather, why they armed themselves was for self-defense of the ghettoes. The black ghetto communities in the United States were subjected to incredible amounts of police brutality, murdering black residents, and even white terrorism. The Panthers emerged, acting lawfully and legally in California (where gun laws stated that people could be armed, so long as they did not point their gun at anyone in public), and would act to protect the ghetto residents against the police and other forms of violence. When police would come into the ghetto, the Panthers would make their presence known and would <em>observe</em> the actions and conduct of the police to ensure that no violence was committed against black residents. Black communities were not protected by white people or the state, they were oppressed and attacked by white people and the state. In such a circumstance, one cannot condemn the actions and objectives of black residents to organize and seek to defend themselves.</p>
<p>The Black Panther Party was not only about self-defense; in fact, that was a rather small aspect of what they did. What we don’t hear about is the fact that the Black Panthers – and their leaders – were revolutionary philosophers and intellectuals, who put action to words, gave inspiration to people (whether black or white or otherwise), and empowered their communities: they organized and made self-sufficient a free breakfast program for black children in the community, free healthcare for residents, free education and literacy. J. Edgar Hoover, the Director of the FBI, declared the “free breakfast” program to be the greatest internal threat to the United States at the time. Why? Because it was empowering a community of people to become self-sufficient, to not depend upon the existing power structures, but to create their own, based in the people and population itself. This, indeed, was dangerous for the existing power structures.</p>
<p>As a result, the FBI and the federal government undertook a war against black America. Through the FBI’s Counter Intelligence Program (COINTELPRO) and other existing avenues, they infiltrated black organizations (as well as anti-war groups and other organizations) and sought to destroy the movement from inside. The COINTELPRO operation was used not only against Martin Luther King (and resulted in his murder), but against the Black Panther Party, and resulted in the assassination of many of its leaders. One such leader was Fred Hampton, a 21-year old man who was a revolutionary philosopher and activist. Not only did he help create the free breakfast program and other community programs in his branch of the Party in Chicago, but he even negotiated a peace settlement between street gangs and brought them within the movement, he (and the Party) worked with white activists and movements in northern cities and in the poor rural south. Black Power saw as essential the empowerment of all people, everywhere, white or black, articulating the fact that the black community would empower itself to create a society free of racism, but that this required white people to seek to empower their own communities to challenge and eradicate the causes of racism within white America. The Black Panthers worked with, traveled to, and inspired and were inspired by revolutionary movements all over the world, from the Caribbean and Latin America, to Africa and Southeast Asia. They spoke out against imperialism and exploitation not only nationally, but globally. Fred Hampton was one of the most profound thinkers, speakers, and actors within this movement. He was a young, vibrant, energetic speaker and activist, garnering the respect of activists all over the nation. In 1969, at the age of 21, he was assassinated by the Chicago Police Department and the FBI, shot to death at 4 a.m. as he was sleeping in bed with his wife, eight-and-a-half months pregnant at the time. She survived, and two weeks later, she gave birth to Fred Hampton, Jr.</p>
<p>Why are these names, ideas and activities not better known today? Not only is Black Power important for black people to understand and learn about, but for all people. The reason for this is simple: Black Power was truly, at its core, about People Power. The movement inspired and often worked with other communities struggling for their own liberation against repression, such as the American Indian Movement (which was also subsequently destroyed by the FBI), and it lent rhetorical and ideological support to women’s liberation and gay liberation movements that emerged. Huey Newton, one of the founders of the Black Panther Party, later wrote and spoke out on the need to support and promote radical women’s and gay liberation movements. Black Power elaborated and acted on ideas which had potential for the liberation of all people. Perhaps the most important principle of the movement was this: that when confronted with oppressive, dominating, and exploitative institutions and systems of power, the pathway toward liberation is not to join – or <em>integrate</em> – with that power, but to actively create something new, at the grassroots, organically developing out of the communities. The relevance these ideas have to the present circumstances of the world is shocking, and no less important to rejuvenate.</p>
<p>My newfound interest in Black Power has inspired me to such a degree that it is evolving my ideas of society and humanity as a whole. This is the profound importance of new ideas: that they lend to the evolution of our own, already-held ideas, that they may further inform the knowledge we already hold and articulate. Many of the ideas of Black Power already conform to ideas which I already held, such as the notion of empowering people and creating a new system instead of integrating within the existing system, the negation of the idea of “usurping” power (or overtaking the government or other existing institutions), and instead, creating a new form of power: vested in the people. However, this does not mean that the ideas of Black Power simply confirm or reaffirm ideas I already held, but instead, further inform them, lead to their evolution and understanding and aid in their articulation, presenting a view and lens through which to see a path of action. Programs like breakfast for children, education, and free health clinics, run by and for local communities, are ideas that need a desperate resurgence. As the current economic crisis descends deeper into a depression, and poverty and exploitation increase, such ideas and actions are essential to human survival as a whole. They bring hope and heart to issues largely void of both.</p>
<p>While a great deal more people than ever before are aware and increasingly becoming aware of such important issues as imperialism, domination, and exploitation, there is a tendency to pursue the path of integrating these individuals and ideas into the existing power structures. The growth of knowledge is leading to mass movements articulating a single philosophy (dogmatic and rigid in their interpretation and understanding), and seeking to put into power one or a few individuals who articulate that philosophy. Thus, the quest for change and articulation of hope become about a single individual, a single idea, and rests upon the premise of integrating such individuals and ideas into the existing power structures. What the history and philosophy of Black Power teaches us is that what is needed is not integration, not usurpation of power, but creativity and creation: not to take power, but to <em>empower</em>.</p>
<p>As such, the history of Black Power is the history of People Power; black history is human history. While it is incredibly important for the black community to learn and remember this history, it is no less important for all peoples – regardless of race, religion, culture or creed – to learn this history. If you claim to articulate a philosophy of change, which can and should work for the benefit of all people in all places, one must not simply learn their own specific cultural history, but the history of all peoples and cultures. An understanding of black history is best delivered by the black thinkers, actors, and ideas which make up that history. Modern black history – both in the world and in the United States itself – is a history of a particularly brutal, oppressive, exploitative, and ruthless social, political, and economic system. If our objective is to truly understand the system in which we live, articulate its strengths and weaknesses, and plan for a solution to change these circumstances, if we do not understand and address the history of what that system did to its most oppressed, most exploited, and most dominated populations (whether black, Native, indigenous, disabled, etc.), we cannot – and <em>DO NOT</em> – properly understand the nature of the system in which we live. Thus, how can we even pretend to have “the solution” if we do not properly understand the problems?</p>
<p>Stokely Carmichael articulated the concept of “internal colonialism,” which was a description for the ways in which the United States government treated the black population of the United States. Many people criticized this term at the time, thinking it to be exaggerated and inflammatory. Carmichael commented that it was an absurd negation of logic to think that what the United States did to others around the world would not be done at home, and he used an example of suggesting that this was the equivalent of saying that the Mafia runs crooked casinos in Peru, but honest ones at home. Thus, just as black history is human history, Black Power is People Power. As such, understanding this history is of vital importance in understanding how to change history as we live today. To allow such profound, important, and philosophical leaders and actors of this history – like Carmichael and Hampton – to rise up and again speak their words and have them heard, will make the murder of 21-year old Fred Hampton and the dozens and hundreds of others have more meaning, will give his words new purpose, will give his ideas new understandings, and will bring the fallen new life as they again, even decades after their deaths, empower the people of the world. To not revive these ideas is to let them die with the individuals, to not bring meaning to their lives and actions, to let them be forgotten to history. This is why when today we hear about “Civil Rights,” these ideas and individuals are not remembered. This is why the movement is referred to as “Civil Rights,” because it implies a specific objective of reform, when, in reality, the “Civil Rights” struggle was but a single phase in a long and evolving history of Black Liberation, which today can and must empower the long and evolving history of human liberation. As Fred Hampton once said, “I am… a Revolutionary.”</p>
<p>So this brings me back to The People’s Book Project, and the process in which it exists and evolves. My exposure to the ideas of Black Power has not even surpassed two weeks of research, but already it is changing, evolving, informing, and adding to the ideas and issues of the book itself. Already, I can see that this area is so important, that to not write about it is to commit a great injustice, that it is already altering the conclusions of the book which I thought I had in stone. Again, the process takes on a life of its own. This is important because it allows me to grow and evolve my thoughts and ideas as I do the research, instead of supporting and regurgitating only that which confirms to my pre-conceived ideas and notions. As I do this, I am able to expose these ideas to others, and to hopefully inform their ideas and actions. This process is long, detailed, and challenging, no less so because of my own living situation in which I find myself having to write it. But that does not matter. What matters is what the process and the book mean, not only to me, but what they could potentially mean to others.</p>
<p>I would like to quote Stokely Carmichael quoting George Bernard Shaw, “All criticism is autobiography… you dig?” My critique – my book – is as much what I think as it is who I am. Both what I think and who I am are in a constant state of evolution and development, and thus, so is the critique itself. The People’s Book Project, as such, is as much a process of development as it is an objective of creating a finished product. I set out to write a book which may help in the cause of liberation for all people in all places. The process of writing this book, then, <em>must</em> be a liberating process; it must not be confined by rigid structures and direction, but must be permitted to find its own free expression, to discover its own path and direction, and to <em>be</em> the change it <em>seeks</em>, as Mohondas Gandhi suggested. The fact that this process is funded by people from around the world, providing what little dollars and cents they may, spreading the word and ideas as they can, is also evidence that the process is <em>being</em> the change it <em>seeks</em>. The patron of this book is not a think tank, a university, a foundation or a government grant. The patron is the people, the community – globally speaking. This is why it is the <em>People’s </em>Book Project, not <em>my</em> Book Project. As much as I am (for obvious reasons) the most influential single person in this project, I would not be able to do what I am doing if it were not for the support of others, everywhere. As much as I am the most involved in this project, despite all my efforts, I cannot control or direct the process more than it controls and directs me. That process is facilitated only by the support from people.</p>
<p>As a result of this process, I have come to accept that this book is not <em>my</em> product, but rather that I am just as much a product of the book. As the process of the project changes me, I change the product of the project. As the people support the process, they allow both of these changes to take place. The end result will be that when the project – which will certainly be a series of books – is finished, it will be all the more important, informed, and purposeful. Thus, the product of this process will be far more beneficial to the people and purpose for which it is being undertaken: to provide knowledge to inform action in the cause of liberation. If I do not seek to produce the best possible piece of work I can and have ever produced, what would be the point? This is why I abandoned what was supposed to be a 200 page book on “Global Governance” and embarked on the journey of a project which has thus far, resulted in an 800-plus page book on people and power.</p>
<p>Now, I have friends and family who are in editing and publishing and writers and researchers, and they hear – “800 pages” – and they think and say, “What the hell are you doing? Edit, condense, concise, cut down” – and of course, they do it out of love, and I need to hear such suggestions and informed opinions. This is important. As I previously mentioned, writers must make choices, and it would appear that at the moment, I have not made many choices save to say that I have chosen to let the process overtake me and the Project. Now I have explained why I made this choice, that it directed me more than I directed it, and what this means in terms of a finished product, in terms of the purpose of the Project. This does not mean, however, that I will not make choices in the future. This Project will not be never-ending and eternal (though it often feels like it, as I am sure it does to ardent supporters who perhaps desire a finished product in the near future). The process has taken on a life of its own, that is true, and it has its place: it is important and essential to the finished product. But when I am left with what I can only assume will be a book far beyond 1,000 pages, when I have made the choices not to go further (as indeed, I cannot cover everything), but to cover what I think as to be most important (as the process itself dictates what is so), then I will make choices in editing: what are the common threads, ideas, institutions and individuals, what are the major events, the major actions and subjects, what must be within and what can be left out, what order should this story be told in, what structure for the chapters, how can it be broken up, how many books should result, and what are the conclusions that I am left with at the end of this current process? For it is when I reach the end of this current process, that I will understand the ideas and information within the research and writing, and thus, it is then that I will truly develop the thesis, and at which point I can truly tell the story as it can and must be told. The editing process is one all to itself. And when I get there, I will do what needs to be done to ensure that the book and books are readable, presentable, approachable, and purposeful.</p>
<p>The books will not be the beginning and end of human history, far from it; they will not be the most comprehensive examination of our modern world (though I certainly am aiming to make them as much, at least for myself as for others), but rather, I see them as a stepping stone, out of which others will critique the books, their ideas, and their suggestions, and through which such critique, the ideas within them will become more informed, more evolved, strengthened and empowered. I will no doubt write future books and research elaborating on the evolution of the ideas within. In such a scenario, the process is, for me, my very life; but don’t worry, this book will not take my entire life. It is simply what I must do at present, to provide for myself and others, a foundation upon which to stand and create something new. It is not to be a rigid dogma, a concise and complete compendium of all knowledge, no single source could ever hope to (or should) be such a thing. It is simply meant to inspire, to inspire with knowledge, to inspire others to add to and critique that knowledge, to evolve and make it stronger, to inspire action and ideas, to inspire and empower people, regardless of race or place. For this to happen, however, I will need to finish the book and get it out to others. Otherwise the process and the product are nothing more than a selfish and insulated personal journey without any other higher purpose. Thus, when the time comes, I know I will have both the instinct and the impetus to know when to make the choice to stop, to say, this is the story I need to tell.</p>
<p>It was upon researching about Black Power these past few weeks that I have come to truly embrace all that I have written about here, that I have come to be inspired to move forward, but that I have also become determined to allow the process to direct the person (me) in creating the product (the book). For if I had stood rigid and controlling over the subject and direction of the book, and decided, without investigation and understanding, what I would and would not include, I would not have allowed myself to research the issue of Black Power, and as a result, I would not have understood the absolute importance of this movement to human history and its evolution into hope for the future of humanity. If I had taken power over the process, instead of allowing the process to have power over me, the end product would be all the more pointless for what it hopes to achieve. At this point, I cannot imagine producing a finished product which does not include the relevancy of Black Power to the past and present.</p>
<p>So I want to extend my appreciation, with the utmost sincerity, to those who have supported this process both financially and otherwise, because none of this would be possible without you, it would not be where it is if it were not for your support, and it will not get anywhere without your future support. So to my patrons, I felt the need to inform you as to the process of this Project, so that you may better understand what it is you are supporting, how you are supporting it, where that support is going and what it is producing. In every sense of the word, then, this <em>is</em> the <em>People’s</em> Book Project, because it would not be possible without the support of the people.</p>
<p>And how many books can say that?</p>
<p>Thank you all, now and forever.</p>
<p>Sincerely,</p>
<p>Andrew Gavin Marshall</p>
<p><a href="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr?cmd=_s-xclick&#38;hosted_button_id=TW4E6EGUH5HZJ"><img src="https://www.paypal.com/en_US/i/btn/btn_donateCC_LG.gif" alt="" /></a></p>
<p><em><a href="http://www.andrewgavinmarshall.com/">Andrew Gavin Marshall </a>is an independent researcher and writer based in Montreal, Canada, writing on a number of social, political, economic, and historical issues. He is also Project Manager of <a href="http://www.thepeoplesbookproject.com/">The People’s Book Project</a>. He also hosts a weekly podcast show, “Empire, Power, and People,” on <a href="http://www.boilingfrogspost.com/">BoilingFrogsPost.com</a>.</em></p>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[Of Prophets, Power, and the Purpose of Intellectuals: Class War and the College Crisis, Part 3]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/04/13/571/</link>
<pubDate>Fri, 13 Apr 2012 04:29:36 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/04/13/571/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[Of Prophets, Power, and the Purpose of Intellectuals: Class War and the College Crisis, Part 3 By: A]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Of Prophets, Power, and the Purpose of Intellectuals: Class War and the College Crisis, Part 3</strong></p>
<p>By: Andrew Gavin Marshall<strong> </strong></p>
<div id="attachment_572" class="wp-caption alignnone" style="width: 300px"><a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.files.wordpress.com/2012/04/290px-lippman-time.jpg"><img class="size-full wp-image-572" title="290px-Lippman-Time" src="http://andrewgavinmarshall.files.wordpress.com/2012/04/290px-lippman-time.jpg?w=290&#038;h=382" alt="" width="290" height="382" /></a><p class="wp-caption-text">Walter Lippmann</p></div>
<p><strong><br />
</strong></p>
<p><a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/04/02/class-war-and-the-college-crisis-the-crisis-of-democracy-and-the-attack-on-education/"><strong>Part 1: <strong>The “Crisis of Democracy” and the Attack on Education</strong></strong></a></p>
<p><strong><a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/04/08/the-purpose-of-education-social-uplift-or-social-control/">Part 2: The Purpose of Education: Social Uplift or Social Control? </a></strong></p>
<p><strong><a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/04/17/student-strikes-debt-domination-and-class-war-in-canada-class-war-and-the-college-crisis-part-4/">Part 4: Student Strikes, Debt Domination, and Class War in Canada</a></strong></p>
<p><strong><a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/04/24/canadas-economic-collapse-and-social-crisis-class-war-and-the-college-crisis-part-5/"><strong>Part 5: Canada’s Economic Collapse and Social Crisis</strong></a></strong></p>
<p><strong><a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/04/30/the-quebec-student-strike-from-maple-spring-to-summer-rebellion/"><strong>Part 6: The Québec Student Strike: From ‘Maple Spring’ to Summer Rebellion?</strong></a><br />
</strong></p>
<p>Intellectual history is written by intellectuals and educational history is written by educators; thus, it would be inevitable that the flaws and failures of each are buried beneath, while the advances and accomplishments are exaggerated or over-estimated. There is, however, a seemingly consistent dichotomy which has evolved and persisted throughout intellectual and educational history: on the one hand, you have the much larger element – both in terms of the general purpose of education and in the general activities and ideas of intellectuals – who support and strengthen institutionalized power structures; on the other hand – much more a break from the ‘traditional’ impetus and activities of education and intellectuals – you have the smaller element, the off-shoots and oddities, which empowers the masses against institutionalized power, and with the intellectuals who speak out, articulate, mobilize, and justify the empowering of the people against that of the dominant structures of society. Therein lies the dichotomy: one form of education is for social control and domination, the other is for social uplift and rejuvenation; one type of intellectual is a programmatic priest for the proselytization of power, the other is an energetic and empowering enemy of entrenched elites.<strong><br />
</strong></p>
<p><strong>A Eulogy for Education: Situating the Social Sciences as Structures of Social Control</strong></p>
<p>Whether public or private, the key issue at hand is that of the utility – or purpose – of higher education. Conventional wisdom inflates the classical liberal concept of higher education as a social good, one which may be funded by the state in order to promote the general well-being of society, as inherently cultural institutions designed to raise the intellectual, spiritual, moral, and philosophical standards of society. A more critical history of education tends to downplay the “social good” theory in place of a “social control” theory of education, and specifically, of the social sciences. In this conception, education was designed to produce professional ‘technicians’ who would – using the techniques of science, rationality, and reason – study social problems with a desire to find and recommend specific policies and programs to ameliorate those problems – to promote reforms to the social system – in order to maintain “order.” Order, in this case, is understood as maintaining the social hierarchy. We understand “social order” as the security of the “social hierarchy” precisely because ‘disorder’ is understood as the opposite of this: a threat to the prevailing social hierarchy and institutional structure of society. Order is maintained through manufacturing ideologies, implementing policies, and undertaking programs of social engineering all with a desire to establish ‘social control.’</p>
<p>For this to be undertaken, it was essential for the social sciences to be separated into distinct spheres: Sociology, Political Science, Economics, and Psychology, for example. This superficial separation established each discipline as one for “expertise” and “professionalism,” whereby those who were trained to understand and partake in politics would study political science, achieving degrees in their “specialty” which would make them socially acknowledged “experts” in their fields. Academic journals reinforce these divisions, focusing primarily on a particular and specific discipline, providing a forum for academics and intellectuals to discuss, debate, and disseminate ideas related to the study and understanding of that discipline and its related topics. The effect, however, is that each discipline remained isolated from other forms of knowledge and, more importantly, that knowledge remained isolated from the general public, whom it was supposed to inform and empower (in theory).</p>
<p>Logic, of course, will tell you that in the real world, politics, economics, sociology and psychology all interact and become intertwined, intersected and interdependent. To add to that, of course, we have other technological, scientific, spiritual, cultural, environmental and historic factors that all merge to create what we broadly call “society.” If our aim is, as it should be, to understand society – to identify its problems and work to resolve them – we therefore would logically need a broader understanding of the social world, which would necessarily require a far more comprehensive, expansive, and multi-disciplinary historical examination of our world and its interacting forms of knowledge. It can be argued, however, that this is too demanding upon the academic and thus, unreasonable and unlikely. Therefore, it is argued, producing “experts” in specific areas would allow for a simultaneous understanding of these various spheres of society, and to effect change in each sector independent of one another. This raises an important question: is an “expert” in Political Science capable of understanding the political world? If they do not take into account economic, social, cultural, scientific, technological and other historical facets of the social world which all interact with the political realm, how can they logically understand the political realm outside of those interactions? In short, the political world does not operate within a vacuum and outside of interactions with other social phenomena, so the claim that they are “professionals” on understanding the social world as a whole, let alone “experts” in the political world, is dubious at best.The fallacy of this concept to produce useful knowledge was eventually acknowledged and educational managers (such as the major foundations) began to support ‘inter-disciplinary’ research to promote at least a more comprehensive understanding than previously existed.</p>
<p>Despite this inherently elitist self-serving conception of social control, the focus – purpose and utility – of education (and specifically the social sciences) on the study and amelioration of social problems inevitably gave rise to ideas, actors, and movements which saw beyond the rigid confines of the educational and knowledge-production system itself, reaching beyond the disciplines and into a more historically-based understanding. These broader understandings typically emerged from historians and philosophers, who must – as stipulated by their very disciplinary focus – acknowledge a multiplicity of factors, spheres, ideas, actors and areas of relevance to any given time and place of human social reality. History, by its very nature, is interdisciplinary: the historian must always acknowledge economic, social, political, and other cultural phenomena in each circumstance being studied.</p>
<p>As an example of these biases and disciplinary obscurities, let’s take a brief look at Political Science. In Political Science, when studying International Relations, you generally study two major theories of international politics: Liberalism, the idea that peace and prosperity between states grows as economic activity increases between them, and that of Realism/Mercantilism, whereby states are viewed as self-interested and the international arena as anarchic, and thus, nation states simply act to serve their own interests (and should). Both theories, of course, serve power. Unless studying the very specific focus of Global Political Economy (and specifically from a critical perspective), Political Science students are not exposed to or confronted with information or ideas which discuss the roles of financial and economic institutions and actors (banks, corporations, etc.) in determining foreign or public policy. Such perspectives are not studied, but simply assumed to be the product of “interested ideology” as opposed to “disinterested knowledge.” Critical theories are rarely acknowledged, let alone studied, and the general use of the word “ideology” is seen as negative, in that, it is not a legitimate focus for discussion or analysis. I personally know of a political science professor who taught a class on ‘Nationalism’ in which a student wrote an essay on ‘class.’ The professor informed the student that she couldn’t discuss “class” because it was “ideology,” and therefore, not disinterested knowledge. Of course, the fact that he was teaching a course on ‘nationalism,’ which itself, is an ideology, did not even come into consideration.</p>
<p>The difference in ideology then, is that the word is used to deride and dismiss theories and ideas which challenge, critique, or oppose power, hierarchy, and the status quo. Those ideas, theories, philosophies and perspectives which support power, hierarchy, and the status quo, are not presented as “ideology,” but as “disinterested knowledge,” as a fact, not in need of proof, but of an assumed nature. They are simply accepted, and are therefore, not ideology. This is also widely reflected in the differences of the academic journals, between those which are establishment and elitist, and those which are critical and allow for more dissent. An example is <em>Foreign Affairs</em>, the premier foreign policy journal, run by the Council on Foreign Relations, the most influential think tank in the United States. In this journal, the articles and essays, written by various “experts” and active, former, or prospective policy-makers and those who hold seats of power, contain largely little or no citations whatsoever. All the ‘facts’ and ideas stated within the articles do not need citations or references because they are ideas which support the status quo, and therefore, they simply reflect the ‘perceived’ realities of society. Now take a journal like <em>Third World Quarterly</em>, which tends to focus on the effects of foreign policy upon the ‘Third World’ nations of the Global South, often highly critical, allowing for major dissenting scholars to have an outlet for their research and ideas. These journal articles are typically and necessarily flooded with citations, sources and references. This is because ideas and facts which challenge the prevailing perception of social reality – the status quo – are treated far more critically and scrutinized to a significant degree.</p>
<p>Critical scholars put their entire reputation and career on the line in taking on controversial topics, and thus, they must provide extensive evidence and citations for all their assertions. Thus, a scholar who contends that – “the United States is an imperial nation which undermines democracy and the self-determination of people around the world” – must provide extensive, detailed, elaborate and concise references and citations. Even then, the scholar is likely to be either ignored or attacked with rhetoric proclaiming them to be “ideologically biased” or worse. On the other hand, a scholar who contends that the United States is a democratic peace-loving nation which benevolently seeks to spread democracy and freedom around the world requires no supporting evidence, citations, or references, simply because it serves power, supports the status quo, and regurgitates the ideas emerging from the institutions of power themselves (such as the State and media), and therefore, no major institutions will challenge the assertions nor subject them to scrutiny. For example, there are entire books written criticizing Noam Chomsky and subjecting his research and writing to extensive scrutiny, pointing out miniscule mistakes in his citations, presenting them as deliberate methods of manipulation. On the other hand, prominent scholars who refer to America as a “benevolent empire” or as the “protector of democracy” around the world are rarely challenged, let alone scrutinized. If scrutiny occurs, it is from the critical scholars, writing in more critically-inclined journals, and thus, their research tends to be disseminated only to each other and stays confined within that small social group. On the other hand, scholars who support power are invited on television, quoted in newspapers, work with think tanks in formulating policy, take part in international conferences, and are invited into the corridors of power in order to implement policy.</p>
<p>Serving power obviously allows for a scholar to rise through the social hierarchy with relative ease. For those scholars who challenge power and the status quo, while entry into positions of power and influence are generally denied, there is still a necessity for toleration among the powerful. The major foundations (Rockefeller Foundation, Carnegie Corporation, Ford Foundation, etc.) often fund critical scholars and journals, not out of a desire to promote or support their ideas, but in order to keep critical scholars  “professionalized,” to keep them as institutionalized academics. If there were no forums, journals, conferences or venues for the discussion, dissemination and debate of critical scholars and ideas, they would have to turn to other avenues for the dissemination of ideas and knowledge, which generally leads to the public sphere, of community involvement, activism, or populist politics. With foundations providing funding for critical scholars, journals, and conferences, the academics remain dependent upon the institutional structure of academia, and their ideas do not reach the wider public, and thus, their critiques are ineffective and do not promote change or understanding within the general population. Thus, such a program of financing provides a “release valve” for intellectual dissent, to keep critical or radical scholars institutionalized and prevent them from becoming mobilized and activist-oriented.</p>
<p>Still, in spite of all the deleterious factors for the pursuit of genuine knowledge with the purpose of empowerment through (instead of power over); the fact that the focus was on ‘social problems’ led inevitably to the generation of activist-oriented intellectuals, for those who could transcend the confines of narrow structures of knowledge. It is not to say that when these intellectuals surfaced, so too did the social movements, but rather that as social movements emerged, progressed, and developed, activist-oriented intellectuals took note, and began providing a philosophical and intellectual basis for the movement to exist and move forward. In short, it was a confluence of different circumstances both within the academic institutions and in the wider society – national and global – which led to the origins of these intellectual leaders, critics, activists, and philosophers. These are the individuals that the Trilateral Commission referred to in its report on the “Crisis of Democracy” as “value-oriented intellectuals.”</p>
<p><strong>Dissident Value-Oriented Intellectuals versus Technocratic Policy-Oriented Intellectuals</strong></p>
<p>In the early 20<sup>th</sup> century, as the concepts and ideas of “public opinion” and “mass democracy” emerged, the dominant political and social theorists of the era took to a debate on redefining democracy. It was an era of social unrest, radical political ideologies and activists, labour unrest and rebellion, extreme poverty, war, and middle-class insecurity (sound familiar?). Central to this discussion on redefining democracy were the books and ideas of Walter Lippmann. With the concept of the “scientific management” of society by social scientists standing firm in the background, society’s problems were viewed as “technical problems” (as in, not structural or institutional) intended to be resolved through rational professionals and experts. Just as with Frederick Taylor’s conception of “scientific management” of the factory, the application of this concept to society would require, in Lippmann’s words, “systematic intelligence and information control,” which would become “the normal accompaniment of action.” With such control, Lippmann asserted, “persuasion&#8230; become[s] a self-conscious art and a regular organ of popular government,” and the “manufacture of consent improve[s] enormously in technique, because it is now based on analysis rather than rule of thumb.”[1] Thus, for elites to maintain social control in the tumultuous new age of the 20<sup>th</sup> century, they must “manufacture consent” of the people to support the existing power structures.</p>
<p>In 1922, Lippmann wrote his profoundly influential book, <em>Public Opinion</em>, in which he expressed his thoughts on the inability of citizens – or the public – to guide democracy or society for themselves. The “intellectuality of mankind,” Lippmann argued, was exaggerated and false. Instead, he defined the public as “an amalgam of stereotypes, prejudices and inferences, a creature of habits and associations, moved by impulses of fear and greed and imitation, exalted by tags and labels.”[2] Lippmann suggested that for the effective “manufacture of consent,” what was needed were “intelligence bureaus” or “observatories,” employing the social scientific techniques of “disinterested” information to be provided to journalists, governments, and businesses regarding the complex issues of modern society.[3] These essentially came to be known and widely employed as think tanks, the most famous of which is the Council on Foreign Relations, founded in 1921 and to which Lippmann later belonged as a member.</p>
<p>In 1925, Lippmann wrote another immensely important work entitled, <em>The Phantom Public</em>, in which he expanded upon his conceptions of the public and democracy. In his concept of democratic society, Lippmann wrote that, “A false ideal of democracy can lead only to disillusionment and to meddlesome tyranny,” and to prevent this from taking place, “the public must be put in its place&#8230; so that each of us may live free of the trampling and the roar of a bewildered herd.”[4] Defining the public as a “bewildered herd,” Lippmann went on to conceive of ‘public opinion’ not as “the voice of God, nor the voice of society, but the voice of the interested spectators of action.” Thus, “the opinions of the spectators must be essentially different from those of the actors.” This new conception of society, managed by actors and not the “bewildered herd” of “spectators” would be constructed so as to subject the managers of society, wrote Lippmann, “to the least possible interference from ignorant and meddlesome outsiders.”[5] In case there was any confusion, the “bewildered herd” of “spectators” made up of “ignorant and meddlesome outsiders” is the public, is we, the people.</p>
<p>Lippmann was not an idle intellectual whose ideas are anachronisms of history, he was perhaps the most influential political theorist of his day, advising presidents while still in his 20s, Woodrow Wilson invited him to organize his war-time propaganda ministry, the Committee on Public Information (which was actually Lippmann’s idea to create), and his ideas held enormous resonance and received immense support from elite institutions and individuals. The influence of Lippmann’s ideas can be seen in the political machinery of the party system, the media, academia, think tanks, the construction of the consumer society, the activities of philanthropic foundations and a variety of other avenues and activities.</p>
<p>Several decades later, in the midst of another major social crisis in the 1960s, elite intellectuals again engaged in a discussion on the direction of society, social engineering, social control, and the role of “intellectuals” in society.</p>
<p>McGeorge Bundy, a member of the Council on Foreign Relations (and later the Trilateral Commission), was the U.S. National Security Adviser, responsible for organizing foreign policy under Kennedy and Johnson (largely responsible for the Vietnam War), and in 1966, he went to become President of the Ford Foundation. In 1967, Bundy wrote an article for <em>Foreign Affairs</em>, the journal of the Council on Foreign Relations which McGeorge’s brother William Bundy (a former CIA analyst and State Department staffer in the Kennedy and Johnson administrations) would be editor of from 1972-1984, after declining the offer from David Rockefeller to be the Council president. McGeorge wrote in his 1967 article that:</p>
<blockquote><p>The end of 1966 finds the United States with more hard business before it than at any time since 1962. We are embattled in Viet Nam; we are in the middle of a true social revolution at home; and we have undiminished involvement with continents and countries that still refuse to match our simpler pictures of them.[6]</p></blockquote>
<p>Bundy lamented the idea that, “American democracy has no enduring taste for imperialism,” because despite all of the “nation’s interests overseas, the boys always want to come home.” Bundy then went on to explain the benefits of questioning particular policies the United States pursues, but not to question the entire premise of America’s foreign policy in general (namely, that of imperialism). Instead, Bundy acknowledged that most of the dissent and argument on the Vietnam War was in terms of “tactics, not fundamentals,” though, he acknowledged, “[t]here are wild men in the wings,” referring to those intellectuals who question the basis and fundamentals of foreign policy itself.[7] Such “wild men in the wings” and “value-oriented intellectuals” present such a monumental threat to established elite interests. As the Trilateral Commission’s report noted in 1975:</p>
<blockquote><p>At the present time, a significant challenge comes from the intellectuals and related groups who assert their disgust with the corruption, materialism, and inefficiency of democracy and with the subservience of democratic government to “monopoly capitalism.” The development of an “adversary culture” among intellectuals has affected students, scholars, and the media. Intellectuals are, as [Political Economist Joseph] Schumpeter put it, “people who wield the power of the spoken and the written word, and one of the touches that distinguish them from other people who do the same is the absence of direct responsibility for practical affairs.” In some measure, the advanced industrial societies have spawned a stratum of value-oriented intellectuals who often devote themselves to the derogation of leadership, the challenging of authority, and the unmasking and delegitimation of established institutions, their behavior contrasting with that of the also increasing numbers of technocratic and policy-oriented intellectuals.[8]</p></blockquote>
<p>The Trilateral Commission report later expanded upon the concept of the role of the intellectual in society. It stated that in the cultural history of Western Europe, “intellectuals are romantic figures who naturally get a position of prominence through a sort of aristocratic exaltation.” However, in periods of “fast changes,” they often come to lead and join “the fight against the old aristocratic tradition.” This, the Trilateral Commission contended, represented an “internal upsetting of the traditional intellectual roles.” This was identified as a “crisis of identity” in which, “[i]t has become a battle between those persons who play the audience, even if it is a protest type, and those who contribute to the process of decision-making.” Claiming that protest-oriented intellectuals are among “the audience” reinforces Lippmann’s assertion some decades earlier that the public are mere “spectators,” not capable of nor desired to engage meaningfully in politics. For the Trilateral Commission, the rise of “value-oriented intellectuals” was the result of the “intellectualization” of the “post-industrial society” in which their particular fields (namely, the humanities) became less useful in “application” and “practical use,” and thus, society “tends to displace traditional value-oriented intellectual disciplines to the benefit of action-oriented ones, that is, those disciplines that can play a direct role in policy-making.”[9] This would of course include the authors of the Trilateral Commission report itself, namely Samuel Huntington, who went on to work on the National Security Council under Zbigniew Brzezinski (co-founder of the Trilateral Commission) in the Jimmy Carter administration.</p>
<p>French philosopher Jean-Paul Sarte had long discussed the role of radical intellectuals in society and social movements. Following the major youth and student protests and movements of 1968, Sarte felt that the first duty of the radical intellectual is to “suppress himself as intellectual” and put his skills “directly at the service of the masses.” In a 1971 interview, Sarte was asked the question, “What should the radical intellectual do?” Sarte responded:</p>
<blockquote><p>Today it is sheer bad faith, hence counterrevolutionary, for the intellectual to dwell in his own problems, instead of realizing that he is an intellectual because of the masses and through them; therefore, that he owes his knowledge to them and must be with them and in them: he must be dedicated to work for their problems, not his own.[10]</p></blockquote>
<p>Thus, radical intellectuals should be creating revolutionary newspapers directed toward the masses, creating “a language that explains the necessary political realities in a way that everyone can understand.” Sarte was then asked, “Are you saying&#8230; that the responsibility of the intellectual is not intellectual?” He replied:</p>
<blockquote><p>Yes, it is in action. It is to put his status at the service of the oppressed directly&#8230; the intellectual who does not put his body as well as his mind on the line against the system is fundamentally supporting the system and should be judged accordingly.[11]</p></blockquote>
<p>As such, it is the responsibility of the radical intellectual to not lead, but follow and support the movements and struggles of the masses. For Sarte, the intellectual’s “privileged status is over.” Thus, “only activism will justify the intellectual.”[12] This is, in fact, a direct counter – or parallel – to the concept of the policy-oriented or technocratic intellectual, who directly partakes in the decision-making process. Just as the “technocratic intellectual” who partakes in the decisions of the institutions of power is “policy-oriented,” the radical intellectual directly partakes in the process of resistance (though not necessarily the decision-making process), and is also “action-oriented.”</p>
<p>In 1967, famed linguist Noam Chomsky wrote an essay in which he voiced his political opposition to the Vietnam War, entitled, “The Responsibility of Intellectuals.” In the article, which provoked widespread discussion and debate, Chomsky wrote:</p>
<blockquote><p>With respect to the responsibility of intellectuals, there are still other, equally disturbing questions. Intellectuals are in a position to expose the lies of governments, to analyze actions according to their causes and motives and often hidden intentions. In the Western world, at least, they have the power that comes from political liberty, from access to information and freedom if expression. For a privileged minority, Western democracy provides the leisure, the facilities, and the training to seek the truth lying hidden behind the veil of distortion and misrepresentation, ideology and class interest, through which the events of current history are presented to us.[13]</p></blockquote>
<p>As Chomsky explained, “If it is the responsibility of the intellectual to insist upon the truth, it is also his duty to see events in their historical perspective.”[14] This is, of course, in counter to the “technical experts” of social science, seeking to remedy “technical problems” of society in a “responsible” manner. In this sense, “responsibility” has a dual use: it is used by elites to denote those intellectuals who are “responsible” to the elite, and it is also used by dissenters to denote a “responsibility” to the truth and the people. Thus, the use of the word – whether one describes dissenters as “responsible” or “irresponsible” – tends to express more about those who use the term rather than those for whom they are applying the term.</p>
<p>This is, it must be acknowledged, not a new phenomenon. It is found throughout human history, though often called different things in different times and places. It can be found among the ancient philosophers and, indeed, the prophets of the Biblical era. As Noam Chomsky has elsewhere explained, “The history of intellectuals is written by intellectuals, so not surprisingly, they are portrayed as defenders of right and justice, upholding the highest values and confronting power and evil with admirable courage and integrity. The record reveals a rather different picture.” Chomsky further wrote:</p>
<blockquote><p>A large part of the Bible is devoted to people who condemned the crimes of state and immoral practices. They are called &#8220;prophets,&#8221; a dubious translation of an obscure word. In contemporary terms, they were &#8220;dissident intellectuals.&#8221; There is no need to review how they were treated: miserably, the norm for dissidents.</p>
<p>There were also intellectuals who were greatly respected in the era of the prophets: the flatterers at the court. The Gospels warn of &#8220;false prophets, who come to you in sheep’s clothing, but inwardly are ravening wolves. By their fruits ye shall know them.&#8221;[15]</p></blockquote>
<p>In his book, <em>Sage, Priest, and Prophet: Religious and Intellectual Leadership in Ancient Israel,</em> Joseph Blenkinsopp explained the use of the term ‘prophet’ in both historical and contemporary context. In the contemporary context, it is generally associated with “prediction, emotional preaching, [and] social protest,” though the Hebrew term for it (nabi), has been so widely and differently used to describe various individuals, including its usage to describe many who functioned in “sanctuaries and royal courts,” in which case, they would be individuals who serve power. On the other hand, for those that challenged the power structures, Blenkinsopp argued that they were essentially “dissident intellectuals.”[16]</p>
<p>Again, this drew a distinction in ancient times with the word ‘prophet’ to that we hold today with the word ‘intellectual’: denoting both those who serve and challenge power. Blenkinsopp explained that the prophets who were “dissident intellectuals” in the Biblical era “collaborated at some level of conscious intent in the emergence of a coherent vision of a moral universe over against current assumptions cherished and propagated by the contemporary state apparatus, including its priestly and prophetic representatives.” In other words, they challenged the institutions of power which existed during that era. These dissident intellectuals – much like those of the modern era – “often play a socially destabilizing role in taking an independent, critical, or innovative line over against commonly accepted assumptions of a dominant ideology.” In fact, stipulated Blenkinsopp, “radical change rarely, if ever, comes about without the cooperation or intervention of an intellectual elite.”[17]</p>
<p>Blenkinsopp described an era in which these prophets emerged in protest “at the accumulation of wealth and the luxurious lifestyle enjoyed by the few at the expense of the many.” The prophet – or dissident intellectual – Amos had lashed “out at those who store of the (fruits of) violence and robbery,” and who “live at ease in houses, the walls and furniture of which are inlaid with ivory.” Amos and another dissident intellectual, Isaiah, had “nothing but scorn for the idle rich and depict.” Blenkinsopp wrote:</p>
<blockquote><p>The concentration of power and resources in the hands of the few, in this instance the political and hierocratic establishment and its clientele, is always liable to generate protest, especially if it is accompanied by the impoverishment of the many. A few decades after Amos, Hesiod claimed divine inspiration in denouncing unjust rulers.[18]</p></blockquote>
<p>Thus, whether Hesiod, Hosea, Micah, or Isaiah, “all four belonged to the very small minority of the population that was literate and educated, and it was from that socially privileged position that their protest was launched.” These dissidents, however, were of a very small minority. For literally hundreds of years, the ‘prophets’ (intellectuals) of the era were “almost exclusively supportive” of power, “and there is no breath of challenge to the political or social status quo.” It was “in Israel and, to a lesser extent, Greece [where] a tradition of dissent and social protest develop[ed].” How were these dissident intellectual ‘prophets’ of the era treated? The established powers attempted to silence Amos and Micah, Hosea was ridiculed as “a fool,” and Isaiah was driven into “retirement” after an attempt to intervene in foreign policy matters.[19] So, while we claim them as prophets today, in their time they were treated as pariahs.</p>
<p>So whether in Biblical Israel, nearly 800 years before the arrival of Christ, or in the 1975 Trilateral Commission report, “dissident intellectuals” are to be feared and reviled by established powers, and it is clear that these powers will always attempt and actively take measures to minimize, ostracize, repress or eliminate such forms of dissent.</p>
<p>Thus, we have come to see the corporatization of our universities and the marginalization of dissident intellectuals in the neoliberal era. As Bronwyn Davies et. al. wrote in the <em>European Journal of Education</em>, few radical intellectuals of the 1960s and 70s “imagined how dangerous their work with students might seem to be to those in government or to the global leaders of big business and industry.” This was, of course, addressed by the Trilateral Commission, which above all represents the interests of the financial, corporate, political, and intellectual elite. This elite felt that “they must establish a new order to make the world more predictable, and they saw those radical intellectuals – both academics and journalists – as contributing to the dangerous disorder.”[20]</p>
<p>The Trilateral Commission was founded by two individuals: one a representative of high finance (David Rockefeller, Chairman and CEO of Chase Manhattan Bank), and the other a representative of the intellectual elite (Zbigniew Brzezinski, professor of political science, member of the Council on Foreign Relations, foreign policy official). Brzezinski wrote a book in 1970, <em>Between Two Ages: America’s Role in the Technetronic Era</em>, in which he laid out the problems of the technological and electronic era (hence, “tehcnetronic”) and elaborated on strategies to resolve them: politically, economically, and socially, including the formation of a “community of developed nations” to jointly work together in managing the world for their own benefit. Rockefeller, who was also a top official at the Council on Foreign Relations and also attended meetings of the Bilderberg group with Brzezinski (another exclusively elitist international think tank linking Western Europe and North America), took note of the book and its arguments, and recruited Brzezinski to help put together this “community,” and in 1973, the Trilateral Commission was formed. Brzezinski, in terms of intellectual influence, is perhaps as close to a Walter Lippmann for the globalized era as one could get. For decades, he has been a major foreign policy official with significant influence, sitting on the boards of major elite think tanks that produce policy plans which are implemented in the government, acting in an advisory capacity to almost every president since Jimmy Carter, and in terms of his still close relationship with the ruling financial oligarchy (namely, the Rockefellers).</p>
<p>In his book, Brzezinski discussed the need for “programmatic engineering” to manage and change American culture, of which he emphasized the roles played by education and the mass media over the alternative avenues of churches and traditional customs.[21] The manufacturing of culture, posited Brzezinski, was an American ‘obligation’:</p>
<blockquote><p>Change in educational procedures and philosophy should also be accompanied by parallel changes in the broader national processes by which values are generated and disseminated. Given America’s role as a world disseminator of new values and techniques, this is both a national and a global obligation. Yet no other country has permitted its mass culture, taste, daily amusement, and, most important, the indirect education of its children to be almost exclusively the domain of private business and advertising, or permitted both standards of taste and the intellectual content of culture to be defined largely by a small group of entrepreneurs located in one metropolitan center.[22]</p></blockquote>
<p>Brzezinski also discussed one of the more relevant and indeed, concerning facets of the Technological Revolution. Of course, writing of this as a ‘concern’ is in terms of Brzezinski writing from the perspective of an elite academic and strategic thinker, and thus, representing the elite class and <em>their </em>overall concerns. Namely, Brzezinski wrote on the prospects of a revolution against this process and the power structures involved, explaining that these groups are likely to emerge in both the developing world and industrialized world in opposition to the process of ‘modernization,’ which Brzezinski refers to as the advancement of the ‘Technetronic Revolution.’ In the Global South (the “Third World”), the revolutionary class is likely to emerge from the educated classes who are deprived of social opportunities fitting with their intellectual expectations. In the industrialized West, however, this “revolutionary intelligentsia” is most likely to emerge from the “middle-class intellectual equivalents” of the revolutionary class in the developing world. Thus, it would emerge among the educated middle-classes of the West, who are deprived of opportunities attuned to their education, thus creating a ‘crisis of expectations.’ Brzezinski wrote that the Technetronic Revolution had created a “social anachronism,” in which these groups may hold onto anti-industrial values and could possibly, even in the more modern countries, effectively block the modernization of their societies, “insisting that it be postponed until after an ideological revolution has taken place.” Brzezinski explained:</p>
<blockquote><p>In this sense the technetronic revolution could partially become a self-limiting phenomenon: disseminated by mass communications, it creates its own antithesis through the impact of mass communications on some sectors of the intelligentsia.[23]</p></blockquote>
<p>Brzezinski’s answer to these profound and potentially revolutionary circumstances was to employ more social engineering, more social control, more integration and coordination among global powers; essentially, to strengthen power structures at the expense of all others. Brzezinski wrote that there was a “mounting national recognition that the future can and must be planned; that unless there is a modicum of deliberate choice, change will result in chaos.”[24] He elaborated:</p>
<blockquote><p>Technological developments make it certain that modern society will require more and more planning. Deliberate management of the American future will become widespread, with the planner eventually displacing the lawyer as the key social legislator and manipulator&#8230; How to combine social planning with personal freedom is already emerging as the key dilemma of technetronic America, replacing the industrial age’s preoccupation with balancing social needs against requirements of free enterprise.[25]</p></blockquote>
<p>In the same line of arguing in favour of more coordination, planning, and “technical” expertise, Brzezinski also posited an image of where this could eventually lead:</p>
<blockquote><p>Another threat, less overt but no less basic, confronts liberal democracy. More directly linked to the impact of technology, it involves the gradual appearance of a more controlled and directed society. Such a society would be dominated by an elite whose claim to political power would rest on allegedly superior scientific know-how. Unhindered by the restraints of traditional liberal values, this elite would not hesitate to achieve its political ends by using the latest modern techniques for influencing public behavior and keeping society under close surveillance and control&#8230;  Persisting social crisis, the emergence of a charismatic personality, and the exploitation of mass media to obtain public confidence would be the steppingstones in the piecemeal transformation of the United States into a highly controlled society.[26]</p></blockquote>
<p>Thus, we come to understand the ideologies, intent, and actions of two divergent social actors: the technocratic and policy-oriented intellectual and the dissident action-oriented intellectual. One supports power, one supports people. Our educational system is still to a significant degree composed of and designed to produce (like industrial factories for intellectual products) those intellectuals who support power, who engage in social engineering with the purpose of social control. Dissident intellectuals, while they exist, remain confined. They engage in research and write in academic journals which reach only other dissident intellectuals. This is the case not only in the West, but across a great deal of the world. There are, of course, exceptions, but they are few and far between. The knowledge and ideas and dissident intellectuals must be designed not for the purpose of internal discussion and debate among other dissidents within the institutions of academia, but to reach the masses, to empower the people, and to <em>join </em>– actively and actually – with the people as they mobilize for change. In order to do this, new forums, conferences, media, and other sources and organizations should attract the “value-oriented intellectuals” away from Ivory towers of intellectual isolation and into the people-oriented pathways of political action. The language must be made less academic and more accessible, the activities must be more directly engaged with people than distant and distracted.</p>
<p>The rigors of academic life make this a great challenge, not only for students but for professors as well. Professors are expected to publish consistently in journals and other publications, and so when they are not teaching or instructing, they are researching and writing, independently and isolated. There is very little time or opportunity for direct engagement, or for writing for other publications and avenues which could allow their research to reach a wider audience. This keeps intellectuals disciplined and distracted, and ultimately, gives little relevance to their research in terms of actually affecting any meaningful changes in society. However, here we come to understanding the inherent dichotomy of a crisis, in this case, the “Crisis of Education.” As the crisis of education leads to increased costs, increased debts, decreased enrollment, decreased opportunities, increased social unrest, increased student resistance, and ultimately, a decrease in the amount of teachers and professors (this is already taking place), there also opens an avenue through which much of the disciplinary mechanisms which held dissident intellectuals back will be eroded. With nothing left to lose (in terms of job security, financial stability, social prestige and opportunity), dissident intellectuals will be far more inclined toward participation in activism and social movements. Avenues for their participation should be opened up and extended as this crisis continues and deepens.</p>
<p>A simply example of such an opportunity to attract dissident intellectuals would be a type of international conference, media, and educational institute. It could begin with a conference, drawing dissidents from around the world – from Egypt, Tunisia, Greece, Turkey, Israel, Spain, the U.K., Canada, Australia, United States, Iceland, Ireland, Chile, Taiwan, etc. – to hold a discussion and debate on the origins, evolution, development and potential for the growing social and activist movements, whether in the Arab Spring, Occupy Wall Street, anti-austerity protests, student strikes, and others. The conference could be televised for free online, so people all over the world could view and engage. A major aim and result of the conference could be to establish an educational institution, which brings together such intellectuals from around the world with more consistency, which organizes a network of globally connected but locally-oriented decentralized schools, designed specifically for a broad, multi-disciplinary and globally-relevant education for social change. They could hold classes in which students and teachers engage as equals, bringing in local activists, alternative media, even filming the actual classes and discussions to post online, even provide a live feed. The aim would be to provide education for the purpose of empowering people to activism and social change. They could establish their own media outlets, providing research and discussion of activities by students and professors, and become engaged in actively planning and helping organize social movements, protests, and other activities.</p>
<p>The point would be to provide a forum where education has an empowering social purpose, where it integrates itself with other elements of society and does not remain isolated and insulated. For example, if one such discussion were to take place in a local decentralized school on the topic of food sustainability, agriculture, GMOs, and the politics of food, the result could be a decision to establish a network of organic farmers who would be willing to produce cheap food for poor areas, establish a space where there could be a cheap organic food market, or cheap (or free) meals made with the food, but dispensing it to poor people in poor areas of major cities, who would otherwise not have the means of good food for decent prices. It’s a very simple program, but the effects can be profound. Not only could it begin to integrate farmers and agriculturalists with such an emerging movement, but it could integrate the poor more closely with such a movement. The poor are, after all, the largest constituency in the world, and the one in the most need of help and empowerment. For the poor, the ideological and power struggles between the middle and upper classes are largely irrelevant, because neither benefit nor empower them. If there is to be a true and genuine revolutionary change in global society, acting without the ideas and support of the poor is a sure way to guarantee failure for genuine change. To get the support of the poor, the poor must be supported; they must be given a stake in the future, empowered to act and participate in change, and the starting point for this is to address the immediate necessities of poor people everywhere: food, clothing, shelter.</p>
<p>The difference between how ‘social control’-oriented institutions (such as foundations and NGOs) address poverty and how revolutionary and radical organizations would address poverty, is the intent and methods in dealing with these immediate concerns. NGOs and foundations seek to establish methods of providing food, clothing, shelter and general necessities so much as to address the symptoms of poverty, not the causes, and thus, to ultimately sustain the system that creates poverty by alleviating the worst conditions just enough to prevent rebellion or resistance. Revolutionary or radical organizations would seek to address the immediate concerns of the poor in order so that they may be empowered and able to begin finding ways to support themselves, to learn from them, and to provide access to forms of knowledge which have been denied to them. Thus, any programs of directly helping the poor would have to be accompanied with opportunities for education, knowledge, and outlets for action. The point is not to simply feed a poor individual, but to disseminate knowledge about why they are poor, how society creates and sustains the poor, the sources and solutions to poverty. Thus, it does not simply alleviate the symptoms, but empowers the individuals. Further, any radical movement must in turn be educated <em>by</em> the poor, for through their very existence, they are better able to understand the nature of the system that exists, because they have always been subjected to its most ugly and oppressive apparatus. While it may be easy for middle class intellectuals and students to promote a revolutionary cause based upon an ideology of how the state can and should function, poor people are able to give a better idea of how the state <em>does</em> function, <em>has</em> functioned, and thus, raise critical questions about the ideas, objectives, and actions of middle class and other radicals. The point would not be to be modern missionaries, providing food with “the Bible,” but to help – not out of pity but out of empathy and necessity – to empower, and, ultimately, to learn <em>from</em> and work <em>with</em> the poor. If any radical or revolutionary movement emerges which does not include a significant number of leaders from the poor population, and without significant support from the poor population, it is inherently anti-democratic and unworthy of pursuit.</p>
<p>This is, of course, just one example. The objective then, would be to find a way to bring dissident intellectuals out of the rigid confines of academia, and into the real world: to embolden, empower, and engage with the people, to participate in activism and social mobilization, and to work with a wide variety of other social groups and sectors in order to collectively participate in the construction of a new and far better world. It is time that <em>this</em> must be the acknowledged purpose of intellectuals, not the exception.</p>
<p><em><a href="http://www.andrewgavinmarshall.com/">Andrew Gavin Marshall </a>is an independent researcher and writer based in Montreal, Canada, writing on a number of social, political, economic, and historical issues. He is also Project Manager of <a href="http://www.thepeoplesbookproject.com/">The People’s Book Project</a>. He also hosts a weekly podcast show, “Empire, Power, and People,” on <a href="http://www.boilingfrogspost.com/">BoilingFrogsPost.com</a>.</em></p>
<p><a href="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr?cmd=_s-xclick&#38;hosted_button_id=TW4E6EGUH5HZJ"><img src="https://www.paypal.com/en_US/i/btn/btn_donateCC_LG.gif" alt="" /></a></p>
<p><strong>Notes</strong></p>
<p>[1]            Frank Webster and Kevin Robins, “Plan and Control: Towards a Cultural History of the Information Society,” <em>Theory and Society</em> (Vol. 18, 1989), pages 341-342.</p>
<p>[2]            Sidney Kaplan, “Social Engineers as Saviors: Effects of World War I on Some American Liberals,” <em>Journal of the History of Ideas</em> (Vol. 17, No. 3, June 1956), pages 366-367.</p>
<p>[3]            Sue Curry Jansen, “Phantom Conflict: Lippmann, Dewey, and the Fate of the Public in Modern Society,” <em>Communication and Critical/Cultural Studies</em> (Vol. 6, No. 3, 2009), page 225.</p>
<p>[4]            Walter Lippmann, et. al., <em>The Essential Lippmann: A Political Philosophy for Liberal Democracy</em> (Harvard University Press, 1982), page 91.</p>
<p>[5]            Ibid, page 92.</p>
<p>[6]            McGeorge Bundy, “The End of Either/Or,” <em>Foreign Affairs</em> (Vol. 45, No. 2, January 1967), page 189.</p>
<p>[7]            Ibid, pages 189-191.</p>
<p>[8]            Michel J. Crozier, Samuel P. Huntington and Joji Watanuki, The Crisis of Democracy, (Report on the Governability of Democracies to the Trilateral Commission, New York University Press, 1975), pages 6-7.</p>
<p>[9]            Ibid, page 31-32.</p>
<p>[10]            Ronald Aronson, “Sarte and the Radical Intellectuals Role,” <em>Science &#38; Society</em> (Vol. 39, No. 4, Winter 1975/1976), pages 436, 447.</p>
<p>[11]            Ibid, pages 447-448.</p>
<p>[12]            Ibid, page 448-449.</p>
<p>[13]            Noam Chomsky, “A Special Supplement: The Responsibility of Intellectuals,” <em>The New York Review of Books</em>, 23 February 1967:</p>
<p><a href="http://www.nybooks.com/articles/archives/1967/feb/23/a-special-supplement-the-responsibility-of-intelle/">http://www.nybooks.com/articles/archives/1967/feb/23/a-special-supplement-the-responsibility-of-intelle/</a></p>
<p>[14]            Ibid.</p>
<p>[15]            Noam Chomsky, “Great Soul of Power,” Information Clearing House, 26 July 2006:</p>
<p><a href="http://www.informationclearinghouse.info/article14221.htm">http://www.informationclearinghouse.info/article14221.htm</a></p>
<p>[16]            Joseph Blenkinsopp, <em>Sage, Priest, Prophet: Religious and Intellectual Leadership in Ancient Israel</em> (Westminster John Knox Press, 1995), page 2.</p>
<p>[17]            Ibid, page 144.</p>
<p>[18]            Ibid, pages 153-154.</p>
<p>[19]            Ibid, page 154.</p>
<p>[20]            Bronwyn Davies, et. al., “The Rise and Fall of the Neo-liberal University,” <em>European Journal of Education</em> (Vol. 41, No. 2, 2006), page 311.</p>
<p>[21]            Zbigniew Brzezinski, <em>Between Two Ages: America’s Role in the Technetronic Era</em> (Greenwood Press, Westport: 1970), page 265.</p>
<p>[22]            Ibid, page 269.</p>
<p>[23]            Ibid, page 278.</p>
<p>[24]            Ibid, page 256.</p>
<p>[25]            Ibid, page 260.</p>
<p>[26]            Ibid, pages 252-253.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[Bringing Down the Empire: Challenging the Institutions of Domination]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/03/12/bringing-down-the-empire-challenging-the-institutions-of-domination/</link>
<pubDate>Mon, 12 Mar 2012 21:33:51 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/03/12/bringing-down-the-empire-challenging-the-institutions-of-domination/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[Bringing Down the Empire: Challenging the Institutions of Domination By: Andrew Gavin Marshall]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Bringing Down the Empire: Challenging the Institutions of Domination</strong></p>
<p><a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.files.wordpress.com/2012/03/join-the-revolution.jpg"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-533" title="join-the-revolution" src="http://andrewgavinmarshall.files.wordpress.com/2012/03/join-the-revolution.jpg?w=300&#038;h=194" alt="" width="300" height="194" /></a></p>
<p>By: Andrew Gavin Marshall</p>
<p><em>&#8220;Nothing is more powerful than an idea whose time has come.&#8221;</em> &#8211; Victor Hugo</p>
<p>We have come to the point in our history of our species where an increasing amount of people are asking questions, seeking answers, taking action, and waking up to the realities of our world, to the systems, ideas, institutions and individuals who have dominated, oppressed, controlled, and ensnared humanity in their grip of absolute control. As the resistance to these ideas, institutions, and individuals grows and continues toward taking action &#8211; locally, nationally, regionally, and globally &#8211; it is now more important than ever for the discussion and understanding of our system to grow in accord. Action must be taken, and is being taken, but information must inform action. Without a more comprehensive, global and expansive understanding of our world, those who resist this system will become increasingly divided, more easily co-opted, and have their efforts often undermined.</p>
<p>So now we must ask the questions: What is the nature of our society? How did we get here? Who brought us to this point? Where are we headed? When will we get to that point? Why is humanity in this place? And what can we do to change the future and the present? These are no small questions, and while they do not have simple answers, the answers can be sought, all the same. If we truly seek change, not simply for ourselves as individuals, not merely for our specific nations, but for the whole of humanity and the entire course of human history, these questions <em>must</em> be asked, and the answers must be pursued.</p>
<p>So, what <em>is</em> the nature of our society?</p>
<p>Our society is one dominated not simply by individuals, not merely by institutions, but more than anything else, by ideas. These three focal points are of course inter-related and interdependent. After all, it is individuals who come up with ideas which are then institutionalized. As a result, over time, the &#8216;institutionalization of ideas&#8217; affect the wider society in which they exist, by producing a specific discourse, by professionalizing those who apply the ideas to society, by implanting them so firmly in the social reality that they often long outlive the individuals who created them in the first place. In time, the ideas and institutions take on a life of their own, they become concerned with expanding the power of the institutions, largely through the propagation and justification of the ideas which legitimate the institution&#8217;s existence. Ultimately, the institution becomes a growing, slow-moving, corrosive behemoth, seeking self-preservation through repression of dissent, narrowing of the discourse, and control over humanity. This is true for the ideas and institutions, whether media, financial, corporate, governmental, philanthropic, educational, political, social, psychological and spiritual. Often the idea which founds an institution may be benevolent, altruistic and humane, but, over time, the institution itself takes control of the idea, makes it rigid and hesitant to reform, and so even the most benevolent idea can become corrupted, corrosive, and oppressive to humanity. This process of <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2012/01/20/interview-the-nature-of-institutions/">the institutionalization of ideas </a>has led to the rise of empires, the growth of wars, the oppression of entire populations, and the control and domination of humanity.</p>
<p>How did we get here?</p>
<p>The process has been a long one. It is, to put it simply, the history of all humanity. In the last 500 years, however, we can identify more concrete and emergent themes, ideas, institutions, individuals and processes which brought us to our current place. Among these are the development of the nation-state, capitalism, and the financial system of banking and central banking. Concurrently with this process, we saw<a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2012/02/26/an-empire-of-poverty-race-punishment-and-social-control/"> the emergence of racism, slavery, and the transformation of class politics into racial politics.</a> The ideas of &#8216;social control&#8217; came to define and lay the groundwork for a multitude of institutions which have emerged as dominant forces in our society. Managing the poor and institutionalizing racism are among the most effective means of social control over the past 500 years. The emergence of national education systems played an important part in creating a collective identity and consciousness for the benefit of the state. The slow and steady progression of psychiatry led to the domination of the human mind, and with that, the application of psychology in methods of social engineering and social control.</p>
<p>Though it was in the 19th century that<a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2011/12/13/the-council-on-foreign-relations-and-the-grand-area-of-the-american-empire/"> revolutionary ideas and new philosophies of resistance emerged</a> in response to the increasing wealth and domination at the top, and the increasing repression and exploitation of the rest. In reaction to this development, elites sought out new forms of social control. Educational institutions facilitated the rise of a new intellectual elite, which, in turn, redefined the concept of democracy to be an elite-guided structure, defined and controlled by that very same intellectual elite. This led to the development of new concepts of <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2012/01/18/power-propaganda-and-purpose-in-american-democracy/">propaganda and power</a>. This elite created the major philanthropic foundations which came to act as &#8220;engines of social engineering,&#8221; taking a dominant role in the shaping of a global society and world order over the 20th century. Ruthless imperialism was very much a part of this process. By no means new to the modern world, empire and war is almost as old as human social organization. In the late 19th and early 20th centuries, rapid imperial expansion led to the domination of almost the entire world by the Western powers. As the Europeans took control of Africa, the United States took control of the Caribbean, with <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2012/02/21/punishing-the-population-the-american-occupations-of-haiti-and-the-dominican-republic/">Woodrow Wilson&#8217;s brutal occupations of Haiti and the Dominican Republic</a>.</p>
<p>The two World Wars transformed the global order: old empires crumbled, and new ones emerged. Bankers centralized their power further and over a greater portion of human society. After World War II, <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2011/12/13/the-council-on-foreign-relations-and-the-grand-area-of-the-american-empire/">the American Empire sought total world domination.</a> It undertook to<a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2011/12/14/the-american-empire-in-latin-america-democracy-is-a-threat-to-national-security/"> control the entirety of Latin America, </a>often through <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2012/01/25/revelations-in-research-the-kennedy-brothers-state-terror-and-friendly-dictatorships/">coups and brutal state repression</a>, including support to tyrannical dictators. This was done largely in an effort to counter the rise of what was called &#8220;radical nationalism&#8221; among the peoples of the region.  In the Middle East, the United States sought to<a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2012/03/02/the-u-s-strategy-to-control-middle-eastern-oil-one-of-the-greatest-material-prizes-in-world-history/"> control the vast oil reserves in an effort to &#8220;control the world.&#8221;</a> To do so, the United States had to <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2012/03/05/fighting-the-rising-tide-of-arab-nationalism-the-eisenhower-doctrine-and-the-syrian-crisis/">set itself against the phenomenon of Arab Nationalism</a>. Israel emerged in the context of great powers seeking to <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2011/12/29/the-origins-of-imperial-israel-a-buffer-against-arab-nationalism/">create a proxy state for their imperial domination of the region</a>. The birth of Israel was itself marked by a brutal campaign of <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2012/01/02/organized-terror-and-ethnic-cleansing-in-palestine/">ethnic cleansing against the domestic Palestinian population</a>, a fact which has scarred forever the image and reality of Israel in the Arab world. The development of the educational system facilitated the imperial expansion, <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2011/10/18/an-education-for-empire-the-rockefeller-carnegie-and-ford-foundations-in-the-construction-of-knowledge/">not only in the United States itself</a>, but globally, and largely at the initiative of major <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2011/10/21/education-or-domination-the-rockefeller-carnegie-and-ford-foundations-developing-knowledge-for-the-developing-world/">foundations like Rockefeller, Carnegie, and Ford</a>.</p>
<p>Who brought us here?</p>
<p>While the ideas and institutions are the major forces of domination in our world, they are all started by individuals. We are ruled, though it may be difficult to imagine, by a small dynastic power structure, largely consisting of powerful banking families, such as the Rothschilds, Rockefellers, and others. The emerged in controlling the financial system, extended their influence over the political system, the educational system, and, through the major foundations, have become the dominant social powers of our world, creating think tanks and other institutions which shape and change the course of society and modern human history. Among these central institutions which extend the domination of these elites and their social group are <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2011/11/30/book-sample-the-rockefeller-world-the-council-on-foreign-relations-and-the-trilateral-commission/">the Council on Foreign Relations, the Bilderberg Group, and the Trilateral Commission</a>.</p>
<p>Where are we headed, and when will we get there?</p>
<p>We face the possibility of a major global war. Already the Western imperial powers have been<a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/america%E2%80%99s-strategic-repression-of-the-%E2%80%98arab-awakening%E2%80%99/"> interfering in the Arab Spring,</a> attempting to co-opt, control, or outright repress various uprisings in the region, as well as extending their imperial interests by supporting militant and destructive elements in order to implement &#8211; <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/08/26/lies-war-and-empire-nato%E2%80%99s-%E2%80%9Chumanitarian-imperialism%E2%80%9D-in-libya/">through war and destabilization &#8211; regime change, such as in Libya</a>. The war <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/03/06/economic-warfare-and-strangling-sanctions-punishing-iran-for-its-defiance-of-the-united-states/">threats against Iran continue</a>, not because Iran is seeking a nuclear weapon, but because Iran seeks to continue to develop independent of Western domination and has the capacity to defend itself, an incomprehensible thought for a global empire which believes it has <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/wikileaks-and-the-worldwide-information-war/">the &#8216;right&#8217; to absolute world domination</a>. The empire itself is threatened by a<a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/are-we-witnessing-the-start-of-a-global-revolution/"> &#8216;Global Political Awakening&#8217; </a>which marks the changing ideas and understandings of humanity about our situation and the possibility for change, even revolutionary if necessary. As the global economic crisis continues to descend into<a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/167/"> a &#8216;Great Global Debt Depression,&#8217;</a> we see the increasing development of resistance, leading even to <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/14/the-global-economic-crisis-riots-rebellion-and-revolution/">riots, rebellion, and potentially revolutio</a>n. <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/14/western-civilization-and-the-economic-crisis-the-impoverishment-of-the-middle-class/">The middle classes of the West are being plunged into poverty</a>, a condition which the rest of the world has known for far too long, and as a result, the political activation of these classes, along with the radicalization of the student population &#8211; left in jobless debt for an eternity &#8211; create the conditions for global solidarity and revolution. These conditions also spur on the State to impose <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/14/revolution-and-repression-in-america/">more repressive and totalitarian measures of control,</a> even to the possibility of state terror against the domestic population.</p>
<p>Just as the process of resistance and repression increase on a global scale, so too does the process of global centralization and expansion of domination. <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/%E2%80%9Ccrisis-is-an-opportunity%E2%80%9D-engineering-a-global-depression-to-create-a-global-government/">Through crises,</a> the global elites seek to construct the apparatus of<a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/from-global-depression-to-global-governance/"> a &#8216;global government.&#8217;</a> The major think tanks such as <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/bilderberg-2011-the-rockefeller-world-order-and-the-high-priests-of-globalization/">the Bilderberg Group</a> have long envisioned and worked toward such a scenario. This <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/10/forging-a-%E2%80%9Cnew-world-order%E2%80%9D-under-a-one-world-government/">&#8216;new world order&#8217;</a> being constructed is specifically for the benefit of the elite and to the detriment of everyone else, and will inevitably &#8211; as by the very nature of institutions &#8211; <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/14/100/">become tyrannical and oppressive</a>. The<a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/14/the-global-political-awakening-and-the-new-world-order/"> &#8216;Technological Revolution&#8217;</a> has thus created two parallel situations: never before has the possibility of absolute global domination and control been so close; yet, never has the potential of total global liberation and freedom been so possible.</p>
<p>Why are we here, and what can we do to change it?</p>
<p>We are here largely due to a lack of understanding of how we have come to be dominated, of the forces, ideas, institutions, and individuals who have emerged as the global oligarchy. To change it, firstly, we need to come to understand these ideas, to understand the origins and &#8216;underneath&#8217; of all ideas that we even today hold as sacrosanct, to question everything and critique every idea. We need to define and understand <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2012/02/07/liberty-anarchy-property-democracy-and-power/">Liberty and Power.</a> When we understand these processes and the social world in which we live, we can begin to take more informed actions toward changing this place, and toward charting our own course to the future. We do have the potential to change the course of history, and history will stand in favour of the people over the powerful.</p>
<p>The People&#8217;s Book Project seeks to expand this understanding of our world, and the ideas, institutions, and individuals which have come to dominate it, as well as those which have emerged and are still emerging in resistance to it. What is the nature of our society? How did we get here? Who brought us here? Why? Where are we going? When will we get there? And what can we do to change it? These are the questions being asked by The People&#8217;s Book Project. The products of this project, entirely funded through donations from readers like you, is to produce<a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/about/"> a multi-volume book on these subjects</a> and seeking to answer as best as possible, these questions. It is, essentially, a modern history of power, people, and potential. The book itself lays the groundwork for<a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/project-philosophy/"> a larger idea</a>, and <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2011/09/20/a-revolutionary-idea-for-a-revolutionary-time-a-plan-of-action-for-the-global-political-awakening/">a plan of action</a>, a method of countering the institutional society, of working toward the empowerment of people, the undermining of power, to make all that we needlessly depend upon irrelevant, to push people toward our true potential as a species, and to inform the action of many so that humanity may learn, discover, try and, eventually, succeed over that which seeks to dominate.</p>
<p>The People&#8217;s Book Project depends entirely upon you, the reader, for support, and that<a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/the-peoples-grants/"> support is needed now</a>.</p>
<p>See what others are saying about The People&#8217;s Book Project:</p>
<p><em>The People&#8217;s Book Project may be a radical idea for radical times, but it&#8217;s an idea whose time has come. With crowd-funding the people finally have the chance to compete with the seemingly unlimited resources of  the financial elite who have traditionally written our history. This  is why I support Andrew Gavin Marshall&#8217;s project and hope others will  support it, too. For once the people have the chance to reclaim their own history, and to tell the truth the way it deserves to be told.</em></p>
<p><a href="http://www.corbettreport.com">James Corbett</a></p>
<p><em>The People&#8217;s Book Project is a great undertaking for our time. Around the world we have seen a political awakening of the oppressed, exploited, and impoverished that has swept the globe, from Cairo to Melbourne to the imperial capital itself: Washington D.C. The project is so important because by tracing how we got to this point in history and who got us here, it allows us to then use that knowledge to begin to envision and articulate a new global social, political, and economic order and then take concrete steps to see this vision come to fruition.</em></p>
<p><a href="http://whataboutpeace.blogspot.com/">Devon DB</a></p>
<p><em>I am an enthusiastic supporter of the People&#8217;s Book Project because our society is in desperate need of creating new Social Architectures.  The Industrial Age is crumbling &#8211; but &#8216;the new&#8217; has yet to be invented.  Thus, we need brilliant young minds to create new possibilities, through the haze of mind numbing commodification of everything.  The People&#8217;s Book Project represents incredible discipline and in-depth research by brilliant young minds to discover the futures we need to build together.  Join me in supporting this exploration of our future.</em></p>
<p><a href="http://inclusion.com/index.html">Jack Pearpoint and Lynda Kahn</a></p>
<p>Please support The People&#8217;s Book Project and make a donation today!</p>
<p><a href="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr?cmd=_s-xclick&#38;hosted_button_id=TW4E6EGUH5HZJ"><img src="https://www.paypal.com/en_US/i/btn/btn_donateCC_LG.gif" alt="" /></a></p>
<p>Thank you for your support,</p>
<p>Andrew Gavin Marshall</p>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[Liberty, Anarchy, Property, Democracy and Power]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/02/07/liberty-anarchy-property-democracy-and-power/</link>
<pubDate>Wed, 08 Feb 2012 01:13:56 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/02/07/liberty-anarchy-property-democracy-and-power/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[I have had a number of debates and discussions recently, largely through various social media networ]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>I have had a number of debates and discussions recently, largely through various social media networks and similar avenues, on some issues that are of major concern to those who seek to confront the challenges of the present and construct a better path for the future. So I thought I would take this opportunity, with ideas fresh in my mind, to simply share some thoughts on these subjects and issues. There is also a relevance between these thoughts and <a href="http://www.thepeoplesbookproject.com">The People&#8217;s Book Project</a>, for it is the research for the book which has shaped the conclusions and/or directions of these ideas, and which will be supported with historical facts throughout the book(s).</p>
<p>As the title indicates, the subject of this article is: Liberty, Anarchy, Property, Democracy and Power. What are these concepts? What are their historical and present manifestations? How do they interact, inter-twine, counteract, or confront each other? Is it possible to ground these concepts in a wider understanding?</p>
<p>Let&#8217;s start with Power. What is power? Power, I would suggest, can be defined as an authority which is imposed over or through an entity or entities, the authority and right to define and direct existence and action. Exercised through individuals, ideas, and institutions, Power can amount to a person&#8217;s right and ability to determine the course of their own life, to exercise free thought, establish their own opinions, ideas and make their own decisions, which inform their actions. This, perhaps, could be explained as &#8216;Personal Power,&#8217; which I would argue is an absolute necessity and is synonymous with autonomy and independence, individuality and freedom. In this sense, &#8220;Personal Power&#8221; is Freedom. Other forms of power, exercised through ideas and institutions, can give support to Personal Power (through knowledge, action, information, and inspiration), or, alternatively, can oppress and destroy personal power for the benefit of Institutional Power (or centralized/hierarchical power). The power of an idea has the duality of being able to support Personal Power or Institutional Power, or otherwise undermine and oppose them.</p>
<p>So what is Liberty? Many define liberty as that which allows for the free actions and decisions of one individual to determine their own lives so long as it does not infringe upon the liberty of another. Some view liberty as an individual right, and others as a collective necessity. I do not think, however, that the individual is antithetical to the collective. For an individual to thrive, grow, prosper, discover, understand, decide and live free and with their Personal Power to determine the course and content of their own individual life, I think it is an inherent necessity or pre-requisite that collective liberty and solidarity co-exist with individual liberty.</p>
<p>Freedom for one requires freedom for all. Why is this so? If freedom for one individual exists without the freedom of all, their personal liberty (or Personal Power) exists in a vacuum outside and around the collective human experience. One may then be free to decide their own course in life, so long as that course requires no interaction or involvement of others, as those others would not be free, and thus, the interaction would be based upon the concept of one person&#8217;s liberty being derived from the deprivation of another person&#8217;s liberty, or in other words: tyranny. Further, the notion of &#8220;individual liberty&#8221; without &#8220;collective liberty&#8221; and &#8220;collective cooperation&#8221; in fact, unknowingly deprives the &#8220;individual&#8221; of the actual freedom, justice, knowledge, interaction, personal growth, prosperity, development, and humanity that comes through social interaction with others. That social interaction is strengthened if the collective (whether we refer to a small community or the collective of all humanity) is itself free and liberated. In this sense, the freedom of others and the interaction and mutual support (cooperation) of the collective strengthens the liberty of the individual: it gives her or him support, protection, Power, growth, knowledge, interaction, information, insight, understanding, material support, inspiration, humility, and love.</p>
<p>To elaborate on this concept, I must admit that such a situation has never existed in history, and that is the point! One may point to a pocket of freedom or liberty here and there, even examine a small isolated island&#8217;s experiment with absolute liberty (or Anarchy), and see how such a society collapsed, thus concluding that such a circumstance is unsustainable, unobtainable, undesirable, and ultimately, impossible. Just as no man is an island, no island is even an island, for beneath the surface of the water, it connects with the landmass of the earth below, which connects with all other landmass, all the oceans are connected, and all the people are connected through our mutual co-existence on this planet, whether we interact personally with one another or not.</p>
<p>One need only look at the Haitian Revolution of 1791-1804 to understand how potential liberation becomes absolute tyranny. Once the most profitable colony in the world, Haiti&#8217;s slaves (approx. half a million) revolted against the slave-owning class and established the first black republic in history. Almost immediately Haiti&#8217;s government became a military dictatorship, designed to protect the newly-liberated country from the foreign imperial powers of France, Great Britain, Spain, and the United States. It&#8217;s history has been scarred by revolution, rebellion, invasion, occupation, civil war, coups, corruption, despotism, and poverty. Yet, even in the revolutionary period, a large percentage of the population desired the ability to have a small piece of land with which they could grow their own food for subsistence and live in liberty. Such a situation would have been impossible if the domestic dictatorships were not constructed, as foreign powers repeatedly attempted to invade and restore slavery; thus, it was deemed necessary to maintain a strong national military. However, that military returned the people to plantation labour under conditions which could compare with the brutality of colonial slavery. So what were they liberated from? Surely, an idyllic free island nation of peasants would not have been possible without the military to protect it from foreign empires; but then, the military itself destroyed liberty in order to secure its own institution and provide economic growth in order to protect the nation from those foreign empires. All the while, the people were thrown back and forth, repressed, controlled, and left to the ravages of an historical contradiction: freedom could not exist without the state, which was required to protect the free from those who would enslave the people; nor could freedom exist with the state, which enslaved people to its will to protect its own survival from those who would destroy it and again enslave the population.</p>
<p>So, freedom could not exist without the state, nor could it exist with it. How do we understand this contradiction, how do we remedy this paradox?</p>
<p>If at the same time that Haiti experienced its revolution, freeing itself from all forms of slavery and domination, and giving liberty to the population, imagine, then, what course of history could have been taken had the liberation struggle taken place simultaneously in all the colonies of the Mediterranean, Latin America, and the world; or, for that matter, had true liberation struggles taken place in the imperial nations themselves. If all people, everywhere, threw off the shackles of domination, control, and hierarchical power simultaneously, in solidarity, and in cooperation; what foreign power then would exist to crush the revolution of a tiny island? What state structure would be built without the justification of &#8220;protection of those freedoms&#8221; through the destruction of those freedoms? Could states at all justify their existence?</p>
<p>It is in this context that I argue that the freedom of one requires the freedom of all, that, inevitably, individual liberty cannot exist without collective liberty. To add to this, absolute freedom and liberty (also known as philosophical Anarchism) is not to be confused with &#8220;chaos&#8221;, a word often mistakenly interchanged with that of &#8216;Anarchy.&#8217; Anarchy is not chaos, as an anarchist society is a highly organized and functioning society, requiring cooperation, collective support and effort and interaction based upon the understanding that individual liberty requires collective cooperation. The organization of an anarchistic society is simply not organized on the basis of hierarchical institutions, which deprive others of liberty and freedom, and impose centralized (institutional) power from above. Instead, anarchistic organization requires cooperatives, collective groupings of free-associations of individuals, working together, discussing together, deciding together (as free individuals, not as an organized &#8216;mob&#8217;), and acting in mutual support. When workers take over a factory and run it themselves, collectively making decisions, sharing responsibilities, and taking action, that is Anarchism. It is not libertarianism, or free-market capitalism, because it rejects the concept of the factory being the &#8220;private property&#8221; of the &#8216;owner&#8217;, and it&#8217;s not socialism because the state has no involvement whatsoever. It is the manifestation of workers realizing that they can work, produce, profit, and prosper without the ownership class.</p>
<p>Just this week in Greece, where the State colludes with foreign imperial powers, bankers, multinational corporations, international institutions, the systems of debt and interest and domination, <a href="http://libcom.org/blog/greek-hospital-now-under-workers-control-05022012">workers have taken control of a hospital</a> in light of the government&#8217;s austerity measures to cut health care spending. They are reaching out to the community for support, and make decisions through a workers&#8217; assembly. The hospital workers recognize that the services of health care are essential for the benefit of the people, and regardless of the decisions or excuses of the state, the banks, the IMF, the EU, or any other hierarchical institution of power, its services are needed, and those that provide the services are the workers at the hospital, not its managers, owners, financiers (whether public or private). So the workers take control, and reach out to the community for direct support, as the community will receive the benefits of the health care. They simply remove the elites from the picture. No doubt such efforts will be trampled, destroyed, opposed, oppressed, and erased from history. Nothing is more dangerous to elites than the threat of a good example. Even though many of these experiments have and likely will have failures, flaws, problems, or be crushed, the examples should be noted and the attempts continued to be made. For as more take notice, as more take action, more examples arise, spreading out like ripples from a drop of water into a puddle, and in time, people everywhere may be attempting the same or similar actions, perfecting (or at least bettering) the specifics, addressing the flaws, learning from the mistakes, improving the effects, including wider communities in the actions, generating international solidarity and support&#8230; and, through time, struggle, and effort, all hierarchical power structures everywhere would be struggling against the widening wave of people working together in making elite dominated structures irrelevant.</p>
<p>This is not a process that can be accomplished simply through workers taking control of their own work places, however. It will no doubt be a long, arduous, conflicting, challenging, and painful process, marked by flaws, failures, but driven by persistence, possibility, necessity, and humanity. In this sense, and elaborating on the earlier example of Haiti in explaining my understanding of &#8216;liberty&#8217; (requiring the freedom of all for the freedom of one), I must also acknowledge that never before has this been possible on a global scale.</p>
<p>Today, and in the course of this century, however, it is possible. We are already globally becoming more interconnected through communication, information, and interaction, largely as a result of the Internet, which allows people in most places of the world to interact with others around the world on a person-to-person basis, not through a lens of power. Previously, unless you had the ability to travel everywhere in the world, one in North America could only view others in Africa, for example, through a lens of power: through the media, the government, educational institutions, industry, popular culture, and through ideas which &#8216;trickle down&#8217; from hierarchical institutions. Now, however, we have the ability to communicate directly with those around the world who have the same means of communication, to talk to them directly, see them on camera, to listen to their knowledge and learn from it. Indeed, this is of the utmost necessity.</p>
<p>Many critical thinkers, activists, alternative media, and people&#8217;s movements in the West operate on the assumption that we have the answers to the problems of the world, and we simply need to spread &#8220;our&#8221; message to the rest (first to the rest of our domestic society and then the rest of the world) in order to obtain our concept of &#8220;liberation&#8221; and &#8220;freedom.&#8221; These activists, intellectuals, critics, and others alike are missing a critical component, however (and that is to say, not ALL of them are missing this, but rather as a general observation): as we are just now grumbling awake from our long consumer-imposed slumber of consent to the system of domination over us, largely galvanized by information exposed to us through the Internet and social media, we should, in fact, consult, discuss, and most importantly &#8211; LISTEN &#8211; to those who have been aware of the domination of the world, who have been subjected to the brutal blunt force of empire, oppression, and control for hundreds of years. It is of the absolute necessity that for us in the Western industrial nations to be able to move forward and build a new vision of society, we must first interact with, listen to, and learn from those who have been living under (and SURVIVING through!) the brutality and ruthless oppression of the empires that emanate from our comfortable living conditions. These are the other 6 billion people on earth. Without their voices being heard, listened to, understood, contemplated, and EMPOWERED, all action will be without informed understanding.</p>
<p>On a simple historical note, we also owe it to the people&#8217;s of Africa, Asia, the Middle East, Latin America and elsewhere to give them voice as we speak and discover our own, to listen to them as we speak for others, to learn from them as we educate ourselves. We owe it to the rest of the world, for, without our misplaced consent to our nations and the ignorance of our true ruling systems and structures that we have for so long submitted to, the oppression, domination, destruction, impoverishment, murder, genocide, and dehumanization of the other people on this planet would not have been possible. Yes, we were and are lied to. But that does not absolve us of the responsibility to remedy the lies through seeking new truths. If we push ahead without moving alongside those we have &#8211; knowingly or unknowingly &#8211; pushed down and kept back, we move forward in a superficial sense. If we propose revolution for ourselves, but leave the rest out of our understanding, ideas, and actions, we doom our own revolutions (whether ideological, philosophical, or physical) to absolute failure. Importantly, our interactions with the colonized peoples of the world cannot consist of dictating TO, but learning FROM. We can begin in our own nations, where our displaced indigenous populations have been subjected to 500 years of domination, empire, genocide, and oppression&#8230; and yet, they survive, move forward; they act and seek change, they generate ideas and support each other. This has been the source of their strength in solidarity with one another. And while it is a long way to reach a better place, as most of these communities suffer currently a greater deprivation than most people in our modern societies, imagine the prospects and possibilities not only for them, but for everyone, if the population as a whole started to speak to, listen to, learn from, and act with indigenous communities, poor communities, disenfranchised peoples, and other oppressed and dominated and segregated people the world over.</p>
<p>Until we begin to remedy the flaws in our own social existence, which have been constructed around us and with our tacit if not apathetic participation and acquiescence, flaws that support segregation, isolation, division, exclusion, and domination, we will not move forward in any true, honest, and hopeful way. There is a fundamental and logical idea about segregation which is often overlooked without a thought: that the segregation of one individual or group from the rest, automatically entails the segregation of all. When issues of segregation are discussed, it often points to the community being &#8220;segregated&#8221; &#8211; whether it is a specific race, gender, the disabled, &#8220;mentally ill&#8221;, &#8220;criminals&#8221;, etc. &#8211; and presents them, alone, as being &#8220;segregated.&#8221; However, this passes over the notion that the wider community is itself segregated from whatever group is being excluded. Thus, apartheid was as much about keeping the black South Africans excluded from society as it was about keeping the whites excluded from the black population. Thus, the whites do not benefit from the knowledge, growth, development, inspiration, understanding, and existence that comes with interaction from the wider segments of society; just as the blacks were deprived of the benefits of the rest of society (to a much more oppressive degree, I might add). Physical separation augments this process of segregation, whether it exists with prisons, mental hospitals, ghettos, slums, in  schools, or with walls, fences, roads, etc. Thus, the segregation or exclusion of one &#8211; whether an individual or group &#8211; automatically entails the segregation and exclusion of all.</p>
<p>To move forward in any meaningful way, we must address this issue, this fact of our social existence, and begin to deconstruct it in order to achieve a greater inclusion, expand the collective community, and thus, expand collective knowledge, understanding, and experience, which in turn, will inform collective action. This long, painful, and challenging process is what is required, however, to achieve a global philosophical revolution, which would make irrelevant any immediate, narrow, and isolated concept of a &#8220;physical revolution&#8221; in usurping power, which simply turns into another form of tyranny. A philosophical revolution, however, should be the goal for people &#8211; individually and collectively, one which cannot be imposed from above, but which must build and grow from below, like a seedling in dirt, sprouting upwards and outwards into the sunlight and slowly growing tall and proud and into a strong, sturdy tree, which in turn blossoms flowers and seeds for future growth. The philosophical revolution will establish the collective understanding that is required to inform action and to create a new society.</p>
<p>In this sense, we are not yet ready for firm &#8220;solutions&#8221; in terms of stating flatly: this policy, this law, this structure, this system, this constitution, this state, this idea WILL work. There will be trial and error, but we already have a long human history to learn from and move forward with. It is this history, not simply of our narrow society or nation (itself being a false historical construct), but of the collective human history and experience, which can inform our present understanding, and which will come to inform our future ideas and actions as our collective interaction grows and develops into something more concrete and inclusive. And before my own hypocrisy is pointed out, in saying that I have already advocated Anarchism as a &#8220;solution&#8221; and then say that we cannot advocate solid &#8220;solutions&#8221; at present, Anarchism is more a process than a product. There have been anarchist movements and experiments in history, most of which were brutally crushed. During the Russian Revolution, there was not simply the Bolsheviks (Communists) and the liberal-tsarist supporters (Whites), but there were also anarchist communities, which were crushed by both the other factions. The Spanish Civil War saw perhaps the largest explosion of anarchism in modern history, which was collectively crushed by Communists, Fascists, and Democratic State-Capitalist societies, all seeking their own interests. Anarchism does not abide by a strict set of &#8220;rules&#8221; or &#8220;regiments&#8221; or constructs for what such a society would entail, look like, or how it would manifest itself. It is an incredibly diverse philosophical realm based upon an opposition to hierarchical authority, upon the principle that centralized-institutionalized power cannot be assumed as just, but must justify itself, and if it cannot, it must be abolished; that people flourish best when free. A common term often interchanged with anarchism is: &#8220;libertarian socialism,&#8221; which may seem a contradiction, but, as explained by anarchist philosopher, Mikhail Bakunin: &#8220;We are convinced that freedom without Socialism is privilege and injustice, and that Socialism without freedom is slavery and brutality.&#8221;</p>
<p>In this sense, I think anarchism gets to the root ideals of both socialism and libertarianism. Socialism seeks the benefit for the many, libertarianism seeks liberty for the individual. As separate ideologies, they are opposed to one another, engaged in a constant struggle for identity and superiority. In the realm of anarchism, what was once oppositional ideas becomes mutually supporting: to link the collective good with individual liberty, and to suggest that individual good requires collective liberty. Thus, socialism without the state, libertarianism without private property. After all, how could state socialism benefit the majority if it functions through the centralization of authority? If it functions for a time, how long until the weaknesses inherent in institutional power destroy the ideals upon which it justifies itself (namely, that it attracts the wrong type of people to it, those who want to wield power, and who are more likely to rise through institutionalized power simply because they will do anything to do so)?</p>
<p>When it comes to libertarian philosophy, where a small state is desired, and a &#8220;free market&#8221; economy is favoured, where private property is sacrosanct and individual liberty is the ideal; how can such a society exist within the context of a state, within the context of corporations, which are themselves constructs of the state? Corporations will exist, grow, dominate, and naturally seek to infuse themselves with the State, support its growth, which then will support their growth (as it does today in our State Capitalist societies), and at the expense of everyone else. Thus, we are left with corporate tyranny, or State Capitalism, the very thing we have today in Western societies. The principle of private property, elevated to holy and untouchable heights by libertarians (who refuse to even QUESTION private property), is viewed as a central foundation and necessity for a libertarian society. In their version of history, private property was viewed as the means to liberty from historical monarchical and feudal societies, where the state dominated land and property. Indeed, this change took place, where the &#8220;rights&#8221; of private property were guaranteed. However, they served the narrow interests of the new capitalist class that developed at the time. What was defined AS private property, also changed through history, and continues to. At one time, humans were considered private property: this was called slavery. Today, our very genes, cell structures, biology, life force, environment, atmosphere, and all material existence is increasingly being defined as &#8220;private property&#8221; so that corporation may come to OWN the RIGHTS to life, itself.</p>
<p>An early anarchist thinker once declared, &#8220;Property is theft.&#8221; Indeed, the concept of private property in libertarian thinking can lay the basis for a free society, as, in principle, it allows for individuals to own their own individual property, free from the control of outside forces, specifically, the state. Unfortunately, this is not the world we live in. As private property became a &#8220;right&#8221; for the emerging capitalist classes hundreds of years ago, the wider populations did not receive the benefits. In fact, where once they worked and laboured on the lands of the state and king, they then worked on the lands of the private businesses and industries. In time, they became property, and were bought and sold. Eventually, formal slavery transformed into wage-slavery, where workers &#8220;leased&#8221; their labour for hourly pay, and continued to struggle in a much-deprived existence, while those who OWN the industries and land, whether private or public, profit at the expense of the people. The &#8220;principle&#8221; of private property liberated in as much as it liberated an emerging elite from an old elite; it did, however, continue to deprive the many, who could own or simply exist on and make use of land and resources collectively, not for short-term profit, nor for the State&#8217;s reaffirmation of control, but for the wider benefit of all people, individually and collectively, and as such, the land and resources would be used wisely and with a long-term approach to not plundering the earth upon which all communities and peoples depend: something that neither states nor private enterprise is capable of.</p>
<p>Thus, I view anarchism &#8211; or libertarian socialism &#8211; not as a &#8220;single&#8221; idea of a &#8220;solution&#8221;, a society-to-be, but rather an approach to moving forward which removes the barriers that currently exist between people: institutional power, hierarchical authority, segregation, exploitation, exclusion, domination and oppression. Whatever society results would come through trial and error, experience, effort, small successes and large failure, collective action informed by collective understanding; growth not separately, but together, collectively. I cannot even imagine the structure or form of such a future society, though there are many possibilities, many ideas, many suggestions, but ultimately, it is unknown, unstructured, undefined. In this sense, anarchy is, I would argue, the best means of an approach to moving forward, for it is a uniting force for the people (such as finding the common ground between libertarians and socialists), from which knowledge and growth can occur, without which a true global change cannot take place. As such, anarchy is the only true, direct and intrinsic form of democracy, where it would truly be a society &#8220;of the people, by the people, and for the people.&#8221; What results, is for posterity to determine, but far from imposing a single idea of what we should replace our current society with, it instead sets out a method of discovering that process for ourselves, collectively and individually.</p>
<p>Anarchists, then, can also be seen as highly pragmatic, as has been the case historically. For example, all anarchist thought generally rejects the legitimacy of the State; however, some strands of anarchist thought accepted the necessity of &#8216;national liberation&#8217; struggles as a stepping stone to a larger global liberation struggle. Anarchists have been known to modify tactics, ideas, approach, and understanding as the circumstances demand. It is a philosophy of patience, but persistence. It holds to ideals, questions, and particular understandings regarding hierarchy, institutions, and power; but allows for actions to maneuver within the existing present circumstances, knowing that all cannot come at once, but that things will come and go in stages, that the march to progress is slow and hard, and that we should support others who march, whether or not we endorse their specific philosophy (say, for example, nationalism).</p>
<p>Many critical American activists, alternative media, politicians and others make up what some refer to as the &#8220;American Awakening,&#8221; opposing the government, corporate tyranny, empire and other similar facets of the modern society. But a large degree of these individuals and groups espouse highly nationalistic rhetoric, firmly attach themselves to libertarianism (to the degree that is becomes a blind faith situation), and endorse popular myths of the national history: that America was once a great beacon of freedom, and then outside or other forces turned it into what it is today. America is where it is today because of where it was when it was created. A person gets sick because their immune system is weak. America became the most powerful and oppressive empire in the world because of the weaknesses inherent in its form, structures, institutions, and ideologies throughout its history. If we do not reconcile with our own histories, we do not move forward, but try to jump back to a myth of a time that never actually existed in reality.</p>
<p>We see the factions of the American Awakening in the Tea Party and the Occupy Movement, one generally representing the right, libertarian-leaning faction, and the other the left-leaning more socialist faction (admittedly a very wide generalization, considering the immense diversity that exists within the movements, especially the Occupy movement). They become opposed to one another, struggle against the interests of one another, and demonize each other. As they fight and divide, institutional and hierarchical power centralizes and grows. As they fight one another, they weaken one another; as they weaken each other, the power over top grows and strengthens, and it may more easily co-opt, control, or destroy the resistance movements. These are symptoms of a growing awakening, yes, but they are not the &#8220;answers.&#8221; As we mature and move forward, we must find common ground to unite the factions against common challenges.</p>
<p>The Tea Party and the Occupy Movement both have a distrust of state and corporate power as it exists and functions in today&#8217;s context. It is, rather, their solutions and interpretations of power that divide them. But as anarchism has shown, there is mutual ground to stand upon. Thus, anarchism provides a stronger foundation upon which people may come together and move forward collectively, but this requires the willingness and ability of all parties, whether right, left, middle, socialist, communist, libertarian, or staunch anarchist, to allow for practical and strategic capitulations, in both ideology and action. Through finding common ground to stand on and work together in moving forward, there will be immense opportunities and indeed, inevitability of learning and growing and evolving &#8211; philosophically and otherwise &#8211; through such cooperation and mutual capitulation, for such an experience would inevitably lead to important lessons and understandings that all parties involved would not be privy to otherwise, had they remained fractured, factionalized, segregated from one another.</p>
<p>It is through this process that people may discover their true power, Personal and Collective. In doing so, they will inevitably deprive institutional forms of power from their own positions and hierarchies. Ultimately, I think this process will be one of the major features of the 21st century, stretching well into this century, if not to the end of it. Just as in all things, there is a perpetual search for and attainment of some sort of balancing force in the world: on the one hand, people will have to come together and create a global philosophical revolution as a precondition for and resulting from the struggle of global liberation and absolute freedom for all peoples on earth from all forms of domination; and, on the other hand, institutional and hierarchical power is seeking to globalize and centralize and dominate on a truly global scale as never before seen, more removed from the many, more controlled by the few, and more dehumanizing than any and every form of tyranny before. Indeed, it may be that it will only be this process of the globalization of power and domination which provides the collective experience necessary to spur on a global philosophical revolution. The interesting fact is that never before in human history have either of these processes been truly possible until today: global domination or global liberation. Both, moreover, are advanced by the same socially transformative process: the Technological Revolution. This is the modern form of the historical human revolutions which brought about the Stone Age and organized human society. In this context, humanity is now emerging from its historical adolescence, where we have always had, and to some degree required, some form of authority telling us how to think, what to do, how to act, who to be; but now, it is time to become an adult: to become autonomous, free, independent, and liberated.</p>
<p>It must be freedom for all, or freedom for none.</p>
<p>&#160;</p>
<p>Andrew Gavin Marshall</p>
<p>7 February 2012</p>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[Power, Propaganda, and Purpose in American Democracy]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/01/18/power-propaganda-and-purpose-in-american-democracy/</link>
<pubDate>Thu, 19 Jan 2012 02:34:46 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2012/01/18/power-propaganda-and-purpose-in-american-democracy/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[By: Andrew Gavin Marshall NOTE: The following article is the documented transcript from the second e]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>By: <a href="http://www.andrewgavinmarshall.com">Andrew Gavin Marshall</a></p>
<p><em>NOTE: The following article is the documented transcript from the second episode of a new podcast show, <a href="http://www.boilingfrogspost.com/tag/andrew-gavin-marshall/">&#8220;Empire, Power, and People with Andrew Gavin Marshall,&#8221;</a> hosted by <a href="http://www.boilingfrogspost.com">BoilingFrogsPost.com</a>. The information within the article is an extracted sample from a book being written and funded through <a href="http://www.thepeoplesbookproject.com">The People&#8217;s Book Project</a>.</em></p>
<p><a href="http://www.boilingfrogspost.com/2012/01/19/empire-power-and-people-with-andrew-gavin-marshall-episode-2/"><em>Listen to the podcast HERE.</em></a></p>
<p>One central facet to the development of the modern institutional society under which we live and are dominated today, was the redefining of the concept of ‘democracy’ that took place in the early 20<sup>th</sup> century. This immensely important discussion took place among the educated, elite intellectual class in the United States at that time, and the consequences of which were profound for the development of not only American society and democracy, but for the globalization that followed after World War II. The central theme that emerged was that in the age of ‘mass democracy’, where people came to be known as “the public,” the concept of ‘democracy’ was redefined to be a system of government and social organization which was to be managed by an intellectual elite, largely concerned with “the engineering of consent” of the masses in order to allow elite-management of society to continue unhindered.</p>
<p>The socio-economic and political situation of the United States had, throughout the 19<sup>th</sup> century, rapidly changed. Official slavery was ended after the Civil War and the wage-slave method of labour was introduced on a much wider scale; that is, the approach at which people are no longer property themselves, but rather lend their labour at minimal hourly wages, a difference equated with rental slavery versus owned slavery. While the system of labour had itself changed, the living conditions of the labourers did not improve a great deal. With Industrialization also came increased urbanization, poverty, and thus, social unrest. The 19<sup>th</sup> Century in the United States was one of near-constant labour unrest, social upheaval and a rapidly growing wealth divide. And it was not simply the lower labouring classes that were experiencing the harsh rigors of a modern industrial life. One social critic of the era, writing in 1873, discussed the situation of the middle class in America:</p>
<blockquote><p>Very few among them are saving money. Many of them are in debt; and all they can earn for years, is, in many cases, mortgaged to pay such debt&#8230; [We see] the unmistakable signs of their incessant anxiety and struggles to get on in life, and to obtain in addition to a mere subsistence, a standing in society&#8230; The poverty of the great middle classes consists in the fact that they have only barely enough to cover up their poverty&#8230; their poverty is felt, mentally and socially, through their sense of dependence and pride. They must work constantly, and with an angry sense of the limited opportunities for a career at their command.[1]</p></blockquote>
<p>As immigrants from Europe and Asia flooded America, a growing sense of racism emerged among the faltering middle class. This situation created enormous tension and unease among middle and working class Americans, and indeed, the industrialists who ruled over them. Yet many in the middle class viewed the lower class, which was increasingly rebellious, as well as the immigrant labourers – also quite militant – as a threat to their own standing in society. Instead of focusing primarily on the need for reorganization at the top of the social structure, they looked to the masses – the working people – as the greatest source of instability. Their approach was in attempting to preserve – or construct – a system beneficial to their own particular interests. Since the middle class survived on the backs of the workers, it was not in their interest as a class to support radical workers movements and revolutionary philosophies. Thus, while criticizing those at the top, the call came for ‘reform’, not revolution; for passive pluralism not democratic populism; for amelioration, not anarchy.</p>
<p>This is what became known as the ‘Progressive Movement’ in American history. Influential journalists became leading ‘Progressives,’ and prominent social thinkers and social critics began further analyzing and arming the journalists with reformist ideas. The middle class was itself a major audience for progressive journalists. They acknowledged the need for social change and reorganization, and pushed for a method of achieving such change through the rational approach of ‘social science’ and “social evaluation.”[2] One of these leading progressive journalists, Edward Bellamy, wrote a book in 1888, “Looking Backward,” in which he argued that, “it would be the force of public opinion – opinion bolstered by the instrument of reason – that would perform the task of remaking the world for the benefit of all humanity.” Thus, “an informed and intelligent ‘public’ would be the agency through which a new historical epoch would be initiated.”[3]</p>
<p>This progressive form of journalism came to be known as “muckraking,” a term coined by Teddy Roosevelt in 1906, as this reform-oriented investigative journalism “began to reshape the discourse of public life,” driven by increasing discontent over governmental and corporate corruption.</p>
<p>The notion of “the public” was born in the eighteenth century Enlightenment, fused with the notion that the public was a rational body of persons, able to comprehend, identify and organize facts, premised on – as philosopher Jürgen Habermas articulated – the “informed, literate men, engaged with one another in an ongoing process of ‘critical-rational’ debate.” Thomas Jefferson reiterated such notions, suggesting that, “the creed of our political faith” rested at “the bar of public reason.” Progressive journalism gave profound emphasis to the promotion of facts and “social documentation.”[4]</p>
<p>Mass circulation media had changed the nature of “the public” in the late 19<sup>th</sup> century. In particular, the newspaper industry grew, and like with other industries between the 1880s and World War I, “financial consolidation and technological innovation combined to alter the character and scale of big-city and small-town journalism,” as newspapers became big business. Thus, news was becoming ‘standardized,’ and the growth and business of magazine publishing followed suit.[5]</p>
<p>Yet, the proliferation of mass media was of a dual nature. While more people were able to gain access to more information from more places simultaneously, there was also the development of a trend in the emergence of a “public” increasingly defined as “spectators,” no longer active participants in the ‘public square,’ but observers from afar, in their geographically segregated middle class.[6]</p>
<p>As the first decade of the 20<sup>th</sup> century drew to a close, and World War I drew nearer, a new concern was increasingly developing among the ‘Progressive’ movement and its ideologues and journalists. While continuing to push for reform, there was a growing rumbling and sense of revolution brewing from below, among the working class people. This concern increasingly moved to the forefront among Progressive intellectuals, who saw their own class and social conceptions threatened by the grumbling masses trapped in poverty beneath them. Perhaps the most influential intellect of the early 20<sup>th</sup> century was a man named Walter Lippmann, a Harvard graduate who joined with Progressive publicists and had even joined the Socialist Party in 1910. By 1914, however, Lippmann had turned from his socialist inclinations, and wrote the well-received <em>Drift and Mastery</em>, which prompted Teddy Roosevelt to refer to Lippmann as “the most brilliant man of his age,” at just 25 years old. Lippmann’s principle concern was with the notion of the people ruling:</p>
<blockquote><p>Ongoing middle-class hostility toward big business – once understood as a constructive catalyst for social reform – had now become, to Lippmann’s increasingly conservative mind, an inadvertent stimulus of social disintegration. As attacks on the practices of big business mounted and an increasingly militant working-class movement challenged the very concept of privately held wealth, Lippmann became more and more alarmed&#8230; In a country once “notorious for its worship of success,” Lippmann wrote, public disfavor was being heaped “savagely upon those who had achieved it.”[7]</p></blockquote>
<p>Lippmann held the muckraking journalists increasingly responsible for this change on social perception, in which social unrest “threatened to spin out of control.” Lippmann described what he saw as an atmosphere of “accusation,” largely aimed at big business, which he viewed as “a collective psychological malady, a dangerous condition of paranoia, that, unless checked, posed a greater danger to society than the excesses of wealth.” Society was a pot on the verge of boiling over. As Lippmann wrote:</p>
<blockquote><p>The sense of conspiracy and secret scheming which transpire is almost uncanny. “Big Business,” and its ruthless tentacles, have become the material for the feverish fantasy of illiterate thousands thrown out of kilter by the rack and strain of modern life&#8230; all the frictions of life are readily ascribed to a deliberate evil intelligence, and men like Morgan and Rockefeller take on attributes of omnipotence, that ten minutes of cold sanity would reduce to a barbarous myth.[8]</p></blockquote>
<p>In 1909, President Theodore Roosevelt gave an interview with the <em>New Haven Register</em> in which he lamented that the excesses of big business, coupled with the challenge of muckraking journalism, was creating a deeply precarious situation, in which, “sooner or later, unless there is a readjustment, there will come a riotous wicked, murderous day of atonement.” Thus, a “search for order” had come to dominate the minds of the once-reformist intellectuals of the day. As Stewart Ewen wrote in his excellent book, <em>PR! A Social History of Spin</em>:</p>
<blockquote><p>Progressives looked for new strategies that might be employed to contain this impending social crisis. In this quest, a growing number turned toward the new ideas and techniques of the social sciences, hoping to discover foolproof instruments for diagnosing social problems and achieving social stability&#8230; To Lippmann and a growing number of others&#8230; the social sciences appealed less in their ability to create an informed public and more in their promise to help establish social control.[9]</p></blockquote>
<p>Lippmann felt that the “discipline of science” would need to be applied to democracy, and that, “social engineers, social scientists, armed with their emerging expertise, would provide the modern state with a foundation upon which a new stability might be realized.” Thus, explained Ewen:</p>
<blockquote><p>[N]ovel strategies of social management and the conviction that a technical elite might be able to engineer social order were becoming increasingly attractive&#8230; Accompanying a democratic current of social analysis that sought to educate the public at large, another – more cabalistic – tradition of social-scientific thought was emerging, one that saw the study of society as a tool by which a technocratic elite could help serve the interests of vested power.[10]</p></blockquote>
<p>One of the most important works of this period was the 1895 work by French social psychologist, Gustave Le Bon, <em>The Crowd: A Study of the Popular Mind</em>, in which he analyzed the changing nature of politics from being middle class oriented to transforming into popular democracy in which “the opinion of the masses” was becoming the most important opinion in society. Le Bon wrote that, “The destinies of nations are elaborated at present in the heart of the masses, and no longer in the councils of princes.” He lamented that, “the claims of the masses are becoming more and more sharply defined, and amount to nothing less than a determination to destroy utterly society as it now exists,” and that, “The divine right of the masses is about to replace the divine right of kings.” The “crowd,” postulated Le Bon, was only able to ‘react’ and was driven not by logic or reason, but by passion and emotion.[11]</p>
<p>An associate and friend of Le Bon’s, Gabriel Tarde, expanded upon this concept, and articulated the idea that “the crowd” was a social group of the past, and that “the public” was “the social group of the future.” The public, argued Tarde, was a “spiritual collectivity, a dispersion of individuals who are physically separated and whose cohesion is entirely mental.” Thus, Tarde identified in the growth of the printing press and mass communications, a powerful medium through which “the public” is shaped, and that, if managed appropriately, could bring a sense of order to a situation increasingly chaotic. The newspaper, Tarde explained, facilitated “the fusion of personal opinions into local opinions, and this into national and world opinion, the grandiose unification of the public mind.” A German sociologist named Ferdinand Tonnies argued that the newspaper became a channel through which one faction of society could “present its own will as the rational general will.” Thus, “objective reality” was in actuality, managed and controlled. The press, in this case, as the “organ of public opinion” could be a “weapon and tool in the hands of those who know how to use it and have to use it&#8230; It is comparable and, in some respects, superior to the material power which the states possess through their armies, their treasuries, and their bureaucratic civil service.”[12]</p>
<p>One of Walter Lippmann’s most influential teachers at Harvard, Graham Wallas, wrote that, “Organized Thought has become typical.” Thus, the idea of “the public” – malleable to suggestion, organized and controlled – came to manifest a type of ‘solution’ to the problem of “the crowd” – irrational, emotionally driven, and reactive. While the crowd was irrational, the ‘public’ could be reasoned with.[13]</p>
<p>One individual who was greatly influenced by these ideas was a man named Ivy Lee, a newspaperman who graduated from Princeton in 1898, and had come to offer his services to major industrial executives as one of the first corporate public relations practitioners. In 1916, he told a group of railroad executives that, “You suddenly find you are not running a private business, but running a business of which the public itself is taking complete supervision. The crowd is in the saddle, the people are on the job, and we must take consideration of that fact, whether we like it or not.” Thus, Lee felt that it was essential for the business community to “manufacture a commonality of interests between them and an often censorious public to establish a critical line of defense against the crowd.”[14]</p>
<p>Ivy Lee defined the job of public relations persons to that of a “news engineer,” and described himself as “a physician for corporate bodies.” The aim was to “supply news” to the press and the public so as to “understand better the soundness of a corporation’s policy or perspective.”[15]</p>
<p>One notable event was what came to be known as the Ludlow Massacre. The Colorado coal strike began in September 1913, in which roughly eleven thousand miners (mostly Greeks, Italians and Serbs) went on strike following the murder of one of their organizers. They went on strike against the Colorado Fuel &#38; Iron Corporation, which was owned by the Rockefeller family, and against their low pay, horrible living conditions, and the “feudal domination of their lives in towns completely controlled by the mining companies.” The strikers were immediately evicted from their shacks in the towns, and subsequently set up tent colonies, when the Rockefellers hired gunmen (using Gatling guns and rifles) to raid the tent colonies. The Colorado governor called out the National Guard (whose wages were paid by the Rockefellers), and raided the colonies. On 20 April 1914, the largest tent colony at Ludlow, housing over one thousand men, women and children, was machine gunned by the National Guard, with the strikers firing back. When the leader of the strike was called up to negotiate a truce, he was shot dead, and the machine gun fire continued, with the Guard moving in at nightfall to set fire to the tents. The following day it was discovered that one tent included the charred bodies of eleven children and two women. This became known as the Ludlow Massacre.[16]</p>
<p>The Rockefeller Foundation emerged in this era, and became immediately interested in the ‘construction of knowledge’ as a means to defending the interests of the Rockefeller Group and capitalist society as a whole. The Rockefeller Foundation secretary, Jerome Greene, identified “research and propaganda” as a means to quiet social and political unrest. It was felt that “public opinion on the labor question could be shaped through the foundation in order to counter leftist and populist attacks on both the Rockefeller business enterprises and on capitalism.”[17]</p>
<p>Following the Ludlow Massacre in 1914, a government commission – the Walsh Commission – was appointed to study the issue, and the Rockefeller Foundation began preparation for its own study.[18] As the Walsh Commission began their work, the Rockefeller Foundation sought to join forces with other major corporate leaders to advance their formation of ideology, and attended a conference “held between representatives of some of the largest financial interests” in the United States. This conference resulted in two approaches being pushed forward in terms of seeking to “educate the citizenry in procapitalistic ideology and thus relieve unrest.” One view was the interpretation that the public was provided with “poor quality of facts and interpretation available on social and economic issues.” Thus, they felt there was a need for a “publicity bureau” to provide a “constant stream of correct information” targeted at the lower and middle classes. However:</p>
<blockquote><p>The Rockefeller representatives at the conference proposed an alternative strategy of public enlightenment. Although they accepted the usefulness of such a publicity organization, they also wanted a permanent research organization to manufacture knowledge on these subjects. While a publicity organization would “correct popular misinformation,” the research institution would study the “causes of social and economic evils,” using its reputation for disinterestedness and scientific detachment to “obtain public confidence and respect,” for its findings. And, of course, the research findings could be disseminated through the publicity bureau as well as other outlets.[19]</p></blockquote>
<p>While the Rockefeller Foundation sought to manufacture ideology in response to the Ludlow Massacre and industrial relations in general, on the corporate side of the matter, the Rockefeller group employed the ideas of an emerging field of public relations, and specifically utilized the talent of Ivy Lee, one of the first PR men in America. Lee’s efforts were employed in “damage control” for the Rockefeller name, which was highly despised by the general public in the early 20<sup>th</sup> century. John D. Rockefeller, Jr. hired Ivy Lee on behalf of the Rockefellers to “secure publicity for their views.” What Lee did for the Rockefellers initially was to produce a series of circulars entitled, “Facts Concerning the Strike in Colorado for Industrial Freedom,” which were sent to “public officials, editors, ministers, teachers, and prominent professional and business men,” in an attempt “to cultivate middle-class allies.”[20]</p>
<p>Based around the concept that “truth happens to an idea” – a famous phrase of Ivy Lee’s – his bulletins were operating on the basis that “something asserted might become a fact, regardless of its connection to actual events.” As Lee explained to the Walsh Commission in 1915, in regards to his definition of ‘truth’: “By the truth, Mr. Chairman, I mean the truth about the operators’ case. What I was to do was to advise and get their case into proper shape for them.”[21] When asked the question, “What personal effort did you ever make to ascertain that the facts given to you by the operators [the Rockefeller group] were correct?,” Lee responded: “None whatever.” As Lee stated to a grouping of railroad executives in 1916:</p>
<blockquote><p>It is not the facts alone that strike the popular mind, but the way in which they take place and in which they are published that kindle the imagination&#8230; Besides, What is a fact? The effort to state an absolute fact is simply an attempt to&#8230; give you my interpretation of the facts.[22]</p></blockquote>
<p>With World War I, the term ‘propaganda’ became popularized and took on negative connotations. In 1917, President Woodrow Wilson established the U.S. Committee on Public Information (CPI) as a “vast propaganda ministry.” The aim of the CPI was to build support in the public for the war, and such an effort was especially challenging in the face of significant anti-war sentiments and potential resistance. This potential was especially ripe in immigrant communities, cramped in urban ghettos and lost to the failed promises of “opportunity” that drew them to America in the first place. Before U.S. involvement in the war, “working-class and radical organizations, pacifists, anarchists and many socialists, maintained that this was nothing but a ‘rich man’s war’.”[23]</p>
<p>It was not only in America that working class sentiments were extremely anti-war, but in Britain and other major nations as well. To add to this situation, in 1917, Russia was in the midst of revolution, leading to the exacerbation of fears on the part of many leading intellectuals and social analysts that revolution was possible anywhere. Thus, many of these analysts and intellectuals had begun lobbying President Wilson “for the establishment of an ideological apparatus that would systematically promote the cause of war. One of these analysts was Arthur Bullard, a leading Progressive, who had been a student of Wilson when the president had been a history professor at Princeton.” Bullard advocated a strong wave of publicity for the government in promoting the war, to “electrify public opinion.” Bullard thus suggested the formation of a “publicity bureau” for the government, “which would constantly keep before the public the importance of supporting the men at the front. It would requisition space on the front page of every newspaper; it would call for a ‘draft’ of trained writers to feed ‘Army stories’ to the public; it would create a Corps of Press Agents,” and to organize a propaganda campaign aimed at making the struggle “comprehensible and popular.”[24]</p>
<p>Walter Lippmann, who was the most respected and influential political thinker of that era, wrote a private letter to President Wilson supporting Bullard’s recommendation, adding that the chief aim of such an agency should be to promote a vision and advertise the war as seeking “to make a world that is safe for democracy.” According to Lippmann, war necessitated the nurturing of “a healthy public opinion.” The President asked Lippmann to develop a plan for the specifics of such an agency, for which Lippmann developed a grand strategic vision, mobilizing communications specialists, and the motion picture industry. Thus, in April of 1917, the Committee on Public Information (CPI) was formed, whose membership included the secretary of state, the secretary of war, and the secretary of the navy, as well as a civilian director, George Creel, a Progressive journalist. Creel, who had been central in the original generation of Progressive writers and publicists, had developed an extensive list of contacts and understood well “the importance of public opinion.” Thus, as Stuart Ewen wrote, “When war was declared, an impassioned generation of Progressive publicists fell into line, surrounding the war effort with a veil of much-needed liberal-democratic rhetoric.”[25]</p>
<p>As the concepts and ideas of “public opinion” and “mass democracy” emerged, the dominant political and social theorists of the era took to a debate on redefining democracy. Central to this discussion were the books and ideas of Walter Lippmann. With the concept of the “scientific management” of society by social scientists standing firm in the background, society’s problems were viewed as “technical problems” intended to be resolved through rational professionals and experts. Scientific Management, then, would be applied not merely to the Industrial factories to which the concept was introduced by Frederick Taylor, but to society as a whole. Lippmann took it upon himself to describe the role and means through which “Scientific Management” could be applied within an industrial democratic society. Lippmann felt that the notion of an “omnicompetent, sovereign citizen” was “a false ideal. It is unattainable. The pursuit of it is misleading. The failure to produce it has produced the current disenchantment.” Further, for Lippmann, society had gained “a complexity now so great as to be humanly unmanageable.” Thus, there was a need, wrote Lippmann, “for interposing some form of expertness between the private citizen and the vast environment in which he is entangled.” Just as with Frederick Taylor’s conception of “scientific management” of the factory, the application of this concept to society would require, in Lippmann’s words, “systematic intelligence and information control,” which would become “the normal accompaniment of action.” With such control, Lippmann asserted, “persuasion&#8230; become[s] a self-conscious art and a regular organ of popular government,” and the “manufacture of consent improve[s] enormously in technique, because it is now based on analysis rather than rule of thumb.”[26]</p>
<p>Thus, arose the panacea of propaganda: the solution to society’s ailments. “In a world of competing political doctrines,” wrote Lippmann, “the partisans of democratic government cannot depend solely upon appeal to reason or abstract liberalism.” Henceforth, “propaganda, as the advocacy of ideas and doctrines, has a legitimate and desirable part to play in our democratic system.” Harold Lasswell, a leading political scientist and communications theorist in the early 20<sup>th</sup> century, wrote that: “The modern conception of social management is profoundly affected by the propagandist outlook. Concerted action for public ends depends upon a certain concentration of motives&#8230; Propaganda is surely here to stay; the modern world is peculiarly dependent upon it for the co-ordination of atomized components in times of crisis and for the conduct of large scale ‘normal operations’.” In other words, propaganda is not merely a tool for times of war and crisis, but for times of peace and stability as well; that propaganda is the means and method through which to attain and maintain that stability. Lippmann added to the discussion that, “without some form of censorship, propaganda in the strict sense of the word is impossible. In order to conduct a propaganda there must be some barrier between the public and the event.”[27]</p>
<p>In 1922, Lippmann wrote his profoundly influential book, <em>Public Opinion</em>, in which he expressed his thoughts on the inability of citizens – or the public – to guide democracy or society for themselves. The “intellectuality of mankind,” Lippmann argued, was exaggerated and false. Instead, he defined the public as “an amalgam of stereotypes, prejudices and inferences, a creature of habits and associations, moved by impulses of fear and greed and imitation, exalted by tags and labels.”[28] Lippmann suggested that for the effective “manufacture of consent,” what was needed were “intelligence bureaus” or “observatories,” employing the social scientific techniques of “disinterested” information to be provided to journalists, governments, and businesses regarding the complex issues of modern society.[29] These essentially came to be known and widely employed as think tanks, the most famous of which is the Council on Foreign Relations, founded in 1921 and to which Lippmann later belonged as a member.</p>
<p>In 1925, Lippmann wrote another immensely important work entitled, <em>The Phantom Public</em>, in which he expanded upon his conceptions of the public and democracy. In his concept of democratic society, Lippmann wrote that, “A false ideal of democracy can lead only to disillusionment and to meddlesome tyranny,” and to prevent this from taking place, “the public must be put in its place&#8230; so that each of us may live free of the trampling and the roar of a bewildered herd.”[30] Defining the public as a “bewildered herd,” Lippmann went on to conceive of ‘public opinion,’ not as “the voice of God, nor the voice of society, but the voice of the interested spectators of action.” Thus, “the opinions of the spectators must be essentially different from those of the actors.” This new conception of society, managed by actors and not the “bewildered herd” of “spectators” would be constructed so as to subject the managers of society, wrote Lippmann, “to the least possible interference from ignorant and meddlesome outsiders.”[31] In case there was any confusion, the “bewildered herd” of “spectators” made up of “ignorant and meddlesome outsiders” is the public, is we, the people.</p>
<p>Edward Bernays, the nephew of Sigmund Freud and former member of Woodrow Wilson’s wartime propaganda machine, the Committee on Public Information (CPI), was another ‘actor’ who played his part in redefining democracy in the age of public opinion. In his 1923 book, <em>Crystallizing Public Opinion</em>, Bernays explained how the ideas of individuals could be shaped into mass opinions through the use of propaganda and ‘public relations.’ Known commonly as the “Father of Public Relations,” Bernays, returning from the post-War Paris Conference in 1919, believed quite strongly in the idea that if propaganda could be used effectively in times of war, it can and should be used effectively in times of peace.</p>
<p>In 1928, Edward Bernays wrote an article for the <em>American Journal of Sociology</em> entitled, “Manipulating Public Opinion: The Why and the How.” Public opinion, explained Bernays, “is the thought of a society at a given time toward a given object; broadly conceived, it is the power of the group to sway the larger public in its attitude.” Bernays was also influenced not simply by his own experiences in the wartime Committee on Public Information, but also by his uncle, Sigmund Freud’s ideas which regarded people as irrational and driven by subconscious emotional desires. With such a conception of the psychology of individuals and groups, Bernays and others felt that people must have their beliefs and opinions shaped by others, others who presumably are the exceptions to the rule regarding the emotionally driven irrational mind. Reflecting this belief, Bernays wrote: “Public opinion can be manipulated, but in teaching the public how to ask for what it wants the manipulator is safeguarding the public against his own possible aggressiveness.”[32] Today – claimed Bernays – the swaying of public opinion “is one of the manifestations of democracy that anyone may try to convince others and to assume leadership on behalf of his own thesis.”[33]</p>
<p>Bernays’ attempt to present the manipulation of public opinion as a “manifestation of democracy” crudely neglects the reality of those who have access to the apparatus and mechanisms that sway public opinion, itself. If that apparatus, which it largely is, is confined to the upper class of society, is that not a bastardization of democratic ideals? Bernays further explained:</p>
<blockquote><p>The manipulation of the public mind&#8230; serves a social purpose. This manipulation serves to gain acceptance for new ideas.[34]</p></blockquote>
<p>Bernays described the nature of propaganda, explaining that one major experiment on the manipulation of public opinion concluded that “attitudes were often created by a circumstance or circumstances of dramatic moment.” Thus, Bernays explained, “very often the propagandist is called upon to create a circumstance that will eventuate in the desired reaction on the part of the public he is endeavoring to reach.”[35] In other words: problem, reaction, solution. Create a problem to incur a specific reaction for which you provide a desired solution. For the propagandist, “analysis of the problem and its causes is the first step toward shaping the public mind on any subject.”[36] Bernays wrote:</p>
<blockquote><p>This is an age of mass production. In the mass production of materials a broad technique has been developed and applied to their distribution. In this age, too, there must be a technique for the mass distribution of ideas. Public opinion can be moved, directed, and formed by such a technique. But at the core of this great heterogeneous body of public opinion is a tenacious will to live, to progress, to move in the direction of ultimate social and individual benefit. He who seeks to manipulate public opinion must always heed it.[37]</p></blockquote>
<p>Bernays later wrote on the development of the public relations industry, of which he was a central and pioneering actor. “Public relations,” wrote Bernays, was “a relatively new profession, and its practitioner, the professional counsel on public relations, serve a constructive function in our complex, free society.” He elaborated: “public relations came about because organized activity, which depends on public support, needed a societal technician to counsel it – the counsel on public relations.” This, Bernays felt, was vital to a “democratic society”:</p>
<blockquote><p>New and faster means of communication and transportation furthered the growth of the profession. Social science research increased understanding of human behavior. The greater complexity of the society and the overlapping and interwoven network of communications that hold it together almost made the evolution of the new profession inevitable.[38]</p></blockquote>
<p>As Bernays explained, “[i]n a democratic society almost every activity depends on public understanding and support,” and thus, he concluded, this can only be brought about “by public education, persuasion, and suggestion by effective public relations. This profession makes it possible for minority ideas to be more readily accepted by the majority.” He referred to this as “the marketplace of ideas,” but neglected to explain that, like other markets, this one, too, is rigged. His conception of “democratic society” is very much an elitist view of democratic society, articulated best by Walter Lippmann in seeking to “engineer the consent” of the public, which was viewed as irrational and incapable of true democracy. Reflecting on his 1923 book, <em>Crystallizing Public Opinion</em>, Bernays discussed the concept of the “manufacture of consent,” a term coined by Walter Lippmann but which Bernays was eager to present as his own. He stated: “I refined the approach and called it the engineering of consent”:</p>
<blockquote><p>In the engineering of consent, determination of goals is subject to change after research about the relevant publics. Only after we know the state of public opinion through research can we be sure that our goals are realistic.[39]</p></blockquote>
<p>In 1947, Bernays re-examined his support for propaganda in a democratic society, writing that:</p>
<blockquote><p>Today it is impossible to overestimate the importance of engineering consent; it affects almost every aspect of our daily lives. When used for social purposes, it is among our most valuable contributions to the efficient functioning of modern society.[40]</p></blockquote>
<p>Naturally, it seems, “efficiency” is held in high regard as an objective of social planning and thus, an aim of society itself. As such, “effect” is often left by the wayside, as in: the <em>effect </em>of an “efficient” modern society is secondary to the actual <em>efficiency</em> of it. Thus, if the effect of a modern society is dehumanization, so long as that process is “efficient,” social planners may view it as desirable, present it as “functioning,” and see whatever means which bring it about as “valuable contributions.” But then, it must be conceded, the ‘desired effect’ for social planners is always social control. Regardless of the human or dehumanizing effects of such a system, if the result is “order and control,” and so long as this is achieved “efficiently,” the system functions well.</p>
<p>In 1928, Edward Bernays wrote a book entitled, <em>Propaganda</em>, which later became used by infamous propagandists such as Hitler’s propaganda chief, Joseph Goebbels. On the first page of his book, Bernays wrote, and it is worth quoting at some length:</p>
<blockquote><p>The conscious and intelligent manipulation of the organized habits and opinions of the masses is an important element in democratic society. Those who manipulate this unseen mechanism of society constitute an invisible government which is the true ruling power of our country.</p>
<p>We are governed, our minds molded, our tastes formed, our ideas suggested, largely by men we have never heard of. This is a logical result of the way in which our democratic society is organized. Vast numbers of human beings must cooperate in this manner if they are to live together as a smoothly functioning society.</p>
<p>Our invisible governors are, in many cases, unaware of the identity of their fellow members in the inner cabinet.</p>
<p>They govern us by their qualities of natural leadership, their ability to supply needed ideas and by their key position in the social structure. Whatever attitude one chooses toward this condition, it remains a fact that in almost every act of our daily lives, whether in the sphere of politics or business, in our social conduct or our ethical thinking, we are dominated by the relatively small number of persons&#8230; who understand the mental processes and social patterns of the masses. It is they who pull the wires which control the public mind, who harness old social forces and contrive new ways to bind and guide the world.[41]</p></blockquote>
<p>These ideas, among many others, have had incredible influence on the philosophy, actions, intentions, and perceptions of not only American society, but the world at large. They spurred on the development of the consumer society, along with other projects of social engineering that have, through the course of the 20<sup>th</sup> century, been focused on the application of social control. It is fundamentally though the notion of “engineering consent” that we have come to the point where so few are able to control so much, leaving little to nothing for the vast majority of the world’s people. This elite intellectual discussion which took place in the early 20<sup>th</sup> century came to define democracy not only for America, but the world as a whole. Thus, we have a new understanding when it comes to our leaders expressing their desires and objectives of spreading democracy around the world. In short, they seek to “engineer consent” on a much larger, grander scale than ever before imagined. It is the globalization of social engineering which we are witnessing in the modern era, and its origins lay in the discernable past.</p>
<p><em><a href="http://www.andrewgavinmarshall.com/">Andrew Gavin Marshall </a>is an independent researcher and writer based in Montreal, Canada, writing on a number of social, political, economic, and historical issues. He is also Project Manager of <a href="http://www.thepeoplesbookproject.com/">The People’s Book Project</a>. He is also the host of a podcast show, <a href="http://www.boilingfrogspost.com/tag/andrew-gavin-marshall/">“Empire, Power, and People”</a> in cooperation with <a href="http://www.boilingfrogspost.com/">BoilingFrogsPost.com</a>.</em></p>
<p><a href="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr?cmd=_s-xclick&#38;hosted_button_id=TW4E6EGUH5HZJ"><img src="https://www.paypal.com/en_US/i/btn/btn_donateCC_LG.gif" alt="" /></a></p>
<p><strong>Notes</strong></p>
<p>[1]            Stuart Ewen, <em>PR! A Social History of Spin</em> (New York: Basic Books, 1996), page 42</p>
<p>[2]            Ibid, pages 44-46.</p>
<p>[3]            Ibid, page 46.</p>
<p>[4]            Ibid, pages 49-50.</p>
<p>[5]            Ibid, pages 50-54.</p>
<p>[6]            Ibid, pages 58-59.</p>
<p>[7]            Ibid, pages 60-61.</p>
<p>[8]            Ibid, pages 62.</p>
<p>[9]            Ibid, pages 63-64.</p>
<p>[10]            Ibid, page 64.</p>
<p>[11]            Ibid, pages 64-66.</p>
<p>[12]            Ibid, pages 67-71.</p>
<p>[13]            Ibid, pages 71-73.</p>
<p>[14]            Ibid, pages 74-75.</p>
<p>[15]            Ibid, pages 76-78.</p>
<p>[16]            Howard Zinn, <em>A People’s History of the United States</em> (Harper Perennial: New York, 2003), pages 354-355.</p>
<p>[17]            Robert F. Arnove, ed., <em>Philanthropy and Cultural Imperialism: The Foundations at Home and Abroad</em> (Indiana University Press: Boston, 1980), page 67.</p>
<p>[18]            Ibid, page 68.</p>
<p>[19]            Ibid, pages 69-70.</p>
<p>[20]            Stuart Ewen, <em>PR! A Social History of Spin</em> (New York: Basic Books, 1996), page 78.</p>
<p>[21]            Ibid, page 79.</p>
<p>[21]            Ibid, pages 80-81.</p>
<p>[22]            Ibid, pages 104-105.</p>
<p>[23]            Ibid, pages 104-105.</p>
<p>[24]            Ibid, pages 106-107.</p>
<p>[25]            Ibid, pages 108-109.</p>
<p>[26]            Frank Webster and Kevin Robins, “Plan and Control: Towards a Cultural History of the Information Society,” <em>Theory and Society</em> (Vol. 18, 1989), pages 341-342.</p>
<p>[27]            Ibid, pages 342-343.</p>
<p>[28]            Sidney Kaplan, “Social Engineers as Saviors: Effects of World War I on Some American Liberals,” <em>Journal of the History of Ideas</em> (Vol. 17, No. 3, June 1956), pages 366-367.</p>
<p>[29]            Sue Curry Jansen, “Phantom Conflict: Lippmann, Dewey, and the Fate of the Public in Modern Society,” <em>Communication and Critical/Cultural Studies</em> (Vol. 6, No. 3, 2009), page 225.</p>
<p>[30]            Walter Lippmann, et. al., <em>The Essential Lippmann: A Political Philosophy for Liberal Democracy</em> (Harvard University Press, 1982), page 91.</p>
<p>[31]            Ibid, page 92.</p>
<p>[32]            Edward Bernays, “Manipulating Public Opinion: The Why and the How,” <em>American Journal of Sociology</em> (Vol. 33, No. 6, May 1928), page 958.</p>
<p>[33]            Ibid, page 959.</p>
<p>[34]            Ibid.</p>
<p>[35]            Ibid, pages 961-962.</p>
<p>[36]            Ibid, page 969.</p>
<p>[37]            Ibid, page 971.</p>
<p>[38]            Edward Bernays, “Emergence of the Public Relations Counsel: Principles and Recollections,” <em>The Business History Review</em> (Vol. 45, No. 3, Autumn 1971), page 296.</p>
<p>[39]            Ibid, page 297.</p>
<p>[40]            Edward Bernays, “The Engineering of Consent,” <em>Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science</em> (Vol. 250, Communication and Social Action, March 1947), page 115.</p>
<p>[41]            Edward Bernays, Propaganda (New York: Ig Publishing, 1928), page 37.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[A Brief Message for Humanity: We Want to be Free!]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/14/a-brief-message-for-humanity-we-want-to-be-free/</link>
<pubDate>Fri, 14 Oct 2011 22:33:03 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/14/a-brief-message-for-humanity-we-want-to-be-free/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[Can you hear it? Taste it? Smell it? See it? Touch it? &#8230; Can you feel it? The people of the wo]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Can you hear it? Taste it? Smell it? See it? Touch it? &#8230; Can you feel it? The people of the world are waking up, rising up, acting up, fed up, not giving up, but getting up, standing up, climbing up&#8230; looking up. Around the world, in every place, in every case, in every situation, circumstance, and altercation, the powers of our world, sitting firm in their positions, atop the institutions of our domination, proffering the ideas of our indoctrination, seek to confuse, divide, control, co-opt, crush, define, repress, overrun, undermine, and cause distress&#8230; to all those people, everywhere, who look forward with new eyes, crying out to the world, and in to themselves, “We want to be free!”</p>
<p>No cry, echoed through all eternity, ever carried such prominence, such eternal relevance and for all past and present circumstance. “We want to be free!”</p>
<p>No single idea, before or hereafter, has such enormous power, such overwhelming possibility, such unsurpassable resonance with the potential for such everlasting permanence. “We want to be free!”</p>
<p>From Tunisia, to Egypt, Iraq, Afghanistan, Somalia, Yemen, Palestine&#8230; to Greece, France, and Spain, Germany, England, Iceland, and Italy&#8230; across the lands of Asia, and the sea itself, to Canada, America (even the South)&#8230; Honduras, Chile, and Brazil, from Venezuela, Bolivia, Argentina, to the birthplace of humanity in that continent across the ocean, that great and wonderful landmass with those great and wonderful people in Africa. Everywhere, people cry out the same. “We want to be free!”</p>
<p>Everywhere, at all times and in all places, there are those among us, not separate, but indeed, very much human, who have lost their way, thrown their heart to the wind, love only themselves and their bank accounts, who seek to dominate, obfuscate, eradicate, the earth they plunder, and push the rest of us under, control, corrupt, and devastate. Their cause is profit and power, their means are deception and dehumanization, and yet their greatest weakness is their own deprivation, their disassociation, endless demoralization and reckless devastation. All they touch and control, has no warmth of heart, no hope of happiness, no joy of love like that which may be found in the smallest country, in the poorest village, with the poorest family, with the saddest story and the hardest life. For even in the greatest of tragedies, humans reach out to one another and find each other in their hearts and minds, hopes and dreams, actions and interactions.</p>
<p>Do not hate and despise those who sit above, in their towers of despair, in their prisons of profit, their cells of control, for they live, daily, paying the price for power. By segregating themselves from everyone else, they deprive themselves of all the humanity they can experience, learn, and love. Do not hate them, for they are weak and petty. Pity them for their self-isolation, love them for their human weakness, which we all share alike. Any such position of power can turn the most benevolent of beings into the most treacherous of tyrants. It is not the human which is depraved, but the society built up around us which makes the human depraved. Don’t hate the people, help the people! For they too, know not what freedom tastes, smells, sounds, looks and feels like. Let us show them the way, let all of us, together and forever, cry out, “We want to be free!”</p>
<p>Let them hear us, fear us, hate us, hurt us, push us, press us, crush us, curse us, and let them see us stand back on our feet, look above and beyond their petty positions, and again cry out, “We want to be free!” Let them see what humanity is capable of creating, instead of destroying. Let them see how humanity can cooperate, not segregate. Let them see, and tremble, and falter and fail, for when they come crashing down to the earth upon which we all stand, from which we all are provided our necessities of life, let us offer them a hand, lift them up, and join the call, “We want to be free!”</p>
<p>This is not the beginning of the end, this is the end of the beginning. This struggle will not be fought and won in the streets of New York, in the sands of the Middle East, in the mountains of Asia or the plains of Africa. This struggle will be fought and won inside every individual human being on this planet, in your heart and mind. But we come together, these new and wonderful days, to see and meet one another, as if for the first time, and to feel what it is to be ‘human’, to be standing side by side, crying out, “No more!” No more war, no more injustice, no more racism and militarism and hatred and dehumanization, no more plundering and destruction, no more segregation and isolation, no more empire and domination, no more institutions and executions, no more division and deprivation. No more. No more. We want to be free!</p>
<p>We want to be free!</p>
<p>We want to be free.</p>
<p>And so, some day, not today, perhaps not tomorrow, perhaps not this year or the next, perhaps not in my lifetime or those of all the rest, but some day&#8230; free, we will be. You can feel it, today, everywhere. Always. It’s within each of us and between all of us. It’s here, just see it, take it, and make it yours!</p>
<p>In our struggle for freedom, to throw off the chains that bind us, we become the idea that unites us. The very act of demanding and seeking freedom, requires all the efforts to release those chains and shackles which hold your mind in thinking that there is no way, no chance, no point. The very call, “We want to be free!” is an act of freedom. For all the institutions and ideas of power built up around us, individually and collectively, have been put there to prevent us from ever making such a call, from ever standing up against them, from ever speaking from our hearts and acting from our instincts.</p>
<p>If you want freedom, be freedom. The only way to get it, is to act like you already have it. And indeed, in truth, you do.</p>
<p>So stand, unite, and call out to the world as they call back to you, “We want to be free!”</p>
<p>And some day soon, so it will be.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[Don't Divide, UNITE! From Occupy Wall Street to Liberate the World]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/13/dont-divide-unite-from-occupy-wall-street-to-liberate-the-world/</link>
<pubDate>Thu, 13 Oct 2011 23:51:02 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/13/dont-divide-unite-from-occupy-wall-street-to-liberate-the-world/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[By: Andrew Gavin Marshall Having watched closely the development and rapid growth of the &#8216;Occu]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>By: Andrew Gavin Marshall</p>
<p>Having watched closely the development and rapid growth of the &#8216;Occupy&#8217; movement from when it began on Wall Street in September to its current global scope, where on October 15th it is expected to erupt in hundreds of cities around the world, there are various concerns and issues which I feel the need to discuss in a little more detail.</p>
<p>First, there is the very real threat of having the movement co-opted, whether by philanthropic foundations, political parties, NGOs, union reps or more likely, an amalgamation of them all simultaneously. This threat is present and pervasive. For those who ignore the potential of co-optation, the result can only be for the movement to be made ineffective for true change.</p>
<p>However, there is another threat, more subtle, and yet, even more damaging than co-optation. This threat comes from not only the movement, but the wider population itself. In a word: division. While closely following the developments in regards to politicians, philanthropists, and long sold-out activist organizations aligning with the movement in order to assert their authority over it, I have been even more disturbed by many reports, voices, criticisms, and perspectives of the wider alternative media and &#8216;awakening&#8217; population, particularly in the United States, but also elsewhere as the movement spreads. The easiest way for a movement to be co-opted is for the movement to first be divided against itself. So I would like to delve into a little more detailed observations on this issue.</p>
<p><strong>What is the threat of co-optation?</strong></p>
<p>I have written and spoken on this issue previously. I recently wrote an article entitled, &#8220;<a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/03/against-the-institution-a-warning-for-occupy-wall-street/">Against the Institution: A Warning for Occupy Wall Street</a>,&#8221; <strong></strong>in which I explained the methods through which co-optation takes place, as well as another article, &#8220;<a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/04/end-the-fed-but-dont-stop-there/">End the Fed&#8230; but don&#8217;t stop there!</a>&#8220;, in which I expressed support for the development of the Occupy the Fed movement, but warned against such a narrow focus, and finally, I did an interview with <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/07/video-occupy-wall-street-infiltration/">Russia Today</a> in which I warned about the potential for co-optation and methods to guard against it.</p>
<span class='embed-youtube' style='text-align:center; display: block;'><iframe class='youtube-player' type='text/html' width='420' height='315' src='http://www.youtube.com/embed/D983q4xOnZg?version=3&#038;rel=1&#038;fs=1&#038;showsearch=0&#038;showinfo=1&#038;iv_load_policy=1&#038;wmode=transparent' frameborder='0'></iframe></span>
<p>So, at the risk of repeating myself, I will just quickly summarize my points here.</p>
<p>Co-optation is the process whereby established, institutional powers join a movement with the intent to direct the movement into an area which is &#8216;safe&#8217; for the institutional elite. The &#8216;institutional elite&#8217; (or global and national elite, if you prefer), are those who own, direct, control, fund, and steer the various institutions and dominant ideologies of our world, including (but not limited to): corporations, international organizations, the State, education, psychiatry, the media, political parties, NGOs, philanthropic foundations, think tanks, the military, intelligence, central banks and private banks.</p>
<p>Principally, co-optation of social movements is made most effective through the efforts of philanthropic foundations. Foundations (most notably the Carnegie, Ford, and Rockefeller Foundations) were created in the early 20th century with a dual purpose: to create consensus among the elites (through the formation of ideology, think tanks, shaping the educational system, etc), and more importantly, the engineering of consent (also through education, as well as facilitating the rise of the consumer society, constructing ideology, organizing Non-governmental organizations &#8211; NGOs &#8211; and directing social movements). When money from a foundation enters a social movement, it has several effects. Often, the movement may start out as or be organically developing into a radical movement aimed at altering the actual social structure &#8211; or system &#8211; of which the philanthropists themselves sit atop. Philanthropic foundations were founded by and are still run by bankers, industrialists, the heads of universities, think tanks, and other social and cultural leaders.</p>
<p>When the money from a foundation enters a social movement, it begins to organize the movement. It removes the radical concepts (or demands) and begins to organize around what they consider &#8220;acceptable&#8221; demands, which are those which promote &#8220;reform&#8221; (not revolution), which can be enacted through legislation. The funding helps create activist organizations, NGOs, non-profits and lobbying groups. Those within the movement who promote the reformist and legalistic &#8220;demands&#8221; are then elevated into leadership positions through foundation funding. Those who are radical may even be tempted into such positions with the hope and promise of &#8220;making change.&#8221; Thus, the foundations &#8216;professionalize&#8217; the movement. The leaders direct organizations, sit over large budgets, and have comfortable salaries. They are invited to international conferences of NGOs, corporations, international organizations, and governments. Their purpose is to &#8220;speak for the people&#8221; in such meetings, but by being professionalized in such a way, they are removed from the people. In fact, their new-found personal wealth, status, respect, and &#8216;inclusion&#8217; into the global institutional structure makes them dependent upon that very structure and system for their own well-being and sense of self-worth. Thus, they will only pursue &#8220;reformist&#8221; and &#8220;legalistic&#8221; changes to the system, never radical or revolutionary, as they are now personally dependent upon that system. The foundations will integrate the movements with particular NGOs, other activist organizations, and particular political parties, which will then &#8220;take on the agenda&#8221; (albeit the heavily &#8220;reformist&#8221; agenda) of the movement, create legislation, and seek &#8220;change&#8221; from within the system.</p>
<p>Ultimately, the result is that the movement is made ineffective. Reforming the system is akin to rearranging the deck-chairs on the Titanic. However, while often creating seemingly benevolent changes, the effects are subtle, yet severe. By turning a potentially radical movement into a reformist co-opted movement, through the effective seclusion of the radical and revolutionary elements and ideas of the movement, the mass of the people behind it are mobilized behind the reformist agenda. As legislation is passed, &#8220;causes&#8221; promoted, political parties participating, and media attention growing, the movement loses its steam and becomes complacent. The legislation addresses their &#8220;demands,&#8221; and now that the &#8220;professional&#8221; and &#8220;organized&#8221; movement has taken up the cause, the people can go back to sleep and feel comfortable in that they were a part of some effort at &#8220;change.&#8221; However, by promoting change within the system, instead of creating a new social, political, and economic reality, the changes themselves are ineffective. This is because the fundamental problem, whether the issue is racism, economic exploitation, poverty, war, empire, austerity, tyranny, exclusion, discrimination, and political oppression, the problem rests in the ideas and institutions of power. If the institutional system itself is not addressed as <strong>THE</strong> problem, no alterations to that system will sufficiently address the particular concern of the activists and social movements.</p>
<p>I have begun <a href="http://www.facebook.com/pages/STOP-Co-Optation-of-the-Occupy-Movement/170967829654210">a Facebook page</a> to promote the issues and make others aware of the threat of co-optation. Please &#8220;like&#8221; the page, share ideas, issues, articles, videos, and concerns (as well as SOLUTIONS!) to help <a href="http://www.facebook.com/pages/STOP-Co-Optation-of-the-Occupy-Movement/170967829654210">stop co-optation</a>!</p>
<p><strong>Solidarity or Co-optation?</strong><br />
In regards to the Occupy Movement, the unions in the United States and elsewhere began showing support and solidarity with the movement, marching with them, and speaking out in favour of their causes. One of the effects this has had has been for those on the right, or the more libertarian social movements, to demonize the Occupy movement, or for those critical of co-optation to decry the movement as &#8220;controlled.&#8221; Even in my warnings against co-optation, I have mentioned the threat from unions, which has led many on the left to criticize me.</p>
<p>Thus, I feel it is important to differentiate between solidarity and co-optation. Solidarity implies a type of social empathy, in seeing how the cause or struggles of one movement or people is the cause and struggle of your own movement or people. Solidarity is an incredibly important and necessary development, especially in the context of today&#8217;s globalized world. Solidarity allows for people the world over to understand and believe that the struggle of one person is the struggle of all people in all places, and indeed it is. Thus, solidarity, no matter with whom, should not be shunned. There is, however, a fine line between solidarity and co-optation.</p>
<p>Co-optation emerges when those who declare solidarity then begin to speak &#8220;for&#8221; the movement, assume leadership positions within the movement, promote their particular agendas as the agendas of the entire movement, and effectively steer it into directions which they desire. This process must be guarded against.</p>
<p>Now, on unions specifically, there are some things to keep in mind. Historically, as unions began to rapidly emerge in the 19th century in America, the entire century was marked with labour struggles, worker uprisings, protests, activists, and rebellion. At that time, especially in the latter half of the 19th century, the unions were largely organizing against the Robber Baron industrialists and bankers, such as JP Morgan, John D. Rockefeller, Harriman, Carnegie, Astor, and Vanderbilt. The protests and rebellions were often repressed brutally by state police or even the national guard, often demanded and paid for by those very industrialists and bankers. Interesting to note that the NYPD, which has been repressing the Occupy Wall Street movement, received<a href="http://www.jpmorganchase.com/corporate/Home/article/ny-13.htm?TB_iframe=true&#38;height=580&#38;width=850"> a $4 million donation from JP Morgan Chase</a>. Funny how some things never change.</p>
<p>At that time, the unions were incredibly radical, often socialist, communist, or anarchistic. They presented a major threat to the established power, and so the 20th century saw the development of new institutions and ideas to properly manage a disgruntled populace and radical social movements. It was in this context, in the early 20th century, in which the working class and lower classes were increasingly radical, and the middle class was increasingly anti-capitalist and distrustful of the banking and industrial elite, that we saw the emergence of philanthropic foundations and public relations. In turn, both the fields of public relations and the foundations helped facilitate the development of the &#8216;consumer culture&#8217; in America, with the aim, as one banker with Lehman Brothers, Paul Mazer said, &#8220;We must shift America from a needs- to a desires-culture.&#8221; The bankers funded the entertainment industry, Hollywood, Times Square, advertising, and the development of department stores; the foundations helped create credit unions to allow middle class people to borrow in order to finance consumption, and public relations put a new face on corporate America and made consumption the past-time of the middle class. The aim was to separate the middle class from the working class, which were in the context of the late 19th and early 20th century, becoming dangerously close to uniting against the common enemy (the system itself).</p>
<p>The most influential political theorist of the era, Walter Lippmann (the Zbigniew Brzezinski of his era), articulated the need for the &#8220;engineering of consent&#8221; among the majority of people, so that society may be ordered and controlled from above, while the desires of the lower classes were created and amused by the true ruling powers. Edward Bernays, the &#8220;father of public relations,&#8221; wrote in his 1928 book, &#8220;Propaganda&#8221;:</p>
<blockquote><p>The conscious and intelligent manipulation of the organized habits and opinions of the masses is an important element in democratic society. Those who manipulate this unseen mechanism of society constitute an invisible government which is the true ruling power of our country. &#8230;We are governed, our minds are molded, our tastes formed, our ideas suggested, largely by men we have never heard of. This is a logical result of the way in which our democratic society is organized. Vast numbers of human beings must cooperate in this manner if they are to live together as a smoothly functioning society. &#8230;In almost every act of our daily lives, whether in the sphere of politics or business, in our social conduct or our ethical thinking, we are dominated by the relatively small number of persons&#8230;who understand the mental processes and social patterns of the masses. It is they who pull the wires which control the public mind.</p></blockquote>
<p>The elite, it can be said, were highly effective in dividing the working class and poor from the middle class. The middle class became dependent upon the system for a particular standard of living (defined by the ability to consume). Radical ideologies were then increasingly made irrelevant, demonized, and erased from the political consciousness. Any criticism of the system was then easily lopped into the category of the &#8220;Red Menace&#8221; of Communism, a boogeyman which still apparently exists for many right-leaning populations.</p>
<p>While the unions began as radical and indeed, revolutionary entities, this is not what they are today. The unions exist as they are, and are only able to be present in today&#8217;s institutional system, by having made the decisions to cooperate with big business and big government, and simply promote minor reforms and critiques to the system. They claim to speak for the workers of the world, but increasingly, especially since the emergence of the neoliberal era, they have come to consistently sell-out the workers. Throughout the Third World, as the neoliberal &#8220;Washington Consensus&#8221; was spread by the IMF and World Bank as a result of the 1980s debt crisis, union reps were bought off by government and business interests, made their pockets full while stabbing the workers in the back.</p>
<p>In regards to the Occupy Movement, solidarity with unions is not a bad thing. Here&#8217;s why: solidarity does not imply unions co-opting the movement (that must be prevented), but it does imply a solidarity with workers. Indeed, workers in America and around the world have suffered much more at the result of decisions and actions by banks, corporations, and governments than the middle class have. But solidarity with a growing and global movement is important, because so long as the movement remains grassroots, or seeks to promote its grassroots and radical potential, the movement can itself be an example for the workers and unions to return to their radical roots. Lead by example!</p>
<p>This seemingly reflexive impulse to simply denounce the entire movement the moment an organization, individual, or idea one does not agree with associates itself with the movement is the height of ignorance. Solidarity with workers and unions is important and necessary. But, if leadership in the movement develops (as it tends to with all social movements), let it develop organically from among the people, let it remain radical and revolutionary, and let it lead those it stands in solidarity with by showing them the way forward to grassroots, globalized, revolutionary social movements.</p>
<p><strong>Destroyed From Within</strong></p>
<p>This hits on another major issue, that of internal and external divisions. In this era, in the midst of the Technological Revolution providing more information and easier global communication than ever before in human history, people have the capacity to come together, to organize, unite, become activated and educated, and seek and promote change together, around the world. This is unprecedented in human history. A totally unique position for humanity to be in, and the greatest opportunity for true liberation humanity has ever had. Let&#8217;s not screw this up!</p>
<p>What I am referring to is that even for all the very real threats of institutional co-optation, we the people, seem to be doing a pretty good job of making the movement ineffective before the elite even have a chance to.</p>
<p>Unfortunately, one of the methods through which the movement is becoming divided is in regards to those who see a threat of co-optation. This is largely done through the alternative media and various social critics and activists. While keeping an eye out for the institutions and individuals commonly associated with co-optation, the moment that politicians, activist organizations, philanthropists or <strong></strong>others show &#8220;solidarity&#8221; with the movement, many critical observers simply denounce the movement as &#8220;co-opted,&#8221; as in: it&#8217;s a done deal, party&#8217;s over, it&#8217;s &#8220;controlled&#8221; and it&#8217;s all a conspiracy! Go home, give up, the end.</p>
<p>Here is why this is an awful position to take: it becomes a self-fulfilling prophecy. If one sees the sharks circling and yells, &#8220;It&#8217;s over, jump in the water and get it over with!&#8221; one may forget that there is still a paddle in the boat. There is still hope. But for the boat to get to shore, attention must be called to the sharks, and those who call attention to the risks, may help steer it best to safety. If those who see the risks inherent simply then jump off the boat, the others remain unaware of those risks, and the boat will likely sink amidst the swarm of sharks. Instead, the movement needs the critical voices, those who see and seek to avoid co-optation. These voices are needed to help mobilize the movement away from co-optation. After all, while the sharks may be circling, we have a much better chance together than alone.</p>
<p>So, to those who denounce the movement as already co-opted and controlled, I have this to say: is it not better to see the problems and make others aware so that they may be avoided, rather than denounce the entire movement, isolate yourself from it, and them from you? After all, once you segregate yourself from the movement, you segregate your ideas from the movement. The most unfortunate aspect of this is that in diversity, there is strength. Diversity of ideas and beliefs is a great thing. The power of uniting regardless of these diversities, and in fact, because of them, is the only way forward.</p>
<p>The elite are constantly engaged in attempting to establish consensus, work together, create common ideology, establish mutual interests, and implement coordinated action. This is their strength. And I am not talking about political parties, Republican and Democrat, they are a sideshow developed for popular consumption, just like Hollywood. The elite &#8211; the true rulers of our world &#8211; constantly and often effectively seek to establish consensus in ideas and action. Yet, we the people, tend to actively engineer divisions and segregation. This is our GREATEST weakness. The elite love this. They love it especially because it does not even require their active participation. We can do it all on our own!</p>
<p>Examples of this in regards to the Occupy movement are as follows: I have seen articles and comments, blogs and alternative news, critics and dissenters, who denounce or decry the movement because there are &#8220;socialists,&#8221; &#8220;communists,&#8221; &#8220;anarchists,&#8221; or that the movement is &#8220;anti-Capitalist,&#8221; and thus, a &#8220;communist conspiracy by bankers.&#8221; <em>Because the movement does not articulate MY specific ideas, the movement is therefore irrelevant and controlled. The movement decries Wall Street, and not the Fed, therefore it is controlled and co-opted! The Fed is the problem, not Wall Street!</em> &#8230; These are very common denunciations of the movement.</p>
<p>Well, for those who focus on the Federal Reserve: indeed, the Federal Reserve is one of the MAIN problems, and in fact, the global central banking system itself. However, I find myself confused by those who seem to have enough knowledge of the Fed to know that it &#8220;needs to go,&#8221; but then state that &#8220;Wall Street is not the problem.&#8221; My confusion is this: Wall Street owns the Fed. The Federal Reserve System, composed of 12 regional Fed banks, which are themselves private banks, the most powerful of which is the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, are controlled by the banks. <a href="http://www.newyorkfed.org/aboutthefed/org_nydirectors.html">The board of directors of the NY Fed</a> includes Jamie Dimon, the CEO of JP Morgan Chase. JP Morgan Chase is one of the principal shareholders in the New York Fed, as are the other major Wall Street banks. Thus, Wall Street owns and runs the Fed for the benefit of the Wall Street banks. So, those who claim we should focus on the Fed and not Wall Street are missing the critical point: they are almost identical, represent the same interests, work to the same ends, and are so heavily integrated that we should be against both (not to mention all other institutions of power).</p>
<p>In fact, many of those who claim that the Fed is the problem and the movement is controlled had themselves for years been highly critical of Wall Street. Yet, it seems, that as soon as others are critical of the same institution, but articulate different philosophies, they are wrong, the movement is controlled, and they are protesting against the wrong things. This creates needless divisions. Instead, would it not be more effective to join the movement and seek to educate the mass of the movement about the Federal Reserve System, instead of denouncing them simply for not knowing? After all, by denouncing them, you segregate yourself and your ideas from the movement. Subsequently, you complain that the movement doesn&#8217;t share your ideas, and is therefore wrong and controlled. It&#8217;s a self-fulfilling prophecy.</p>
<p>It must be understood that the majority of the Occupy movement is made up of students and average people, hurt by the economic crisis, or disturbed by the declining social conditions, the political apathy to make change, and the general dissatisfaction with the status quo, These are reasonable things to make people active and motivated. Do not expect the majority of these people to be as &#8216;aware&#8217; of the large plethora of issues at hand, or to understand the system as well as those who have made a living out of studying it. I have seen footage from the movement where protesters denounce Wall Street and in the same breath endorse Obama. It&#8217;s absurd, yes, Obama is a Wall Street product (much like a derivative!), but don&#8217;t denounce the entire movement as a result. Instead, should we not seek to educate, engage, and interact with those people in the hopes of enlarging their perspective? But then, it is always much easier to denounce, disregard, and dismiss than it is to engage, participate, and integrate. What we may not realize is that dismissal only segregates our ideas and analysis from the wider population.</p>
<p><strong>This is an Opportunity! Don&#8217;t Ignore it, Take it!</strong></p>
<p>All too often we miss the forest for the trees. We so easily segregate ourselves from one another, as opposed to uniting together. We see the superiority of our own ideas, and demonize all others. Passive observation is always so much easier than active participation. The notion that libertarians have nothing to learn from socialists is as absurd as the notion that socialists have nothing to learn from libertarians. Yet, both groups so often demonize one another, and always keep each other at a distance, segregated, divided, and thereby both sides of the spectrum become ineffective. Both demonize each other based upon false conceptualizations of each philosophy. Socialists, and for that matter, many on the left, identify libertarians with neoliberalism, and thus, as part of the problem, as the status quo itself. Libertarians, for their part, see socialists as absolute Marxist Communists and, many on the right as well, tend to associate socialism with Communist China, the Soviet Union, or North Korea, and therefore they see socialists as wanting to destroy all individuality and freedom in favour of the all-encompassing power of &#8216;the State.&#8217; This division was not always present, and it&#8217;s time it is relegated to the dustbin of history. We cannot move forward lest we move forward together.</p>
<p>There is, however, a philosophy which is known almost paradoxically as &#8220;Libertarian Socialism.&#8221; One would find this an absurd oxymoron, but it is an actual philosophy. It is often interchangeable with the term &#8220;anarchism.&#8221; Anarchism itself is perhaps the most effectively demonized and dismissed political philosophy, as well as the most misunderstood, not to mention the one with the most potential to unite the masses of people. It is an incredibly diverse philosophy, not dogmatic or strict, but incredibly all encompassing. Anarchism is simply the belief in human freedom being the necessary condition for human happiness, and that it is institutions of authority which make humanity depraved, violent, corrupt, and controlled. Anarchists have presented the most authoritative critique of the state, as well as various institutions of power. It&#8217;s origins and developments can be found in ancient Chinese Taoism, and it emerged as a distinct philosophy organically in several different civilizations, eras, and ideas: in ancient China, Rome, Greece, early Christianity, Medieval Europe, <strong></strong>and the word &#8220;anarchist&#8221; first was used to describe a philosophical position in the 19th century, with philosophers like William Godwin, Pierre-Joseph Proudhon, Mikhail Bakunin, Peter Kropotkin, Leo Tolstoy, and into the 20th century with theorists like Emma Goldman and many others. In fact, it was the anarchist philosopher, Bakunin, who presented the greatest challenge to Karl Marx at the First International, as Marx sought to (and ultimately did) have Bakunin and the anarchists sidelined and made irrelevant in the Socialist International. Bakunin, for his part, predicted that Marxism is too authoritarian, as it would use the state to establish a dictatorship, and that if ever attempted, it would establish a &#8220;Red bureaucracy&#8221; all the more tyrannical than the government it was supposed to replace. Of course, Bakunin was correct in predicting this, but we don&#8217;t commonly learn about philosophers or philosophies which are accurate, that might have the undesired side effect of educating us.</p>
<p>Instead, we hear the word &#8220;anarchism&#8221; and think of violence, lawlessness, chaos, disorder, and primitive nature. Anarchism is in fact about the triumph of individuality, and the necessity of community; that the individual is best supported through communal ties. The promotion of absolute freedom from all structures of authority, along with a stressing of individuality (and with it, ingenuity and creativity), as well as the importance of community and interaction, has allowed this philosophy to attract communists, socialists, liberals, conservatives, and libertarians. In fact, it has allowed for mutual cooperation across the spectrum, for anarchism does not sit upon the left/right paradigm, but rather upon the freedom/tyranny paradigm. It is able to remove socialism and communism from authoritarian elements (which promote the state), and is also able to remove libertarianism from its arch-capitalist concepts which promote corporations and banks at the behest of the rest. Anarchism is capable of mixing the &#8216;free market&#8217; ideals of libertarians with the social principles of socialists.</p>
<p>I stress this point simply to press the idea that there is mutual ground upon which the left and right are able to unite, to come together, act together, and learn from one another. I comfortably place myself within the anarchist philosophy largely because it is not dogmatic. For many years, I struggled to define my own views: I was neither conservative nor liberal, I identified with many social principles of socialists, yet was attracted to the freedom-promoting ideals of libertarians. I felt that Marxist analysis had much to offer, but I had great distaste for its proffered solutions. Through my own individual research on a wide range of subjects, I came to see not capitalism as the problem, nor the state as the sole problem. The problem then, I found, was that I was expected to identify &#8220;one&#8221; cause of all problems, and therefore, take &#8220;one&#8221; stance, and offer &#8220;one solution.&#8221; I could not do this. I found interesting and indeed important ideas in a wide array of philosophies, theories, critiques and concepts, but could not adhere to &#8220;one.&#8221; Rather, I would seek to take the ideas I liked from each, remove those I didn&#8217;t, and throw them together to form my own perspective as a kind of &#8220;hodge podge&#8221; philosophy. The result, was that I tended to identify the concept of power centralization itself as the issue: the notion of ideas and institutions of power depriving individuals and the collective of humanity the power of self-determination. When I quite literally stumbled into some anarchist philosophy, I realized that this concept has been articulated for thousands of years, developed organically by many civilizations, cultures, religions, and individuals. Known as different things at different times, it all tended to fall under the umbrella of anarchism, and what a wide, all-encompassing umbrella it is. What other philosophy could you have such variations of ideas so as to include what are known as &#8220;anarcho-communists&#8221; and &#8220;anarcho-Capitalists,&#8221; and that they may have such common ground to stand upon?</p>
<p><strong>Diversity is Strength</strong></p>
<p>Do not fear different ideas, radical concepts, or foreign philosophies. Engage, learn, teach, debate, articulate, DE-segregate, include, interact, unify, energize, challenge yourself and others, develop and grow. We do not all need to have ONE opinion, ONE idea, ONE solution. All we need is ONE reason to unite, yet we all too often overlook that very blatant, obvious reason to find many reasons for which we can divide. All it takes is one reason to unite, very simple: we are all in this together. That&#8217;s it! All the rest is salad dressing. We are all in this little world together. You don&#8217;t have to like every idea or every other person, you don&#8217;t have to think the same or act the same or dress the same or believe the same, all you have to do is be aware that we are, all of us, here on this little planet together. That realization makes it necessary that we begin to find common ground to stand on. This does not mean we need to have ONE idea, for once we have one dogmatic concept, it becomes institutionalized and corrosive and destructive.</p>
<p>Diversity is strength.</p>
<p>It amazes me, how in doing my own research for several years now, I find myself feeling so secure, so determined and even stubborn on the &#8216;correctness&#8217; or &#8216;righteousness&#8217; of a particular idea or understanding I have come to embrace. And then&#8230; I do more research, discover more things, delve into more history, more philosophy, more ideas, more analysis&#8230; and suddenly, I have to challenge all my preconceived notions and beliefs. Suddenly, I have to refine all my &#8220;correct&#8221; ideas to become &#8220;more correct.&#8221; And then, like it says on your bottle of conditioner, &#8220;rinse, repeat.&#8221; The one thing I have come to stop being surprised by, is that I am constantly surprised. My own beliefs, ideas, understanding and philosophy is in a constant state of growth, as I am in a constant state of learning. And yet, every time I come to some new conclusion, it seems as if my mind says, &#8220;Well then, that&#8217;s it, I&#8217;ve got it&#8230; now I&#8217;m done&#8230; right?&#8221; And then, I happen across some new subject, some new idea, or issue&#8230; and &#8220;rinse, repeat.&#8221;</p>
<p>We must learn to all put aside our inherent biases, to engage with our own knowledge, but with the acceptance that we have more to learn from others. Because, we do! Whether or not you believe it, we do. And we won&#8217;t ever move forward in this world unless we move forward together. The elite know this. They have always known this since ancient times. That is why elites seek to divide and conquer. But the system that has developed up and around humanity for the several thousand years of our existence on this little planet has become so ingrained in the human conception of itself that we no longer require the elite to divide us, we do such a good and effective job of it ourselves!</p>
<p>Humanity must mature from its adolescent stage of development where we have authority figures telling us how to dress, what to think, where to go and what to do. It&#8217;s time humanity becomes an &#8216;adult.&#8217; In short, we need to grow up! Put aside the petty differences which do us no good, find our common ground to stand on, and move forward together.</p>
<p>The funny thing is, once we are capable of doing that, the elite become a sideshow. When we do that, we realize that the elite are always a sideshow. They become totally irrelevant, archaic, and useless. To change the world, we must change our selves. The true revolution requires no seizure of power or usurpation of the state. The true revolution is a philosophical revolution, fought and won internally. The growing and developing global protest Occupy Movement is an important step in establishing global solidarity, in truly experiencing the &#8216;power&#8217; of individuals when they come together, in understanding that we are all indeed, together.</p>
<p>If the movement becomes a truly effective engine for change, it will have to promote solidarity with all peoples and groups all over the world, it will not demand anything of institutions and power structures, but demand change only of itself, and as such, seek to forge cooperation, education, understanding, and actively create new ideas and a new social reality.</p>
<p>If it is to be truly effective, not only must it guard against institutional co-optation, but it must more so guard against internal divisions and segregation. Whether the movement isolates itself from others, or others isolate themselves from the movement, the effect is the same.</p>
<p>But always remember&#8230;</p>
<p><strong>Diversity is Strength!</strong></p>
<p>Andrew Gavin Marshall is an <a href="www.andrewgavinmarshall.com">independent researcher and writer</a> and is Project Manager of <a href="http://www.thepeoplesbookproject.com">The People&#8217;s Book Project</a>.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[VIDEO: Occupy Wall Street Infiltration? ]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/07/video-occupy-wall-street-infiltration/</link>
<pubDate>Fri, 07 Oct 2011 19:32:16 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/07/video-occupy-wall-street-infiltration/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[My latest interview with RT, in which I discuss the issue of the potential for Occupy Wall Street to]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>My latest interview with RT, in which I discuss the issue of the potential for Occupy Wall Street to be infiltrated, co-opted and controlled, and what could be done to prevent this, both in terms of ideas and action.</p>
<span class='embed-youtube' style='text-align:center; display: block;'><iframe class='youtube-player' type='text/html' width='420' height='315' src='http://www.youtube.com/embed/D983q4xOnZg?version=3&#038;rel=1&#038;fs=1&#038;showsearch=0&#038;showinfo=1&#038;iv_load_policy=1&#038;wmode=transparent' frameborder='0'></iframe></span>
<p>Please help prevent co-optation of the Occupy Movement. Join the &#8220;STOP Co-Optation&#8221; facebook page, discuss ideas, promote information, and share with friends!</p>
<p><a href="http://www.facebook.com/pages/STOP-Co-Optation-of-the-Occupy-Movement/170967829654210">STOP Co-Optation of the &#8216;Occupy&#8217; Movement</a></p>
<p>For more on this subject, see:</p>
<p><a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/03/against-the-institution-a-warning-for-occupy-wall-street/">Against the Institution: A Warning for Occupy Wall Street</a></p>
<p><a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/04/end-the-fed-but-dont-stop-there/">End the Fed&#8230; but don&#8217;t stop there!</a></p>
<p><a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/09/20/a-revolutionary-idea-for-a-revolutionary-time-a-plan-of-action-for-the-global-political-awakening/">A Revolutionary Idea for a Revolutionary Time: A Plan of Action for the Global Political Awakening</a></p>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[VIDEO: Make Revolution, Not Reform: A Warning to the 'Occupy' Movement]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/04/video-make-revolution-not-reform-a-warning-to-the-occupy-movement/</link>
<pubDate>Tue, 04 Oct 2011 19:23:05 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/04/video-make-revolution-not-reform-a-warning-to-the-occupy-movement/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[For more information, see: &#8220;End the Fed… but don’t stop there!&#8221; &#8220;Against the Insti]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<span class='embed-youtube' style='text-align:center; display: block;'><iframe class='youtube-player' type='text/html' width='640' height='390' src='http://www.youtube.com/embed/oneVFYeMHjU?version=3&#038;rel=1&#038;fs=1&#038;showsearch=0&#038;showinfo=1&#038;iv_load_policy=1&#038;wmode=transparent' frameborder='0'></iframe></span>
<p>For more information, see:</p>
<p><a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/04/end-the-fed-but-dont-stop-there/">&#8220;End the Fed… but don’t stop there!&#8221;</a></p>
<p><a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/03/against-the-institution-a-warning-for-occupy-wall-street/">&#8220;Against the Institution: A Warning for &#8216;Occupy Wall Street&#8217;.&#8221;</a></p>
<p><a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/09/20/a-revolutionary-idea-for-a-revolutionary-time-a-plan-of-action-for-the-global-political-awakening/">&#8220;A Revolutionary Idea for a Revolutionary Time: A Plan of Action for the Global Political Awakening.&#8221;</a></p>
<p><a href="http://www.thepeoplesbookproject.com">&#8220;The People&#8217;s Book Project.&#8221;</a></p>
<p>&#160;</p>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[End the Fed... but don't stop there!]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/04/end-the-fed-but-dont-stop-there/</link>
<pubDate>Tue, 04 Oct 2011 06:48:56 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/04/end-the-fed-but-dont-stop-there/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[End the Fed&#8230; but don&#8217;t stop there! By: Andrew Gavin Marshall In solidarity with the Occu]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>End the Fed&#8230; but don&#8217;t stop there!</p>
<p>By: Andrew Gavin Marshall</p>
<p>In solidarity with the Occupy Wall Street movement, an Occupy the Fed (referring to the Federal Reserve System in the United States) has sprung up. I would just like to make a few comments related to this issue, as I think ending the Fed is very important (along with the entire central banking system), however, many who advocate an &#8216;end to the Fed&#8217; often present it as a type of all-encompassing solution, as if ending the Fed will end all the problems faced by humanity at our present situation. I hope to shed some light upon this misleading notion.</p>
<p>The Fed is certainly an integral aspect of the system, as is the entire global central banking system. But it was itself a product of the system, and it&#8217;s not like America or the world were wonderful utopias of freedom, equality, and justice prior to the central banks or the Fed. They simply were the manifestation of the next logical step in power structures. The problem then, lies not with the Fed alone (though it is necessary to END it), but the true struggle, and the true source of change, can come only from the great struggle against &#8216;the institution&#8217; itself. Whether a central bank, a private bank, a State, a corporation, an international financial institution, the UN, the IMF, World Bank, WTO, NATO, the military, philanthropic foundations, psychiatry, the church, the media, education, etc., it is &#8216;the institution&#8217; and &#8216;the idea&#8217; which must be challenged. Ideas are powerful things, and when institutionalized, they become corrosive, oppressive, segregative, divisive, controlling and dehumanizing. The Institution seeks to define humanity, and thus forces humanity to conform to its definition, to fit within the confines of our global institutional structures. Instead, we need to create a society that conforms to human nature. How do we do this? First, we must discover our true human nature. As long as &#8220;civilization&#8221; has existed, humans have been defined, controlled, and oppressed by various ideas and institutions.</p>
<p>As such, our &#8216;nature&#8217; has only been viewed within the confines of the structure that controls us. When you study mice in a maze, no matter for what length of time or what the maze is constructed of and looks like, you cannot deduce the nature of the mouse separate from the context of the maze. To understand the true nature of the mouse, you must tear down the maze, stand back, and observe as life seeks out new opportunity, exploration, discovery, creativity, and purpose. In short, freedom. We must tear down the maze, tear down the walls, the institutions and ideas which seek to define and control humanity. We have to set humanity free in order to understand our true nature, and thus, construct a society based upon that nature. Simultaneously to the de-institutionalization of society, we must construct alternatives through communities, collective groupings, cooperative voluntary associations of individuals and localities, where people directly control and operate the economy, the polity, the society itself. It does not require hierarchy, institutions, authority and coercion. It requires only the will and the ability to see the system for what it is in its entirety, and to act accordingly.</p>
<p>So what is a possibility? What type of ideas can we move forward with? Many people may cringe, revile, and reject the notion of &#8216;anarchy,&#8217; but their prejudices in regards to anarchy lead one to associate it reflexively with chaos, violence, and disorder. Anarchy is not what one typically thinks. Anarchy is not chaos or violence or lawlessness. Anarchy is simply the concept that the burden of proof is on the structure of power, and if that structure has no legitimacy, it should not exist. Anarchy is where true democracy and true freedom flourish, where people don&#8217;t fight one another or seek to control and dominate, but where they cooperate, integrate, communicate, liberate and grow together. Technology would not be the enemy, but the means through which we establish, maintain, and give growth to a new global philosophy of liberation, through which communities and peoples around the world can interact and communicate directly with one another &#8211; and NOT through a particular lens of power &#8211; but as individuals, as equals. They can learn from each other, grow together. Anarchy is the understanding that freedom for one requires freedom for all, from all which seeks to define, control, and oppress humanity.</p>
<p>Never before has the aim of such a global society been made possible, but it is precisely because of technology &#8211; communication and information &#8211; that such a concept may become practical and plausible. It is precisely that everyone can see, communicate, and understand one another and our collective struggles as human beings which will allow us to understand that it is the structures, ideas, and institutions of power which must be laid to rest. If you merely replace the institution with another, change the flag, usurp the power over the institution, no matter the intent, the desire, the hope&#8230; the institution will corrupt those who sit atop. All of human history is evidence of this.</p>
<p>Humans were not meant to live in a system where so few are able to control so many. Power was not meant to be centralized, and thereby removed from the people. Individual psychology is evidence of this. Power is necessary in the life of all individuals, the power to lead one&#8217;s own life and seek out your own destiny, ideas, experience your creativity and to discover and be who you are to the best of your abilities. When we lack this power over our own lives, our societies become sick. The social is a reflection of the psychological, and the psychological is a reflection of the social; just as the sky reflects the ocean, and the ocean reflects the sky. To be free, personally, individually, psychologically, emotionally, politically, economically, socially, and truly&#8230; we can no longer accept this perverted system we call &#8220;civilization.&#8221;</p>
<p>Humanity is still in its adolescent stage, where we remain dependent upon those who brought us here. Now it is time to use the tools we have acquired through our collective historical childhood and adolescence so that the whole of humanity may now &#8216;grow up&#8217; and create a society befitting of a free thinking and acting individual.</p>
<p>So yes, End the Fed&#8230; But for the sake of humanity, don&#8217;t stop there!</p>
<p>For more information on this subject, see my recent article: <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/03/against-the-institution-a-warning-for-occupy-wall-street/">Against the Institution: A Warning for ‘Occupy Wall Street’</a></p>
<p>And for a wider perspective of the &#8216;Institutional&#8217; system and means of creating a new one, see my report: <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/09/20/a-revolutionary-idea-for-a-revolutionary-time-a-plan-of-action-for-the-global-political-awakening/">A Revolutionary Idea for a Revolutionary Time: A Plan of Action for the Global Political Awakening</a></p>
<p><em><a href="http://www.andrewgavinmarshall.com">Andrew Gavin Marshall</a> is an independent researcher and writer based in Montreal, Canada, and is Project Manager of <a href="http://www.thepeoplesbookproject.com">The People&#8217;s Book Project. </a></em></p>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[Against the Institution: A Warning for 'Occupy Wall Street']]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/03/against-the-institution-a-warning-for-occupy-wall-street/</link>
<pubDate>Mon, 03 Oct 2011 05:02:18 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/10/03/against-the-institution-a-warning-for-occupy-wall-street/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[While I fully endorse the efforts and actions of the Occupy Wall Street protests, now emerging inter]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<span class='embed-youtube' style='text-align:center; display: block;'><iframe class='youtube-player' type='text/html' width='640' height='390' src='http://www.youtube.com/embed/oneVFYeMHjU?version=3&#038;rel=1&#038;fs=1&#038;showsearch=0&#038;showinfo=1&#038;iv_load_policy=1&#038;wmode=transparent' frameborder='0'></iframe></span>
<p>While I fully endorse the efforts and actions of the Occupy Wall Street protests, now emerging internationally, there are concerns which need to be addressed and kept in mind as the movement moves forward.</p>
<p>The process through which a potentially powerful movement may be co-opted and controlled is slight and subtle. If Occupy Wall Street hopes to strive for the 99%, it must not submit to the 1%, in any capacity.</p>
<p>The Occupy movement must prevent what happened to the Tea Party movement to happen to it. Whatever ideological stance you may have, the Tea Party movement started as a grass roots movement, largely a result of anti-Federal Reserve protests. They were quickly co-opted with philanthropic money and political party endorsements.</p>
<p>For the Occupy Movement to build up and become a true force for change, it must avoid and reject the organizational and financial &#8216;contributions&#8217; of institutions: be they political parties, non-profits, or philanthropic foundations. The efforts are subtle, but effective: they seek to organize, professionalize, and institutionalize a movement, push forward the issues they desire, which render the movement useless for true liberation, as these are among the very institutions the movement should be geared against.</p>
<p>This is not simply about &#8220;Wall Street,&#8221; this is about POWER. Those who have power, and those who don&#8217;t. When those who have power offer a hand in your struggle, their other hand holds a dagger. Remain grassroots, remain decentralized, remain outside and away from party politics, remain away from financial dependence. Freedom is not merely in the aim, it&#8217;s in the action.</p>
<p>The true struggle is not left versus right, democrat versus republican, liberal versus conservative, or libertarian versus socialist. <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2011/09/20/a-revolutionary-idea-for-a-revolutionary-time-a-plan-of-action-for-the-global-political-awakening/">The true struggle is that of people against the institution</a>: the State, the banks, the central banking system, the corporation, the international financial institutions, the military, the political parties, the mainstream media, philanthropic foundations, think tanks, university, education, psychiatry, the legal system, the church, et. al.</p>
<p>The transfer of power from one institution to another does not solve the crisis of <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2011/09/20/a-revolutionary-idea-for-a-revolutionary-time-a-plan-of-action-for-the-global-political-awakening/">our &#8216;institutional society,&#8217;</a> whereby a few have come to dominate so much, to concentrate so much power at the expense of everyone else having so little. True liberation will result only from opposition to &#8216;the institution&#8217; as an entity. Placating power from one institution to another renders resistance ineffective. The power structures must be discredited, and power must be distributed to the people, through voluntary associations, communal groupings, and people-powered (and people-funded!) initiatives.</p>
<p>In order to survive as a movement, money will become a necessity. Do not turn to the non-profits and philanthropic foundations for support. The philanthropies, which fund and created the non-profits and NGOs, were themselves created to engage in &#8216;social engineering&#8217;: to &#8216;manufacture consent&#8217; among the governed, and create consensus among the governors. The philanthropies (particularly those of Carnegie, Ford, and Rockefeller) fund social movements and protest organizations so as to steer them into directions which are safe for the elites. The philanthropies are themselves run by the elite, founded by bankers and industrialists striving to preserve their place at the top of the social structure in the midst of potentially revolutionary upheaval. As the president of the Ford Foundation once said, &#8220;Everything the foundation does is to make the world safe for capitalism.&#8221;</p>
<p>Money from philanthropies will organize the movement into a more professionalized entity, will direct its efforts around the promotion of legalistic reform, making slight changes to the system&#8217;s symptoms, promoting particular legislation, rallying around very specific issues removed from their global historical context. The effect is to turn anti-system revolutionaries into legalistic reformers. With such funding, movement organizers are drawn into the world of NGOs, international conferences, international institutions, aid agencies, and mainstream political participation. The leaders of the movement become professionalized and successful, both in prestige and finances. Thus, their own personal position becomes dependent upon promoting reform, not revolution; on maintaining the system (with minor changes to the aesthetic), not moving against it. The movement itself, then, would be institutionalized.</p>
<p>For the finances to grow without the threat of institutional dominance, the money must come from the people. A truly populist cause could be funded by the people. Keep the people in charge.</p>
<p>If we truly want freedom and liberation, we must begin to act free and liberated. If we want <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/2011/09/20/a-revolutionary-idea-for-a-revolutionary-time-a-plan-of-action-for-the-global-political-awakening/">the &#8216;true liberation,&#8217;</a> we must understand the true system of power that confines, oppresses, segregates, exploits, impoverishes, and controls us. It is not a matter of the state or the banks or the corporations. It is a matter of the institution, itself. The structures of power must be struggled against so that we may come to liberate humanity from all that confines it, and experience what our true &#8216;human nature&#8217; is.</p>
<p>If one studies mice in a maze, no matter for how long or what the maze is built of, looks like, feels like, you cannot deduce the nature of the mouse separate from that of the maze. Break down the maze and you may observe the true nature of the mouse. We have been living, always, within a maze. The walls are constructed as institutions which direct, steer, manipulate, define and segregate us from one another.</p>
<p>First we must tear down the barriers that bind us from ourselves, and then we may truly understand what it is to be human and free.</p>
<p>Andrew Gavin Marshall</p>
<p>Project Manager, <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/">The People&#8217;s Book Project</a></p>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[A Revolutionary Idea for a Revolutionary Time: A Plan of Action for the Global Political Awakening]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/09/20/a-revolutionary-idea-for-a-revolutionary-time-a-plan-of-action-for-the-global-political-awakening/</link>
<pubDate>Tue, 20 Sep 2011 05:19:27 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/09/20/a-revolutionary-idea-for-a-revolutionary-time-a-plan-of-action-for-the-global-political-awakening/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[[The Rockefeller Foundation’s policies] were directed to the general problem of human behavior, with]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<blockquote><p><em>[The Rockefeller Foundation’s policies] were directed to the general problem of human behavior, <strong>with the aim of control through understanding</strong>. The Social sciences, for example, will concern themselves with the rationalization of social control; the Media and Natural sciences propose a closely coordinated study of sciences which underlie personal understanding and personal control.</em></p></blockquote>
<p>- Max Mason, President of the Rockefeller Foundation, 1933[1]</p>
<blockquote><p><em>Much of [the Global Political Awakening] is also fueled by globalization, which the United States propounds, favors and projects by virtue of being a globally outward-thrusting society. But that also contributes to instability<strong>, and is beginning to create something altogether new: namely, some new ideological or doctrinal challenge which might fill the void created by the disappearance of communism</strong></em><em>&#8230; But [communism] is now totally discredited, and we have a pragmatic vacuum in the world today regarding doctrines. </em><strong><em>But I see the beginnings, in writings and stirrings, of the making of a doctrine which combines anti-Americanism with anti-globalization, and the two could become a powerful force in a world that is very unequal and turbulent</em></strong><em>.</em></p></blockquote>
<p>- Zbigniew Brzezinski, The Carnegie Council, 2004[2]</p>
<p><strong>Introduction</strong></p>
<p>We are in revolutionary times. Our societies – the political, economic, and social institutions and ideas that comprise our global, national, and local social structure – are in a state of transformation. We are entering into <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/167/">the Greatest Depression in history</a>, our governments are driven by <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/the-logic-of-imperial-insanity-and-the-road-to-world-war-iii/">the logic of imperial insanity</a>, whereby we are increasingly headed for a World War III scenario. The imperial strategists who advise and determine the policies of our nations are bent on <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/12/an-imperial-strategy-for-a-new-world-order-the-origins-of-world-war-iii/">a system of total global control</a>. We undertake an imperialist war <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/08/26/lies-war-and-empire-nato%E2%80%99s-%E2%80%9Chumanitarian-imperialism%E2%80%9D-in-libya/">against the country of Libya</a>, we seek to <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/imperial-eye-on-pakistan/">expand the global war into Pakistan</a>, largely in order <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/punishing-pakistan-and-challenging-china/">to challenge China’s growing influence</a> in the world, and we have set the stage for <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/yemen-the-covert-apparatus-of-the-american-empire/">another imperialist war in Yemen</a>. The covert apparatus – military and intelligence – of our imperialistic nations have and continue to employ the techniques and <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/the-imperial-anatomy-of-al-qaeda-the-cia%E2%80%99s-drug-running-terrorists-and-the-%E2%80%9Carc-of-crisis%E2%80%9D/">support of terrorism</a> in order to achieve strategic goals, including <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/911-and-america%E2%80%99s-secret-terror-campaign/">using terrorism against our domestic populations</a> themselves.</p>
<p>The middle classes of the Western industrialized world <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/14/western-civilization-and-the-economic-crisis-the-impoverishment-of-the-middle-class/">are on the verge of total extinction</a>, with the likely result of leading to <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/14/the-global-economic-crisis-riots-rebellion-and-revolution/">riots, rebellion, and revolution</a>. We have entered the era of the ‘Global Political Awakening,’ where for the first time in human history, <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/14/the-global-political-awakening-and-the-new-world-order/">as American imperial strategist Zbigniew Brzezinski articulated</a>, “<em>almost all of humanity is politically activated, politically conscious and politically interactive. Global activism is generating a surge in the quest for cultural respect and economic opportunity in a world scarred by memories of colonial or imperial domination</em>.” With the Arab uprisings, we have <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/are-we-witnessing-the-start-of-a-global-revolution/">seen a new phase in the Global Political Awakening</a>, which is itself a process in the long road to world revolution. Naturally, <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/america%E2%80%99s-strategic-repression-of-the-%E2%80%98arab-awakening%E2%80%99/">our imperial governments seek to co-opt, control, or totally oppress these revolutionary sentiments</a> into more evolutionary, stable, and secure structures.</p>
<p>Elite think tanks such as the Council on Foreign Relations, the Bilderberg Group, and the Trilateral Commission work to establish consensus among elites in <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/bilderberg-2011-the-rockefeller-world-order-and-the-high-priests-of-globalization/">a global project of social engineering, seeking to establish a system and structure of global governance</a> and ultimately, global government. A major facet of this global social engineering project is through the global economic crisis – the Greatest Depression – whereby <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/%E2%80%9Ccrisis-is-an-opportunity%E2%80%9D-engineering-a-global-depression-to-create-a-global-government/">a great global debt depression will create and conditions necessary to serve as an excuse for a global government</a>. Already, this process is well under way in the establishment of global economic governance, in the forms of a global central bank and a global currency.</p>
<p>Indeed, the system being constructed and engineered by the elite is not simply a global government as we may understand the notion of government in today’s context, but an entirely new structure, driven by the social engineering techniques of science and technology, <a href="http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/14/100/">into a Global Scientific Dictatorship</a>.</p>
<p>So where are we? How did we get here? Who drove us here? What ideas created these circumstances? Where are we going? Why?</p>
<p><strong>Understanding Power</strong></p>
<p>These are questions I ask and seek to answer in <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/">my current book project</a>, which is a historical, political, economic and social analysis of the ideas, institutions, and individuals of power in our world. Included in this examination is the history and emergence of the nation state, capitalism, central banking, and the rise of the powerful and dominant banking dynasties – such as Rothschild, Morgan, and Rockefeller – which have come to manifest themselves as the modern imperial families of the global era. Included in this heavily-researched study is the emergence of the concept of ‘social control’ and its manifestation through the creation of the public education system, the university education system, the development and evolution of the ‘social sciences’ as tools of ‘social engineering,’ the emergence of the major philanthropic foundations, founded, funded, and run by the dominant dynastic powers for the purposes of creating consensus among elites, and engineering consent among the governed. Also examined in the book is the apparatus of empire, including the IMF, the World Bank, the UN, the Bank for International Settlements, the Pentagon, CIA, and the uses and techniques of war and covert operations. However, the role of the foundations is a significant facet of the book.</p>
<p>The foundations play a significant part in the examination of power in our global society, and are a major focus of my book. The foundations were created in an era in large part defined by the elite ideology of eugenics, where the elite sought to engineer humanity itself, to establish themselves as entrenched in the social structure of the world, and to create the conditions through which that domination may be expanded and secured. The foundations not only funded and helped engineer the eugenics movement, but they have played a pivotal role in the control, co-optation, consensus-building, ideology construction, and engineering of consent in a large number of other areas: the formation and evolution of the social sciences (including political science, economics, sociology, psychology), the development and direction of science (in particular genetics, microbiology, physics, chemistry, psychiatry, medicine), the population control movement, funding and directing into ‘safe’ avenues major social movements which would otherwise threaten the global social structure and elite interests, such as the Civil Rights movement, the environmental movement, and the anti-globalization movement. The foundations have essentially created and managed a global civil society, supporting the development and proliferation of Non-governmental organizations (NGOs), which act as modern equivalents to the missionary societies of the formal colonial era, whereby they contribute moderately to relieving the symptoms of imperialism and domination (such as supporting efforts for education, health care, and human rights) while ultimately undermining and co-opting indigenous resistance movements which might otherwise challenge the power structures that created those symptoms in the first place. The foundations helped establish and fund the major think tanks, such as the Council on Foreign Relations, the Bilderberg Group, and the Trilateral Commission, which function by bringing together elites from banking, industry, media, academia, politics, military, intelligence and other areas in order to help establish consensus among the elites in the broader goal of engineering a system of global governance. As such, the foundations are ‘engines of social engineering,’ effectively constructing ideology, and aiding in the institutionalization of ideas.</p>
<p>It is the concept of the institutionalization of ideas which is a primary focus of my book, understanding power as being particularly relevant in this context. While certainly there are individuals, families, and groups which are dominant and hold enormous power, there were first ideas and institutions which allowed and facilitated the rise of these very individuals to such positions of power. In the book, I do not refrain from naming the names of the elite, with a particular focus on the roles of the Rothschild and Rockefeller families; however, I also place these dynastic influences within a wider context: understanding that these families were only able to rise to the positions of power they now hold because of the effect of particular ideas and institutions, such as those of the nation-state, capitalism, central banking, private banking, hegemony, empire, and social engineering. More than ingenuity, it was opportunity that allowed these families to rise to power. While since coming to power, they have generally been the dominant forces in steering the direction of the global social, political, and economic structures, they are as much a product of previous social, political, and economic power structures as the rest of us are. As such, we cannot erroneously and simplistically identify all the problems of our world with a few individuals or families. This would be a monumental error if we are to ever move forward and find new solutions. It is, in fact, the power of ideas which is central to understanding our world, and in particular, the effect of the ‘institutionalization of ideas.’</p>
<p>While critically examining the roles of these dynastic powers in our society is imperative in order to understand how we got to this place, if we limit ourselves to that focus alone, we risk the eventual failure of any attempt at true change. If we focus simply on these dynastic influences, we neglect the role played by the various ideas and institutions which have made possible the development of dynastic power; thus, if we fail to properly understand the nature and interaction of ideas and institutions in the context of power, we will ultimately only replace the names of those who dominate the world, not the system of domination itself. If we seek to only criticize and change the dynastic rulers, new ones will rise in their place, for we would hold onto various ideas and institutions which gave rise to them in the first place. After all, if it had not been the Rothschilds or Rockefellers, it would have been someone else. Even if we remove all the ideas and institutions which these dynasties have established, we neglect to see that there were previous institutionalized ideas which brought them to power in the first place. This is the focus of my book, seeking to understand power in the context of the institutionalization of ideas.</p>
<p>As such, we also can come to understand a different notion of human nature, manifested and made possible only by the removal of those ideas and institutions which dominate and oppress humanity, and thus, we can see a possibility of an era of true human liberation, a true global revolution. The circumstances for this global revolution are developing and increasing. Already, we are thrust within the era of the ‘Global Political Awakening,’ where all of humanity is socially conscious, politically aware, and economically exploited. Thus, the conditions for radical change are made present. However, there still remains the multiplicity of views, understandings, ideologies, and intricacies of actions which make the ‘Global Awakening’ at present, a disunited, fractured, largely divided, often antagonistic, and easily co-opted global social phenomena.</p>
<p>The concept of the ‘Global Political Awakening’ has been popularized by the American imperial strategist Zbigniew Brzezinski, Jimmy Carter’s National Security Adviser, former director of the Council on Foreign Relations, former Bilderberg group member, and co-founder with David Rockefeller of the Trilateral Commission, who continues to serve on a number of boards of prominent elite think tanks such as the Center for Strategic and International Studies (CSIS) and the RAND Corporation. Brzezinski identifies the ‘global political awakening’ as the greatest strategic threat to the institutionalized powers of the world, and proposes that policies initiated by governments and other institutions must address this as the fundamental issue of our time, and thus support the expansion of global governance as a means to deal with this phenomenon. In discussing this concept, Brzezinski warned fellow elites in a speech to the Carnegie Council, that the ‘global political awakening’ remains relatively adolescent and disunited:</p>
<blockquote><p><strong><em>But I see the beginnings, in writings and stirrings, of the making of a doctrine which combines anti-Americanism with anti-globalization, and the two could become a powerful force in a world that is very unequal and turbulent</em></strong><em>.</em>[3]</p></blockquote>
<p>This book attempts to help fill the “doctrinal void” that Brzezinski identifies as being the fundamental force preventing the unification of the Global Political Awakening. I am attempting to write this book as a study of power in our world unlike any previous examination: how did we get here? Where are we going? And why? Further, the book, through its more comprehensive examination of the power of ideas and institutions, simultaneously undertakes an examination of resistance and potential solutions. As such, the book attempts to articulate a ‘Philosophy of Liberation,’ one that may appeal to the majority of the world’s population.</p>
<p><strong>The Philosophy of Liberation</strong></p>
<p>This philosophy, intended to serve as a potential doctrine for the ‘Global Political Awakening,’ has a broad appeal which can unite the left and right, which has the potential to gain support from both socialists and libertarians. Fundamentally, it is a simple concept: the ‘philosophy of liberation’ entails the absolute and total liberation of humanity from the ideas and institutions which dominate, co-opt, control, oppress and destroy humanity. The aim in such a concept of absolute and total liberation is to free humanity so that we may understand the true ‘human nature’, which has otherwise always been subject to various forms of control and oppression.</p>
<p>Apart from abstract notions of liberation and freedom, however, the book proposes particular plans of action and initiative which seek to bring such ideals to reality. The critical importance of understanding power in our world as a product of ideas and institutions is that we can come to see that what is needed to change this world into something that supports and liberates humanity (as opposed to controlling and oppressing humanity) is simply&#8230; a new idea. If ideas built this world and its power structures, if ideas built the institutions which dominate and control, if ideas gave rise to the dynastic powers which rule our world like modern imperial families, then what is required to bring all of this tumbling down is a new idea.</p>
<p>This new idea, which I set forth in the book, is a concept of anti-institutionalism: those ideas which seek to dominate must be challenged by those which seek to liberate; the institutionalization of those dominating ideas must be challenged by a counter-institutional structure which seeks to establish a parallel global system, so that the old institutions may be made irrelevant, antiquated, and extinct. The paradox here is that we must construct a counter-hegemonic system of institutions, but that they must be endowed with a strict adherence to a ‘philosophy of liberation’ which manifests itself as ‘anti-institutionalism.’ In short, we must create anti-institutional institutions.</p>
<p>Why is this so? Is this not entirely contradictory?</p>
<p>Indeed, these are fair questions, but they have fair answers. While we may have ideas of what is ideal, what is desired, and what is important; namely, concepts of peace, justice, democracy, freedom, and liberation. But we must establish a plan of action – a concept of how to achieve those ideals – yet this can only be done by understanding the world <strong><em>as it is</em></strong>, and therefore, the plan of action for liberation must be based on a realistic conception of the world if it is to have any chance of success in changing that world.</p>
<p>We live in a world of institutions and ideas. That is established. To create something new, to progress toward true liberation and freedom, we have to establish plans of action that act within – though opposed to – the global power structure of ideas and institutions. This does not propose a strategy of “change from the inside” where well-intentioned people join the institutions that dominate in the hopes that they may change the system from within those institutions. That strategy leads to folly and failure. Why? Because those institutions are dominated more by ideas than they are by individuals. The idea pervades, penetrates, and dominates the institution and infects the individuals within it, so that those with even the greatest and most humane of intentions can be corrupted and have their intentions disrupted by the institution they inhabit. No, what is needed is the formation of a counter-institutional structure.</p>
<p>The formation of institutions can allow them to flourish, spread, expand, and proliferate in a world which is predominantly institutional. If one wants to cross the sea to get to a new shore, one must first find a way to build a boat that facilitates the crossing. When the shore is reached, the boat has no more purpose. This is the concept of the counter-institutional structure: that it is only temporary, and that these institutions may seek to institutionalize – on a global scale – ideas which imbue a ‘philosophy of liberation’, and thus, they seek to bring about their own obsolescence. They deal with the world as it is, by creating structures within the global system (instead of isolating themselves from it), and thus in the same way that the ideas and institutions which seek to dominate have become so predominant and powerful in our world, we can effectively use the system against itself until the ideas and institutions which seek to liberate can become as powerful among the world’s people. Once a ‘philosophy of liberation’ has taken hold within the world’s population, and these counter-hegemonic institutions have helped establish an alternative system – helping to create people-oriented, locally organized, yet globally cooperative polities, economies, and societies – the institutions may be made irrelevant and dismantled, so that they may not be transformed through the potential to themselves dominate and control.</p>
<p>While the Global Political Awakening is a present reality in the world, the conditions for a true global revolution and challenge to the global power structures has yet to manifest itself. There are movements in different places, through different peoples, with differing ideas, but they are not yet united in aim, ideology, or action. The elite are seeking to establish a system and structure of global government, and are working very hard to establish such consensus among the global elite, as well as to employ specific strategies of action to effect such a change. We must do the same in order to counter this process.</p>
<p>Living in the era of the ‘Technological Revolution’, we are faced with an unprecedented dichotomy, whereby we are in the circumstances where for the first time in all of human history, a truly global oppressive system and structure of governance is made possible, and simultaneously, for the first time in human history, a global resistance and revolution against power structures is made possible via the communication and information revolutions, with the ultimate potential for all of humanity to become free simultaneously. This is unprecedented. Never before have all of humanity had the possibility of achieving liberation at the same time. Thus, we have never truly had a liberated human society. This is both the greatest challenge and the greatest opportunity that humanity has ever faced. The elite see these developments in the same context, but with the perspective reversed. The elite see the greatest opportunity they have ever faced in human history as being to achieve the actual construction of a global government, never before possible, but now made plausible through advancements in technology; they also see the greatest challenge they have ever collectively faced in human history as being from a globally aware, active, and philosophically united world population seeking liberation and freedom. The elite are articulating these realities, and attempting to strategize and plan actions based upon these concepts. Brzezinski is perhaps the best example of this, as he has been articulating the notion of the ‘Global Political Awakening’ for many years, and has traveled to several of the more prominent think tanks among the imperial nations, warning the elites of the true realities of the world in which they seek to operate and dominate.</p>
<p>So too must the people of the world begin discussing these ideas, issues, and realities in order to establish consensus in understanding and initiatives for action. So long as we remain divided by artificial separations such as seeking change within the context of the ‘nation-state’ (as many in the anti-globalist movement seek a return to nationalism as a “solution”), which keeps them divided from the rest of the world. Only through <strong><em>solidarity of philosophy and action</em></strong> on the part of the world’s people may we come to actually and effectively create true change. The elite understand this. It’s time that we do too.</p>
<p><strong>A Plan of Action: The People’s Project</strong></p>
<p>The plan of action for establishing the anti-institutional counter-hegemonic system I set forth in my book is what I refer to as “The People’s Project.” The book, by setting forth a more comprehensive analysis of the global structures and systems of power, builds a solution based upon this more elaborate understanding. In particular, as the role of the philanthropic foundations is of particular interest and focus in the book, I propose that in order to properly counter the global power structures, we must create a type of ‘people’s foundation.’ This is what I refer to as “The People’s Project.”</p>
<p>Instead of being funded by wealthy billionaires, philanthropists, bankers and industrialists, the People’s Project would be funded by the people, using the means made available through the Technological Revolution: utilizing social media networks in order to fundraise from people and communities around the world, and to advertise, promote and disseminate the idea globally. As such, the Project is democratically funded, and in fact, it is a representation of genuine free-market principles, something which could appeal to the libertarian elements of resistance. The funding would be directed for specific initiatives and projects that the organization undertakes.</p>
<p>While the funding is democratic and free-market oriented, in that if an idea is not welcomed by the people, it simply wouldn’t be funded by them; the actual organization, operations, and day-to-day decision making process must be undertaken by a relatively small and cooperative group of individuals. If we attempt to make the entire decision-making process democratic, we would be attempting to manifest a democratic institution in an anti-democratic world, and it would be stalled, stagnant, and ultimately a failure. Thus, it must <em>act</em> as an institution of the likes of a major philanthropic foundation. Its operations must be effected and decisions made by a group of people so that it may function effectively within the global institutional system. However, this group of people must abide by a strict adherence to a ‘philosophy of liberation,’ and all the Project’s financial information, decisions, and initiatives must be made publicly available, so that they may be analyzed, discussed, and assessed by the public. The people must be treated as the patrons, since they provide the money. Projects will be proposed and planned by the group within the institution, and the people will discuss, debate, assess, and ultimately vote with their dollars. If a project does not have popular appeal or support, it will not be funded, and thus, will not move forward into action.</p>
<p>The initiatives of The People’s Project itself must seek to create the counter-institutional structure that would make the present global system of power structure irrelevant and extinct. As this is ultimately a process of de-institutionalization, we must understand it in a similar context: that of the de-institutionalization of psychiatric patients over the past several decades. Certainly, releasing prisoners of psychiatric institutions was the right thing to do, as the momentum built for this endeavour and many of these institutions were closed down, and their prisoners (or as they are often referred to, “patients”) were released. However, many of these released prisoners simply ended up as homeless people, having no where to go and nothing to be able to do. Does this mean that the institution was a good thing? No, it was and remains an incredibly dehumanizing idea and structure. The problem was multi-faceted: most important in the failure of de-institutionalization of psychiatric prisoners was the fact that the vast majority of society suffers a severe misunderstanding of what we commonly refer to as ‘madness’ or ‘mental illness.’ This misunderstanding is an intentional consequence of the ideas and institutions of psychiatry, psychology, and pharmacology which are extremely prominent within our society, and which have been largely influence by the major philanthropic foundations. Namely, without a more coherent understanding of what we refer to as “mental illness,” we cannot even begin to understand those who experience different emotional and psychological states of being, which we mistakenly refer to as “diseases.” However, as an impulse, we tend to quickly attempt to define, label, and control that which we do not understand, and therefore we often mistreat those who we are labeling as such. In 1933, Max Mason, President of the Rockefeller Foundation, wrote that the foundation’s policies:</p>
<blockquote><p>were directed to the general problem of human behavior, <strong>with the aim of control through understanding</strong>. The Social sciences, for example, will concern themselves with the rationalization of social control; the Media and Natural sciences propose a closely coordinated study of sciences which underlie personal understanding and personal control. Many procedures will be explicitly co-operative between [Foundation] divisions. The Medical and Natural Sciences will<em>, through psychiatry and psychobiology, have a strong interest in the problems of mental disease</em>.[4]</p></blockquote>
<p>What we refer to as “mental illness” or “madness” is yet another avenue and means through which power is exercised in our world, and this is perhaps the most pervasive, damaging, and destructive powers that exist in our world, largely brought about through the institutions and ideas of psychiatry and psychology, which have predominantly sought the prescription laid out by the Rockefeller Foundation, “to the general problem of human behavior, <strong>with the aim of control through understanding</strong>.” Psychology and psychiatry were largely avenues through which power sought to control the human mind, not to liberate it. Indeed, it is an incredibly important though little-known fact that in 1992, the World Health Organization released a study of comparing treatment of schizophrenia in the developed and developing world (rich vs. poor) that began in 1968, which concluded that patients in poor countries<strong> “</strong><em>had a considerably better course and outcome than (patients) in developed countries. This remained true whether clinical outcomes, social outcomes, or a combination of the two was considered</em>.”[5] A follow-up study by the WHO again confirmed that in poor countries, patients suffering “severe mental health” issues had a much higher rate of recovery than those in the rich, ‘developed’ nations, which tend to treat such experiences as a biological disease, and confuse treatment with causation: as in, because we treat such conditions with chemicals (i.e., drugs), the cause of the condition must itself be chemical. <strong></strong></p>
<p>As we largely misunderstand and misinterpret (and thus mislabel) such conditions as “diseases,” we fail to be able to deal properly with those who are subject to such conditions. Thus, the process of de-institutionalization of psychiatric facilities led in most places to human tragedy. From the 1960s onward, radical psychiatrists and philosophers began to challenge the way people view and understand madness and “mental illness.” Among them were Thomas Szasz, who challenged the entire notion of “mental disease” with his famous essay and subsequent book, “The Myth of Mental Illness,” which was perhaps the greatest intellectual challenge to the entire psychiatric establishment ever developed. There was also the French philosopher Michel Foucault who took on the challenge of understanding the history, ideas and institutions of psychiatry as an exercise in power – what he referred to as ‘biopower’ – the direct influence upon the biology and psychology of the individual. There was the radical Scottish psychiatrist, R.D. Laing, who posited a different understanding of madness, explaining that, “Insanity is a sane reaction to an insane society.” And there was also the radial Italian psychiatrist, Franco Basaglia, who challenged the dominant ideas and who had actually created a successful method of de-institutionalization of psychiatric centers in Italy. Compared to the failures of North American deinstitutionalization, Italy achieved relative successes, largely at the initiative of Franco Basaglia, who sought to destroy the psychiatric institution itself. Basaglia understood that for deinstitutionalization to be successful, one must create the conditions which make the integration of patients into society possible. In one interview, Basaglia said:</p>
<blockquote><p>It is not that we put illness aside, but rather that we believe in order to have a relationship with an individual it is necessary to establish it independent of the label by which the patient has been defined.[6]</p></blockquote>
<p>What Basaglia realized was that, “psychiatric diagnoses were not independent of the prevailing moral and social order which tended to define normality and abnormality in its own class-based terms.” Psychiatry then, provided a “medical rationale” behind the “institutionalized violence” against the prisoners of psychiatric hospitals, which were largely poor, dispossessed individuals. As Basaglia explained:</p>
<blockquote><p>Once the medical pretenses are gone, we can see the misery and the poverty that are the true nature of the asylum. The specificity of madness is also gone. The deception is obvious: it is one thing to say that an institution locks up fifty ‘sick’ people. It is quite another to say hat fifty ‘poor’ people have been locked up because there is no other solution to their problems.[7]</p></blockquote>
<p>Psychiatry was thus understood as “a covert apparatus of brutal social control,” and psychiatric physicians were agents of social control. These technicians “diagnosed, with greater and greater precision and specificity, thus fragmenting the problem of ‘mental illness’ into a multitude of diseases so as to avoid confronting its <em>wholeness</em>, its unifying dimensions as a shared experience of alienated human needs.” In fact, “the inhuman regulations of the institution produce signs and symptoms that justify locking up the inmate,” and the “transformation of patient into object is almost literal.”[8] Thus, the institution itself often creates the ‘disease’ more than the individual experiences it as separated from the institution.</p>
<p>Basaglia’s program of deinstitutionalization included having the patients themselves help in physically destroying the institution with their own hands, most especially the physical barriers that confined and excluded them, such as doors, bars, and window gratings. Subsequently, ‘patients’ would work in the hospital, getting paid for their work, thus replicating the notion of a paid labour force on the outside of the institution. There would be daily meetings between staff and patients, and the meetings – known as the <em>assemblea</em> – were gradually transformed from a venue to express personal problems “toward using it as a vehicle for translating the personal into the collective and the political.”[9] The process of “destroying and, ultimately, closing down the wards of the [institution] had to be accompanied by the far more radical and difficult task of ‘opening up’ communities.”[10] The anti-institutional slogan put forward in this movement was, “Freedom is Therapeutic.” Thus, “alternative solutions had to be worked out, links re-established with the community; ex-patients had to develop new personal and social identities and to regain contractual power within the community.” Hence, the process of deinstitutionalization took place on two fronts: “in the hospital and in the community.”[11]</p>
<p>As the communities began to be integrated with the ex-patients, “townspeople could begin to recognize in the distress and suffering of former inmates some of the problems in living that plagued their own lives.” Further, “through the vehicle of art there existed yet another way of sensitizing the public at large to the violence of segregative control.” The physical institution itself, had been converted into a place for community interaction and life, turning wards and rooms into shops, college dorms, radio stations, and day care centers.[12]</p>
<p>Basaglia had to also “confront the old and uneasy alliance between psychiatry and the law. Demedicalizing and decriminalizing madness went hand in glove.”[13] Thus, laws had to be challenged and changed with made for a more effective and humane treatment of ‘patients’ and process of deinstitutionalization.</p>
<p>Why I spent so much time and space discussing the notion of psychiatry and its institutions of control is because the institution of psychiatry – both physical and ideational – can serve as a microcosm for understanding the global institution we live within today. Sociologist Erving Goffman published his monumental study of what he referred to as ‘total institutions’ in his 1961 book, <em>Asylums</em>. He defined the ‘total institution’ as “<em>a place of residence and work where a large number of like-situated individuals, cut off from the wider society for an appreciable period of time, together lead an enclosed, formally administered round of life.</em>”[14] In short, we can understand the power structures of the world as a type of ‘total institution’: whereby people are segregated – or confined – from one another, where they live, eat, work, sleep, remain enclosed and entrapped, where their actions and personal psychological health are often resulting from the institution itself: they become a product <em>of</em> the institution, not simply a resident within it. The institution itself creates the conditions it purportedly seeks to treat. The world is, in fact, a total institution. As we move down the road to a system of global governance, that institution is being further defined, segregated, controlling, and dehumanizing. Within the total institution of global society, psychiatry does come to play a particularly dehumanizing and personally pervasive role. As a 1944 Annual Report of the Rockefeller Foundation indicated:</p>
<blockquote><p>It is not too much to assert&#8230; that in its actual and potential contribution to general medicine, to education, to sociology, indeed to the general business of living, psychiatry, without claiming omniscience in itself, is cast for a role of fundamental importance in helping to shape any world that may come out of the present one.[15]</p></blockquote>
<p>Just as Basaglia sought the means to more effectively and efficiently deinstitutionalize the mental asylums, so too must we – globally – seek to create a more effective process of deinstitutionalizing global society. This requires the dual process of breaking down the institutions that confine us, while simultaneously – and more painstakingly – seeking to establish links, changes, positions, and possibilities within the community itself.</p>
<p>The People’s Project would seek to establish these community initiatives on a number of levels. Just as the philanthropic foundations have engineered much of our society in the world today, down to the very construction of knowledge itself, so too must The People’s Project engage in social engineering, but not with a purpose to control; rather, with a purpose to liberate. These initiatives of the major philanthropic foundations have been articulated by many of their former leaders and administrators. Warren Weaver, a director of the Rockefeller Foundation who led the natural sciences department in the 1930s, wrote that:</p>
<blockquote><p>The welfare of mankind depends in a vital way on man’s understanding of himself and his physical environment. Science has made magnificent progress in the analysis and control of inanimate forces, but science has not made equal advances in <strong>the more delicate, more difficult, and more important problem of the analysis and control over animate forces</strong>.[16]</p></blockquote>
<p>In 1934, Warren Weaver wrote a proposal to the board of trustees of the Rockefeller Foundation in which he asked:</p>
<blockquote><p>Can man gain an intelligent control of his own power? Can we develop so sound and extensive a genetics that we can hope to breed, in the future, superior men? Can we obtain enough knowledge of physiology and psychobiology of sex so that man can bring this pervasive, highly important, and dangerous aspect of life under rational control? Can we unravel the tangled problem of the endocrine glands, and develop, before it is too late, a therapy for the whole hideous range of mental and physical disorders which result from glandular disturbances? &#8230; Can we release psychology from its present confusion and ineffectiveness and shape it into a tool which every man can use every day? Can man acquire enough knowledge of his own vital processes so that we can hope to rationalize human behavior? Can we, in short, create a new science of Man?[17]</p></blockquote>
<p>The Foundation, however, is an important and potent example to follow for a counter-hegemonic institution. This is because of the nature of how the foundation influences and exerts its power, which while largely through funding initiatives, it can spur developments of entire fields and initiatives simply through the act of suggestion. As a former president of the Rockefeller Foundation, Raymond Fosdick, wrote in 1934 in a letter to the board of trustees of the Foundation:</p>
<blockquote><p>We do not have to be cynical to admit that if a foundation announces an interest in anthropology or astronomy or physio-chemical reactions, there will be plenty of institutions that will develop a zeal for the prosecution of these studies. The responsibility which this inescapable fact throws upon a foundation is enormous. <strong>The possession of funds carries with it power to establish trends and styles of intellectual endeavour</strong>&#8230; Indeed we would strongly advocate a shift of emphasis in favor not only of the dissemination of knowledge, but on the practical application of knowledge in fields where human need is great and opportunity is real. As a means of advancing knowledge, application can be as effective an instrument as research.[18]</p></blockquote>
<p>Thus, as the Foundation influences, so too can The People’s Project influence. The key differences, however, are the ideology and patronage of the institution itself. As the former Rockefeller Foundation president Max Mason articulated, the foundation’s policies were directed “<em>to the general problem of human behavior, <strong>with the aim of control through understanding</strong></em>.”[19] The People’s Project, however, would be directed “<em>to the general problem of human society, <strong>with the aim of liberation through understanding</strong></em>.” Patronage is another important difference. In the private foundation, patronage is the result of wealthy philanthropists, industrialists, bankers and billionaires who fund the foundations, and thus influence and determine the direction it takes. With The People’s Project, patronage would lie with the people, funding would be democratically accountable, and thus, the direction of a project – if undesired by the people – would be made impossible by their refusal to fund the project. It is in this sense that the People’s Project may be accountable, even while its institutional structure is undemocratic.</p>
<p>As for specific initiatives that The People’s Project could and should undertake, I outline this somewhat more specifically in the <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/project-philosophy/">“Project Philosophy</a>” on the website for the Project; however, I will explain a general concept here.</p>
<p>The first initiative is referred to as The People’s Book Project, whereby the book I am writing may be funded and made possible. I will publish and make available the financial information, donations received, as well as logging the hours I have worked on the book, and thus, how much I am being paid to do so. I will update the site – <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/">The People’s Book Project</a> – with information on what I am writing about at that time, giving an up-to-date and interactive process of writing the book, with comments and suggestions from readers and supporters. The book itself will serve as the philosophical foundation for the larger initiative of The People’s Project, laying the groundwork for a more comprehensive analysis and understanding of the world, and thus, serving as the basis for which the organization understands and acts in our world. The book also, as a conclusion, proposes the concept of The People’s Project in terms of solutions. Thus, if the book is itself funded and brought into being through this initiative, its very existence will be brought about by the recommendations it sets forth in its conclusions; thus, its existence may serve as evidence of its validity as a solution.</p>
<p>To put it simply: the book does not simply ‘recommend’ a solution, as it’s very existence would be evidence of that solution. Once the book is complete, The People’s Project can begin to undertake its larger initiatives.</p>
<p>Like the foundations, it must start with the formation of ideology and consensus. That is the purpose of the book itself, to establish a concrete understanding and to support the dissemination of those ideas to people and places around the world, to help institutionalize those ideas in the institutions which the Project creates and supports. Such institutions could and should include: radical think tanks, which are designed to produce research and recommendations for strategies aimed at the global liberation of humanity. The creation of liberation-oriented think tanks, as well as supporting them to become self-sufficient (perhaps in the same democratically funded way as the Project itself) could draw intellectual talents away from the powerful think tanks, or the “alternative” think tanks, which are supported by the major foundations and which draw intellectual talents which might otherwise support radical social change and revolutionary movements into a structure, institution, and context which forces them to be placated by the ideas of slow, evolutionary change to the system, but that type of change which simply addresses the symptoms of the global system, but doesn’t challenge the power structure outright. These types of think tanks exist as controlled opposition to the dominant imperial think tanks such as the Council on Foreign Relations. These “alternative” think tanks must be made irrelevant by the development of radical, liberation-oriented think tanks which seek to directly challenge the system itself, and help in the construction of new alternatives. Their existence alone would create the potential to attract intellectual talent, and thus, become successful initiatives.</p>
<p>Another avenue which The People’s Project should undertake is that of supporting the formation of a ‘new economy’, essentially helping establish a parallel economy to the global system we are all subjugated under. This would initially involve supporting initiatives aimed at creating local currencies, controlled and operated by local communities. The Project should organize conferences and meetings, bringing together representatives from various community currency projects around the world, in order to help understand the different projects, the failures and successes, and come to a better understanding of what works. Further, bringing such representatives together should also facilitate the establishment of trade and exchange ties between these communities, which is important to ensure that a project of building a parallel economy and community currency does not isolate itself from the world (and thus ensure its eventual failure, as it would ultimately be crushed by power-institutional forces from without), but that the parallel economy can establish itself globally. The key difference is that instead of operating through the dominant central banks, private banks, and multinational corporations, this parallel global economy would establish itself among the people directly. Of course, this implies the absolute necessity of &#8211; early on &#8211; bringing farmers and produce distributors into this system. In this sense, control over food is essential. We must reduce and ultimately eliminate our dependence upon the dominant institutions in our world.</p>
<p>Once community currencies can begin to be established, an immediate initiative of those communities (which the People’s Project can help begin) is to create a community foundation, funded entirely by the community bank, which is accountable to the people, not bankers. The initiatives and projects of the community foundation would mirror those of the People’s Project, but on a local scale. It must be funded by the community bank, without interest or debt. Since the concepts of interest and debt are just ideas, all we have to do to change their existence is to simply agree, collectively, that they are bad ideas. After all, currencies are faith-based, so we need to place our faith in a different currency system which supports people, not bankers. The community foundation could then be perpetually funded by the community bank in order to support local initiatives and community projects. Of course, this is a complex process which would take a great deal of time and effort, and not least without a great many failures along the way. But the point is that we need to establish a plan of action to begin effecting change and interaction and communication on a global scale.</p>
<p>This is not a utopian ideal, it is a humane ideal. Up until present time, what we refer to as “human civilization” is often the process of a coercive and socially constructed method of shaping humanity to fit within the confines and adjust itself to ‘society.’ Human history continuously shows examples whereby societies were constructed and people were then forced to adjust to those societies. Often this was done violently and coercively, but also, and more effectively, and most especially in the past century, this was done through the engineering of consent. The point of this Project is to help free humanity, so that we can properly understand human nature for the first time, and thus construct society around the needs and desires of human nature. Human civilization must come to reflect human nature; human nature can no longer be shaped within the confines of human civilization. As people are largely a product of their environment, down to the very notion of what we know as “mental illness,” we must begin to reshape the environment to support the people. We must construct our society in such a way that enhances and flourishes all that is good in human nature, while minimizing and undermining all that is bad in human nature. Currently, our society does the opposite. That is why war, poverty, dehumanization, and destruction are so common, whereas cooperation, liberation, peace, and harmonious existence are so rare.</p>
<p>It seems quite apparent that our little experiment known as ‘human civilization’ is actually more properly identified as a “dehumanized civilization,” as it ruins, oppresses, controls, co-opts, and seeks to destroy all that is good, wonderful, and beautiful in human nature. We must then, construct a new civilization, a “humane civilization,” one that undermines the negative aspects of human nature and supports the positive. Humans have a tendency to be corrupted by too much power, no matter the intentions and beliefs of that individual, too much power in one person or institution is self destructive. Subsequently, too much power in too few hands implies the de facto circumstance of too little power in too many hands, so that the vast majority of the world’s people are left with very little power even over their own lives. This leads to poverty, despair, violence, terrorism, war, hunger, hatred, and madness. What is implied then, is that power must be decentralized, people must gain more, and institutions must have less. In such a situation, we can begin to see the potential for humanity to gain – for the first time in all of human history – the ultimate liberation, the true freedom. As such, we would be able to see the true reality of “human nature.”</p>
<p>If you study mice in a maze, no matter for how long you may do so, you cannot ever hope to understand the mouse outside of the context of the maze itself. The mouse or mice you study and observe are products of that maze, as they are confined within it and their lives dictated by its walls and parameters. Therefore, you can never hope to conclude a true ‘nature’ of the mouse through observing it in such circumstances. Only when you break the walls of the maze and erase its foundations, thus freeing the mice to their own devices, can you even begin to understand the nature and potential of the mouse. This is the perspective we must come to understand in regards to humanity. We can commonly deduce that it is “human nature” to be violent, to hate, to kill, to destroy; that we need states and governments and powers to stand above and look over us, preventing us from destroying ourselves. Yet, we act in accordance with the confines of our own maze – the global institutional social system – and thus, we are a product – and our nature is thus a product – of the system we live within. If our nature is violent, hateful, and destructive, it is because the system we live within has made it so. Thus, we need to liberate humanity from that system, and simultaneously create a parallel system which may help to establish a society that requires cooperation, true individuality, respect, understanding, peace, and love. We are largely a product of our environment, therefore we must change both the individual – through our personal perceptions and understanding of the world – and the environment around the individual, in order to create a truly ‘humane’ society.</p>
<p>These are the aims and objectives of The People’s Project. The Book Project, as the first phase in the wider initiative explained above, seeks to establish itself as a basis upon which the People’s Project would understand and act in the world. <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/">The People’s Book Project</a> can only be made possible through the support, donations, and word of mouth of the people themselves, activated through social media and the Internet, using the unprecedented opportunity we have before us as a result of the Technological, communication and information revolutions.</p>
<p>Indeed, nothing would be a greater shame than to exist in revolutionary times without revolutionary ideas.</p>
<p><em><strong>Andrew Gavin Marshall</strong> is an independent researcher and writer based in Montreal, Canada, writing on a number of social, political, economic, and historical issues. He is also Project Manager of <a href="http://thepeoplesbookproject.com/">the People&#8217;s Book Project</a>.</em></p>
<div>
<hr align="left" size="1" width="33%" />
<div>
<p>[1] Lily E. Kay, “Rethinking Institutions: Philanthropy as an Historigraphic Problem of Knowledge and Power,” <em>Minerva</em> (Vol. 35, 1997), page 290.</p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[2] Zbigniew Brzezinski, The Choice: Global Domination or Global Leadership. Speech at the Carnegie Council: March 25, 2004: <a href="http://www.cceia.org/resources/transcripts/4424.html">http://www.cceia.org/resources/transcripts/4424.html</a></p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[3] Zbigniew Brzezinski, The Choice: Global Domination or Global Leadership. Speech at the Carnegie Council: March 25, 2004: <a href="http://www.cceia.org/resources/transcripts/4424.html">http://www.cceia.org/resources/transcripts/4424.html</a></p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[4] Lily E. Kay, “Rethinking Institutions: Philanthropy as an Historigraphic Problem of Knowledge and Power,” <em>Minerva</em> (Vol. 35, 1997), page 290.</p>
<p>[5] The International Pilot Study of Schizophrenia. Leff, J. Psychological Medicine, 22 (1992):131-145: <a href="http://www.madinamerica.com/madinamerica.com/Antipsychotic%20drugs%20and%20chronic%20illness.html">http://www.madinamerica.com/madinamerica.com/Antipsychotic%20drugs%20and%20chronic%20illness.html</a></p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[6] Nancy Scheper-Hughes and Anne M. Lovell, “Breaking the Circuit of Social Control: Lessons in Public Psychiatry from Italy and Franco Basaglia,” <em>Social Science and Medicine</em> (Vol. 23, Issue 2, 1986), page 160.</p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[7] Nancy Scheper-Hughes and Anne M. Lovell, “Breaking the Circuit of Social Control: Lessons in Public Psychiatry from Italy and Franco Basaglia,” <em>Social Science and Medicine</em> (Vol. 23, Issue 2, 1986), page 161.</p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[8] Nancy Scheper-Hughes and Anne M. Lovell, “Breaking the Circuit of Social Control: Lessons in Public Psychiatry from Italy and Franco Basaglia,” <em>Social Science and Medicine</em> (Vol. 23, Issue 2, 1986), pages 161-162.</p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[9] Nancy Scheper-Hughes and Anne M. Lovell, “Breaking the Circuit of Social Control: Lessons in Public Psychiatry from Italy and Franco Basaglia,” <em>Social Science and Medicine</em> (Vol. 23, Issue 2, 1986), pages 164-165.</p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[10] Nancy Scheper-Hughes and Anne M. Lovell, “Breaking the Circuit of Social Control: Lessons in Public Psychiatry from Italy and Franco Basaglia,” <em>Social Science and Medicine</em> (Vol. 23, Issue 2, 1986), page 167.</p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[11] Nancy Scheper-Hughes and Anne M. Lovell, “Breaking the Circuit of Social Control: Lessons in Public Psychiatry from Italy and Franco Basaglia,” <em>Social Science and Medicine</em> (Vol. 23, Issue 2, 1986), page 168.</p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[12] Nancy Scheper-Hughes and Anne M. Lovell, “Breaking the Circuit of Social Control: Lessons in Public Psychiatry from Italy and Franco Basaglia,” <em>Social Science and Medicine</em> (Vol. 23, Issue 2, 1986), page 169.</p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[13] Nancy Scheper-Hughes and Anne M. Lovell, “Breaking the Circuit of Social Control: Lessons in Public Psychiatry from Italy and Franco Basaglia,” <em>Social Science and Medicine</em> (Vol. 23, Issue 2, 1986), page 170.</p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[14] Erving Goffman, <em>Asylums: Essays on the Social Situation of Mental Patients and Other Inmates</em> (First Anchor Books, New York: 1961), page xiii.</p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[15] Annual Report, The Rockefeller Foundation, 1944, page 31.</p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[16] Daniel J. Kevles, “Foundations, Universities, and Trends in Support for the Physical and Biological Sciences, 1900-1992,” <em>Daedalus</em> (Vol. 121, No. 4, Immobile Democracy?), Fall 1992, page 206</p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[17] Robert E. Kohler, “The Management of Science: The Experience of Warren Weaver and the Rockefeller Programme in Molecular Biology.” <em>Minerva</em> (Vol. 14, No. 3), 1976, page 291</p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[18] Robert E. Kohler, “The Management of Science: The Experience of Warren Weaver and the Rockefeller Programme in Molecular Biology.” <em>Minerva</em> (Vol. 14, No. 3), 1976, page 293</p>
</div>
<div>
<p>[19] Lily E. Kay, “Rethinking Institutions: Philanthropy as an Historigraphic Problem of Knowledge and Power,” <em>Minerva</em> (Vol. 35, 1997), page 290.</p>
</div>
</div>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[Bilderberg 2011: The Rockefeller World Order and the "High Priests of Globalization"]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/bilderberg-2011-the-rockefeller-world-order-and-the-high-priests-of-globalization/</link>
<pubDate>Fri, 15 Jul 2011 19:59:06 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/bilderberg-2011-the-rockefeller-world-order-and-the-high-priests-of-globalization/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[Bilderberg 2011: The Rockefeller World Order and the &#8220;High Priests of Globalization&#8221; Glo]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<table width="100%" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td align="left" valign="top">
<div><strong>Bilderberg 2011: The Rockefeller World Order and the &#8220;High Priests of Globalization&#8221;</strong></div>
<div><a href="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr?cmd=_s-xclick&#38;hosted_button_id=5SHVB8TCRVRHS"><img src="https://www.paypal.com/en_US/i/btn/x-click-but21.gif" alt="" /></a></div>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" align="left" nowrap="nowrap">
<div><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/">Global Research</a>, June 16, 2011</div>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" align="left">
<div>
<blockquote>
<blockquote>
<p align="center"><em>To say we were striving for a one-world government is exaggerated, but not wholly unfair. Those of us in Bilderberg felt we couldn&#8217;t go on forever fighting one another for nothing and killing people and rendering millions homeless. So we felt that a single community throughout the world would be a good thing.</em>[1]</p>
<p>- Denis Healey, 30-year member of the Steering  Committee of the Bilderberg Group</p></blockquote>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify"><strong>The ‘Foundations’ of the Bilderberg Group</strong></p>
<p>The Bilderberg Group, formed in 1954, was founded in the Netherlands as a secretive meeting held once a year, drawing roughly 130 of the political-financial-military-academic-media elites from North America and Western Europe as “an informal network of influential people who could consult each other privately and confidentially.”[2] Regular participants include the CEOs or Chairman of some of the largest corporations in the world, oil companies such as Royal Dutch Shell, British Petroleum, and Total SA, as well as various European monarchs, international bankers such as David Rockefeller, major politicians, presidents, prime ministers, and central bankers of the world.[3] The Bilderberg Group acts as a “secretive global think-tank,” with an original intent to “to link governments and economies in Europe and North America amid the Cold War.”[4]</p>
<p align="justify">In the early 1950s, top European elites worked with selected American elites to form the Bilderberg Group in an effort to bring together the most influential people from both sides of the Atlantic to advance the cause of ‘Atlanticism’ and ‘globalism.’ The list of attendees were the usual suspects: top politicians, international businessmen, bankers, leaders of think tanks and foundations, top academics and university leaders, diplomats, media moguls, military officials, and Bilderberg also included several heads of state, monarchs, as well as senior intelligence officials, including top officials of the CIA, which was the main financier for the first meeting in 1954.[5]</p>
<p align="justify">The European founders of the Bilderberg Group included Joseph Retinger and Prince Bernhard of the Netherlands. Prince Bernhard had, incidentally, been a member of the Nazi Party until 1934, three years prior to his marrying the Dutch Queen Juliana, and had also worked for the German industrial giant, I.G. Farben, the maker of Zyklon B, the gas used in concentration camps.[6] On the American side, those who were most prominent in the formation of the Bilderberg Group were David Rockefeller, Dean Rusk (a top official with the Council on Foreign Relations who was then the head of the Rockefeller Foundation), Joseph Johnson (another Council leader who was head of the Carnegie Endowment), and John J. McCloy (a top Council leader who became Chairman of Chase Manhattan Bank in 1953 and was also Chairman of the Board of the Ford Foundation).[7]</p>
<p align="justify">The fact that the major American foundations – Rockefeller, Carnegie, and Ford – were so pivotal in the origins of the Bilderberg Group is not a mere coincidence. The foundations have, since their founding at the beginning of the 20th century, been the central institutions in constructing consensus among elites, and creating consent to power. They are, in short, the engines of social engineering: both for elite circles specifically, and society as a whole, more generally. As Professor of Education Robert F. Arnove wrote in his book Philanthropy and Cultural Imperialism:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">Foundations like Carnegie, Rockefeller, and Ford have a corrosive influence on a democratic society; they represent relatively unregulated and unaccountable concentrations of power and wealth which buy talent, promote causes, and, in effect, establish an agenda of what merits society’s attention. They serve as “cooling-out” agencies, delaying and preventing more radical, structural change. They help maintain an economic and political order, international in scope, which benefits the ruling-class interests of philanthropists and philanthropoids – a system which&#8230; has worked against the interests of minorities, the working class, and Third World peoples.[8]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">These foundations had been central in promoting the ideology of ‘globalism’ that laid the groundwork for organizations such as the Council on Foreign Relations and the Bilderberg Group to exist. The Rockefeller Foundation, in particular, supported several organizations that promoted a ‘liberal internationalist’ philosophy, the aim of which:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">was to support a foreign policy within a new world order that was to feature the United States as the leading power – a programme defined by the Rockefeller Foundation as ‘disinterested’, ‘objective’ and even ‘non-political’&#8230; The construction of a new internationalist consensus required the conscious, targeted funding of individuals and organizations who questioned and undermined the supporters of the ‘old order’ while simultaneously promoting the ‘new’.[9]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">The major foundations funded and created not only policy-oriented institutes such as think tanks, but they were also pivotal in the organization and construction of universities and education itself, in particular, the study of ‘international relations.’[10] The influence of foundations over education and universities and thus, ‘knowledge’ itself, is unparalleled. As noted in the book, Philanthropy and Cultural Imperialism:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">The power of the foundation is not that of dictating what will be studied. Its power consists in defining professional and intellectual parameters, in determining who will receive support to study what subjects in what settings. And the foundation’s power resides in suggesting certain types of activities it favors and is willing to support. As [political theorist and economist Harold] Laski noted, “the foundations do not control, simply because, in the direct and simple sense of the word, there is no need for them to do so. They have only to indicate the immediate direction of their minds for the whole university world to discover that it always meant to gravitate to that angle of the intellectual compass.”[11]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">The major philanthropic foundations created by America’s ‘robber baron’ industrialists and bankers were established not to benefit mankind, as was their stated purpose, but to benefit the bankers and industrialist elites in order to engage in social engineering. Through banks, these powerful families controlled the global economy; through think tanks, they manage the political and foreign policy establishments; and through foundations, they engineer society itself according to their own designs and interests. Through these foundations, elites have come to shape the processes, ideas and institutions of education, thus ensuring their continued hegemony over society through the production and control of knowledge. The educational institutions train future elites for government, economics, sciences, and other professional environments, as well as producing the academics that make up the principle component of think tanks, such as the Bilderberg Group.</p>
<p align="justify">Foundations effectively “blur boundaries” between the public and private sectors, while simultaneously effecting the separation of such areas in the study of social sciences. This boundary erosion between public and private spheres “adds feudal elements to our purported democracy, yet it has not been resisted, protested, or even noted much by political elites or social scientists.”[12] Zbigniew Brzezinski, foreign policy strategist, former director of the Council on Foreign Relations, Bilderberg member and co-founder with David Rockefeller of the Trilateral Commission, wrote that the blurring of boundaries “serves United States world dominance”:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">As the imitation of American ways gradually pervades the world, it creates a more congenial setting for the exercise of the indirect and seemingly consensual American hegemony. And as in the case of the domestic American system, that hegemony involves a complex structure of interlocking institutions and procedures, designed to generate consensus and obscure asymmetries in power and influence.[13]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">In 1915, a Congressional investigation into the power of philanthropic foundations took place, named the Walsh Commission, which warned that, “the power of wealth could overwhelm democratic culture and politics.”[14] The Final Report of the Walsh Commission “suggested that foundations would be more likely to pursue their own ideology in society than social objectivity.”[15] In this context, we can come to understand the evolution of the Bilderberg Group as an international think tank aimed at constructing consensus and entrenching ideology among the elite.</p>
<p align="justify">At their first meeting, Bilderbergers covered the following broad areas, which remained focal points of discussion for successive meetings: Communism and the Soviet Union; Dependent areas and peoples overseas; Economic policies and problems; and European integration and the European Defense Community.[16]</p>
<p align="justify">Nearly every single American participant in the Bilderberg meetings was also a member of the Council on Foreign Relations. Among the notable American members of the Bilderberg Group in its early years were David Rockefeller, Dean Rusk, John J. McCloy, George McGhee, George Ball, Walt Whitman Rostow, McGeorge Bundy, Arthur Dean, and Paul Nitze. As Political Scientist Stephen Gill wrote, “Prominent in the American section were the network of Rockefeller interests.”[17]</p>
<p align="justify">Certainly, while Rothschild interests have remained in the Bilderberg Group, as evidenced by Edmond de Rothschild having been a member of the Steering Committee, and Franco Bernabe, Vice Chairman of Rothschild Europe being a current Steering Committee member,[18] the Rockefeller interests seem to be most dominant. Not only is David Rockefeller sitting as the single individual of the Member Advisory Group of the Steering Committee, but close Rockefeller confidantes have long served on the Steering Committee and been affiliated with the organization, such as: Sharon Percy Rockefeller; George Ball, a long-time leader in the Council on Foreign Relations, who was Undersecretary of State for Economic Affairs in the Kennedy and Johnson administrations; Henry Kissinger, long-time Rockefeller aide and American imperial strategist; Zbigniew Brzezinski, who co-founded the Trilateral Commission with David Rockefeller; Joseph E. Johnson, former U.S. State Department official and President of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace; John J. McCloy, former Chairman the Council on Foreign Relations (superceded by David Rockefeller), former Assistant Secretary of War, Chairman of Chase Manhattan Bank (where he was superceded by David Rockefeller), former Trustee of the Rockefeller Foundation, Chairman of the Ford Foundation, and President of the World Bank; and James Wolfensohn, former President of the World Bank and Trustee of the Rockefeller Foundation.</p>
<p align="justify">One current Steering Committee member, who is representative of not only a continuation of Rockefeller interests, but also of the continuing influence and role of the major foundations is Jessica T. Matthews. She is President of the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, who had served on the National Security Council under Zbigniew Brzezinski, was a senior fellow at the Council on Foreign Relations (at which David Rockefeller remains as Honorary Chairman), is a member of the Trilateral Commission, is a trustee of the Rockefeller Foundation, and has served on the boards of the Brookings Institution, the Rockefeller Brothers Fund and the Joyce Foundation.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Bilderberg and the European Union</strong></p>
<p align="justify">Joseph Retinger, one of the founders of the Bilderberg Group, was also one of the original architects of the European Common Market and a leading intellectual champion of European integration. In 1946, he told the Royal Institute of International Affairs (the British counterpart and sister organization of the Council on Foreign Relations), that Europe needed to create a federal union and for European countries to “relinquish part of their sovereignty.” Retinger was a founder of the European Movement (EM), a lobbying organization dedicated to creating a federal Europe. Retinger secured financial support for the European Movement from powerful US financial interests such as the Council on Foreign Relations and the Rockefellers.[19] Important to note is that following World War II, the CFR’s main finances came from the Carnegie Corporation, Ford Foundation and most especially, the Rockefeller Foundation.[20]</p>
<p align="justify">Apart from Retinger, the founder of the Bilderberg Group and the European Movement, another ideological founder of European integration was Jean Monnet, who founded the Action Committee for a United States of Europe (ACUE), an organization dedicated to promoting European integration, and he was also the major promoter and first president of the European Coal and Steel Community (ECSC), the precursor to the European Common Market.[21]</p>
<p align="justify">Declassified documents (released in 2001) showed that “the US intelligence community ran a campaign in the Fifties and Sixties to build momentum for a united Europe. It funded and directed the European federalist movement.”[22] The documents revealed that, “America was working aggressively behind the scenes to push Britain into a European state. One memorandum, dated July 26, 1950, gives instructions for a campaign to promote a fully-fledged European parliament. It is signed by Gen William J Donovan, head of the American wartime Office of Strategic Services, precursor of the CIA.” Further, “Washington&#8217;s main tool for shaping the European agenda was the American Committee for a United Europe, created in 1948. The chairman was Donovan, ostensibly a private lawyer by then,” and “the vice-chairman was Allen Dulles, the CIA director in the Fifties. The board included Walter Bedell Smith, the CIA&#8217;s first director, and a roster of ex-OSS figures and officials who moved in and out of the CIA. The documents show that ACUE financed the European Movement, the most important federalist organisation in the post-war years.” Interestingly, “the leaders of the European Movement &#8211; Retinger, the visionary Robert Schuman and the former Belgian prime minister Paul-Henri Spaak &#8211; were all treated as hired hands by their American sponsors. The US role was handled as a covert operation. ACUE&#8217;s funding came from the Ford and Rockefeller foundations as well as business groups with close ties to the US government.”[23]</p>
<p align="justify">The European Coal and Steel Community was formed in 1951, and signed by France, West Germany, Italy, Belgium, Luxembourg and the Netherlands. Newly released documents from the 1955 Bilderberg meeting show that a main topic of discussion was “European Unity,” and that “the discussion affirmed complete support for the idea of integration and unification from the representatives of all the six nations of the Coal and Steel Community present at the conference.” Further, “A European speaker expressed concern about the need to achieve a common currency, and indicated that in his view this necessarily implied the creation of a central political authority.” Interestingly, “a United States participant confirmed that the United States had not weakened in its enthusiastic support for the idea of integration, although there was considerable diffidence in America as to how this enthusiasm should be manifested. Another United States participant urged his European friends to go ahead with the unification of Europe with less emphasis upon ideological considerations and, above all, to be practical and work fast.”[24] Thus, at the 1955 Bilderberg Group meeting, they set as a primary agenda, the creation of a European common market.[25]</p>
<p align="justify">In 1957, two years later, the Treaty of Rome was signed, which created the European Economic Community (EEC), also known as the European Community. Over the decades, various other treaties were signed, and more countries joined the European Community. In 1992, the Maastricht Treaty was signed, which created the European Union and led to the creation of the Euro. The European Monetary Institute was created in 1994, the European Central Bank was founded in 1998, and the Euro was launched in 1999. Etienne Davignon, Chairman of the Bilderberg Group and former EU Commissioner, revealed in March of 2009 that the Euro was debated and planned at Bilderberg conferences.[26]</p>
<p align="justify">The European Constitution (renamed the Lisbon Treaty) was a move towards creating a European superstate, creating an EU foreign minister, and with it, coordinated foreign policy, with the EU taking over the seat of Britain on the UN Security Council, representing all EU member states, forcing the nations to “actively and unreservedly” follow an EU foreign policy; set out the framework to create an EU defence policy, as an appendage to or separate from NATO; the creation of a European Justice system, with the EU defining “minimum standards in defining offences and setting sentences,” and creates common asylum and immigration policy; and it would also hand over to the EU the power to “ensure co-ordination of economic and employment policies”; and EU law would supercede all law of the member states, thus making the member nations relative to mere provinces within a centralized federal government system.[27]</p>
<p align="justify">The Constitution was largely written up by Valéry Giscard d’Estaing, former President of the French Republic from 1974 to 1981. Giscard d’Estaing also happens to be a member of the Bidlerberg Group, the Trilateral Commission, and is also a close friend of Henry Kissinger, having co-authored papers with him.</p>
<p align="justify">The Treaty, passed in 2009, created the position of President of the European Council, who represents the EU on the world stage and leads the Council, which determines the political direction of the EU. The first President of the European Council is Herman Van Rompuy, former Prime Minister of Belgium. On November 12, 2009, a small Bilderberg meeting took place, hosted by Viscount Etienne Davignon (Chairman of the Bilderberg Group), and including “international policymakers and industrialists,” among them, Henry Kissinger. Herman Von Rompuy “attended the Bilderberg session to audition for the European job, calling for a new system of levies to fund the EU and replace the perennial EU budget battles.”[28] Following his selection as President, Van Rompuy gave a speech in which he stated, “We are going through exceptionally difficult times: the financial crisis and its dramatic impact on employment and budgets, the climate crisis which threatens our very survival; a period of anxiety, uncertainty, and lack of confidence. Yet, these problems can be overcome by a joint effort in and between our countries. 2009 is also the first year of global governance with the establishment of the G20 in the middle of the financial crisis; the climate conference in Copenhagen is another step towards the global management of our planet.”[29]</p>
<p align="justify">As indicated from leaks of the recent 2011 Bilderberg meeting in Switzerland, the euro-zone is in a major crisis, and Bilderberg members are struggling to keep the house of glass from shattering to pieces. One major subject discussed at this year’s meeting, according to Bilderberg investigative journalist, Daniel Estulin (who reportedly has inside sources in the meetings who leak information, which has proved quite accurate in the past), the Bilderberg meeting discussed the situation of Greece, which is likely to only get worse, with another bailout on the horizon, continuing social unrest, and a possible abandonment of the euro. The problems of Greece, Ireland and the wider global economy as a whole were featured in this year’s discussions.[30] Representatives from Greece this year included George Papaconstantinou, the Greek Minister of Finance, among several bankers and businessmen.[31]</p>
<p align="justify">Among the EU power players attending this years meeting was the first President of the European Council, Herman van Rompuy, who was appointed as President following an invitation to a private Bilderberg meeting in November of 2009, at which he gave a speech advocating for EU-wide taxes, allowing the EU to not rely exclusively upon its member nations, but have its “own resources.”[32] Van Rompuy, who previously stated that, “2009 is also the first year of global governance,” is no surprise guest at Bilderberg. Other key EU officials who attended this year’s meeting were Joaquín Almunia, a Vice President of the European Commission; Frans van Daele, Chief of Staff to European Council President Van Rompuy; Neelie Kroes, a Vice President of the European Commission; and of course, Jean-Claude Trichet, President of the European Central Bank.[33]</p>
<p align="justify">As with each meeting, there is the official list of participants, and then there are those participants who attend, but whose names are not listed in any official release. At this year’s meeting, some reports indicate that attendees whose names were not listed included NATO Secretary-General Anders Rasmussen, which is not surprising considering that the NATO Secretary-General has generally been present at every meeting; Jose Luis Zapatero, Spanish Prime Minister; Angela Merkel, German Chancellor; Bill Gates, Co-Chairman of Bill and Melinda Gates Foundation and former Microsoft CEO; and Robert Gates, the outgoing U.S. Secretary of Defense.[34] The Guardian also reported that these “unofficial guests” were spotted at the conference or had their attendance ‘leaked’.[35] Angela Merkel has reportedly attended meetings in the past, which would make her current attendance less than surprising.[36]</p>
<p align="justify">At the recent meeting, EU officials were discussing the need for the EU to undertake a “massive power grab” in the face of the massive economic crisis facing Europe and indeed the world. Without such a power grab, the euro and indeed the Union itself would likely collapse; a scenario anathema to everything the Bilderberg group has tried to achieve in its 57-year history. The aim, put simply, would be to have the EU police itself and the nations of the Union, with the ability to punish nations for not following the rules, and as one Bilderberger reportedly stated at the meeting, “What we are heading towards a form of real economic government.”[37] Now while this statement cannot be independently verified, there is much documentation within the public record that several of the European attendees at the meeting could have easily made such a statement.</p>
<p align="justify">Prior to the meeting, European Central Bank President, Jean-Claude Trichet, “said governments should consider setting up a finance ministry for the 17-nation currency region as the bloc struggles to contain a region-wide sovereign debt crisis.” Trichet asked: “Would it be too bold, in the economic field, with a single market, a single currency and a single central bank, to envisage a ministry of finance of the union?” Further in line with this thought, and with the ideas laid out in the Bilderberg meeting in favour of a ‘power grab’, Trichet said he supports “giving the European Union powers to veto the budget measures of countries that go ‘harmfully astray,’ though that would require a change to EU Treaties.” Such a finance ministry would, according to Trichet, “exert direct responsibilities in at least three domains”:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">They would include &#8220;first, the surveillance of both fiscal policies and competitiveness policies&#8221; and &#8220;direct responsibilities&#8221; for countries in fiscal distress, he said. It would also carry out &#8220;all the typical responsibilities of the executive branches as regards the union&#8217;s integrated financial sector, so as to accompany the full integration of financial services, and third, the representation of the union confederation in international financial institutions.&#8221;[38]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Last year, Belgian Prime Minister Yves Leterme endorsed such an idea of a ‘European Economic Government’ when he stated:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">The idea of strengthened economic government has been put on the table and will make progress. In the end, the European Debt Agency or something like it will become a reality. I’m convinced of this. It’s about Europe’s financial stability and it’s not an ideological debate about federalism. I myself am a federalist. But more integration and deeper integration are simply logical consequences of having a single currency.[39]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">This is of course, not surprising, considering that Leterme’s predecessor is Herman van Rompuy, the current Bilderberg participant and EU President, a strong-headed advocate of an ‘economic government’ and ‘global governance.’ The plans for an ‘economic government’ require the strong commitment of both France and Germany, which may explain Merkel’s reported appearance at Bilderberg. In March of 2010, the German and French governments released a draft outline that would “strengthen financial policy coordination in the EU.” The plan, seen by German publication Der Spiegel, “calls for increased monitoring of individual member states&#8217; competitiveness so that action can be taken early on should problems emerge.” Luxembourg Prime Minister Jean-Claude Juncker stated in response to the plan, “We need a European economic government in the sense of strengthened coordination of economic policy within the euro zone.”[40] In December of 2010, German Finance Minister Wolfgang Schaeuble stated that, “In 10 years we will have a structure that corresponds much stronger to what one describes as political union.”[41]</p>
<p align="justify">As reported by the German press in early 2011, Germany and France were split on several aspects of such an ‘economic government.’ However, as Merkel stated, “We have obviously been discussing the issue of an economic government for a long time,” and that, “What we are currently envisioning goes yet another step in this direction.” Yet, the differences between the two approaches are mainly as follows:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">France would prefer to see the European Council, which comprises the heads of state and government of the EU&#8217;s member states, turned into a kind of economic government. Since only euro-zone member countries would be involved initially, French Finance Minister [and past Bilderberg participant] Christine Lagarde has dubbed the project &#8220;16 plus.&#8221;</p>
<p align="justify">The Germans are focused on completely different things. Their preference would be to see the current rescue fund replaced by the so-called European Stability Mechanism in 2013. According to this arrangement, in return for any help, cash-strapped countries would have to subject themselves to a strict cost-cutting regimen.[42]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Mario Draghi is the current President of the Bank of Italy, as well as a board member of the Bank for International Settlements – the BIS (the central bank to the world’s central banks). In an interview posted on the website of the BIS in March of 2010, Mario Draghi stated that in response to the Greek crisis, “In the euro area we need a stronger economic governance providing for more coordinated structural reforms and more discipline.”[43] Mario Draghi also attended the 2009 conference of the Bilderberg Group.[44] Perhaps unsurprisingly, Mario Draghi has been backed by the euro-area finance ministers to be the successor to Jean-Claude Trichet at the European Central Bank, who is due to step down in October of 2011.[45]</p>
<p align="justify">Certainly, the objective of a ‘European economic government’ will continue throughout the coming years, especially as the economic crisis continues. As Dominique Strauss-Kahn, outgoing Managing Director of the IMF and long-time Bilderberg participant stated, “crisis is an opportunity.”[46] Bilderberg, while not omnipotent by any means, will do all in its ability to prevent the collapse of the euro or the ending of the European Union. Bilderberg has, after all, from its very beginning, made ‘European integration’ one of its central objectives. In an official biography of Bilderberg-founder and long-time Chairman Prince Bernhard, the Bilderberg Group was credited as “the birthplace of the European Community.”[47]</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Regime Change at the IMF?</strong></p>
<p align="justify">Christine Lagarde, the French Finance Minister who has been pivotal in the process towards drafting and proposing a ‘European economic government’, is also considered the front-runner for the job of Managing Director of the IMF. The Managing Director of the IMF is always in attendance at Bilderberg meetings, except for this year, considering outgoing director Dominique Strauss-Kahn is facing sexual assault charges in New York; yet, the top job is usually set aside for those who have been invited to at least one meeting of the Bilderberg Group. While the race has yet to finish, perhaps it is noteworthy that Christine Lagarde attended a Bilderberg meeting in 2009.[48] Could this make her the supreme choice, or is there a surprise in the near future?</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>A Place for China in the New World Order?</strong></p>
<p align="justify">Investigative journalist Daniel Estulin’s report of inside sources in this year’s meeting indicated a rather extensive discussion on the role of China, which is hardly surprising, considering this has been a central topic of discussion in meetings for a number of years. China emerged in discussions on Pakistan, as China has become increasingly Pakistan’s closest economic and strategic ally, a trend that is continuing as America continues to spread the Afghan war into neighbouring Pakistan. China is also a major player in Africa, threatening the West’s stranglehold over the continent, in particular through the World Bank and IMF. Most importantly, however, and not unrelated to its role in Pakistan and Africa, China has become the greatest economic competitor for the United States in the world, and as the IMF even admitted recently, its economy is expected to surpass that of the United States by 2016. Bilderberg paid attention to this issue not simply as a financial-economic consideration, but as a massive geopolitical transition in the world: “the biggest story of our time.”[49]</p>
<p align="justify">What made the discussion on China at this year’s meeting unique was that it actually included two attendees from China for the first time ever. The two guests were Huang Yiping, a prominent economics professor at Peking University (China’s Harvard), and Fu Ying, China’s Vice Minister of Foreign Affairs.[50] This is especially unusual and telling of the importance of the discussion at hand, considering that Bilderberg is exclusively a European and North American (Atlantic) organization, and in the past, when Bilderberg memebers David Rockefeller and Zbigniew Brzezinski suggested Japan be allowed to join in 1972, the European rejected the proposition, and instead the Trilateral Commission was formed in 1973 to integrate the elites of Western Europe, North America, and Japan. The Trilateral Commission eventually expanded the Japanese section of the group into a ‘Pacific Asian Group’ in 2000 to include not only Japan, but South Korea, Australia, New Zealand, Indonesia, Malaysia, the Philippines, Singapore, and Thailand.</p>
<p align="justify">In 2009 the G20 was endowed with the task of ‘managing’ the global economic crisis – to include the ‘emerging’ economic giants, notably China and India – and as Bilderberg member Jean-Claude Trichet stated, this marked “the emergence of the G20 as the prime group for global economic governance.”[51] That same year the newly-appointed European Union President Herman van Rompuy declared to be “the first year of global governance.” No surprise then, that also in 2009, China and India were invited as official members of the Trilateral Commission.[52] This indicates a growing role for India and especially China in global affairs, and participation in Bilderberg meetings emphasizes the aim to not alienate China from the established institutions, ideologies and systems of global power, but to more fully integrate China within that system. The aim of the global elite, perhaps best represented by Bilderberg, is not to allow for the collapse of the American empire and the rise of a new one; rather, it is to manage the collapse of American hegemony into an entirely new system of global governance. This ‘big idea’ is not possible without the participation of China, and thus, as Bilderberg has long been saturated with the ideology of ‘global governance,’ it cannot be seen as too surprising to see China invited. Perhaps the surprise should be that it simply took this long.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Is Bilderberg Building a Global Government?</strong></p>
<p align="justify">Jon Ronson wrote an article for the Guardian paper in which he managed to interview key members of the Bilderberg Group for an exposé on the organization, attempting to dismantle the “conspiracy theories” surrounding the secrecy of the meetings. However, through his interviews, important information regarding the social importance of the group continued to emerge. Ronson attempted to contact David Rockefeller, but only managed to reach his press secretary who told Ronson that the “conspiracy theories” about Rockefeller and “global think-tanks such as Bilderberg in general” left David Rockefeller “thoroughly fed up.” According to his press secretary, “Mr. Rockefeller&#8217;s conclusion was that this was a battle between rational and irrational thought. Rational people favoured globalisation. Irrational people preferred nationalism.”[53]</p>
<p align="justify">While dismissing “conspiracy theories” that Bilderberg “runs the world,” Ronson did explain that the Bilderberg members he interviewed admitted, “that international affairs had, from time to time, been influenced by these sessions.” As Denis Healey, a 30-year member of the Steering Committee, himself pointedly explained:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">To say we were striving for a one-world government is exaggerated, but not wholly unfair. Those of us in Bilderberg felt we couldn&#8217;t go on forever fighting one another for nothing and killing people and rendering millions homeless. So we felt that a single community throughout the world would be a good thing&#8230; Bilderberg is a way of bringing together politicians, industrialists, financiers and journalists. Politics should involve people who aren&#8217;t politicians. We make a point of getting along younger politicians who are obviously rising, to bring them together with financiers and industrialists who offer them wise words. It increases the chance of having a sensible global policy.[54]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Will Hutton, the former Editor of the Observer, who had been invited to Bilderberg meetings in the past, once famously referred to the group as “the high priests of globalization.”[55] Hutton has said that “people take part in these networks in order to influence the way the world works,” and to create, as he put it, “the international common sense” of policy. The Chairman of the Bilderberg Group, Viscount Etienne Davignon, stated that, “I don&#8217;t think (we are) a global ruling class because I don&#8217;t think a global ruling class exists. I simply think it&#8217;s people who have influence interested to speak to other people who have influence.”[56]</p>
<p align="justify">G. William Domhoff is a professor of Psychology and Sociology at the University of California, Santa Cruz, and has written about the Bilderberg Group. In an interview, he discounted the notion that the study of such groups is relegated to the realm of conspiracy theory, and instead explained that he studies “how elites strive to develop consensus, which is through such publicly observable organizations as corporate boards and the policy-planning network, which can be studied in detail, and which are reported on in the media in at least a halfway accurate manner.”[57]</p>
<p align="justify">Bilderbergers have long been advocates of global governance and ‘global government,’ and ‘crisis’ is always an excellent means through which to advance their agendas. Just as the Greek crisis has stepped up calls for the formation of a ‘European economic government,’ an idea which has been sought out for much longer than Greece has been in crisis, so too is the global economic crisis an excuse to advance the cause of ‘global economic governance.’ Outgoing Managing Director of the IMF, Dominique Strauss-Kahn, stated in May of 2010 that, “crisis is an opportunity,” and he called for “a new global currency issued by a global central bank, with robust governance and institutional features,” and that the “global central bank could also serve as a lender of last resort.” However, he stated, “I fear we are still very far from that level of global collaboration.”[58] Unless, of course, the world continues to descend into economic and financial ruin, as any astute economic observer would likely warn is taking place.</p>
<p align="justify">Following the April 2009 G20 summit, “plans were announced for implementing the creation of a new global currency to replace the US dollar’s role as the world reserve currency.” Point 19 of the communiqué released by the G20 at the end of the Summit stated, “We have agreed to support a general SDR allocation which will inject $250bn (£170bn) into the world economy and increase global liquidity.” SDRs, or Special Drawing Rights, are “a synthetic paper currency issued by the International Monetary Fund.” As the Telegraph reported, “the G20 leaders have activated the IMF&#8217;s power to create money and begin global ‘quantitative easing’. In doing so, they are putting a de facto world currency into play. It is outside the control of any sovereign body.”[59] The Washington Post reported that the IMF is poised to transform “into a veritable United Nations for the global economy”:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">It would have vastly expanded authority to act as a global banker to governments rich and poor. And with more flexibility to effectively print its own money, it would have the ability to inject liquidity into global markets in a way once limited to major central banks, including the U.S. Federal Reserve&#8230; the IMF is all but certain to take a central role in managing the world economy. As a result, Washington is poised to become the power center for global financial policy, much as the United Nations has long made New York the world center for diplomacy.[60]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">While the IMF is pushed to the forefront of the global currency agenda, the Bank for International Settlements (BIS) remains as the true authority in terms of ‘global governance’ overall. As the IMF’s magazine, Finance and Development, stated in 2009, “the Bank for International Settlements (BIS), established in 1930, is the central and the oldest focal point for coordination of global governance arrangements.”[61] Jean-Claude Trichet, President of the European Central Bank (ECB) and long-time Bilderberg participant, gave a speech at the Council on Foreign Relations in April of 2010 in which he explained that, “the significant transformation of global governance that we are engineering today is illustrated by three examples”:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">First, the emergence of the G20 as the prime group for global economic governance at the level of ministers, governors and heads of state or government. Second, the establishment of the Global Economy Meeting of central bank governors under the auspices of the BIS as the prime group for the governance of central bank cooperation. And third, the extension of Financial Stability Board membership to include all the systemic emerging market economies.[62]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">In concluding his speech, Trichet emphasized that, “global governance is of the essence to improve decisively the resilience of the global financial system.”[63] The following month, Trichet spoke at the Bank of Korea, where he said, “central bank cooperation is part of a more general trend that is reshaping global governance, and which has been spurred by the global financial crisis,” and that, “it is therefore not surprising that the crisis has led to even better recognition of their increased economic importance and need for full integration into global governance.” Once again, Trichet identified the BIS and its “various fora” – such as the Global Economy Meeting and the Financial Stability Board – as the “main channel” for central bank cooperation.[64]</p>
<p align="justify">For more on ‘Global Government’ and the global economic crisis, see: Andrew Gavin Marshall, <a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=21632" target="_new">“Crisis is an Opportunity”: Engineering a Global Depression to Create a Global Government,</a> Global Research, 26 October 2010.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Rockefeller’s Dream</strong></p>
<p align="justify">David Rockefeller celebrated his 96th birthday during last weekend’s Bilderberg meeting, and is one of if not the only remaining original founders of the group in 1954. If the Bilderberg Group represents the “high priests of globalization,” then David Rockefeller is the ‘Pope’.</p>
<p align="justify">James Wolfensohn represents the importance of the Rockefellers to not only America, but to the whole process of globalization. James D. Wolfensohn, an Australian national, was President of the World Bank from 1995-2005, and has since founded and leads his private firm, Wolfensohn &#38; Company, LLC. He has also been a long-time Steering Committee member of the Bilderberg Group, and has served as an Honorary Trustee of the Brookings Institution, a major American think tank, as well as a Trustee of the Rockefeller Foundation, and is a member of the Council on Foreign Relations. Wolfensohn’s father, Hyman, was employed by James Armand de Rothschild of the Rothschild banking dynasty, after whom James was named. His father taught him how to “cultivate mentors, friends and contacts of influence.”[65] Wolfensohn rose quickly through the financial world, and as his father had lived in service to the Rothschild’s – the dominant family of the 19th century – James Wolfensohn lived in service to the Rockefellers, arguably the dominant family of the 20th century. On the event of David Rockefeller’s 90th birthday, James Wolfensohn, speaking at the Council on Foreign Relations, stated:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">[T]he person who had perhaps the greatest influence on my life professionally in this country, and I’m very happy to say personally there afterwards, is David Rockefeller, who first met me at the Harvard Business School in 1957 or ‘58&#8230; [At the beginning of the 20th century] as we looked at the world, a family, the Rockefeller family, decided that the issues were not just national for the United States, were not just related to the rich countries. And where, extraordinarily and amazingly, David’s grandfather set up the Rockefeller Foundation, the purpose of which was to take a global view.</p>
<p align="justify">&#8230; So the Rockefeller family, in this last 100 years, has contributed in a way that is quite extraordinary to the development in that period and has given ample focus to the issues of development with which I have been associated. In fact, it’s fair to say that there has been no other single family influence greater than the Rockefeller’s in the whole issue of globalization and in the whole issue of addressing the questions which, in some ways, are still before us today. And for that David, we’re deeply grateful to you and for your own contribution in carrying these forward in the way that you did.[66]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">David Rockefeller has been even less humble (but perhaps more honest) in his assertion of his family’s and his own personal role in shaping the world. In his 2002 book, Memoirs, David Rockefeller wrote:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">For more than a century ideological extremists at either end of the political spectrum have seized upon well-publicized incidents such as my encounter with Castro to attack the Rockefeller family for the inordinate influence they claim we wield over American political and economic institutions. Some even believe we are part of a secret cabal working against the best interests of the United States, characterizing my family and me as &#8216;internationalists&#8217; and of conspiring with others around the world to build a more integrated global political and economic structure&#8211;one world, if you will. If that&#8217;s the charge, I stand guilty, and I am proud of it.[67]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">As if this admission was not quite enough, at a 1991 meeting of the Bilderberg group, David Rockefeller was quoted as saying:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">We are grateful to the Washington Post, The New York Times, Time Magazine and other great publications whose directors have attended our meetings and respected their promises of discretion for almost 40 years. It would have been impossible for us to develop our plan for the world if we had been subjected to the lights of publicity during those years. But the world is more sophisticated and prepared to march towards a world government. The supranational sovereignty of an intellectual elite and world bankers is surely preferable to the national auto-determination practiced in past centuries.[68]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">So, happy 96th birthday, Mr. David Rockefeller! But I am sorry to say (or perhaps not so sorry) that while the mainstream media have “respected their promises of discretion,” the new media – the alternative media – have not. As you said yourself, “It would have been impossible for us to develop our plan for the world if we had been subjected to the lights of publicity during those years,” it seems that the “lights of publicity” are now descending upon your “plan for the world,” making it all the more difficult to come to pass. Indeed, “the world is more sophisticated,” but not because the world is ‘ready’ for your plan, but because the world is getting ready to reject it. While national sovereignty certainly has problems and is hardly something I would consider ‘ideal’, the “supranational sovereignty of an intellectual elite and world bankers” is about the worst scenario one could imagine. So as a birthday present to you, Mr. Rockefeller, I promise (and I am sure that I am speaking for a great many more than simply myself) that I will continue to expose your “plans for the world,” so that your dream – and our nightmare – will never become a reality. The light will shine, and in due time, the people will be ready to follow its path.</p>
<p><em><strong></strong></em><span style="font-family:Times New Roman;"><em><br />
</em></span></p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Notes</strong></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[1]        Jon Ronson, Who pulls the strings? (part 3), The Guardian, 10 March 2001:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/books/2001/mar/10/extract1"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.guardian.co.uk/books/2001/mar/10/extract1</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[2]        CBC, Informal forum or global conspiracy? CBC News Online: June 13, 2006:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.cbc.ca/news/background/bilderberg-group/"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.cbc.ca/news/background/bilderberg-group/</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[3]        Holly Sklar, ed., Trilateralism: The Trilateral Commission and Elite Planning for World Management. (South End Press: 1980), 161-171</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[4]        Glen McGregor, Secretive power brokers meeting coming to Ottawa? Ottawa Citizen: May 24, 2006:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.canada.com/topics/news/world/story.html?id=ff614eb8-02cc-41a3-a42d-30642def1421&#38;k=62840"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.canada.com/topics/news/world/story.html?id=ff614eb8-02cc-41a3-a42d-30642def1421&#38;k=62840</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[5]        Stephen Gill, American Hegemony and the Trilateral Commission (Cambridge University Press: New York, 1990), page 129.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[6]        Bruno Waterfield, Dutch Prince Bernhard &#8216;was member of Nazi party&#8217;, The Telegraph, 5 March 2010:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/europe/netherlands/7377402/Dutch-Prince-Bernhard-was-member-of-Nazi-party.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/europe/netherlands/7377402/Dutch-Prince-Bernhard-was-member-of-Nazi-party.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[7]        Joan Roelofs, Foundations and Public Policy: The Mask of Pluralism (New York: State University of New York Press, 2003), page 52.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[8]        Robert F. Arnove, ed., Philanthropy and Cultural Imperialism: The Foundations at Home and Abroad (Indiana University Press: Boston, 1980), page 1.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[9]        Inderjeet Parmar, “‘To Relate Knowledge and Action’: The Impact of the Rockefeller Foundation on Foreign Policy Thinking During America’s Rise to Globalism 1939-1945,” Minerva (Vol. 40, 2002), page 246.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[10]      Ibid, page 247.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[11]      Robert F. Arnove, ed., Philanthropy and Cultural Imperialism: The Foundations at Home and Abroad (Indiana University Press, 1980), page 319.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[12]      Joan Roelofs, “Foundations and Collaboration,” Critical Sociology, Vol. 33, 2007, page 480</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[13]      Ibid, page 481.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[14]      Ibid, page 483.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[15]      Erkki Berndtson, “Review Essay: Power of Foundations and the American Ideology,” Critical Sociology, Vol. 33, 2007, page 580</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[16]      Joan Roelofs, Foundations and Public Policy: The Mask of Pluralism (New York: State University of New York Press, 2003), page 52.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[17]      Stephen Gill, American Hegemony and the Trilateral Commission (Cambridge University Press: New York, 1990), pages 131-132.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[18]      Bilderberg Meetings, Former Steering Committee Members, BilderbergMeetings.org:<br />
</span><a href="http://bilderbergmeetings.org/former-steering-committee-members.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://bilderbergmeetings.org/former-steering-committee-members.html</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;">; Steering Committee:<br />
</span><a href="http://bilderbergmeetings.org/governance.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://bilderbergmeetings.org/governance.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[19]      Holly Sklar, ed., Trilateralism: The Trilateral Commission and Elite Planning for World Management. (South End Press: 1980), 161-162</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[20]      CFR, The First Transformation. CFR History:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.cfr.org/about/history/cfr/first_transformation.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.cfr.org/about/history/cfr/first_transformation.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[21]      William F. Jasper, Rogues&#8217; gallery of EU founders. The New American: July 12, 2004:<br />
</span><a href="http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_m0JZS/is_14_20/ai_n25093084/pg_1?tag=artBody;col1"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_m0JZS/is_14_20/ai_n25093084/pg_1?tag=artBody;col1</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[22]      Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, Euro-federalists financed by US spy chiefs. The Telegraph: June 19, 2001:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/europe/1356047/Euro-federalists-financed-by-US-spy-chiefs.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/europe/1356047/Euro-federalists-financed-by-US-spy-chiefs.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[23]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[24]      Bilderberg Group, GARMISCH-PARTENKIRCHEN CONFERENCE. The Bilderberg Group: September 23-25, 1955, page 7: </span></p>
<p align="justify"><a href="http://wikileaks.org/leak/bilderberg-meetings-report-1955.pdf"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://wikileaks.org/leak/bilderberg-meetings-report-1955.pdf</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[25]      Who are these Bilderbergers and what do they do? The Sunday Herald: May 30, 1999:<br />
</span><a href="http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_qn4156/is_19990530/ai_n13939252"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_qn4156/is_19990530/ai_n13939252</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[26]      Andrew Rettman, &#8216;Jury&#8217;s out&#8217; on future of Europe, EU doyen says. EUobserver: March 16, 2009:<br />
</span><a href="http://euobserver.com/9/27778"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://euobserver.com/9/27778</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[27]      Daily Mail, EU Constitution &#8211; the main points. The Daily Mail: June 19, 2004:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.dailymail.co.uk/news/article-307249/EU-Constitution--main-points.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.dailymail.co.uk/news/article-307249/EU-Constitution&#8211;main-points.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[28]      Ian Traynor, Who speaks for Europe? Criticism of &#8216;shambolic&#8217; process to fill key jobs. The Guardian, 17 November 2009:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/2009/nov/17/top-european-job-selection-process"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/2009/nov/17/top-european-job-selection-process</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[29]      Herman Van Rompuy, Speech Upon Accepting the EU Presidency, BBC News, 22 November 2009:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pzm_R3YBgPg"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pzm_R3YBgPg</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[30]      Daniel Estulin, Bilderberg Report 2011, DanielEstulin.com, 14 June 2011:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.danielestulin.com/2011/06/13/bilderberg-report-2011-informe-club-bilderberg-2011/"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.danielestulin.com/2011/06/13/bilderberg-report-2011-informe-club-bilderberg-2011/</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[31]      Bilderberg Meetings, Bilderberg 2011: List of Participants, BilderbergMeetings.org, June 2011:<br />
</span><a href="http://bilderbergmeetings.org/participants_2011.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://bilderbergmeetings.org/participants_2011.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[32]      Bruno Waterfield, EU Presidency candidate Herman Van Rompuy calls for new taxes, The Telegraph, 16 November 2009:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/europe/eu/6582837/EU-Presidency-candidate-Herman-Van-Rompuy-calls-for-new-taxes.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/europe/eu/6582837/EU-Presidency-candidate-Herman-Van-Rompuy-calls-for-new-taxes.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[33]      Bilderberg Meetings, Bilderberg 2011: List of Participants, BilderbergMeetings.org, June 2011: </span><a href="http://bilderbergmeetings.org/participants_2011.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;"></p>
<p>http://bilderbergmeetings.org/participants_2011.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[34]      PrisonPlanet, Exclusive: Unnamed Bilderberg Attendees Revealed, Gates Violates Logan Act, Prison Planet, 11 June 2011:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.prisonplanet.com/exclusive-unnamed-bilderberg-attendees-revealed.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.prisonplanet.com/exclusive-unnamed-bilderberg-attendees-revealed.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[35]      Charlie Skelton, Bilderberg 2011: The opposition steps up, The Guardian, 11 June 2011:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/blog/2011/jun/11/bilderberg-switzerland"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/blog/2011/jun/11/bilderberg-switzerland</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[36]      SwissInfo, World’s Powerful Bilderberg Group Meets In St Moritz, EurasiaReview, 9 June 2011:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.eurasiareview.com/worlds-powerful-bilderberg-group-meets-in-st-moritz-09062011/"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.eurasiareview.com/worlds-powerful-bilderberg-group-meets-in-st-moritz-09062011/</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[37]      Daniel Estulin, Bilderberg Report 2011, DanielEstulin.com, 14 June 2011:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.danielestulin.com/2011/06/13/bilderberg-report-2011-informe-club-bilderberg-2011/"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.danielestulin.com/2011/06/13/bilderberg-report-2011-informe-club-bilderberg-2011/</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[38]      Bloomberg, European Central Bank President Jean-Claude Trichet calls for Euro Finance Ministry, The Economic Times, 3 June 2011:<br />
</span><a href="http://articles.economictimes.indiatimes.com/2011-06-03/news/29617216_1_single-currency-jean-claude-trichet-budget"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://articles.economictimes.indiatimes.com/2011-06-03/news/29617216_1_single-currency-jean-claude-trichet-budget</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[39]      Daniel Hannan, European economic government is inevitable, Telegraph Blogs, 17 March 2010:<br />
</span><a href="http://blogs.telegraph.co.uk/news/danielhannan/100030219/european-economic-government-is-inevitable/"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://blogs.telegraph.co.uk/news/danielhannan/100030219/european-economic-government-is-inevitable/</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[40]      Spiegel, Plans for European Economic Government Gain Steam, Der Spiegel, 1 March 2011:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.spiegel.de/international/europe/0,1518,680955,00.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.spiegel.de/international/europe/0,1518,680955,00.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[41]      ANDREW WILLIS, Germany predicts EU &#8216;political union&#8217; in 10 years, EU Observer, 13 December 2010:<br />
</span><a href="http://euobserver.com/9/31485"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://euobserver.com/9/31485</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[42]      Peter Müller and Michael Sauga, France and Germany Split over Plans for European Economic Government, Der Spiegel, 3 January 2011:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.spiegel.de/international/europe/0,1518,737423,00.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.spiegel.de/international/europe/0,1518,737423,00.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[43]      Mario Draghi: “We need a European economic government” – interview in Handelsblatt, The Bank for International Settlements, March 2010:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.bis.org/review/r100325b.pdf"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.bis.org/review/r100325b.pdf</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[44]      Bilderberg Meetings, Participants 2009, BilderbergMeetings.org, May 2009:<br />
</span><a href="http://bilderbergmeetings.org/participants.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://bilderbergmeetings.org/participants.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[45]      Ecofin: Finance Ministers Back Mario Draghi To Lead ECB, The Wall Street Journal, 16 May 2011:<br />
</span><a href="http://online.wsj.com/article/BT-CO-20110516-715655.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://online.wsj.com/article/BT-CO-20110516-715655.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[46]      Dominique Strauss-Kahn, Concluding Remarks by Dominique Strauss-Kahn, Managing Director of the International Monetary Fund, at the High-Level Conference on the International Monetary System, Zurich, 11 May 2010:</span></p>
<p align="justify"><a href="http://www.imf.org/external/np/speeches/2010/051110.htm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.imf.org/external/np/speeches/2010/051110.htm</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[47]      Stephen Gill, American Hegemony and the Trilateral Commission (Cambridge University Press: New York, 1990), pages 131-132.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[48]      Bilderberg Meetings, Participants 2009, BilderbergMeetings.org, May 2009:<br />
</span><a href="http://bilderbergmeetings.org/participants.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://bilderbergmeetings.org/participants.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[49]      Daniel Estulin, Bilderberg Report 2011, DanielEstulin.com, 14 June 2011:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.danielestulin.com/2011/06/13/bilderberg-report-2011-informe-club-bilderberg-2011/"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.danielestulin.com/2011/06/13/bilderberg-report-2011-informe-club-bilderberg-2011/</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[50]      Bilderberg Meetings, Bilderberg 2011: List of Participants, BilderbergMeetings.org, June 2011:<br />
</span><a href="http://bilderbergmeetings.org/participants_2011.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://bilderbergmeetings.org/participants_2011.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[51]      Jean-Claude Trichet, Global Governance Today, Keynote address by Mr Jean-Claude Trichet, President of the European Central Bank, at the Council on Foreign Relations, New York, 26 April 2010:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.bis.org/review/r100428b.pdf"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.bis.org/review/r100428b.pdf</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[52]      The Trilateral Commission, About the Pacific Asian Group, May 2011:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.trilateral.org/go.cfm?do=Page.View&#38;pid=13"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.trilateral.org/go.cfm?do=Page.View&#38;pid=13</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[53]      Jon Ronson, Who pulls the strings? (part 2), The Guardian, 10 March 2001:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/books/2001/mar/10/extract"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.guardian.co.uk/books/2001/mar/10/extract</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[54]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[55]      Mark Oliver, The Bilderberg group, The Guardian, 4 June 2004:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/news/2004/jun/04/netnotes.markoliver"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.guardian.co.uk/news/2004/jun/04/netnotes.markoliver</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[56]      BBC, Inside the secretive Bilderberg Group, BBC News, 29 September 2005:<br />
</span><a href="http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/americas/4290944.stm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/americas/4290944.stm</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[57]      Chip Berlet, Interview: G. William Domhoff, New Internationalist, September 2004:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.publiceye.org/antisemitism/nw_domhoff.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.publiceye.org/antisemitism/nw_domhoff.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[58]      Dominique Strauss-Kahn, Concluding Remarks by Dominique Strauss-Kahn, Managing Director of the International Monetary Fund, at the High-Level Conference on the International Monetary System, Zurich, 11 May 2010:</span></p>
<p align="justify"><a href="http://www.imf.org/external/np/speeches/2010/051110.htm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.imf.org/external/np/speeches/2010/051110.htm</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[59]      Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, The G20 moves the world a step closer to a global currency. The Telegraph: April 3, 2009:</span></p>
<p align="justify"><a href="http://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/comment/ambroseevans_pritchard/5096524/The-G20-moves-the-world-a-step-closer-to-a-global-currency.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/comment/ambroseevans_pritchard/5096524/The-G20-moves-the-world-a-step-closer-to-a-global-currency.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[60]      Anthony Faiola, A Bigger, Bolder Role Is Imagined For the IMF, The Washington Post, 20 April 2009:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.washingtonpost.com/wp-dyn/content/article/2009/04/19/AR2009041902242.html?hpid=topnews"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.washingtonpost.com/wp-dyn/content/article/2009/04/19/AR2009041902242.html?hpid=topnews</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[61]      Amar Bhattacharya, A Tangled Web, Finance and Development, March 2009, Vol. 46, No. 1:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/fandd/2009/03/bhattacharya.htm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.imf.org/external/pubs/ft/fandd/2009/03/bhattacharya.htm</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[62]      Jean-Claude Trichet, Global Governance Today, Keynote address by Mr Jean-Claude Trichet, President of the European Central Bank, at the Council on Foreign Relations, New York, 26 April 2010:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.bis.org/review/r100428b.pdf"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.bis.org/review/r100428b.pdf</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[63]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[64]      Jean-Claude Trichet, Central bank cooperation after the global financial crisis, Video address by Jean-Claude Trichet, President of the European Central Bank, at the Bank of Korea International Conference 2010, Seoul, 31 May 2010:</span></p>
<p align="justify"><a href="http://www.ecb.int/press/key/date/2010/html/sp100531.en.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.ecb.int/press/key/date/2010/html/sp100531.en.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[65]      Michael Stutchbury, The man who inherited the Rothschild legend, The Australian, 30 October 2010:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.theaustralian.com.au/news/features/the-man-who-inherited-the-rothschild-legend/story-e6frg6z6-1225945329773"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.theaustralian.com.au/news/features/the-man-who-inherited-the-rothschild-legend/story-e6frg6z6-1225945329773</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[66]      James D. Wolfensohn, Council on Foreign Relations Special Symposium in honor of David Rockefeller’s 90th Birthday, The Council on Foreign Relations, 23 May 2005:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.cfr.org/world/council-foreign-relations-special-symposium-honor-david-rockefellers-90th-birthday/p8133"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.cfr.org/world/council-foreign-relations-special-symposium-honor-david-rockefellers-90th-birthday/p8133</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[67]      David Rockefeller, Memoirs (Random House, New York: 2002), pages 404 &#8211; 405.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[68]      Gordon Laxer, “Radical Transformative Nationalisms Confront the US Empire,” Current Sociology (Vol. 51, Issue 2: March 2003), page 141.</span></p>
</div>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[Robber Barons, Revolution, and Social Control]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/robber-barons-revolution-and-social-control/</link>
<pubDate>Fri, 15 Jul 2011 19:34:36 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/15/robber-barons-revolution-and-social-control/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[Robber Barons, Revolution, and Social Control The Century of Social Engineering Global Research, Mar]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<table width="100%" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td align="left" valign="top">
<div><strong>Robber Barons, Revolution, and Social Control</strong></div>
<div><strong>The Century of Social Engineering</strong></div>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" align="left" nowrap="nowrap">
<div><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/">Global Research</a>, March 10, 2011</div>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" align="left">
<div><a href="https://www.paypal.com/cgi-bin/webscr?cmd=_s-xclick&#38;hosted_button_id=5SHVB8TCRVRHS"><img src="https://www.paypal.com/en_US/i/btn/x-click-but21.gif" alt="" /></a></div>
<div><strong>Introduction</strong></div>
<div>
<p align="justify"><em>The purpose of this essay is to examine first of all the rise of class and labour struggle throughout the United States in the 19th century, the rise and dominance of the ‘Robber Baron’ industrialists like J.P. Morgan and John D. Rockefeller, their convergence of interests with the state, and finally to examine the radical new philosophies and theories that arose within the radicalized and activated populations, such as Marxism and Anarchism. I do not attempt to provide exhaustive or comprehensive analyses of these theoretical and philosophical movements, but rather provide a brief glimpse to some of the ideas (particularly those of anarchism), and place them in the historical context of the mass struggles of the 19th century.</em></p>
<p align="justify"><strong>America’s Class Struggle</strong></p>
<p align="justify">Unbeknownst to most Americans – and for that matter, most people in general – the United States in the 19th century was in enormous upheaval, following on the footsteps of the American Revolution, a revolution which was directed by the landed elite in the American colonies, a new revolutionary spirit arose in the working class populace. The 19th century, from roughly the 1830s onwards, was one great long labour struggle in America.</p>
<p align="justify">In the early decades of the 19th century, Eastern capitalists in America began to expand to the West, “and it became important to keep that new West, tumultuous and unpredictable, under control.”[1] The new capitalists favoured monopolization over competition as a method of achieving ‘stability’ and “security to your own property.” The state played its traditional role in securing business interests, as state legislatures gave charters to corporations, granting them legal charters, and “between 1790 and 1860, 2,300 corporations were chartered.”[2] However, as Howard Zinn wrote in A People’s History of the United States:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">The attempts at political stability, at economic control, did not quite work. The new industrialism, the crowded cities, the long hours in the factories, the sudden economic crises leading to high prices and lost jobs, the lack of food and water, the freezing winters, the hot tenements in the summer, the epidemics of disease, the deaths of children – these led to sporadic reactions from the poor. Sometimes there were spontaneous, unorganized uprisings against the rich. Sometimes the anger was deflected into racial hatred for blacks, religious warfare against Catholics, nativist fury against immigrants. Sometimes it was organized into demonstrations and strikes.[3]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">In the 1830s, “episodes of insurrection” were taking place amid the emergence of unions. Throughout the century, it was with each economic crisis that labour movements and rebellious sentiments would develop and accelerate. Such was the case with the 1837 economic crisis, caused by the banks and leading to rising prices. Rallies and meetings started taking place in several cities, with one rally numbering 20,000 people in Philadelphia. That same year, New York experienced the Flour Riot. With a third of the working class – 50,000 people – out of work in New York alone, and nearly half of New York’s 500,000 people living “in utter and hopeless distress,” thousands of protesters rioted, ultimately leading to police and troops being sent in to crush the protesters.[4]</p>
<p align="justify">In 1835 there had been a successful general strike in Philadelphia, where fifty trade unions had organized in favour of a ten-hour work day. In this context, political parties began creating divides between workers and lower class people, as antagonisms developed between many Protestants and Catholics. Thus, middle class politicians “led each group into a different political party (the nativists into the American Republican party, the Irish into the Democratic party), party politics and religion now substituting for class conflict.”[5]</p>
<p align="justify">Another economic crisis took place in 1857, and in 1860, a Mechanics Association was formed, demanding higher wages, and called for a strike. Within a week, strikes spread from Lynn, Massachusetts, to towns across the state and into New Hampshire and Maine, “with Mechanics Associations in twenty-five towns and twenty thousand shoe-workers on strike,” marking the largest strike prior to the Civil War.[6] Yet, “electoral politics drained the energies of the resisters into the channels of the system.” While European workers were struggling for economic justice and political democracy, American workers had already achieved political democracy, thus, “their economic battles could be taken over by political parties that blurred class lines.”[7]</p>
<p align="justify">The Civil War (1861-1865) served several purposes. First of all, the immediate economic considerations: the Civil War sought to create a single economic system for America, driven by the Eastern capitalists in the midst of the Industrial Revolution, uniting with the West against the slave-labour South. The aim was not freedom for black slaves, but rather to end a system which had become antiquated and unprofitable. With the Industrial Revolution driving people into cities and mechanizing production, the notion of slavery lost its appeal: it was simply too expensive and time consuming to raise, feed, house, clothe and maintain slaves; it was thought more logical and profitable (in an era obsessed with efficiency) to simply pay people for the time they engage in labour. The Industrial Revolution brought with it the clock, and thus time itself became a commodity. As slavery was indicative of human beings being treated as commodities to be bought and sold, owned and used, the Industrial Revolution did not liberate people from servitude and slavery, it simply updated the notions and made more efficient the system of slavery: instead of purchasing people, they would lease them for the time they can be ‘productive’.</p>
<p align="justify">Living conditions for the workers and the vast majority, however, were not very different from the conditions of slavery itself. Thus, as the Civil War was sold to the public on the notion of liberating the slaves in the South, the workers of the North felt betrayed and hateful that they must be drafted and killed for a war to liberate others when they themselves were struggling for liberation. Here, we see the social control methods and reorganizing of society that can take place through war, a fact that has always existed and remains today, made to be even more prescient with the advances in technology. During the Civil War, the class conflict among the working people of the United States transformed into a system where they were divided against each other, as religious and racial divisions increasingly erupted in violence. With the Conscription Act of 1863, draft riots erupted in several Northern U.S. cities, the most infamous of which was the New York draft riots, when for three days mobs of rioters attacked recruiting stations, wealthy homes, destroying buildings and killing blacks. Roughly four hundred people were killed after Union troops were called into the city to repress the riots.[8] In the South, where the vast majority of people were not slave owners, but in fact poor white farmers “living in shacks or abandoned outhouses, cultivating land so bad the plantation owners had abandoned it,” making little more than blacks for the same work (30 cents a day for whites as opposed to 20 cents a day for blacks). When the Southern Confederate Conscription Law was implemented in 1863, anti-draft riots erupted in several Southern cities as well.[9]</p>
<p align="justify">When the Civil War ended in 1865, hundreds of thousands of soldiers returned to squalor conditions in the major cities of America. In New York alone, 100,000 people lived in slums. These conditions brought a surge in labour unrest and struggle, as 100,000 went on strike in New York, unions were formed, with blacks forming their own unions. However, the National Labour Union itself suppressed the struggle for rights as it focused on ‘reforming’ economic conditions (such as promoting the issuance of paper money), “it became less an organizer of labor struggles and more a lobbyist with Congress, concerned with voting, it lost its vitality.”[10]</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>The Robber Barons Against Americans</strong></p>
<p align="justify">In 1873, another major economic crisis took place, setting off a great depression. Yet, economic crises, while being harmful to the vast majority of people, increasing prices and decreasing jobs and wages, had the effect of being very beneficial to the new industrialists and financiers, who use crisis as an opportunity to wipe out competition and consolidate their power. Howard Zinn elaborated:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">The crisis was built into a system which was chaotic in its nature, in which only the very rich were secure. It was a system of periodic crisis – 1837, 1857, 1873 (and later: 1893, 1907, 1919, 1929) – that wiped out small businesses and brought cold, hunger, and death to working people while the fortunes of the Astors, Vanderbilts, Rockefellers, Morgans, kept growing through war and peace, crisis and recovery. During the 1873 crisis, Carnegie was capturing the steel market, Rockefeller was wiping out his competitors in oil.[11]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">In 1877, a nation-wide railroad strike took place, infuriating the major railroad barons, particularly J.P. Morgan, offered to lend money to pay army officers to go in and crush the strikes and get the trains moving, which they managed to accomplish fairly well. Strikes took place and soldiers were sent in to Pennsylvania, New Jersey, New York, Ohio, and Indiana, with the whole city of Philadelphia in uproar, with a general strike emerging in Pittsburgh, leading to the deployment of the National Guard, who often shot and killed strikers. When all was said and done, a hundred people were dead, a thousand people had gone to jail, 100,000 workers had gone on strike, and the strikes had roused into action countless unemployed in the cities.[12] Following this period, America underwent its greatest spur of economic growth in its history, with elites from both North and South working together against workers and blacks and the majority of people:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">They would do it with the aid of, and at the expense of, black labor, white labor, Chinese labor, European immigrant labor, female labor, rewarding them differently by race, sex, national origin, and social class, in such a way as to create separate levels of oppression – a skillful terracing to stabilize the pyramid of wealth.[13]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">The bankers and industrialists, particularly Morgan, Rockefeller, Carnegie, Mellon and Harriman, saw enormous increases in wealth and power. At the turn of the century, as Rockefeller moved from exclusively interested in oil, and into iron, copper, coal, shipping, and banking (with Chase Manhattan Bank, now J.P. Morgan Chase), his fortune would equal $2 billion. The Morgan Group also had billions in assets.[14] In 1900, Andrew Carnegie agreed to sell his steel company to J.P. Morgan for $492 million.[15]</p>
<p align="justify">Public sentiment at this time, however, had never been so anti-Capitalist and spiteful of the great wealth amassed at the expense of all others. The major industrialists and bankers firmly established their control over the political system, firmly entrenching the two party system through which they would control both parties. Thus, “whether Democrats or Republicans won, national policy would not change in any important way.”[16] Labour struggles had continued and exacerbated throughout the decades following the Civil War. In 1893, another economic depression took place, and the country was again plunged into social upheaval.</p>
<p align="justify">The Supreme Court itself was firmly overtaken by the interests of the new elite. Shortly after the Fourteenth Amendment was added to the Constitution to protect newly freed blacks, the Supreme Court began “to develop it as a protection for corporations,” as corporate lawyers argued that corporations were defined as legal ‘persons’, and therefore they could not have their rights infringed upon as stipulated in the Fourteenth Amendment. The Supreme Court went along with this reasoning, and even intervened in state legislative decisions which instead promoted the rights of workers and farmers. Ultimately, “of the Fourteenth Amendment cases brought before thee Supreme Court between 1890 and 1910, nineteen dealt with the Negro, 288 dealt with corporations.”[17]</p>
<p align="justify">It was in this context that increasing social unrest was taking place, and thus that new methods of social control were becoming increasingly necessary. Among the restless and disgruntled masses, were radical new social theories that had emerged to fill a void – a void which was created by the inherent injustice of living in a human social system in which there is a dehumanizing power structure.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Philosophies of Liberation and Social Dislocation</strong></p>
<p align="justify">It was in this context that new theories and philosophies emerged to fill the void created by the hegemonic ideologies and the institutions which propagate them. While these various critical philosophies expanded human kind’s understanding of the world around them, they did not emerge in a vacuum – that is, separate from various hegemonic ideas, but rather, they were themselves products of and to varying degrees espoused certain biases inherent in the hegemonic ideologies. This arose in the context of increasing class conflict in both the United States and Europe, brought about as a result of the Industrial Revolution. Two of the pre-eminent ideologies and philosophies that emerged were Marxism and Anarchism.</p>
<p align="justify">Marxist theory, originating with German philosopher Karl Marx, expanded human kind’s understanding of the nature of capitalism and human society as a constant class struggle, in which the dominant class (the bourgeoisie), who own the means of production (industry) exploit the lower labour class (proletariat) for their own gain. Within Marxist theory, the state itself was seen as a conduit through which economic powers would protect their own interests. Marxist theory espoused the idea of a “proletarian revolution” in which the “workers of the world unite” and overthrow the bourgeoisie, creating a Communist system in which class is eliminated. However, Karl Marx articulated a concept of a “dictatorship of the proletariat” in which upon seizing power, the proletariat would become the new ruling class, and serve its own interests through the state to effect a transition to a Communist society and simultaneously prevent a counterrevolution from the bourgeoisie. Karl Marx wrote in the Communist Manifesto (1848) also on the need for a central bank to manage the monetary system. These concepts led to significant conflict between Marxist and Anarchist theorists.</p>
<p align="justify">Anarchism is one of the most misunderstood philosophies in modern historical thought, and with good reason: it’s revolutionary potential was boundless, as it was an area of thought that was not as rigid, doctrinaire or divisive as other theories, both hegemonic and critical. No other philosophy or political theory had the potential to unite both socialists and libertarians, two seemingly opposed concepts that found a home within the wide spectrum of anarchist thought, leading to a situation in which many anarchists refer to themselves as ‘libertarian socialists.’ As Nathan Jun has pointed out:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">[A]narchism has never been and has never aspired to be a fixed, comprehensive, self-contained, and internally consistent system of ideas, set of doctrines, or body of theory. On the contrary, anarchism from its earliest days has been an evolving set of attitudes and ideas that can apply to a wide range of social, economic, and political theories, practices, movements, and traditions.[18]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Susan Brown noted that within Anarchist philosophy, “there are mutualists, collectivists, communists, federalists, individualists, socialists, syndicalists, [and] feminists,” and thus, “Anarchist political philosophy is by no means a unified movement.”[19] The word “anarchy” is derived from the Greek word anarkhos, which means “without authority.” Thus, anarchy “is committed first and foremost to the universal rejection of coercive authority,” and that:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">[C]oercive authority includes all centralized and hierarchical forms of government (e.g., monarchy, representative democracy, state socialism, etc.), economic class systems (e.g., capitalism, Bolshevism, feudalism, slavery, etc.), autocratic religions (e.g., fundamentalist Islam, Roman Catholicism, etc.), patriarchy, heterosexism, white supremacy, and imperialism.[20]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">The first theorist to describe himself as anarchist was Pierre-Joseph Proudhon, a French philosopher and socialist who understood “equality not just as an abstract feature of human nature but as an ideal state of affairs that is both desirable and realizable.”[21] While this was a common concept among socialists, anarchist conceptions of equality emphasized that, “true anarchist equality implies freedom, not quantity. It does not mean that every one must eat, drink, or wear the same things, do the same work, or live in the same manner. Far from it: the very reverse in fact,” as “individual needs and tastes differ, as appetites differ. It is equal opportunity to satisfy them that constitutes true equality.”[22]</p>
<p align="justify">Mikhail Bakunin, one of the most prominent anarchist theorists in history, who was also Karl Marx’s greatest intellectual challenger and opposition, explained that individual freedom depends upon not only recognizing, but “cooperating in [the] realization of others’ freedom,” as, he wrote:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">My freedom&#8230; is the freedom of all since I am not truly free in thought and in fact, except when my freedom and my rights are confirmed and approved in the freedom and rights of all men and women who are my equals.[23]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Anarchists view representative forms of government, such as Parliamentary democracies, with the same disdain as they view overtly totalitarian structures of government. The reasoning is that:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">In the political realm, representation involves divesting individuals and groups of their vitality—their power to create, transform, and change themselves. To be sure, domination often involves the literal destruction of vitality through violence and other forms of physical coercion. As a social-physical phenomenon, however, domination is not reducible to aggression of this sort. On the contrary, domination operates chiefly by “speaking for others” or “representing others to themselves”—that is, by manufacturing images of, or constructing identities for, individuals and groups.[24]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Mikhail Bakunin wrote that, “Only individuals, united through mutual aid and voluntary association, are entitled to decide who they are, what they shall be, how they shall live.” Thus, with any hierarchical or coercive institutions, the natural result is oppression and domination, or in other words, spiritual death.[25]</p>
<p align="justify">Anarchism emerged indigenously and organically in America, separate from its European counterparts. The first anarchists in America could be said to be “the Antinomians, Quakers, and other left-wing religious groups who found the authority, dogma, and formalism of the conventional churches intolerable.” These various religious groups came to develop “a political outlook which emphasized the anti-libertarian nature of the state and government.” One of the leaders of these religious groups, Adin Ballou, declared that “the essence of Christian morality is the rejection of force, compromise, and the very institution of government itself.” Thus, a Christian “is not merely to refrain from committing personal acts of violence but is to take positive steps to prevent the state from carrying out its warlike ambitions.”[26] This development occurred within the first decades of the 19th century in America.</p>
<p align="justify">In the next phase of American philosophical anarchism, inspiration was drawn from the idea of individualism. Josiah Warren, known as the “first American anarchist,” had published the first anarchist periodical in 1833, the Peaceful Revolutionist. Many others joined Warren in identifying the state as “the enemy” and “maintaining that the only legitimate form of social control is self-discipline which the individual must impose upon himself without the aid of government.” Philosophical anarchism grew in popularity, and in the 1860s, two loose federations of anarchists were formed in the New England Labor Reform League and the American Labor Reform League, which “were the source of radical vitality in America for several decades.” American anarchists were simultaneously developing similar outlooks and ideas as Proudhon was developing in Europe. One of the most prominent American anarchists, Benjamin Tucker, translated Proudhon’s work in 1875, and started his own anarchist journals and publications, becoming “the chief political theorist of philosophical anarchism in America.”[27]</p>
<p align="justify">Tucker viewed anarchism as “a rejection of all formalism, authority, and force in the interest of liberating the creative capacities of the individual,” and that, “the anarchist must remove himself from the arena of politics, refusing to implicate himself in groups or associations which have as their end the control or manipulation of political power.” Thus, Tucker, like other anarchists, “ruled out the concepts of parliamentary and constitutional government and in general placed himself and the anarchist movement outside the tradition of democracy as it had developed in America.” Anarchism has widely been viewed as a violent philosophy, and while that may be the case for some theorists and adherents, many anarchist theorists and philosophies rejected the notion of violence altogether. After all, its first adherents in America were driven to anarchist theory simply as a result of their uncompromising pacifism. For the likes of Tucker and other influential anarchist theorists, “the state, rather than being a real structure or entity, is nothing more than a conception. To destroy the state then, is to remove this conception from the mind of the individual.” Thus, the act of revolution “has nothing whatever to do with the actual overthrow of the existing governmental machinery,” and Proudhon opined that, “a true revolution can only take place as mankind becomes enlightened.” Revolution, to anarchists, was not an imminent reality, even though it may be an inevitable outcome:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">The one thing that is certain is that revolution takes place not by a concerted uprising of the masses but through a process of individual social reformation or awakening. Proudhon, like Tucker and the native American anarchists, believed that the function of anarchism is essentially educational&#8230; The state will be abolished at the point at which people in general have become convinced of its un-social nature&#8230; When enough people resist it to the point of ignoring it altogether, the state will have been destroyed as completely as a scrap of paper is when it is tossed into a roaring fire.[28]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">In the 1880s, anarchism was taken up by many of the radical immigrants coming into America from Europe, such as Johann Most and Emma Goldman, a Jewish Russian feminist anarchist. The press portrayed Goldman “as a vile and unsavory devotee of revolutionary violence.” Goldman partook in an attempted assassination of Henry C. Frick, an American industrialist and financier, historically known as one of the most ruthless businessmen and referred to as “the most hated man in America.” This was saying something in the era of J.P. Morgan, Andrew Carnegie and John D. Rockefeller. Emma Goldman later regretted the attempted assassination and denounced violence as an anarchist methodology. However, she came to acknowledge a view similar to Kropotkin’s (another principle anarchist philosopher), “that violence is the natural consequence of repression and force”:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">The state, in her opinion, sows the seeds of violence when it lends it authority and force to the retardation of social change, thereby creating deep-seated feelings of injustice and desperation in the collective unconscious. “I do not advocate violence, government does this, and force begets force.”[29]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">The general belief was that “social violence is never arbitrary and meaningless. There is always a deep-seated cause standing behind every deed.” Thus:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">Social violence, she argued, will naturally disappear at the point at which men have learned to understand and accommodate themselves to one another within a dynamic society which truly values human freedom. Until then we can expect to see pent up hostility and frustration of certain individuals and groups explode from time to time with the spontaneity and violence of a volcano.[30]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Thus we have come to take a brief glimpse of the social upheaval and philosophies gripping and spreading across the American (and indeed the European) landscape in the 19th century. As a radical reaction to the revolutionizing changed brought by the Industrial Revolution, class struggle, labor unrest, Marxism and Anarchism arose within a populace deeply unsatisfied, horrifically exploited, living in desperation and squalor, and lighting within them a spark – a desire – for freedom and equality. They were not ideologically or methodologically unified, specifically in terms of the objectives and ends; yet, their enemies were the same. It as a struggle among the people against the prevailing and growing sources of power: the state and Capitalist industrialization. The emergence of corporations in America after the Civil War (themselves a creation of the state), created new manifestations of exploitation, greed and power. The Robber Barons were the personification of ‘evil’ and in fact were quite openly and brazenly ruthless. The notion of ‘public relations’ had not yet been invented, and so the industrialists would openly and violently repress and crush struggles, strikes and protests. The state was, after all, firmly within their grip.</p>
<p align="justify">It was this revolutionary fervour that permeated the conniving minds of the rich and powerful within America, that stimulated the concepts of social control, and laid the foundations for the emergence of the 20th century as the ‘century of social engineering.’</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Notes</strong></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[1]        Howard Zinn, A People’s History of the United States (Harper Perennial: New York, 2003), page 219</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[2]        Ibid, pages 219-220.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[3]        Ibid, page 221.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[4]        Ibid, pages 224-225.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[5]        Ibid, pages 225-226.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[6]        Ibid, page 231.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[7]        Ibid, page 232.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[8]        Ibid, pages 235-236.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[9]        Ibid, pages 236-237.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[10]      Ibid, pages 241-242.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[11]      Ibid, page 242.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[12]      Ibid, pages 245-251.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[13]      Ibid, page 253.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[14]      Ibid, pages 256-257.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[15]      Ibid, page 257.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[16]      Ibid, page 258.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[17]      Ibid, pages 260-261.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[18]      Nathan Jun, “Anarchist Philosophy and Working Class Struggle: A Brief History and Commentary,” WorkingUSA: The Journal of Labor and Society (Vol. 12, September 2009), page 505</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[19]      Ibid, page 506.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[20]      Ibid, pages 507-508.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[21]      Ibid, page 509.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[22]      Ibid, page 510.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[23]      Ibid, pages 510-511.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[24]      Ibid, page 512.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[25]      Ibid, page 512.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[26]      William O. Reichert, “Toward a New Understanding of Anarchism,” The Western Political Quarterly (Vol. 20, No. 4, December 1967), page 857.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[27]      Ibid, page 858.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[28]      Ibid, pages 858-860.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[29]      Ibid, pages 860-861.</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[30]      Ibid, page 862.</span></p>
</div>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[New Eugenics and the Rise of the Global Scientific Dictatorship]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/14/100/</link>
<pubDate>Fri, 15 Jul 2011 03:25:51 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/14/100/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[Introduction We are in the midst of the most explosive development in all of human history. Humanity]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><strong>Introduction</strong></p>
<p align="justify">We are in the midst of the most explosive development in all of human history. Humanity is experiencing a simultaneously opposing and conflicting geopolitical transition, the likes of which has never before been anticipated or experienced. Historically, the story of humanity has been the struggle between the free-thinking individual and structures of power controlled by elites that seek to dominate land, resources and people. The greatest threat to elites at any time – historically and presently – is an awakened, critically thinking and politically stimulated populace. This threat has manifested itself throughout history, in different places and at different times. Ideas of freedom, democracy, civil and human rights, liberty and equality have emerged in reaction and opposition to power structures and elite systems of control.</p>
<p align="justify">The greatest triumphs of the human mind – whether in art, science or thought – have arisen out of and challenged great systems of power and control. The greatest of human misery and tragedy has arisen out of the power structures and systems that elites always seek to construct and manage. War, genocide, persecution and human degradation are directly the result of decisions made by those who control the apparatus of power, whether the power manifests itself as intellectual, ecclesiastical, spiritual, militaristic, or scientific. The most malevolent and ruthless power is that over the free human mind: if one controls how one thinks, they control the individual itself. The greatest human achievements are where individuals have broken free the shackles that bind the mind and let loose the inherent and undeniable power that lies in each and every individual on this small little planet.</p>
<p align="justify">Currently, our world is at the greatest crossroads our species has ever experienced. We are in the midst of the first truly global political awakening, in which for the first time in all of human history, all of mankind is politically awakened and stirring; in which whether inadvertently or intentionally, people are thinking and acting in political terms. This awakening is most evident in the developing world, having been made through personal experience to be acutely aware of the great disparities, disrespect, and domination inherent in global power structures. The awakening is spreading increasingly to the west itself, as the majority of the people living in the western developed nations are thrown into poverty and degradation. The awakening will be forced upon all people all over the world. Nothing, no development, ever in human history, has posed such a monumental threat to elite power structures.</p>
<p align="justify">This awakening is largely driven by the Technological Revolution, which through technology and electronics, in particular mass media and the internet, have made it so that people across the world are able to become aware of global issues and gain access to information from around the world. The Technological Revolution, thus, has fostered an Information Revolution which has, in turn, fed the global political awakening.</p>
<p align="justify">Simultaneously, the Technological Revolution has led to another unique and unprecedented development in human history, and one that is diametrically opposed, yet directly related to the global political awakening. For the first time in human history, free humanity is faced with the dominating threat of a truly global elite, who have at their hands the technology to impose a truly global system of control: a global scientific dictatorship. The great danger is that through the exponential growth in scientific techniques, elites will use these great new powers to control and dominate all of humanity in such a way that has never before been experienced.</p>
<p align="justify">Through all of human history, tyrants have used coercive force and terror to control populations. With the Technological Revolution, elites increasingly have the ability to control the very biology and psychology of the individual to a point where it may not be necessary to impose a system of terror, but rather where the control is implemented on a much deeper, psychological, subliminal and individual biological manner. While terror can prevent people from opposing power for a while, the scientific dictatorship can create a personal psycho-social condition in which the individual comes to love his or her own slavery; in which, like a mentally inferior pet, they are made to love their leaders and accept their servitude.</p>
<p align="justify">So we are presented with a situation in which humanity is faced with both the greatest threat and the greatest hope that we have ever collectively experienced in our short human history. This essay, the third part in the series, “The Technological Revolution and the Future of Freedom,” examines the ideas behind the global scientific dictatorship, and how it may manifest itself presently and in the future, with a particular focus on the emergence of ‘new eugenics’ as a system of mass control.</p>
<p align="justify">Free humanity faces the most monumental decision we have ever been presented with: do we feed and fuel the global political awakening into a true human psycho-social revolution of the mind, creating a new global political economy which empowers and liberates all of humanity; or&#8230; do we fall silently into a ‘brave new world’ of a global scientific oppression, the likes of which have never before been experienced, and whose dominance would never be more difficult to challenge and overcome?</p>
<p align="justify">We can either find a true freedom, or descend into a deep despotism. We are not powerless before this great ideational beast. We have, at our very fingertips the ability to use technology to our benefit and to re-shape the world so that it benefits the people of the world and not simply the powerful. It must be freedom for all or freedom for none.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>What is the ‘Scientific Dictatorship’?</strong></p>
<p align="justify">In 1932, Aldous Huxley wrote his dystopian novel, “Brave New World,” in which he looked at the emergence of the scientific dictatorships of the future. In his 1958 essay, “Brave New World Revisited,” Huxley examined how far the world had come in that short period since his book was published, and where the world was heading. Huxley wrote that:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify"><strong>In politics the equivalent of a fully developed scientific theory or philosophical system is a totalitarian dictatorship</strong>. In economics, the equivalent of a beautifully composed work of art is the smoothly running factory in which <strong>the workers are perfectly adjusted to the machines</strong>. The Will to Order can make tyrants out of those who merely aspire to clear up a mess. <strong>The beauty of tidiness is used as a justification for despotism</strong>.[1]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Huxley explained that, “The future dictator’s subjects will be painlessly regimented by a corps of highly trained social engineers,” and he quotes one “advocate of this new science” as saying that, “The challenge of social engineering in our time is like the challenge of technical engineering fifty years ago. If the first half of the twentieth century was the era of technical engineers, the second half may well be the era of social engineers.” Thus, proclaims Huxley, “<strong>The twenty-first century, I suppose, will be the era of World Controllers, the scientific caste system and Brave New World</strong>.”[2]</p>
<p align="justify">In 1952, Bertrand Russell, a British philosopher, historian, mathematician, and social critic wrote the book, “The Impact of Science on Society,” in which he warned and examined how science, and the technological revolution, was changing and would come to change society. In his book, Russell explained that:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">I think the subject which will be of most importance politically is mass psychology. Mass psychology is, scientifically speaking, not a very advanced study&#8230; This study is immensely useful to practical men, whether they wish to become rich or to acquire the government. It is, of course, as a science, founded upon individual psychology, but hitherto it has employed rule-of-thumb methods which were based upon a kind of intuitive common sense. <strong>Its importance has been enormously increased by the growth of modern methods of propaganda. Of these the most influential is what is called ‘education’.</strong> Religion plays a part, though a diminishing one; the Press, the cinema and the radio play an increasing part.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>What is essential in mass psychology is the art of persuasion</strong><strong>.</strong> If you compare a speech of Hitler’s with a speech of (say) Edmund Burke, you will see what strides have been made in the art since the eighteenth century. What went wrong formerly was that people had read in books that man is a rational animal, and framed their arguments on this hypothesis. We now know that limelight and a brass band do more to persuade than can be done by the most elegant train of syllogisms. <strong>It may be hoped that in time anybody will be able to persuade anybody of anything if he can catch the patient young and is provided by the State with money and equipment.</strong></p>
<p align="justify"><strong>This subject will make great strides when it is taken up by scientists under a scientific dictatorship</strong>.[3]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Russell went on to analyze the question of whether a ‘scientific dictatorship’ is more stable than a democracy, on which he postulated:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">Apart from the danger of war, I see no reason why such a regime should be unstable. After all, most civilised and semi-civilised countries known to history have had a large class of slaves or serfs completely subordinate to their owners. There is nothing in human nature that makes the persistence of such a system impossible. And <strong>the whole development of scientific technique has made it easier than it used to be to maintain a despotic rule of a minority.</strong> When the government controls the distribution of food, its power is absolute so long as it can count on the police and the armed forces. And their loyalty can be secured by giving them some of the privileges of the governing class. <strong>I do not see how any internal movement of revolt can ever bring freedom to the oppressed in a modern scientific dictatorship</strong>.[4]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Drawing on the concept popularized by Aldous Huxley – of people loving their servitude – Bertrand Russell explained that under a scientific dictatorship:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">It is to be expected that <strong>advances in physiology and psychology will give governments much more control over individual mentality than they now have even in totalitarian countries</strong>. Fichte laid it down that <strong>education should aim at destroying free will</strong>, so that, after pupils have left school, they shall be incapable, throughout the rest of their lives, of thinking or acting otherwise than as their schoolmasters would have wished&#8230; Diet, injections, and injunctions will combine, from a very early age, <strong>to produce the sort of character and the sort of beliefs that the authorities consider desirable, and any serious criticism of the powers that be will become psychologically impossible. Even if all are miserable, all will believe themselves happy, because the government will tell them that they are so</strong>.[5]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Russell explained that, “The completeness of the resulting control over opinion depends in various ways upon scientific technique. Where all children go to school, and all schools are controlled by the government, <strong>the authorities can close the minds of the young to everything contrary to official orthodoxy</strong>.”[6] Russell later proclaimed in his book that, “<strong>a scientific world society cannot be stable unless there is a world government</strong>.”[7] He elaborated:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">Unless there is a world government which secures universal birth control, there must be from time to time great wars, in which the penalty of defeat is widespread death by starvation. That is exactly the present state of the world, and some may hold that there is no reason why it should not continue for centuries. I do not myself believe that this is possible. <strong>The two great wars that we have experienced have lowered the level of civilization in many parts of the world, and the next is pretty sure to achieve much more in this direction. Unless, at some stage, one power or group of powers emerges victorious and proceeds to establish a single government of the world with a monopoly of armed force</strong>, it is clear that the level of civilization must continually decline until scientific warfare becomes impossible – that is until science is extinct.[8]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Russell explains that eugenics plays a central feature in the construction of any world government scientific dictatorship, stating that, “Gradually, by selective breeding, <strong>the congenital differences between rulers and ruled will increase until they become almost different species. A revolt of the plebs would become as unthinkable as an organized insurrection of sheep against the practice of eating mutton</strong>.”[9]</p>
<p align="justify">In a 1962 speech at UC Berkeley, Aldous Huxley spoke about the real world becoming the ‘Brave New World’ nightmare he envisaged. Huxley spoke primarily of the ‘Ultimate Revolution’ that focuses on ‘behavioural controls’ of people. Huxley said of the ‘Ultimate Revolution’:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">In the past, we can say, that <strong>all revolutions have essentially aimed at changing the environment in order to change the individual</strong>. There’s been the political revolution, the economic revolution . . . the religious revolution. All these aimed as I say not directly at the human being but at his surroundings, so by modifying his surroundings you did achieve – at one remove – an effect upon the human being.</p>
<p align="justify">Today, we are faced, I think, with the approach of what may be called the ‘Ultimate Revolution’ – the ‘Final Revolution’ – where man can act directly on the mind-body of his fellows. Well needless to say some kind of direct action on human mind-bodies has been going on since the beginning of time, but this has generally been of a violent nature. The techniques of terrorism have been known from time immemorial, and people have employed them with more-or-less ingenuity, sometimes with utmost crudity, sometimes with a good deal of skill acquired with a process of trial and error – finding out what the best ways of using torture, imprisonments, constraints of various kinds . . .</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>If you are going to control any population for any length of time, you must have some measure of consent</strong>. It’s exceedingly difficult to see how pure terrorism can function indefinitely, it can function for a fairly long time; <strong>but sooner or later you have to bring in an element of persuasion, an element of getting people to consent to what is happening to them</strong>.</p>
<p align="justify">Well it seems to me the nature of the Ultimate Revolution with which we are now faced is precisely this: that <strong>we are in process of developing a whole series of techniques, which will enable the controlling oligarchy – who have always existed and will presumably always exist – to get people to love their servitude.</strong> This is the ultimate in malevolent revolution&#8230;</p>
<p align="justify">There seems to be a general movement in the direction of this kind of Ultimate Control, this method of control, by which <strong>people can be made to enjoy a state of affairs by which any decent standard they ought not to enjoy; the enjoyment of servitude</strong> . . .</p>
<p align="justify">I am inclined to think that the scientific dictatorships of the future – and I think there are going to be scientific dictatorships in many parts of the world – will be probably a good deal nearer to the Brave New World pattern than to the 1984 pattern. They will be a good deal nearer, not because of any humanitarian qualms in the scientific dictators, but simply because the ‘brave new world’ pattern is probably a good deal more efficient than the other. <strong>That if you can get people to consent to the state of affairs in which they are living – the state of servitude – if you can do this, then you are likely to have a much more stable, a much more lasting society; much more easily controllable society</strong> than you would if you were relying wholly on clubs, and firing squads and concentration camps.[10]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">In 1961, President Eisenhower delivered his farewell address to the nation in which he warned of the dangers to democracy posed by the military-industrial complex: the interconnected web of industry, the military, and politics creating the conditions for constant war. In that same speech, Eisenhower warned America and the world of another important change in society:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">Today, the solitary inventor, tinkering in his shop, has been overshadowed by task forces of scientists in laboratories and testing fields. In the same fashion, <strong>the free university, historically the fountainhead of free ideas and scientific discovery, has experienced a revolution in the conduct of research. Partly because of the huge costs involved, a government contract becomes virtually a substitute for intellectual curiosity</strong>. For every old blackboard there are now hundreds of new electronic computers.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>The prospect of domination of the nation&#8217;s scholars by Federal employment, project allocations, and the power of money is ever present – and is gravely to be regarded.</strong></p>
<p align="justify">Yet, in holding scientific research and discovery in respect, as we should, <strong>we must also be alert to the equal and opposite danger that public policy could itself become the captive of a scientific-technological elite.</strong>[11]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">In 1970, Zbigniew Brzezinski wrote about “the gradual appearance of a more controlled and directed society,” in the “technetronic revolution”; explaining:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">Such a society would be dominated by an elite whose claim to political power would rest on allegedly superior scientific know-how. Unhindered by the restraints of traditional liberal values, <strong>this elite would not hesitate to achieve its political ends by using the latest modern techniques for influencing public behavior and keeping society under close surveillance and control</strong>. Under such circumstances, the scientific and technological momentum of the country would not be reversed but would actually feed on the situation it exploits.[12]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify"><strong>New Eugenics</strong></p>
<p align="justify">Many sciences and large social movements are directed by the same foundations and money that financed the eugenics movement in the early 20th century. The Rockefeller foundations, Ford, Carnegie, Mellon, Harriman, and Morgan money that flowed into eugenics led directly to ‘scientific racism,’ and ultimately the Holocaust in World War II.[13] Following the Holocaust, Hitler had discredited the eugenics movement he admired so much in America. So the movement branched off into forming several other social engineering projects: population control, genetics, and environmentalism. The same foundations that laid the foundations for eugenic ideology – the belief in a biological superiority and right to rule (justifying their power) – then laid the foundations for these and other new social and scientific movements.</p>
<p align="justify">Major environmental and conservation organizations were founded with Rockefeller and Ford Foundation money,[14] which then continued to be central sources of funding to this day; while the World Wildlife Fund (WWF) was founded in 1961 by Sir Julian Huxley, Aldous Huxley’s brother, who was also the President of the British Eugenics Society. Prince Bernhard of the Netherlands became the organization’s first president. Prince Bernhard also happened to be one of the founders of the elite global think tank, the Bilderberg Group, which he co-founded in 1954; and he was previous to that, a member of the Nazi Party and an SS officer.[15] Sir Julian Huxley also happened to be the first Director-General of the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organisation (UNESCO). In 1946, Huxley wrote a paper titled, “UNESCO: It’s Purpose and its Philosophy.” In it, he wrote that the general focus of UNESCO:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify"><strong>is to help the emergence of a single world culture</strong>, with its own philosophy and background of ideas, and with its own broad purpose. This is opportune, since <strong>this is the first time in history that the scaffolding and the mechanisms for world unification have become available</strong>, and also the first time that man has had the means (in the shape of scientific discovery and its applications) of laying a world-wide foundation for the minimum physical welfare of the entire human species&#8230;[16]</p>
<p align="justify">At the moment, it is probable that the indirect effect of civilisation is dysgenic instead of eugenic; and in any case it seems likely that the dead weight of genetic stupidity, physical weakness, mental instability, and disease-proneness, which already exist in the human species, will prove too great a burden for real progress to be achieved. <strong>Thus even though it is quite true that any radical eugenic policy will be for many years politically and psychologically impossible, it will be important for Unesco to see that the eugenic problem is examined with the greatest care, and that the public mind is informed of the issues at stake so that much that now is unthinkable may at least become thinkable</strong>&#8230;[17]</p>
<p align="justify">Still another and quite different type of borderline subject is that of eugenics. It has been on the borderline between the scientific and the unscientific, constantly in danger of becoming a pseudo- science based on preconceived political ideas or on assumptions of racial or class superiority and inferiority. <strong>It is, however, essential that eugenics should be brought entirely within the borders of science, for, as already indicated, in the not very remote future the problem of improving the average quality of human beings is likely to become urgent; and this can only be accomplished by applying the findings of a truly scientific eugenics</strong>&#8230;[18]</p>
<p align="justify">It is worth pointing out that the applications of science at once bring us up against social problems of various sorts. Some of these are direct and obvious. Thus the application of genetics in eugenics immediately raises the question of values- <strong>what qualities should we desire to encourage in the human beings of the future?</strong>[19]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">On page 6 of the UNESCO document, Sir Julian Huxley wrote that, “in order to carry out its work, an organisation such as Unesco needs not only a set of general aims and objects for itself, but also <strong>a working philosophy, a working hypothesis concerning human existence and <em>its</em> aims and objects</strong>, which will dictate, or at least indicate, a definite line of approach to its problems.”[20] While much of the language of equality and education sounds good and benevolent, it is based upon a particular view of humanity as an irrational, emotionally driven organism which needs to be controlled. Thus, the ‘principle of equality’ becomes “The Fact of Inequality”:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">Finally we come to a difficult problem-that of discovering <strong>how we can reconcile our principle of human equality with the biological fact of human inequality</strong>&#8230; The democratic principle of equality, which is also Unesco’s, is a principle of equality of opportunity-that human beings should be equal before the law, should have equal opportunities for education, for making a living, for freedom of expression and movement and thought. <strong>The biological absence of equality, on the other hand, concerns the natural endowments of man and the fact of genetic difference in regard to them.</strong></p>
<p align="justify">There are instances of biological inequality which are so gross that they cannot be reconciled at all with the principle of equal opportunity. <strong>Thus low-grade mental defectives cannot be offered equality of educational opportunity,</strong> nor are the insane equal with the sane before the law or in respect of most freedoms. However, <strong>the full implications of the fact of human inequality have not often been drawn and certainly need to be brought out here, as they are very relevant to Unesco’s task</strong>.[21]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Many of these “genetic inequalities” revolve around the idea of intellectual superiority: the idea that there is no equality among the intellectually inferior and superior. That inequality is derived from human biology – from genetics; it is a “human fact.” It just so happens that elites who propagate this ideology, also happen to view the masses as intellectually inferior; thus, there can be no social equality in a world with a technological intellectual elite. So eugenics must be employed, as the UENSCO paper explains, to address the issues of raising human welfare to a manageable level; that the time will come where elites will need to address the whole of humanity as a single force, and with a single voice. Eugenics is about the social organization and control of humanity. Ultimately, eugenics is about the engineering of inequality. In genetics, elites found a way to take discrimination down to the DNA.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Genetics as Eugenics</strong></p>
<p align="justify">Award-winning author and researcher, Edwin Black, wrote an authoritative history of eugenics in his book, “War Against the Weak,” in which he explained that, “the incremental effort to transform eugenics into human genetics forged an entire worldwide infrastructure,” with the founding of the Institute for Human Genetics in Copenhagen in 1938, led by Tage Kemp, a Rockefeller Foundation eugenicist, and was financed with money from the Rockefeller Foundation.[22] While not abandoning the eugenics goals, the new re-branded eugenics movement “claimed to be eradicating poverty and saving the environment.”[23]</p>
<p align="justify">In a 2001 issue of Science Magazine, Garland Allen, a scientific historian, wrote about genetics as a modern form of eugenics. He began by citing a 1998 article in Time Magazine which proclaimed that, “Personality, temperament, even life choices. New studies show it&#8217;s mostly in your genes.” Garland explains the implications:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">Coat-tailing on major advances in genetic biotechnology, these articles portray genetics as the new &#8220;magic bullet&#8221; of biomedical science that will solve many of our recurrent social problems. <strong>The implication is that these problems are largely a result of the defective biology of individuals or even racial or ethnic groups.</strong> If aggressive or violent behavior is in the genes, so the argument goes, then <strong>the solution lies in biomedical intervention&#8211;gene therapy in the distant future and pharmacotherapy</strong> (replacing the products of defective genes with drug substitutes) in the immediate future.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>By promoting such claims, are we heading toward a new version of eugenics?</strong> Are we getting carried away with the false promise of a technological fix for problems that really lie in the structure of our society? <strong>My answer to these questions is &#8220;yes,&#8221;</strong> but with some important qualifications that derive from the different historical and social contexts of the early 1900s and the present&#8230;</p>
<p align="justify">The term eugenics was coined in 1883 by the Victorian polymath Francis Galton, geographer, statistician, and first cousin of Charles Darwin. It meant to him &#8220;truly- or well-born,&#8221; and referred to <strong>a plan to encourage the &#8220;best people&#8221; in society to have more children (positive eugenics) and to discourage or prevent the &#8220;worst elements&#8221; of society from having many, if any, children (negative eugenics).</strong> Eugenics became solidified into a movement in various countries throughout the world in the first three decades of the 20th century, but nowhere more solidly than in the United States and, after World War I, in Germany.[24]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">While genetic traits such as eye colour and the like were proven to be hereditary, “eugenicists were more interested in the inheritance of social behaviors, intelligence, and personality.” Further:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">American eugenicists also strove to disseminate the results of eugenic research to the public and to lawmakers. They supported the idea of positive eugenics [encouraging the ‘best’ to become better], but focused most of their energies on negative eugenics [to encourage the ‘worst’ to become fewer]. Eugenicists wrote hundreds of articles for popular magazines, published dozens of books for the general (and some for the scientific) reader, prepared exhibits for schools and state fairs, made films, and wrote sermons and novels.[25]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">American eugenicists, fully backed by the financial support of the major American philanthropic fortunes, passed eugenics legislation in over 27 states across the United States, often in the form of forced sterilizations for the mentally ‘inferior’, so that, “By the 1960s, when most of these laws were beginning to be repealed, more than 60,000 people had been sterilized for eugenic purposes.” As Garland Allen wrote:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">For the wealthy benefactors that supported eugenics, such as the Carnegie, Rockefeller, Harriman, and Kellogg philanthropies, <strong>eugenics provided a means of social control in a period of unprecedented upheaval and violence. It was these same economic elites and their business interests who introduced scientific management and organizational control into the industrial sector</strong>&#8230;</p>
<p align="justify">[In 1994] we saw the resurrection of claims that there are genetic differences in intelligence between races, leading to different socio-economic status. <strong>Claims about the genetic basis for criminality, manic depression, risk-taking, alcoholism, homosexuality, and a host of other behaviors have also been rampant in scientific and especially popular literature</strong>. Much of the evidence for such claims is as controversial today as in the past.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>We seem to be increasingly unwilling to accept what we view as imperfection in ourselves and others</strong>. As health care costs skyrocket, we are coming to accept a bottom-line, cost-benefit analysis of human life. This mind-set has serious implications for reproductive decisions. If a health maintenance organization (HMO) requires in utero screening, and refuses to cover the birth or care of a purportedly &#8220;defective&#8221; child, how close is this to eugenics? If gene or drug therapy is substituted for improving our workplace or school environments, our diets and our exercise practices, how close is this to eugenics? Significant social changes are expensive, however. <strong>If eugenics means making reproductive decisions primarily on the basis of social cost, then we are well on that road</strong>.[26]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Genetics unleash an unprecedented power into human hands: the power of unnatural creation and the manipulation of biology. We do not yet fully understand nor comprehend the implications of genetic manipulation in our food, plants, animals, and in humans, themselves. What is clear is that we are changing the very biology of our environment and ourselves in it. While there are many clear and obvious benefits to genetic technology, such as the ability to enhance ailing senses (sight, hearing, etc.) and cure diseases, the positive must be examined and discussed with the negative repercussions of genetic manipulation so as to better direct the uses of this powerful technology.</p>
<p align="justify">Debates on issues such as stem-cell research and genetic manipulation often focus on a science versus religion aspect, where science seeks to benevolently cure mankind of its ailments and religion seeks to preserve the sanctity of ‘creation’. This is an irrational and narrow manner to conduct a real debate on this monumental issue, painting the issue as black and white, which it most certainly is not. Science can be used for good as well as bad, and human history, most especially that of the 20th century, is nothing if not evidence for that fact. Incredible scientific ingenuity went into the creation of great weapons; the manipulation of the atom to kill millions in an instant, or the manufacturing of biological and chemical weapons. The problem with the interaction of science and power is that with such great power comes the temptation to use and abuse it. If the ability to create a weapon like an atom bomb seems possible, most certainly there are those who seek to make it probable. Where there is temptation, there is human weakness.</p>
<p align="justify">So while genetics can be used for benevolent purposes and for the betterment of humankind, so too can it be used to effectively create a biological caste system, where in time it would be feasible to see a break in the human race, where as human advancement technologies become increasingly available, their use is reserved to the elite so that there comes a time where there is a biological separation in the human species. Oliver Curry, an evolutionary theorist from the London School of Economics predicted that “the human race will have reached its physical peak by the year 3000” and that, “The human race will one day split into two separate species, an attractive, intelligent ruling elite and an underclass of dim-witted, ugly goblin-like creatures.”[27] Such was the plot of H.G. Wells’ classic book, “The Time Machine,” who was himself, a prominent eugenicist at the turn of the 20th century. While this would be a long time from now, its potential results from the decisions we make today.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Population Control as Eugenics</strong></p>
<p align="justify">Not only was the field of genetics born of eugenics, and heavily financed by the same monied-interests that seek social control; but so too was the field of population control. In environmental literature and rhetoric, one concept that has emerged over the years as playing a significant part is that of population control. Population is seen as an environmental issue because the larger the population, the more resources it consumes and land it occupies. In this concept, the more people there are the worse the environment becomes. Thus, programs aimed at controlling population growth are often framed in an environmentalist lens. There is also a distinctly radical element in this field, which views population growth not simply as an environmental concern, but which frames people, in general, as a virus that must be eradicated if the earth is to survive.</p>
<p align="justify">However, in the view of elites, population control is more about controlling the people than saving the environment. Elites have always been drawn to population studies that have, in many areas, helped construct their worldview. Concerns about population growth really took hold with Thomas Malthus at the end of the 18th century. In 1798, Malthus wrote a “theory on the nature of poverty,” and he “called for population control by moral restraint,” citing charity as a promotion of “generation-to-generation poverty and simply made no sense in the natural scheme of human progress.” Thus, the idea of ‘charity’ became immoral. The eugenics movement attached itself to Malthus’ theory regarding the “rejection of the value of helping the poor.”[28]</p>
<p align="justify">The ideas of Malthus, and later Herbert Spencer and Charles Darwin were remolded into branding an elite ideology of “Social Darwinism”, which was “the notion that in the struggle to survive in a harsh world, many humans were not only less worthy, many were actually destined to wither away as a rite of progress. To preserve the weak and the needy was, in essence, an unnatural act.”[29] This theory simply justified the immense wealth, power and domination of a small elite over the rest of humanity, as that elite saw themselves as the only truly intelligent beings worthy of holding such power and privilege.</p>
<p align="justify">Francis Galton later coined the term “eugenics” to describe this emerging field. His followers believed that the ‘genetically unfit’ “would have to be wiped away,” using tactics such as, “segregation, deportation, castration, marriage prohibition, compulsory sterilization, passive euthanasia – and ultimately extermination.”[30] The actual science of eugenics was lacking extensive evidence, and ultimately Galton “hoped to recast eugenics as a religious doctrine,” which was “to be taken on faith without proof.”[31]</p>
<p align="justify">As the quest to re-brand “eugenics” was under way, a 1943 edition of Eugenical News published an article titled “Eugenics After the War,” which cited Charles Davenport, a major founder and progenitor of eugenics, in his vision of “a new mankind of biological castes with master races in control and slave races serving them.”[32] A 1946 article in Eugenical News stated that, “<strong>Population, genetics, [and] psychology, are the three sciences to which the eugenicist must look for the factual material on which to build an acceptable philosophy of eugenics and to develop and defend practical eugenics proposals</strong>.”[33]</p>
<p align="justify">In the post-war period, emerging in the 1950s and going into the 1960s, the European colonies were retracting as nations of the ‘Third World’ were gaining political independence. This reinforced support for population control in many circles, as “For those who benefited most from the global status quo, population control measures were a far more palatable alternative to ending Third World poverty or promoting genuine economic development.”[34]</p>
<p align="justify">In 1952, “John D. Rockefeller 3rd convened a group of scientists to discuss the implications of the dramatic demographic change. They met in Williamsburg, Virginia, under the auspices of the National Academy of Sciences, and after two and a half days agreed on the need for a new institution that could provide solid science to guide governments and individuals in addressing population questions.”[35] That new institution was to become the Population Council. Six of the Council’s ten founding members were eugenicists.[36]</p>
<p align="justify">According to the Population Council’s website, it “did not itself espouse any form of population policy. Instead, through grants to individuals and institutions, it invested in strengthening the indigenous capacity of countries and regions to conduct population research and to develop their own policies. The Council also funded seminal work in U.S. universities and further developed its own in-house research expertise in biomedicine, public health, and social science.”[37]</p>
<p align="justify">In 2008, Matthew Connelly, a professor at Columbia University, wrote a book called, “Fatal Misconception: The Struggle to Control World Population,” in which he critically analyzes the history of the population control movement. He documents the rise of the field through the eugenics movement:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">In 1927 a Rockefeller-funded study of contraception sought &#8220;some simple measure which will be available for the wife of the slum-dweller, the peasant, or the coolie, though dull of mind.&#8221; In 1935 one representative told India&#8217;s Council of State that population control was a necessity for the masses, adding that &#8220;it is not what they want, but what is good for them.&#8221; The problem with the natives was that &#8220;they are born too much and they don&#8217;t die enough,&#8221; a public-health official in French Indochina stated in 1936.[38]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Connelly’s general thesis was “how some people have long tried to redesign world population by reducing the fertility of other’s.” Further:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify"><strong>Connelly examines population control as a global transnational movement because its main advocates and practitioners aimed to reduce world population through global governance and often viewed national governments as a means to this end</strong>. Fatal Misconceptions is therefore an intricate account of networks of influential individuals, international organizations, NGOs, and national governments.[39]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">As one review in the Economist pointed out, “Much of the evil done in the name of slowing population growth had its roots in an uneasy coalition between feminists, humanitarians and environmentalists, who wished to help the unwillingly fecund, and the racists, eugenicists and militarists who wished to see particular patterns of reproduction, regardless of the desires of those involved.” The Economist further wrote:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">As the world population soared, the population controllers came to believe they were fighting a war, and there would be collateral damage. Millions of intra-uterine contraceptive devices were exported to poor countries although they were known to cause infections and sterility. &#8220;<strong>Perhaps the individual patient is expendable in the general scheme of things</strong>,&#8221; said a participant at a conference on the devices organised in 1962 by the Population Council, a research institute founded by John D. Rockefeller, &#8220;particularly if the infection she acquires is sterilising but not lethal.&#8221; In 1969 Robert McNamara, then president of the World Bank, said he was reluctant to finance health care &#8220;unless it was very strictly related to population control, because usually health facilities contributed to the decline of the death rate, and thereby to the population explosion.&#8221;[40]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">A review in the New York Review of Books pointed out that this movement coincided a great deal with the feminist movement in advancing women’s reproductive rights. However, “these benefits were seen by many US family planning officials as secondary to the goal of reducing the absolute numbers of people in developing countries. The urgency of what came to be known as the &#8220;population control movement&#8221; contributed to a climate of coercion and led to a number of serious human rights abuses, especially in Asian countries.”[41] Dominic Lawson, writing a review of Connelly’s book for The Sunday Times, explained that:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">the population-control movement was bankrolled by America&#8217;s biggest private fortunes &#8211; the Ford family foundation, John D Rockefeller III, and Clarence Gamble (of Procter &#38; Gamble). These gentlemen shared not just extreme wealth but a common anxiety: the well-to-do and clever (people like them, obviously) were now having much smaller families than their ancestors, but the great unwashed &#8211; Chinamen! Indians! Negroes! &#8211; were reproducing themselves in an irresponsible manner. What they feared was a kind of Darwinism in reverse &#8211; the survival of the unfittest.[42]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">As the New Scientist reported, while contraceptives and women’s fertility rights were being expanded, “For much of the past half-century, population control came first and human rights had to be sacrificed.” Further, the New Scientist wrote that Connelly “lays bare the dark secrets of <strong>an authoritarian neo-Malthusian ethos that created an international population agenda built around control</strong>.” One such horrific notion was “the official policies that made it acceptable to <strong>hand out food aid to famine victims only if the women agreed to be sterilized</strong>.”[43] In a sad irony, this seemingly progressive movement for women’s rights actually had the effect of resulting in a humanitarian disaster, disproportionately affecting women of the developing world.</p>
<p align="justify">In 1968, biologist Paul Ehrlich wrote his widely influential book, ‘The Population Bomb,’ “in which he predicted that global overpopulation would cause massive famines as early as the 1970s.”[44] In his book, he refers to mankind as a “cancer” upon the world:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">A cancer is an uncontrolled multiplication of cells; the population explosion is an uncontrolled multiplication of people. Treating only the symptoms of cancer may make the victim more comfortable at first, but eventually he dies &#8211; often horribly. A similar fate awaits a world with a population explosion if only the symptoms are treated. We must shift our efforts from treatment of the symptoms to the cutting out of the cancer. The operation will demand many apparent brutal and heartless decisions. The pain may be intense. But the disease is so far advanced that only with radical surgery does the patient have a chance to survive.[45]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">The American political elite fully embraced this population paradigm of viewing the world and relations with the rest of the world. President Lyndon Johnson was quoted as saying, “I’m not going to piss away foreign aid in nations where they refuse to deal with their own population problems,” while his successor, Richard Nixon, was quoted as saying, “population control is a must &#8230; population control must go hand in hand with aid.”[46] Robert McNamara, President of the World Bank and former Secretary of Defense in the Johnson administration, said that he opposed World Bank programs financing health care “unless it was very strictly related to population control, because usually health facilities contributed to the decline of the death rate, and thereby to the population explosion.”[47]</p>
<p align="justify">Ehrlich was also influential in tracking India’s rapid population growth into the 1970s. The rapid population growth in India was attributed at the time to the result of the public health system the British had set up under the colonial government, as well as the fact that, as a means to maintaining a relationship of dependence with Britain, the British had discouraged industrialization in India. As famine was around the corner in India, President “Johnson used food aid to pressure the Indian government to meet its family planning targets,” and “By the early 1970s, Bangladesh was spending one third of its entire health budget on family planning and India was spending 60 percent.”[48] Further:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">[B]etween the 1960s and 1980s, millions of people in India and other Asian countries were sterilized or had IUDs [intrauterine devices], as well as other contraceptives, inserted in unhygienic conditions. Numerous cases of uterine perforation, excessive bleeding, infections, and even death were reported.[49]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">The Population Council knowingly sent un-sterile IUDs to India, and in the 1970s, nearly half a million women in forty-two developing countries were treated with defective IUDs that “heightened the risk of infection and uterine perforation,” after the United States Agency for International Development (USAID) had “quietly bought up thousands of the devices at a discount for distribution overseas.” Then sterilization was introduced as a means for “keeping the quotas” on population control in India, as “<strong>sterilization was made a condition for receiving land allocations and water for irrigation, as well as electricity, rickshaw licenses, and medical care</strong>.” A Swedish diplomat touring a Swedish/World Bank population program at the time was quoted as saying, “Obviously the stories&#8230; on how young and unmarried men are more or less dragged to the sterilization premises are true in far too many cases.”[50]</p>
<p align="justify">In 1967, the UN Fund for Population Activities was created, and in 1971, “the General Assembly acknowledged that UNFPA [United Nations Population Fund] should play a leading role within the UN system in promoting population programmes.”[51] In 1970, Nixon created the Commission on Population Growth and the American Future, known as the Rockefeller Commission, for its chairman, John D. Rockefeller 3rd. In 1972, the final report was delivered to Nixon.</p>
<p align="justify">Among the members of the Commission (besides Rockefeller) were David E. Bell, Vice President of the Ford Foundation, and Bernard Berelson, President of the Population Council. Among the conclusions were that, “Population growth is one of the major factors affecting the demand for resources and the deterioration of the environment in the United States. The further we look into the future, the more important population becomes,” and that, “From an environmental and resource point of view, there are no advantages from further growth.” Further, the report warned:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">The American future cannot be isolated from what is happening in the rest of the world. There are serious problems right now in the distribution of resources, income, and wealth, among countries. World population growth is going to make these problems worse before they get better. The United States needs to undertake much greater efforts to understand these problems and develop international policies to deal with them.[52]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">In 1974, National Security Study Memorandum (NSSM) 200 was issued under the direction of US National Security Adviser Henry Kissinger, otherwise known as “Implications of Worldwide Population Growth for U.S. Security and Overseas Interests.” Among the issues laid out in the memorandum was that, “Growing populations will have a serious impact on the need for food especially in the poorest, fastest growing LDCs [Lesser Developed Countries],” and “The most serious consequence for the short and middle term is the possibility of massive famines in certain parts of the world, especially the poorest regions.” Further, “rapid population growth presses on a fragile environment in ways that threaten longer-term food production.” The report plainly stated that, “there is a major risk of severe damage to world economic, political, and ecological systems and, as these systems begin to fail, to our humanitarian values.”[53]</p>
<p align="justify">The memorandum lays out key policy recommendations for dealing with the “crisis” of overpopulation. They stated that “our aim should be for the world to achieve a replacement level of fertility, (a two-child family on the average), by about the year 2000,” and that this strategy “will require vigorous efforts by interested countries, U.N. agencies and other international bodies to make it effective [and] U.S. leadership is essential.” They suggested a concentration on specific countries: India, Bangladesh, Pakistan, Nigeria, Mexico, Indonesia, Brazil, the Philippines, Thailand, Egypt, Turkey, Ethiopia and Colombia.[54]</p>
<p align="justify">They recommended the “Integration of population factors and population programs into country development planning,” as well as “Increased assistance for family planning services, information and technology,” and “Creating conditions conducive to fertility decline.” The memorandum even specifically mentioned that, “We must take care that our activities should not give the appearance to the LDCs [Lesser Developed Countries] of an industrialized country policy directed against the LDCs.”[55] Essentially, NSSM 200 made population control a key strategy in US foreign policy, specifically related to aid and development. In other words, it was eugenics as foreign policy.</p>
<p align="justify">In 1975, Indira Gandhi, the Prime Minister of India, declared martial law. Her son Sanjay was appointed as the nation’s chief population controller. Sanjay “proceeded to flatten slums and then tell the residents that they could get a new house if they would agree to be sterilized. Government officials were given sterilization quotas. Within a year, six million Indian men and two million women were sterilized. At least 2,000 Indians died as a result of botched sterilization operations.” However, the following year there was an election, and Indira Gandhi’s government was thrown out of power, with that issue playing a major factor.[56]</p>
<p align="justify">Next, however, China became the major focus of the population control movement, which “offered technical assistance to China&#8217;s &#8220;one child&#8221; policy of 1978-83, even helping to pay for computers that allowed Chinese officials to track &#8220;birth permits,&#8221; the official means by which the government banned families from having more than one child and required the aborting of additional children.”[57] Further:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">Even China&#8217;s draconian population programs received some support in the 1980s from the US-funded International Planned Parenthood Federation and the UN Population Fund. Before China launched its infamous &#8220;One Child Policy,&#8221; concerns were being raised about its &#8220;voluntary&#8221; family planning program. In 1981, Chinese and American newspapers reported that &#8220;<strong>vehicles transporting Cantonese women to hospitals for abortions were &#8216;filled with wailing noises.&#8217; Some pregnant women were reportedly &#8216;handcuffed, tied with ropes or placed in pig&#8217;s baskets.</strong>&#8216;&#8221;</p>
<p align="justify">After 1983, coercion became official Chinese policy. &#8220;All women with one child were to be inserted with a stainless-steel, tamper-resistant IUD, all parents with two or more children were to be sterilized, and all unauthorized pregnancies aborted,&#8221; according to the One Child Policy. During this time, the International Planned Parenthood Federation and the UN Population Fund continued to support China&#8217;s nongovernmental Family Planning Association, even though some of its top officials also worked for the government.[58]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">The UN was not a passive participant in population control measures, as it actively supported these harsh programs, and in many cases, rewarded governments for their vicious tactics in reducing population growth:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">In 1983, Xinzhong Qian and Indira Gandhi were awarded the first United Nations Population Award to recognize and reward their accomplishments in limiting the population growth in China and India in the previous decade. During the 1970s, officials in these countries had launched extremely ambitious population programs that were supposed to improve the quality of the population and halt its growth. <strong>The measures used were harsh. For example, slum clearance resulting in the eradication of whole urban neighbourhoods and the widespread sterilization of their inhabitants was an important part of India’s ‘Emergency’ campaign. In Delhi, hundreds of thousands of people were driven from their homes in events that resulted in numerous clashes, arrests, and deaths, while a total of eight million sterilizations were recorded in India in 1976</strong>.[59]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Horrifically, “between the 1960s and 1980s, millions of people in India and other Asian countries were sterilized or had IUDs, as well as other contraceptives, inserted in unhygienic conditions. <strong>Numerous cases of uterine perforation, excessive bleeding, infections, and even death were reported</strong>, but these programs made little effort to treat these conditions, or even determine their frequency, so we don&#8217;t know precisely how common they were.”[60]</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">In the late 1980s, revelations in Brazil uncovered the NSSM 200 in Brazil since its implementation in 1975 under the Ford Presidency. An official government investigation was launched, and it was discovered that, “<strong>an estimated 44% of all Brazilian women aged between 14 and 55 had been permanently sterilized</strong>.” Further, the programs of sterilization, undertaken by a number of international organizations, were coordinated under the guidance of USAID.[61]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">At the UN’s 1994 World Population Conference in Cairo, Third World delegates to the conference emphasized the need for development policies as opposed to demographic policies; that the focus must be on development, not population. This was essentially a setback for the radical population control movement; however, it wasn’t one they couldn’t work around. There was still a great deal of support among Western elites and co-opted developing world elites for the aims of population control. As Connelly articulated:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">It appealed to the rich and powerful because, with the spread of emancipatory movements and the integration of markets, it began to appear easier and more profitable to control populations than to control territory. That’s why opponents were correct in viewing it as another chapter in the unfinished history of imperialism.[62]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">It was around this point that the population control movement, while continuing on its overall aims of curbing population growth of Third World nations, began to further merge itself with the environmental movement. While always working alongside the environmental movement, this period saw the emergence of a more integrated approach to policy agendas.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Environmentalism as Eugenics</strong></p>
<p align="justify">Michael Barker extensively covered the connection between the Rockefeller and Ford foundations in funding the environmental movement in the academic journal, Capitalism Nature Socialism. As Barker noted, following World War II, the public became increasingly concerned with the environment as the “chemical-industrial complex” grew at an astounding rate.[63] Since Rockefeller interests were heavily involved in the chemical industry, the rising trend in environmental thought and concern had to quickly be controlled and steered in a direction favourable to elite interests.</p>
<p align="justify">Two important organizations in shaping the environmental movement were the Conservation Foundation and Resources for the Future, which largely relied upon Rockefeller and Ford Foundation funding, and both conservation organizations had interestingly helped to “launch an explicitly pro-corporate approach to resource conservation.”[64] Laurance Rockefeller served as a trustee of the Conservation Foundation, and donated $50,000 yearly throughout the 50s and 60s. Further, the Conservation Foundation was founded by Fairfield Osborn, whose cousin, Frederick Osborn, became another prominent voice in conservation.[65] Frederick Osborn was also working with the Rockefeller’s Population Council and was President of the American Eugenics Society.</p>
<p align="justify">In 1952, the Ford Foundation created the organization Resources for the Future (RFF), (the same year that the Rockefellers created the Population Council), and the original founders were also “John D. Rockefeller Jr.’s chief advisors on conservation matters.” Laurance Rockefeller joined the board of the RFF in 1958, and the RFF got $500,000 from the Rockefeller Foundation in 1970.[66] The Ford Foundation would also go on to create the Environmental Defense Fund (EDF), the Natural Resources Defense Council (NRDC), and the Sierra Club Legal Defense Fund.[67] McGeorge Bundy, who was President of the Ford Foundation from 1966 until 1979, once stated that, “everything the foundation did could be regarded as ‘making the world safe for capitalism’.”[68]</p>
<p align="justify">Certainly one of the pre-eminent, if not the most prominent environmental organizations in the world is the World Wildlife Foundation (WWF). The WWF was founded on September 11, 1961, by Sir Julian Huxley, the first Director General of the UN organization, UNESCO.[69] Sir Julian Huxley was also a life trustee of the British Eugenics Society from 1925, and its President from 1959-62. In the biography of Julian Huxley on the British Eugenics Society’s website (now known as the Galton Institute – a genetics research center), it stated that, “Huxley believed that eugenics would one day be seen as the way forward for the human race,” and that, “<strong>A catastrophic event may be needed for evolution to move at an accelerated pace</strong>, as the extinction of the dinosaurs gave the mammals their chance to take over the world. It is much the same with ideas whose time has not yet come; they must survive periods when they are not generally welcome. Like the small mammals in dinosaur times they must await their opportunity.”[70]</p>
<p align="justify">In 1962, Rachel Carson, an American marine biologist, published her seminal work, Silent Spring, which has long been credited with helping launch the modern environmental movement. Her book was largely based around the criticism of pesticides as harmful to the environment and human and animal health. Of particular note, she is seen as being the starting force for the campaign against DDT. Carson died in 1964, but her legacy was set in stone by the emerging environmental movement.</p>
<p align="justify">The Environmental Defense Fund was founded in 1967 with the specific aim to ban DDT. Some of its initial funding came from the Ford Foundation.[71] This also spurred the formation of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), an official US government agency, in 1970. In 1972, the EPA banned the use of DDT in the United States. Since this time, “DDT prohibitions have been expanded and enforced by NGO pressure, coercive treaties, and threats of economic sanctions by foundations, nations and international aid agencies.”[72]</p>
<p align="justify">DDT is widely regarded as a carcinogen, and most have never questioned the banning of DDT until understanding the effects of DDT usage beyond the environmental aspect. In particular, we need to look at Africa to understand the significant role of DDT and why we need to re-evaluate its potential usage, weighing the pros and cons of doing so. We must bring in the “human element” and balance that out with the “environmental element” instead of just simply writing off the human aspect to the issue.</p>
<p align="justify">The World Health Organization (WHO) said in 2000, that, “malaria infected over 300 million people. It killed nearly 2,000,000 – most of them in sub-Saharan Africa. Over half the victims are children, who die at the rate of two per minute or 3,000 per day,” and that, “Since 1972, over 50 million people have died from this dreaded disease. Many are weakened by AIDS or dysentery, but actually die of malaria.” In 2002 alone, 80,000 Ugandans died from malaria, half of which were children.[73] The fact is, that:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">No other chemical comes close to DDT as an affordable, effective way to repel mosquitoes from homes, exterminate any that land on walls, and disorient any that are not killed or repelled, largely eliminating their urge to bite in homes that are treated once or twice a year with tiny amounts of this miracle insecticide.[74]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Donald Roberts, Professor of Tropical Public Health at the Uniformed Services University of Health Sciences, explained that, “DDT is long-acting; the alternatives are not,” and that, ultimately, when it comes to the issue of poor countries and poor people, “DDT is cheap; the alternatives are not. End of Story.”[75]</p>
<p align="justify">Richard Tren, President of Africa Fighting Malaria, said that, “In the 60 years since DDT was first introduced, not a single scientific paper has been able to replicate even one case of actual human harm from its use.” At the end of World War II, DDT was used on nearly every concentration camp survivor to prevent typhus, and the “widespread use of DDT in Europe and the United States played vital roles in eradicating malaria and typhus on both continents.” Further, in 1979, a World Health Organization (WHO) review of DDT use could not find “any possible adverse effects of DDT,” and said it was the “safest pesticide used for residual spraying and vector control programs.”[76]</p>
<p align="justify">However, organizations such as the WHO, United Nations Environmental Program (UNEP), the World Bank, Greenpeace, World Wildlife Fund, and a variety of others still remained adamantly opposed to the use of DDT. While DDT is not outright banned, it is extremely difficult to have it used in places like Africa due to funding. The funding for health care and disease-related programs comes largely from western aid agencies and NGOs, and “The US Agency for International Development [USAID] will not fund any indoor residual spraying and neither will most of the other donors,” explained Richard Tren, which “means that most African countries have to use whatever [these donors] are willing to fund (bed nets), which may not be the most appropriate tool.”[77]</p>
<p align="justify">A Ugandan Health Minister said in 2002 that, “Our people’s lives are of primary importance. The West is concerned about the environment because we share it with them. But it is not concerned about malaria because it is not a problem there. In Europe, they used DDT to kill anopheles mosquitoes that cause malaria. Why can’t we use DDT to kill the enemy in our camp?”[78]</p>
<p align="justify">Michael Crichton, an author and PhD molecular biologist, plainly stated, “Banning DDT is one of the most disgraceful episodes in the twentieth century history of America. We knew better, and we did it anyway, and we let people around the world die, and we didn’t give a damn.” As author Paul Driessen eloquently explained, the West “would never tolerate being told they had to protect their children solely by using bed nets, larvae-eating fish and medicinal treatments. But they have been silent about conditions in Africa, and about the intolerable attitudes of environmental groups, aid agencies and their own government[s].”[79]</p>
<p align="justify">James Lovelock, a scientist, researcher, environmentalist and futurist, became famous for popularizing his idea known as the Gaia hypothesis. He first started writing about this theory in journals in the early 1970s, but it shot to fame with the publication of his 1979 book, “Gaia: A New Look at Life on Earth.” The general theory is that the Earth acts as a single organism, where all facets interact and react in a particular way that promotes an optimal environment on Earth. Thus, the theory was named after the Greek Earth goddess, Gaia. In the opening paragraph of his book, he stated that, “the quest for Gaia is an attempt to find the largest living creature on Earth.”[80] His theory provoked a fair amount criticism within the scientific community, with some referring to it as merely a metaphorical description of Earth processes.[81]</p>
<p align="justify">Lovelock has also been known to make wild predictive statements. In 2006, he wrote an article for the Independent, in which he stated that, “My Gaia theory sees the Earth behaving as if it were alive, and clearly anything alive can enjoy good health, or suffer disease,” and that the Earth is “seriously ill, and soon to pass into a morbid fever that may last as long as 100,000 years.”[82]</p>
<p align="justify">In 2008, the Guardian interviewed Lovelock, who contended that it was “too late” to do anything about global warming, that catastrophe was inevitable, and that, “about 80%&#8221; of the world&#8217;s population [will] be wiped out by 2100.”[83] In August of 2009, Lovelock became a patron of the Optimum Population Trust, a British population control organization. Upon his becoming a patron, he stated that, “<strong>Those who fail to see that population growth and climate change are two sides of the same coin are either ignorant or hiding from the truth. These two huge environmental problems are inseparable and to discuss one while ignoring the other is irrational</strong>.” He added, “How can we possibly decrease carbon emissions and land use while the number of emitters and the space they occupy remorselessly increases? When will the environmentalists who claim to be green recognise the truth and speak out?”[84]</p>
<p align="justify">Taxes and trades in carbon and carbon credits virtually commodify our atmosphere, so that the very air we breathe becomes property that is bought and sold. A tax on carbon is a tax on life. Since the lifeblood of an industrial society is oil, this requires carbon emissions in order to develop. The restraints on carbon, particularly the notion of trading carbon credits – i.e., trading the ‘right’ to pollute a certain amount – will disproportionately affect the developing world, which cannot afford to finance its own development. Corporations and banks will trade and own the world’s carbon credits, granting them the exclusive right to pollute and control the world’s resources and environment. The carbon trading market could become twice the size of the world oil market within ten years time.[85]</p>
<p align="justify">In regards to the Copenhagen Climate talks, which essentially broke down in December of 2009, the real source of this failure lies in a document that revealed the true nature of the negotiations, referred to as the ‘Danish Text.’ The ‘Danish Text’ was a leaked Danish government document which outlined a draft agreement “that hands more power to rich countries,” as, “The draft <strong>hands effective control of climate change finance to the World Bank</strong>” and “would make any money to help poor countries adapt to climate change <strong>dependent on them taking a range of actions</strong>.”[86] In other words, it becomes the new means of exerting “conditionality” upon the developing, and increasingly the developed world. ‘Conditionality’ implying – of course – a restructuring of society along lines designated by the World Bank.</p>
<p align="justify">While these are but examples of the influence and shaping of science to mold society and control humanity, much more discussion and debate is needed on these issues. While science can be used for the benefit of mankind, so too can it be used for the control and oppression of humanity. The people who run our societies view us as needing to be controlled, so they redirect the social apparatus into systems of control and coercion. Science can allow us to understand an idea or organism; but in doing so, it can also allow us to understand how to dominate and control that idea or organism. We must continually engage in a discussion of our changing society to better understand the nature of its changes and how that could affect us both positively and negatively.</p>
<p align="justify">If not for the Technological (or ‘Technetronic’) Revolution, elites would not have access to such powerful means of control; but, simultaneously, people have never had such great access to each other through mass communications and the Internet. So while environmental science can allow us to better understand our environment, something we seem still to be very much an adolescent in accomplishing, it also unleashes an ability, and what’s greater – a temptation – to control and shape the environment. Science can be used to both free and imprison the human mind. It is imperative that we approach and discuss the sciences (and all issues) from this perspective, not from a narrow-minded and divisive black-and-white world of ‘left’ and ‘right’, of religion or science. We cannot simply view criticism and opposition to social and scientific endeavours as ‘backwards’, or based on ‘religious doctrine’. There are rational reasons and purposes for criticism and debate on all of these issues, and rational positions of dissent.</p>
<p align="justify">Issues like climate change are generally divided upon those who ‘believe’ in climate change, and those who are termed ‘deniers’, which is a disingenuous and divisive approach to rational debate. It silences the critical scientists, who do not get funding from governments or corporations. It classifies those who dissent as ‘deniers’, employing rhetoric like that used against Holocaust deniers, whereas the majority of the dissent within the scientific community comes from those who simply see the role of other forces (often natural) in shaping and changing our climate, such as solar radiation. They do not ‘deny’ climate change, but they dissent on the causes and consequences. Is their opinion not worth hearing? If we are reshaping our entire global political and economic spheres as a result of our supposedly ‘collective’ perception of this issue – as we certainly are – then is it not of the utmost importance that we hear from other voices, especially those of dissent, in order to better understand the issue?</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Merging Man and Machine: The Future of Humanity</strong></p>
<p align="justify">Eisenhower warned, “The prospect of domination of the nation&#8217;s scholars by Federal employment, project allocations, and the power of money is ever present – and is gravely to be regarded,” and that, “<strong>we must also be alert to the equal and opposite danger that public policy could itself become the captive of a scientific-technological elite</strong>.”[87]</p>
<p align="justify">Bill Joy, a computer scientist and co-founder of Sun Microsystems, who was co-chair of the presidential commission on the future of IT research, wrote an article for Wired Magazine in 2000 entitled, “Why the Future Doesn’t Need Us.” Joy explained the possibilities in a technological society of the near future, that “new technologies like genetic engineering and nanotechnology were giving us the power to remake the world.” One startling development in the world is that of robot technology and its potential impact upon society. Joy explains:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">Accustomed to living with almost routine scientific breakthroughs, we have yet to come to terms with the fact that <strong>the most compelling 21st-century technologies &#8211; robotics, genetic engineering, and nanotechnology &#8211; pose a different threat than the technologies that have come before</strong>. Specifically, robots, engineered organisms, and nanobots share a dangerous amplifying factor: <strong>They can self-replicate</strong>. A bomb is blown up only once &#8211; but one bot can become many, and quickly get out of control.[88]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Joy explains that while these technologies can, and consistently are promoted and justified in the name of doing good (such as curing diseases, etc.), “<strong>with each of these technologies, a sequence of small, individually sensible advances leads to an accumulation of great power and, concomitantly, great danger</strong>.” Joy ominously warns that:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">The 21st-century technologies &#8211; genetics, nanotechnology, and robotics (GNR) &#8211; are so powerful that they can spawn whole new classes of accidents and abuses. <strong>Most dangerously, for the first time, these accidents and abuses are widely within the reach of individuals or small groups. They will not require large facilities or rare raw materials. Knowledge alone will enable the use of them</strong>.</p>
<p align="justify">Thus we have the possibility not just of weapons of mass destruction but of knowledge-enabled mass destruction (KMD), this destructiveness hugely amplified by the power of self-replication.</p>
<p align="justify">I think it is no exaggeration to say we are on the cusp of the further perfection of extreme evil, an evil whose possibility spreads well beyond that which weapons of mass destruction bequeathed to the nation-states, on to <strong>a surprising and terrible empowerment of extreme individuals</strong>.[89]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">In other words: we are entering an era faced with the “scientific dictators” of Huxley’s nightmare vision in ‘Brave New World’. Joy explained that by 2030, “we are likely to be able to build machines, in quantity, a million times as powerful as the personal computers of today.” Thus:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">As this enormous computing power is combined with the manipulative advances of the physical sciences and the new, deep understandings in genetics, <strong>enormous transformative power is being unleashed. These combinations open up the opportunity to completely redesign the world</strong>, for better or worse: The replicating and evolving processes that have been confined to the natural world are about to become realms of human endeavor.[90]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Joy examined the transformative nature of robotics, as an intelligent robot may be built by 2030, “And once an intelligent robot exists, it is only a small step to a robot species &#8211; to an intelligent robot that can make evolved copies of itself.” Further, “A second dream of robotics is that <strong>we will gradually replace ourselves with our robotic technology, achieving near immortality by downloading our consciousnesses</strong>.” Joy further warns of the potential for an arms race to develop in these technologies, just as took place in the nuclear, radiological and biological weapons of the 20th century.[91]</p>
<p align="justify">Joy aptly explained that in the 20th century, those technologies were largely the products of governments, whereas in the 21st century, the new technologies of genetic engineering, nanotechnology and robotics (GNR), are the products of corporations and capitalism. Thus, the driving force is that of competition, desire, and the economic system. Hence, there is far less regulation and discussion of these new technologies than there was of the 20th century technologies, as the new technologies are developed in privately owned labs, not public. Joy often quotes a passage from Kaczynski&#8217;s Unabomber Manifesto regarding a future dystopia, which Joy feels has “merit in the reasoning.” In the event that human control over machines is retained (as opposed to the machines taking over):</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify"><strong>[C]ontrol over large systems of machines will be in the hands of a tiny elite</strong> &#8211; just as it is today, but with two differences. <strong>Due to improved techniques the elite will have greater control over the masses</strong>; and because human work will no longer be necessary the masses will be superfluous, a useless burden on the system. <strong>If the elite is ruthless they may simply decide to exterminate the mass of humanity. If they are humane they may use propaganda or other psychological or biological techniques to reduce the birth rate until the mass of humanity becomes extinct, leaving the world to the elite</strong>.</p>
<p align="justify">Or, if the elite consists of soft-hearted liberals, they may decide to play the role of good shepherds to the rest of the human race. They will see to it that everyone&#8217;s physical needs are satisfied, that all children are raised under psychologically hygienic conditions, that everyone has a wholesome hobby to keep him busy, and that anyone who may become dissatisfied undergoes &#8220;treatment&#8221; to cure his &#8220;problem.&#8221; Of course, <strong>life will be so purposeless that people will have to be biologically or psychologically engineered</strong> either to remove their need for the power process or make them &#8220;sublimate&#8221; their drive for power into some harmless hobby. <strong>These engineered human beings may be happy in such a society, but they will most certainly not be free. They will have been reduced to the status of domestic animals</strong>.[92]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">A horrifying vision indeed; but one which builds upon the ideas of Huxley, Russell and Brzezinski, who envisioned a people who – through biological and psychological means – are made to love their own servitude. Huxley saw the emergence of a world in which humanity, still a wild animal, is domesticated; where only the elite remain wild and have freedom to make decisions, while the masses are domesticated like pets. Huxley opined that, “<strong>Men and women will grow up to love their servitude and will never dream of revolution. There seems to be no good reason why a thoroughly scientific dictatorship should ever be overthrown</strong>.”[93]</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>We Can Have a Scientific Dictatorship, or&#8230;</strong></p>
<p align="justify">We can create an alternative. We use, strengthen, mobilize, decentralize, and mobilize the global political awakening into a global movement of people not simply politically aware, but politically active and engaged. A world where people do not simply observe the apparatus of political, economic and social power influencing their lives; but in which the people actively seek to change it to better suit their lives and their freedom. We need to understand each other better; but to do that, we cannot view each other through the harsh and deceptive lens of power.</p>
<p align="justify">To understand each other, we must know each other. People must communicate with one another around the world; ideas must be exchanged between people and discussed, debated, and decided upon; the people must determine their own futures. Take the elites out of the equation: if you do not want them to dominate your lives, do not give them the power to do so. Talk to each other and determine your own polities, economies and societies. Do not entrust dying ideas and diseased institutions to determine your future for you.</p>
<p align="justify">The tools and systems of social control are vast and evasive; they penetrate the very psychology and biology of the individual. The elite feel that they are entrusted – due to their supposed ‘innate’ superior intelligence and specialization – to control society and reshape it as they see fit, to actively mold and construct public opinion and ideas. They have a belief that people are essentially irrational emotional beings, and that they must be controlled by an elite or else the world would be in chaos. This is what underpins the ideas of ‘stability’ and ‘order’. The state has been used to fight every progressive form of change that society has ever developed for its betterment: women’s rights, racial rights, civil rights, the anti-war movement, gay rights, etc. Initially, the impulse – the immediate reaction of the state – is to oppress social movements and to suppress human freedoms. This approach often leads to a situation in which social movements are only accepted by the state when they are co-opted by the state or powerful economic forces, which then exert their influence over the state to alter the policy.</p>
<p align="justify">If we gain stability and order at the cost of our very humanity, is it worth it? Do we really need this eternal guidance, which has been constant through almost all of human history, to treat the human species as if it was in a constant state of adolescence, never quite prepared to make its own decisions or go out in the world on its own? Well it is time for humanity to grow up, leave the strange comfort of mental authoritarianism. The strive for human autonomy has only just begun; only now is all of humanity politically awakened; only now – and never before – has all of known humanity had such a great and perfect opportunity to remake the world, retake power, re-imagine individuality and revitalize freedom.</p>
<p align="justify">Our world is governed not by a conspiracy, but by ideas: ideas of power, money, the state, military, empire, race, religion, sex, gender, politics and people. The only challenge to those ideas, are new ideas. There are roughly 6,000 members of the ‘global elite,’[94] there are over 6.8 billion people in the world. That sounds like a lot of potential for new ideas. The greatest resource for the future of humanity is not in the ‘control’ of humanity, which is doomed to ultimate failure, but for the release and encouragement of the human mind and spirit.</p>
<p align="justify">People can understand the science and mechanics of the brain, the functions of psychology, the ability of human strength; but still, today, we do not know how all that biology can create Beethoven’s 9th Symphony. Humanity is still very much a mystery to humans, and it would seem likely that the best answers to the questions of ‘how should we live?’ and ‘how should our societies function?’ are best answered with the bigger question of ‘why are we here’?</p>
<p align="justify">If the purpose of people and humanity is to consume and dominate, then our present situation seems only natural. If we were meant for more, then we must become more. If we were meant to be free, we must become free. Ideas are powerful things: they can build empires, and collapse them just as easily.</p>
<p align="justify">In 1967, Dr. Martin Luther King delivered one of his most moving and important speeches, “Beyond Vietnam,” in which he spoke out against war and empire. He left humanity with sobering words:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">I am convinced that if we are to get on the right side of the world revolution, we as a nation must undergo a radical revolution of values. We must rapidly begin the shift from a &#8220;thing-oriented&#8221; society to a &#8220;person-oriented&#8221; society. When machines and computers, profit motives and property rights are considered more important than people, the giant triplets of racism, materialism, and militarism are incapable of being conquered.[95]</p>
</blockquote>
<hr />
<hr />
<p><strong>Endnotes</strong></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[1]        Aldous Huxley, Brave New World and Brave New World Revisited. (Harper Perennial, New York, 2004), page 255<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[2]        Ibid, page 259.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[3]        Bertrand Russell, The Impact of Science on Society, (Routledge, 1985), page 40<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[4]        Ibid, page 66.<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[5]        Ibid, page 62.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[6]        Ibid, page 58.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[7]        Ibid, page 117.<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[8]        Ibid, page 118.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[9]        Ibid, page 63.<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[10]      Aldous Huxley, The Ultimate Revolution, March 20, 1962. Berkeley Language Center &#8211; Speech Archive SA 0269: </span><a href="http://sunsite.berkeley.edu/Speech/VideoTest/audiofiles.html#huxley"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://sunsite.berkeley.edu/Speech/VideoTest/audiofiles.html#huxley</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[11]      Dwight D. Eisenhower, Eisenhower&#8217;s Farewell Address to the Nation. January 17, 1961: </span><a href="http://mcadams.posc.mu.edu/ike.htm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://mcadams.posc.mu.edu/ike.htm</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[12]      Zbigniew Brzezinski, Between Two Ages: America’s Role in the Technetronic Era. (Viking Press, New York, 1970), page 97<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[13]      Edwin Black, Eugenics and the Nazis &#8212; the California connection. The San Francisco Chronicle: November 9, 2003:<br />
</span><a href="http://articles.sfgate.com/2003-11-09/opinion/17517477_1_eugenics-ethnic-cleansing-master-race"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://articles.sfgate.com/2003-11-09/opinion/17517477_1_eugenics-ethnic-cleansing-master-race</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[14]      Michael Barker, The Liberal Foundations of Environmentalism: Revisiting the Rockefeller-Ford Connection. Capitalism Nature Socialism: Volume 19, Number 2, June 2008</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[15]      Bruno Waterfield, Dutch Prince Bernhard &#8216;was member of Nazi party&#8217;. The Telegraph: March 5, 2010:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/europe/netherlands/7377402/Dutch-Prince-Bernhard-was-member-of-Nazi-party.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/worldnews/europe/netherlands/7377402/Dutch-Prince-Bernhard-was-member-of-Nazi-party.html</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[16]      Julian Huxley, UNESCO Its Purpose and Its Philosophy (1946). Preparatory Commission of the United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organisation, page 61.<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[17]      Ibid, page 21.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[18]      Ibid, pages 37-38.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[19]      Ibid, page 38.<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[20]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[21]      Ibid, page 18.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[22]      Edwin Black, War Against the Weak: Eugenics and America’s Campaign to Create a Master Race. (New York: Thunders’s Mouth Press, 2004), page 418</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[23]      MARTIN MORSE WOOSTER, The War Against Fertility. The Wall Street Journal: April 1, 2008:<br />
</span><a href="http://online.wsj.com/article/SB120700566688178565.html?mod=hpp_europe_leisure"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://online.wsj.com/article/SB120700566688178565.html?mod=hpp_europe_leisure</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[24]      Garland E. Allen, “Is a New Eugenics Afoot?” Science Magazine, October 5, 2001: Vol. 294, no. 5540:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.sciencemag.org/cgi/content/full/294/5540/59"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.sciencemag.org/cgi/content/full/294/5540/59</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[25]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[26]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[27]      Niall Firth, Human race will &#8216;split into two different species&#8217;. The Daily Mail: October 26, 2007:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.dailymail.co.uk/sciencetech/article-489653/Human-race-split-different-species.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.dailymail.co.uk/sciencetech/article-489653/Human-race-split-different-species.html</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[28]      Edwin Black, War Against the Weak: Eugenics and America’s Campaign to Create a Master Race (New York: Thunder’s Mouth Press, 2004), 11-12</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[29]      Ibid, pages 12-13.<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[30]      Ibid, page 19.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[31]      Ibid, page 28.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[32]      Ibid, page 416.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[33]      Ibid, page 418.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[34]      Simon Butler, The Dark History of Population Control. Climate and Capitalism: November 23, 2009: </span><a href="http://climateandcapitalism.com/?p=1293"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://climateandcapitalism.com/?p=1293</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[35]      History, ABOUT THE POPULATION COUNCIL. The Population Council: September 10, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.popcouncil.org/about/history.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.popcouncil.org/about/history.html</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[36]      MARTIN MORSE WOOSTER, The War Against Fertility. The Wall Street Journal: April 1, 2008: </span><a href="http://online.wsj.com/article/SB120700566688178565.html?mod=hpp_europe_leisure"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://online.wsj.com/article/SB120700566688178565.html?mod=hpp_europe_leisure</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[37]      History, ABOUT THE POPULATION COUNCIL. The Population Council: September 10, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.popcouncil.org/about/history.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.popcouncil.org/about/history.html</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[38]      Review, Horrid History. The Economist: May 24, 2008<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[39]      Heli Kasanen, BOOK REVIEW: Fatal misconception: the struggle to control world population, By Matthew Connelly: The Electronic Journal of Sustainable Development, 2009, 1(3), page 15</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[40]      Review, Horrid History. The Economist: May 24, 2008<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[41]      Helen Epstein, The Strange History of Birth Control. The New York Review of Books: August 18, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.powells.com/review/2008_08_18.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.powells.com/review/2008_08_18.html</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[42]      Dominic Lawson, Fatal Misconception: The Struggle to Control World Population by Matthew Connelly. The Sunday Times: May 18, 2008:<br />
</span><a href="http://entertainment.timesonline.co.uk/tol/arts_and_entertainment/books/non-fiction/article3938455.ece"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://entertainment.timesonline.co.uk/tol/arts_and_entertainment/books/non-fiction/article3938455.ece</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[43]      Fred Pearce, Fatal Misconception by Matthew Connelly. The New Scientist: May 21, 2008:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.newscientist.com/article/mg19826572.400-review-ifatal-misconceptioni-by-matthew-connelly.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.newscientist.com/article/mg19826572.400-review-ifatal-misconceptioni-by-matthew-connelly.html</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[44]      Jack M. Hollander, The Real Environmental Crisis: Why Poverty, Not Affluence, Is the Environment’s Number One Enemy. (University of California Press: Berkeley, 2003), page 30<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[45]      Lara Knudsen, Reproductive Rights in a Global Context. (Vanderbilt University Press: 2006), page 3</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[46]      Simon Butler, The Dark History of Population Control. Climate and Capitalism: November 23, 2009: </span><a href="http://climateandcapitalism.com/?p=1293"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://climateandcapitalism.com/?p=1293</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[47]      Nicholas D. Kristof, Birth Control for Others. The New York Times: March 23, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.nytimes.com/2008/03/23/books/review/Kristof-t.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.nytimes.com/2008/03/23/books/review/Kristof-t.html</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[48]      Helen Epstein, The Strange History of Birth Control. The New York Review of Books: August 18, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.powells.com/review/2008_08_18.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.powells.com/review/2008_08_18.html</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[49]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[50]      Ibid.<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[51]      UNFPA, UNFPA and the United Nations System. About UNFPA: </span><a href="http://www.unfpa.org/about/unsystem.htm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.unfpa.org/about/unsystem.htm</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[52]      Population and the American Future, The Report of The Commission on Population Growth and the American Future. The Center for Research on Population and Security: March 27, 1972:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.population-security.org/rockefeller/001_population_growth_and_the_american_future.htm#Commission"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.population-security.org/rockefeller/001_population_growth_and_the_american_future.htm#Commission</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[53]      NSSM 200, Implications of Worldwide Population Growth for U.S. Security and Overseas Interests. National Security Study Memorandum (NSSM) 200: April 24, 1974: </span><a href="http://www.population-security.org/11-CH3.html#summary"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.population-security.org/11-CH3.html#summary</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[54]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[55]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[56]      MARTIN MORSE WOOSTER, The War Against Fertility. The Wall Street Journal: April 1, 2008:<br />
</span><a href="http://online.wsj.com/article/SB120700566688178565.html?mod=hpp_europe_leisure"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://online.wsj.com/article/SB120700566688178565.html?mod=hpp_europe_leisure</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[57]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[58]      Helen Epstein, The Strange History of Birth Control. The New York Review of Books: August 18, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.powells.com/review/2008_08_18.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.powells.com/review/2008_08_18.html</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[59]      Heli Kasanen, BOOK REVIEW: Fatal misconception: the struggle to control world population, By Matthew Connelly: The Electronic Journal of Sustainable Development, 2009, 1(3), page 15<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[60]      Helen Epstein, The Strange History of Birth Control. The New York Review of Books, August 18, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.powells.com/review/2008_08_18.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.powells.com/review/2008_08_18.html</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[61]      F. William Engdahl, Seeds of Destruction: The Hidden Agenda of Genetic Manipulation. (Global Research, Montreal: 2007), page 65<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[62]      Simon Butler, The Dark History of Population Control. Climate and Capitalism: November 23, 2009: </span><a href="http://climateandcapitalism.com/?p=1293"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://climateandcapitalism.com/?p=1293</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[63]      Michael Barker, The Liberal Foundations of Environmentalism: Revisiting the Rockefeller-Ford Connection. Capitalism Nature Socialism: Volume 19, Number 2, June 2008: page 15</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[64]      Ibid, pages 19-20.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[65]      Ibid, page 20.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[66]      Ibid, page 22.<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[67]      Ibid, page 25.<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[68]      Ibid, page 26.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[69]      WWF, A History of WWF: The Sixties. World Wildlife Fund: November 13, 2005: <a href="http://www.panda.org/about_wwf/who_we_are/history/sixties/index.cfm" rel="nofollow">http://www.panda.org/about_wwf/who_we_are/history/sixties/index.cfm</a><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[70]      John Timson, Portraits of the Pioneers: Sir Julian Huxley, FRS. The Galton Institute: December 1999 Newsletter: <a href="http://www.galtoninstitute.org.uk/Newsletters/GINL9912/julian_huxley.htm" rel="nofollow">http://www.galtoninstitute.org.uk/Newsletters/GINL9912/julian_huxley.htm</a><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[71]      Michael Barker, The Liberal Foundations of Environmentalism: Revisiting the Rockefeller-Ford Connection. Capitalism Nature Socialism: Volume 19, Number 2, June 2008: page 25</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[72]      Paul Driessen, Eco-Imperialism: Green Power, Black Death. (Merril Press: 2004), page 67</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[73]      Ibid, page 66.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[74]      Ibid, page 67.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[75]      Ibid, page 68.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[76]      Ibid, page 69.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[77]      Ibid, page 71.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[78]      Ibid, page 72.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[79]      Ibid, page 73.<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[80]      James Lovelock, Gaia: A New Look at Life on Earth. (Oxford: 1979), page 1<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[81]      S.J. Gould, Kropotkin was no crackpot. Natural History, June 1997: pages 12-21<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[82]      James Lovelock, The Earth is about to catch a morbid fever that may last as long as 100,000 years. The Independent: January 16, 2006:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.independent.co.uk/opinion/commentators/james-lovelock-the-earth-is-about-to-catch-a-morbid-fever-that-may-last-as-long-as-100000-years-523161.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.independent.co.uk/opinion/commentators/james-lovelock-the-earth-is-about-to-catch-a-morbid-fever-that-may-last-as-long-as-100000-years-523161.html</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[83]      Decca Aitkenhead, &#8216;Enjoy life while you can&#8217;. The Guardian: March 1, 2008:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/theguardian/2008/mar/01/scienceofclimatechange.climatechange"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.guardian.co.uk/theguardian/2008/mar/01/scienceofclimatechange.climatechange</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[84]      OPT, GAIA SCIENTIST TO BE OPT PATRON. News Release: August 26, 2009:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.optimumpopulation.org/releases/opt.release26Aug09.htm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.optimumpopulation.org/releases/opt.release26Aug09.htm</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[85]      Terry Macalister, Carbon trading could be worth twice that of oil in next decade. The Guardian: November 29, 2009:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/environment/2009/nov/29/carbon-trading-market-copenhagen-summit"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.guardian.co.uk/environment/2009/nov/29/carbon-trading-market-copenhagen-summit</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[86]      John Vidal, Copenhagen climate summit in disarray after &#8216;Danish text&#8217; leak. The Guardian: December 8, 2009:<br />
</span><a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/environment/2009/dec/08/copenhagen-climate-summit-disarray-danish-text"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.guardian.co.uk/environment/2009/dec/08/copenhagen-climate-summit-disarray-danish-text</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[87]      Dwight D. Eisenhower, Eisenhower&#8217;s Farewell Address to the Nation. January 17, 1961: </span><a href="http://mcadams.posc.mu.edu/ike.htm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://mcadams.posc.mu.edu/ike.htm</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[88]      Bill Joy, Why the future doesn&#8217;t need us. Wired Magazine: April 2000: </span><a href="http://www.wired.com/wired/archive/8.04/joy.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.wired.com/wired/archive/8.04/joy.html</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[89]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[90]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[91]      Ibid.<br />
</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[92]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[93]      Time, The Press: Brave New Newsday. Time Magazine: June 9, 1958: </span><a href="http://www.time.com/time/magazine/article/0,9171,868521,00.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.time.com/time/magazine/article/0,9171,868521,00.html</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[94]      Laura Miller, The rise of the superclass. Salon: March 14, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.salon.com/books/review/2008/03/14/superclass"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.salon.com/books/review/2008/03/14/superclass</span></a></p>
<p align="left"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[95]      Rev. Martin Luther King, Beyond Vietnam: A Time to Break Silence. Speech delivered by Dr. Martin Luther King, Jr., on April 4, 1967, at a meeting of Clergy and Laity Concerned at Riverside Church in New York City: </span><a href="http://www.hartford-hwp.com/archives/45a/058.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.hartford-hwp.com/archives/45a/058.html</span></a></p>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[The Global Political Awakening and the New World Order]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/14/the-global-political-awakening-and-the-new-world-order/</link>
<pubDate>Fri, 15 Jul 2011 02:14:36 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/14/the-global-political-awakening-and-the-new-world-order/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[The Global Political Awakening and the New World Order The Technological Revolution and the Future o]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<table width="100%" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td align="left" valign="top">
<div><strong>The Global Political Awakening and the New World Order</strong></div>
<div><strong>The Technological Revolution and the Future of Freedom, Part 1</strong></div>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" align="left" nowrap="nowrap">
<div><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/">Global Research</a>, June 24, 2010</div>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" align="left">
<div>
There is a new and unique development in human history that is taking place around the world; it is unprecedented in reach and volume, and it is also the greatest threat to all global power structures: the ‘global political awakening.’ The term was coined by Zbigniew Brzezinski, and refers to the fact that, as Brzezinski wrote:</p>
<blockquote><p>For the first time in history almost all of humanity is politically activated, politically conscious and politically interactive. Global activism is generating a surge in the quest for cultural respect and economic opportunity in a world scarred by memories of colonial or imperial domination.[1]</p></blockquote>
<p>It is, in essence, this massive ‘global political awakening’ which presents the gravest and greatest challenge to the organized powers of globalization and the global political economy: nation-states, multinational corporations and banks, central banks, international organizations, military, intelligence, media and academic institutions. The Transnational Capitalist Class (TCC), or ‘Superclass’ as David Rothkopf refers to them, are globalized like never before. For the first time in history, we have a truly global and heavily integrated elite. As elites have globalized their power, seeking to construct a ‘new world order’ of global governance and ultimately global government, they have simultaneously globalized populations.</p>
<p>The ‘Technological Revolution’ (or ‘Technetronic’ Revolution, as Brzezinski termed it in 1970) involves two major geopolitical developments. The first is that as technology advances, systems of mass communication rapidly accelerate, and the world’s people are able to engage in instant communication with one another and gain access to information from around the world. In it, lies the potential – and ultimately a central source – of a massive global political awakening. Simultaneously, the Technological Revolution has allowed elites to redirect and control society in ways never before imagined, ultimately culminating in a global scientific dictatorship, as many have warned of since the early decades of the 20th century. The potential for controlling the masses has never been so great, as science unleashes the power of genetics, biometrics, surveillance, and new forms of modern eugenics; implemented by a scientific elite equipped with systems of psycho-social control (the use of psychology in controlling the masses).</p>
<p><strong>What is the “Global Political Awakening”?</strong></p>
<p>To answer this question, it is best to let Zbigniew Brzezinski speak for himself, since it is his term. In 2009, Zbigniew Brzezinski published an article based on a speech he delivered to the London-based Chatham House in their academic journal, International Affairs. Chatham House, formerly the Royal Institute of International Relations, is the British counterpart to the US-based Council on Foreign Relations, both of which were founded in 1921 as “Sister Institutes” to coordinate Anglo-American foreign policy. His article, “Major foreign policy challenges for the next US President,” aptly analyzes the major geopolitical challenges for the Obama administration in leading the global hegemonic state at this critical juncture. Brzezinski refers to the ‘global political awakening’ as “a truly transformative event on the global scene,” since:</p>
<blockquote><p>For the first time in human history almost all of humanity is politically activated, politically conscious and politically interactive. There are only a few pockets of humanity left in the remotest corners of the world that are not politically alert and engaged with the political turmoil and stirrings that are so widespread today around the world. <strong>The resulting global political activism is generating a surge in the quest for personal dignity, cultural respect and economic opportunity in a world painfully scarred by memories of centuries-long alien colonial or imperial domination</strong>.[2]</p></blockquote>
<p>Brzezinski posits that the ‘global political awakening’ is one of the most dramatic and significant developments in geopolitics that has ever occurred, and it “is apparent in radically different forms from Iraq to Indonesia, from Bolivia to Tibet.” As the Economist explained, “Though America has focused on its notion of what people want (democracy and the wealth created by free trade and open markets), Brzezinski points in a different direction: It&#8217;s about dignity.” Further, argues Brzezinski, “The worldwide yearning for human dignity is the central challenge inherent in the phenomenon of global political awakening.”[3]</p>
<p>In 2005, Brzezinski wrote an essay for The American Interest entitled, “The Dilemma of the Last Sovereign,” in which he explains the geopolitical landscape that America and the world find themselves in. He wrote that, “For most states, sovereignty now verges on being a legal fiction,” and he critically assessed the foreign policy objectives and rhetoric of the Bush administration. Brzezinski has been an ardent critic of the “war on terror” and the rhetoric inherent in it, namely that of the demonization of Islam and Muslim people, which constitute one of the fastest growing populations and the fastest growing religion in the world. Brzezinski fears the compound negative affects this can have on American foreign policy and the objectives and aspirations of global power. He writes:</p>
<blockquote><p>America needs to face squarely a centrally important new global reality: that the world&#8217;s population is experiencing a political awakening unprecedented in scope and intensity, with the result that <strong>the politics of populism are transforming the politics of power</strong>. The need to respond to that massive phenomenon poses to the uniquely sovereign America an historic dilemma: What should be the central definition of America&#8217;s global role?[4]</p></blockquote>
<p>Brzezinski explains that formulating a foreign policy based off of one single event – the September 11th terror attacks – has both legitimized illegal measures (torture, suspension of habeas corpus, etc) and has launched and pacified citizens to accepting the “global war on terror,” a war without end. The rhetoric and emotions central to this global foreign policy created a wave of patriotism and feelings of redemption and revenge. Thus, Brzezinski explains:</p>
<blockquote><p>There was no need to be more precise as to who the terrorists actually were, where they came from, or what historical motives, religious passions or political grievances had focused their hatred on America. Terrorism thus replaced Soviet nuclear weapons as the principal threat, and terrorists (potentially omnipresent and generally identified as Muslims) replaced communists as the ubiquitous menace.[5]</p></blockquote>
<p>Brzezinski explains that this foreign policy, which has inflamed anti-Americanism around the world, specifically in the Muslim world, which was the principle target population of ‘terrorist’ rhetoric, has in fact further inflamed the ‘global political awakening’. Brzezinski writes that:</p>
<blockquote><p>[T]he central challenge of our time is posed not by global terrorism, but rather by the intensifying turbulence caused by the phenomenon of global political awakening. <strong>That awakening is socially massive and politically radicalizing</strong>.[6]</p></blockquote>
<p>This ‘global political awakening’, Brzezinski writes, while unique in its global scope today, originates in the ideas and actions of the French Revolution, which was central in “transforming modern politics through the emergence of a socially powerful national consciousness.” Brzezinski explains the evolution of the ‘awakening’:</p>
<blockquote><p>During the subsequent 216 years, political awakening has spread gradually but inexorably like an ink blot. Europe of 1848, and more generally the nationalist movements of the late 19th and early 20th centuries, reflected the new politics of populist passions and growing mass commitment. In some places that combination embraced utopian Manichaeism for which the Bolshevik Revolution of 1917, the Fascist assumption of power in Italy in 1922, and the Nazi seizure of the German state in 1933 were the launch-pads. The political awakening also swept China, precipitating several decades of civil conflict. Anti-colonial sentiments galvanized India, where the tactic of passive resistance effectively disarmed imperial domination, and after World War II anti-colonial political stirrings elsewhere ended the remaining European empires. In the western hemisphere, Mexico experienced the first inklings of populist activism already in the 1860s, leading eventually to the Mexican Revolution of the early 20th century.[7]</p></blockquote>
<p>Ultimately, what this implies is that – regardless of the final results of past awakenings – what is central to the concept of a ‘political awakening’ is the population – the people – taking on a political and social consciousness and subsequently, partaking in massive political and social action aimed at generating a major shift and change, or revolution, in the political, social and economic realms. Thus, no social transformation presents a greater or more direct challenge to entrenched and centralized power structures – whether they are political, social or economic in nature. Brzezinski goes on to explain the evolution of the ‘global political awakening’ in modern times:</p>
<blockquote><p>It is no overstatement to assert that now in the 21st century <strong>the population of much of the developing world is politically stirring and in many places seething with unrest. It is a population acutely conscious of social injustice to an unprecedented degree, and often resentful of its perceived lack of political dignity</strong>. The nearly universal access to radio, television and increasingly the Internet is creating a community of shared perceptions and envy that can be galvanized and channeled by demagogic political or religious passions. <strong>These energies transcend sovereign borders and pose a challenge both to existing states as well as to the existing global hierarchy, on top of which America still perches</strong>.[8]</p></blockquote>
<p>Brzezinski explains that several central areas of the ‘global political awakening’, such as China, India, Egypt, Bolivia, the Muslims in the Middle East, North Africa, Southeast Asia and increasingly in Europe, as well as Indians in Latin America, “increasingly are defining what they desire in reaction to what they perceive to be the hostile impact on them of the outside world. In differing ways and degrees of intensity they dislike the status quo, and many of them are susceptible to being mobilized against the external power that they both envy and perceive as self-interestedly preoccupied with that status quo.” Brzezinski elaborates on the specific group most affected by this awakening:</p>
<blockquote><p>The youth of the Third World are particularly restless and resentful. <strong>The demographic revolution they embody is thus a political time-bomb</strong>, as well. With the exception of Europe, Japan and America, <strong>the rapidly expanding demographic bulge in the 25-year-old-and-under age bracket is creating a huge mass of impatient young people</strong>. Their minds have been stirred by sounds and images that emanate from afar and which intensify their disaffection with what is at hand. Their potential revolutionary spearhead is likely to emerge from among the scores of millions of students concentrated in the often intellectually dubious &#8220;tertiary level&#8221; educational institutions of developing countries. Depending on the definition of the tertiary educational level, there are currently worldwide between 80 and 130 million &#8220;college&#8221; students. <strong>Typically originating from the socially insecure lower middle class and inflamed by a sense of social outrage, these millions of students are revolutionaries-in-waiting, already semi-mobilized in large congregations, connected by the Internet and pre-positioned for a replay on a larger scale of what transpired years earlier in Mexico City or in Tiananmen Square</strong>. Their physical energy and emotional frustration is just waiting to be triggered by a cause, or a faith, or a hatred.[9]</p></blockquote>
<p>Brzezinski thus posits that to address this new global “challenge” to entrenched powers, particularly nation-states that cannot sufficiently address the increasingly non-pliant populations and populist demands, what is required, is “increasingly supranational cooperation, actively promoted by the United States.” In other words, Brzezinski favours an increased and expanded ‘internationalization’, not surprising considering he laid the intellectual foundations of the Trilateral Commission. He explains that “Democracy per se is not an enduring solution,” as it could be overtaken by “radically resentful populism.” This is truly a new global reality:</p>
<blockquote><p>Politically awakened mankind craves political dignity, which democracy can enhance, but political dignity also encompasses ethnic or national self-determination, religious self-definition, and human and social rights, all in a world now acutely aware of economic, racial and ethnic inequities. The quest for political dignity, especially through national self-determination and social transformation, is part of the pulse of self-assertion by the world&#8217;s underprivileged.[10]</p></blockquote>
<p>Thus, writes Brzezinski, “An effective response can only come from a self-confident America genuinely committed to a new vision of global solidarity.” The idea is that to address the grievances caused by globalization and global power structures, the world and America must expand and institutionalize the process of globalization, not simply in the economic sphere, but in the social and political as well. It is a flawed logic, to say the least, that the answer to this problem is to enhance and strengthen the systemic problems. One cannot put out a fire by adding fuel.</p>
<p>Brzezinski even wrote that, “Let it be said right away that supranationality should not be confused with world government. Even if it were desirable, mankind is not remotely ready for world government, and the American people certainly do not want it.” Instead, Brzezinski argues, America must be central in constructing a system of global governance, “in shaping a world that is defined less by the fiction of state sovereignty and more by the reality of expanding and politically regulated interdependence.”[11] In other words, not ‘global government’ but ‘global governance’, which is simply a rhetorical ploy, as ‘global governance’ – no matter how overlapping, sporadic and desultory it presents itself, is in fact a key step and necessary transition in the moves toward an actual global government.</p>
<p>Thus, the rhetoric and reality of a “global war on terror” in actuality further inflames the ‘global political awakening’ as opposed to challenging and addressing the issue. In 2007, Brzezinski told the US Senate that the “War on terror” was a “mythical historical narrative,”[12] or in other words, a complete fiction.</p>
<p><strong>Of Power and People</strong></p>
<p>To properly understand the ‘global political awakening’ it is imperative to understand and analyze the power structures that it most gravely threatens. Why is Brzezinski speaking so vociferously on this subject? From what perspective does he approach this issue?</p>
<p>Global power structures are most often represented by nation-states, of which there are over 200 in the world, and the vast majority are overlooking increasingly politically awakened populations who are more shaped by transnational communications and realities (such as poverty, inequality, war, empire, etc.) than by national issues. Among nation-states, the most dominant are the western powers, particularly the United States, which sits atop the global hierarchy of nations as the global hegemon (empire). American foreign policy was provided with the imperial impetus by an inter-locking network of international think tanks, which bring together the top political, banking, industrial, academic, media, military and intelligence figures to formulate coordinated policies.</p>
<p>The most notable of these institutions that socialize elites across national borders and provide the rationale and impetus for empire are an inter-locking network of international think tanks. In 1921, British and American elite academics got together with major international banking interests to form two “sister institutes” called the Royal Institute of International Affairs (RIIA) in London, now known as Chatham House, and the Council on Foreign Relations in the United States. Subsequent related think tanks were created in Canada, such as the Canadian Institute of International Affairs, now known as the Canadian International Council (CIC), and other affiliated think tanks in South Africa, India, Australia, and more recently in the European Union with the formation of the European Council on Foreign Relations.[13]</p>
<p>Following World War I, these powers sought to reshape the world order in their designs, with Woodrow Wilson proclaiming a right to “national self determination” which shaped the formation of nation-states throughout the Middle East, which until the war was dominated by the Ottoman Empire. Thus, proclaiming a right to “self-determination” for people everywhere became, in fact, a means of constructing nation-state power structures which the western nations became not only instrumental in building, but in exerting hegemony over. To control people, one must construct institutions of control. Nations like Iraq, Saudi Arabia, Jordan, Lebanon, Syria, Kuwait, etc., did not exist prior to World War I.</p>
<p>Elites have always sought to control populations and individuals for their own power desires. It does not matter whether the political system is that of fascism, communism, socialism or democracy: elites seek power and control and are inherent in each system of governance. In 1928, Edward Bernays, nephew of the father of psychoanalysis Sigmund Freud, wrote one of his most influential works entitled “Propaganda.” Bernays also wrote the book on “Public Relations,” and is known as the “father of public relations,” and few outside of that area know of Bernays; however, his effect on elites and social control has been profound and wide-ranging.</p>
<p>Bernays led the propaganda effort behind the 1954 CIA coup in Guatemala, framing it as a “liberation from Communism” when in fact it was the imposition of a decades-long dictatorship to protect the interests of the United Fruit Company, who had hired Bernays to manage the media campaign against the democratic socialist government of Guatemala. Bernays also found a fan and student in Josef Goebbels, Hitler’s Minister of Propaganda, who took many of his ideas from Bernays’ writings. Among one of Bernays’ more infamous projects was the popularizing of smoking for American women, as he hired beautiful women to walk up and down Madison Avenue while smoking cigarettes, giving women the idea that smoking is synonymous with beauty.</p>
<p>In his 1928 book, “Propaganda,” Bernays wrote that, “If we understand the mechanisms and motives of the group mind, it is now possible to control and regiment the masses according to our will without their knowing it.” Further:</p>
<blockquote><p><strong>The conscious and intelligent manipulation of the organized habits and opinions of the masses is an important element in democratic society</strong><strong>&#8230; Those who manipulate this unseen mechanism of society constitute an invisible government which is the true ruling power of our country</strong>. . . . In almost every act of our daily lives, whether in the sphere of politics or business, in our social conduct or our ethical thinking, <strong>we are dominated by the relatively small number of persons . . . who understand the mental processes and social patterns of the masses. It is they who pull the wires which control the public mind</strong>.[14]</p></blockquote>
<p>Following World War II, America became the global hegemon, whose imperial impetus was provided by the strategic concept of “containment” in containing the spread of Communism. Thus, America’s imperial adventures in Korea, the Middle East, Africa, Asia and South America became defined by the desire to “roll back” the influence of the Soviet Union and Communism. It was, not surprisingly, the Council on Foreign Relations that originated the idea of “containment” as a central feature of foreign policy.[15]</p>
<p>Further, following World War II, America was handed the responsibility for overseeing and managing the international monetary system and global political economy through the creation of institutions and agreements such as the World Bank, International Monetary Fund (IMF), NATO, the UN, and GATT (later to become the World Trade Organization – WTO). One central power institution that was significant in establishing consensus among Western elites and providing a forum for expanding global western hegemony was the Bilderberg Group, founded in 1954 as an international think tank.[16]</p>
<p>Zbigniew Brzezinski, an up-and-coming academic, joined the Council on Foreign Relations in the early 1960s. In 1970, Brzezinski, who had attended a few Bilderberg meetings, wrote a book entitled, “Between Two Ages: America’s Role in the Technetronic Era,” in which he analyzed the impact of the ‘Revolution in Technology and Electronics,’ thus, the ‘technetronic era.’ Brzezinski defines the ‘technetronic society’ as, “a society that is shaped culturally, psychologically, socially, and economically by the impact of technology and electronics – particularly in the arena of computers and communications. The industrial process is no longer the principal determinant of social change, altering the mores, the social structure, and the values of society.”[17]</p>
<p>Brzezinski, expanding upon notions of social control, such as those propagated by Edward Bernays, wrote that, “Human conduct, some argue, can be predetermined and subjected to deliberate control,” and he quoted an “experimenter in intelligence control” who asserted that, “I foresee the time when we shall have the means and therefore, inevitably, the temptation to manipulate the behaviour and intellectual functioning of all the people through environmental and biochemical manipulation of the brain.”[18]</p>
<p>Brzezinski, in a telling exposé of his astute powers of observation and ability to identify major global trends, wrote that we are “witnessing the emergence of transnational elites” who are “composed of international businessmen, scholars, professional men, and public officials. The ties of these new elites cut across national boundaries, their perspectives are not confined by national traditions, and their interests are more functional than national.” Further, writes Brzezinski, “it is likely that before long the social elites of most of the more advanced countries will be highly internationalist or globalist in spirit and outlook.” However, warns Brzezinski, this increasing internationalization of elites “could create a dangerous gap between them and the politically activated masses, whose ‘nativism’ – exploited by more nationalist political leaders – could work against the ‘cosmopolitan’ elites.”[19] Brzezinski also wrote about “the gradual appearance of a more controlled and directed society,” in the “technetronic revolution;” explaining:</p>
<blockquote><p><strong>Such a society would be dominated by an elite whose claim to political power would rest on allegedly superior scientific know-how</strong>. Unhindered by the restraints of traditional liberal values, <strong>this elite would not hesitate to achieve its political ends by using the latest modern techniques for influencing public behavior and keeping society under close surveillance and control</strong>. Under such circumstances, the scientific and technological momentum of the country would not be reversed but would actually feed on the situation it exploits.[20]</p></blockquote>
<p>Further, writes Brzezinski, “<strong>Persisting social crisis, the emergence of a charismatic personality, and the exploitation of mass media to obtain public confidence would be the steppingstones in the piecemeal transformation of the United States into a highly controlled society</strong>.” Elaborating, Brzezinski writes, “The traditionally democratic American society could, because of its fascination with technical efficiency, become an extremely controlled society, and its humane and individualistic qualities would thereby be lost.”[21]</p>
<p>In his book, Brzezinski called for a “Community of the Developed Nations,” consisting of Western Europe, North America and Japan, to coordinate and integrate in order to shape a ‘new world order’ built upon ideas of global governance under the direction of these transnational elites. In 1972, Brzezinski and his friend, David Rockefeller, presented the idea to the annual Bilderberg meetings. Rockefeller was, at that time, Chairman of the Council on Foreign Relations and was CEO of Chase Manhattan Bank. In 1973, Brzezinski and Rockefeller created the Trilateral Commission, a sort of sister institute to the Bilderberg Group, with much cross-over membership, bringing Japan into the western sphere of economic and political integration.[22]</p>
<p>In 1975, the Trilateral Commission published a Task Force Report entitled, “The Crisis of Democracy,” of which one of the principal authors was Samuel Huntington, a political scientist and close associate and friend of Zbigniew Brzezinski. In this report, Huntington argues that the 1960s saw a surge in democracy in America, with an upswing in citizen participation, often “in the form of marches, demonstrations, protest movements, and ‘cause’ organizations.”[23] Further, “the 1960s also saw a reassertion of the primacy of equality as a goal in social, economic, and political life.”[24] Huntington analyzed how as part of this “democratic surge,” statistics showed that throughout the 1960s and into the early 1970s, there was a dramatic increase in the percentage of people who felt the United States was spending too much on defense (from 18% in 1960 to 52% in 1969, largely due to the Vietnam War).[25] In other words, people were becoming politically aware of empire and exploitation.</p>
<p>Huntington wrote that the “essence of the democratic surge of the 1960s was a general challenge to existing systems of authority, public and private,” and that, “People no longer felt the same compulsion to obey those whom they had previously considered superior to themselves in age, rank, status, expertise, character, or talents.” Huntington explained that in the 1960s, “hierarchy, expertise, and wealth” had come “under heavy attack.”[26] He stated that three key issues which were central to the increased political participation in the 1960s were:</p>
<blockquote><p>social issues, such as use of drugs, civil liberties, and the role of women; racial issues, involving integration, busing, government aid to minority groups, and urban riots; military issues, involving primarily, of course, the war in Vietnam but also the draft, military spending, military aid programs, and the role of the military-industrial complex more generally.[27]</p></blockquote>
<p>Huntington presented these issues, essentially, as the “crisis of democracy,” in that they increased distrust with the government and authority, that they led to social and ideological polarization, and led to a “Decline in the authority, status, influence, and effectiveness of the presidency.”[28]</p>
<p>Huntington concluded that many problems of governance in the United States stem from an “<strong><em>excess of democracy</em></strong>,” and that, “the effective operation of a democratic political system usually requires some measure of apathy and noninvolvement on the part of some individuals and groups.” Huntington explained that society has always had “marginal groups” which do not participate in politics, and while acknowledging that the existence of “marginality on the part of some groups is inherently undemocratic,” it has also “enabled democracy to function effectively.” Huntington identifies “the blacks” as one such group that had become politically active, posing a “danger of overloading the political system with demands.”[29]</p>
<p>Huntington, in his conclusion, stated that the vulnerability of democracy, essentially the ‘crisis of democracy,’ comes from “a highly educated, mobilized, and participant society,” and that what is needed is “a more balanced existence” in which there are “desirable limits to the indefinite extension of political democracy.”[30] Summed up, the Trilateral Commission Task Force Report essentially explained that the “Crisis of Democracy” is that there is too much of it, and so the ‘solution’ to the ‘crisis’ is to have less democracy and more ‘authority.’</p>
<p><strong>The New World Order</strong></p>
<p>Following the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1991, American ideologues – politicians and academics – began discussing the idea of the emergence of a “new world order” in which power in the world is centralized with one power – the United States, and laid the basis for an expansion of elitist ideology pertaining to the notion of ‘globalization’: that power and power structures should be globalizaed. In short, the ‘new world order’ was to be a global order of global governance. In the short term, it was to be led by the United States, which must be the central and primary actor in constructing a new world order, and ultimately a global government.[31]</p>
<p>Anne-Marie Slaughter, currently the Director of Policy Planning for the US State Department, is a prominent academic within the American elite establishment, having long served in various posts at the State Department, elite universities and on the board of the Council on Foreign Relations. In 1997, Slaughter wrote an article for the journal of the Council on Foreign Relations, “Foreign Affairs,” in which she discussed the theoretical foundations of the ‘new world order.’ In it, she wrote that, “The state is not disappearing, it is disaggregating into its separate, functionally distinct parts. These parts—courts, regulatory agencies, executives, and even legislatures—are networking with their counterparts abroad, creating a dense web of relations that constitutes a new, transgovernmental order,” and that, “transgovernmentalism is rapidly becoming the most widespread and effective mode of international governance.”[32]</p>
<p>Long preceding Slaughter’s analysis of the ‘new world order,’ Richard N. Gardner published an article in Foreign Affairs titled, “The Hard Road to World Order.” Gardner, a former American Ambassador and member of the Trilateral Commission, wrote that, “The quest for a world structure that secures peace, advances human rights and provides the conditions for economic progress—for what is loosely called world order—has never seemed more frustrating but at the same time strangely hopeful.”[33]</p>
<p>Gardner wrote, “If instant world government, [UN] Charter review, and a greatly strengthened International Court do not provide the answers, what hope for progress is there? The answer will not satisfy those who seek simple solutions to complex problems, but it comes down essentially to this: The hope for the foreseeable future lies, not in building up a few ambitious central institutions of universal membership and general jurisdiction as was envisaged at the end of the last war, but rather in the much more decentralized, disorderly and pragmatic process of inventing or adapting institutions of limited jurisdiction and selected membership to deal with specific problems on a case-by-case basis, as the necessity for cooperation is perceived by the relevant nations.”[34]</p>
<p>He then stated, “In short, <strong>the &#8220;house of world order&#8221; will have to be built from the bottom up rather than from the top down</strong>. It will look like a great &#8220;booming, buzzing confusion,&#8221; to use William James&#8217; famous description of reality, but <strong>an end run around national sovereignty, eroding it piece by piece, will accomplish much more than the old-fashioned frontal assault</strong>.”[35]</p>
<p>In 1992, Strobe Talbott wrote an article for Time Magazine entitled, “The Birth of the Global Nation.” Talbott worked as a journalist for Time Magazine for 21 years, and has been a fellow of the Yale Corporation, a trustee of the Hotchkiss School and the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, a director of the Council on Foreign Relations, the North American Executive Committee of the Trilateral Commission, and the American Association of Rhodes Scholars, and a member of the participating faculty of the World Economic Forum. Talbott served as Deputy Secretary of State from 1994 to 2001 in the Clinton administration and currently sits as President of the Brookings Institution, one of the premier American think tanks. In his 1992 article, “within the next hundred years,” Talbott wrote, “<strong>nationhood as we know it will be obsolete; all states will recognize a single, global authority</strong>.” He explained:</p>
<blockquote><p>All countries are basically social arrangements, accommodations to changing circumstances. <strong>No matter how permanent and even sacred they may seem at any one time, in fact they are all artificial and temporary</strong>. Through the ages, there has been an overall trend toward larger units claiming sovereignty and, paradoxically, a gradual diminution of how much true sovereignty any one country actually has.[36]</p></blockquote>
<p>Further, he wrote that, “<strong>it has taken the events in our own wondrous and terrible century to clinch the case for world government</strong>. With the advent of electricity, radio and air travel, the planet has become smaller than ever, its commercial life freer, its nations more interdependent and its conflicts bloodier.”[37]</p>
<p>David Rothkopf, a scholar at the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, former Deputy Undersecretary of Commerce for International Trade in the Clinton administration, former managing director of Kissinger and Associates, and a member of the Council on Foreign Relations, recently wrote a book titled, “Superclass: The Global Power Elite and the World They are Making.” As a member of that “superclass,” his writing should provide a necessary insight into the construction of this “New World Order.” He states that, “In a world of global movements and threats that don’t present their passports at national borders, it is no longer possible for a nation-state acting alone to fulfill its portion of the social contract.” He wrote that, “progress will continue to be made,” however, it will be challenging, because it “undercuts many national and local power structures and cultural concepts that have foundations deep in the bedrock of human civilization, namely the notion of sovereignty.” He further wrote that, “Mechanisms of global governance are more achievable in today’s environment,” and that these mechanisms “are often creative with temporary solutions to urgent problems that cannot wait for the world to embrace a bigger and more controversial idea like real global government.”[38]</p>
<p>In December of 2008, the Financial Times published an article titled, “And Now for A World Government,” in which the author, former Bilderberg attendee, Gideon Rachman, wrote that, “for the first time in my life, I think the formation of some sort of world government is plausible,” and that, “A ‘world government’ would involve much more than co-operation between nations. It would be an entity with state-like characteristics, backed by a body of laws. The European Union has already set up a continental government for 27 countries, which could be a model. The EU has a supreme court, a currency, thousands of pages of law, a large civil service and the ability to deploy military force.”[39]</p>
<p>He stated that, “it is increasingly clear that the most difficult issues facing national governments are international in nature: there is global warming, a global financial crisis and a ‘global war on terror’.” He wrote that the European model could “go global” and that a world government “could be done,” as “The financial crisis and climate change are pushing national governments towards global solutions, even in countries such as China and the US that are traditionally fierce guardians of national sovereignty.” He quoted an adviser to French President Nicolas Sarkozy as saying, “Global governance is just a euphemism for global government,” and that the “core of the international financial crisis is that we have global financial markets and no global rule of law.” However, Rachman states that any push towards a global government “will be a painful, slow process.” He then states that a key problem in this push can be explained with an example from the EU, which “has suffered a series of humiliating defeats in referendums, when plans for ‘ever closer union’ have been referred to the voters. In general, the Union has progressed fastest when far-reaching deals have been agreed by technocrats and politicians – and then pushed through without direct reference to the voters. <strong>International governance tends to be effective, only when it is anti-democratic</strong>.”[40]</p>
<p><strong>The Global Political Awakening and the Global Economic Crisis</strong></p>
<p>In the face of the global economic crisis, the process that has led to the global political awakening is rapidly expanding, as the social, political and economic inequalities and disparities that led to the awakening are all being exacerbated and expanded. Thus, the global political awakening itself is entering into a period in which it will undergo rapid, expansionary and global transformation.</p>
<p>This ‘global political awakening’, of which Brzezinski has explained as being one of the primary global geopolitical challenges of today, has largely, up until recent times, been exemplified in the ‘Global South’, or the ‘Third World’ developing nations of the Middle East, Central and Southeast Asia, Africa and Latin America. Developments in recent decades and years in Venezuela, Bolivia, and Iran exemplify the nationalist-orientation of much of this awakening, taking place in a world increasingly and incrementally moving towards global governance and global institutions.</p>
<p>In 1998, Hugo Chavez became President of Venezuela, having campaigned on promises of aiding the nation’s poor majority. In 2002, an American coup attempt took place in Venezuela, but Chavez retained his power and was further emboldened by the attempt, and gained a great burst of popular support among the people. Chavez has undertaken what he refers to as a process of “Bolivarian socialism”, and has taken a decidedly and vehemently anti-American posture in Latin America, long considered America’s “back yard.” Suddenly, there is virulent rhetoric and contempt against the United States and its influence in the region, which itself is backed by the enormous oil-wealth of Venezuela.</p>
<p>In Bolivia, Evo Morales was elected President in 2005 of the poorest nation in South America, and he was also the first indigenous leader of that country to ever hold that position of power, after having long been dominated by the Spanish-descended landed aristocracy. Evo Morales rose to power on the wave of various social movements within Bolivia, key among them being the “water wars” which took place in Cochabamba, Bolivia’s third largest city, in 2000. The water wars were instigated after the World Bank forced Bolivia to privatize its water so that American and European companies could come in and purchase the rights to Bolivia’s water, meaning that people in the poorest nation in South America could not even drink rain water without paying American or European companies for the ‘right’ to use it. Thus, revolt arose and Evo Morales rose with it. Now, Morales and Chavez represent the “new Left” in Latin America, and with it, growing sentiments of anti-American imperialism.</p>
<p>In Iran, itself defined more by nationalism than ethnic polarities, has become a principal target of the western hegemonic world order, as it sits atop massive gas and oil reserves, and is virulently anti-American and firmly opposed to western hegemony in the Middle East. However, with increased American rhetoric against Iran, its regime and political elites are further emboldened and politically strengthened among its people, the majority of whom are poor.</p>
<p>Global socio-political economic conditions directly relate to the expansion and emergence of the ‘global political awakening’. As of 1998, “3 billion people live on less than $2 per day while 1.3 billion get by on less than $1 per day. Seventy percent of those living on less than $1 per day are women.”[41] In 2003, a World Bank report revealed that, “A minority of the world&#8217;s population (17%) consume most of the world&#8217;s resources (80%), leaving almost 5 billion people to live on the remaining 20%. As a result, billions of people are living without the very basic necessities of life &#8211; food, water, housing and sanitation.”[42]</p>
<p>In regards to poverty and hunger statistics, “Over 840 million people in the world are malnourished—799 million of them are from the developing world. Sadly, more than 153 million of them are under the age of 5 (half the entire US population).” Further, “Every day, 34,000 children under five die of hunger or other hunger-related diseases. This results in 6 million deaths a year.” That amounts to a “Hunger Holocaust” that takes place every single year. As of 2003, “Of 6.2 billion living today, 1.2 billion live on less than $1 per day. Nearly 3 billion people live on less than $2 a day.”[43]</p>
<p>In 2006, a groundbreaking and comprehensive report released by the World Institute for Development Economics Research of the United Nations University (UNU-WIDER) reported that, “The richest 2% of adults in the world own more than half of global household wealth.” An incredibly startling statistic was that:</p>
<blockquote><p><strong>[T]he richest 1% of adults alone owned 40% of global assets in the year 2000, and that the richest 10% of adults accounted for 85% of the world total. In contrast, the bottom half of the world adult population owned barely 1% of global wealth</strong>.[44]</p></blockquote>
<p>This is worth repeating: the top 1% owns 40% of global assets; the top 10% owns 85% of world assets; and the bottom 50% owns 1% of global assets; a sobering figure, indeed. Something is rotten in the state of Denmark.</p>
<p>The Millennium Development Goals (MDGs) report stated that in 2009, “an estimated 55 million to 90 million more people will be living in extreme poverty than anticipated before the crisis.” Further, “the encouraging trend in the eradication of hunger since the early 1990s was reversed in 2008, largely due to higher food prices.” Hunger in developing regions has risen to 17% in 2008, and “children bear the brunt of the burden.”[45]</p>
<p>In April of 2009, a major global charity, Oxfam, reported that <strong>a couple trillion dollars given to bail out banks could have been enough “to end global extreme poverty for 50 years.</strong>”[46] In September of 2009, Oxfam reported that the economic crisis “is forcing 100 people-a-minute into poverty.” Oxfam stated that, “Developing countries across the globe are struggling to respond to the global recession that continues to slash incomes, destroy jobs and has helped push the total number of hungry people in the world above 1 billion.”[47]</p>
<p>The financial crisis has hit the ‘developing’ world much harder than the western developed nations of the world. The UN reported in March of 2009 that, “Reduced growth in 2009 will cost the 390 million people in sub-Saharan Africa living in extreme poverty around $18 billion, or $46 per person,” and “This projected loss represents 20 per cent of the per capita income of Africa’s poor – a figure that dwarfs the losses sustained in the developed world.”[48]</p>
<p>Thus, the majority of the world’s people live in absolute poverty and social dislocation. This is directly the result of the globalized world order that has been and is being constructed. Now, as that same infrastructure is being further institutionalized and built upon, people are being thrown into the ‘awakening’ like never before. Their very poverty pushes them into an awakening. There is a seemingly lost notion of judging a society by how it treats it weakest members: the poor. Poverty forces one to look at the world differently, as they see the harsh restraints that society has imposed upon the human spirit. Life simply cannot be about the struggle to make payments week-to-week; to afford water, shelter, and food; to live according to the dictates of money and power.</p>
<p>Look to history, and you see that from some of the most oppressive societies can come the greatest of humanity. Russia, a nation which has never in its history experienced true political freedom for the individual, has managed to produce some of the greatest music, art, expression and literature as a vibrant outcry of humanity from a society so overcome with the need to control it. It the fact that such triumphs of human spirit can come from such tyrannies over human nature is a sobering display of the great mystery of human beings. Why waste humanity by subjecting it to poverty? Think of the difference that could be made if all of humanity was allowed to flourish individually and collectively; think of all the ideas, art, expression, intellect and beauty we aren’t getting from those who have no voice.</p>
<p>Until we address this fundamental issue, any notion of humanity as being ‘civilized’ is but a cynical joke. If it’s human civilization, we haven’t quite figured it out yet. We don’t yet have a proper definition of ‘civilized’, and we need to make it ‘humane’.</p>
<p><strong>The West and the Awakening</strong></p>
<p>The middle classes of the western world are undergoing a dramatic transition, most especially in the wake of the global economic crisis. In the previous decades, the middle class has become a debt-based class, whose consumption was based almost entirely on debt, and so their ability to consume and be the social bedrock of the capitalist system is but a mere fiction. Never in history has the middle class, and most especially the youth who are graduating college into the hardest job market in decades, been in such peril.[49]</p>
<p>The global debt crisis, which is beginning in Greece, and spreading throughout the euro-zone economies of Spain, Portugal, Ireland and ultimately the entire EU, will further consume the UK, Japan and go all the way to America.[50] This will be a truly global debt crisis. Government measures to address the issue of debt focus on the implementation of ‘fiscal austerity measures’ to reduce the debt burdens and make interest payments on their debts.</p>
<p>‘Fiscal austerity’ is a vague term that in actuality refers to cutting social spending and increasing taxes. The effect this has is that the public sector is devastated, as all assets are privatized, public workers are fired en masse, unemployment becomes rampant, health and education disappear, taxes rise dramatically, and currencies are devalued to make all assets cheaper for international corporations and banks to buy up, while internally causing inflation – dramatically increasing the costs of fuel and food. In short, ‘fiscal austerity’ implies ‘social destruction’ as the social foundations of nations and peoples are pulled out from under them. States then become despotic and oppress the people, who naturally revolt against ‘austerity’: the sterilization of society.</p>
<p>‘Fiscal austerity’ swept the developing world through the 1980s and 1990s in response to the 1980s debt crisis which consumed Latin America, Africa, and areas of Asia. The result of the fiscal austerity measures imposed upon nations by the World Bank and IMF was the social dismantling of the new societies and their subsequent enslavement to the international creditors of the IMF, World Bank, and western corporations and banks. It was an era of economic imperialism, and the IMF was a central tool of this imperial project.</p>
<p>As the debt crisis we see unfolding today sweeps the world, the IMF is again stepping in to impose ‘fiscal austerity’ on nations in return for short-term loans for countries to pay off the interest on their exorbitant debts, themselves owed mostly to major European and American banks. Western nations have agreed to impose fiscal austerity,[51] which will in fact only inflame the crisis, deepen the depression and destroy the social foundations of the west so that we are left only with the authoritarian apparatus of state power – the police, military, homeland ‘security’ apparatus – which is employed against people to protect the status quo powers.</p>
<p>The IMF has also come to the global economic crisis with a new agenda, giving out loans in its own synthetic currency – Special Drawing Rights (SDRs) – an international reserve basket of currencies. The G20 in April of 2009 granted the IMF the authority to begin phasing in the applications of issuing SDRs, and for the IMF to in effect become a global central bank issuing a global currency.[52] So through this global debt crisis, SDRs will be disbursed globally – both efficiently and in abundance – as nations will need major capital inflows and loans to pay off interest payments, or in the event of a default. This will happen at a pace so rapid that it would never be conceivable if not for a global economic crisis. The same took place in the 1980s, as the nature of “Structural Adjustment Programs” (SAPs) could not be properly assessed as detrimental to economic conditions and ultimately socially devastating, for countries needed money fast (as the debt crisis spread across the developing world) and were not in a position to negotiate. Today, this will be the ‘globalization’ of the debt crisis of the 1980s, on a much larger and more devastating scale, and the reaction will be equally globalized and devastating: the continued implementation of ‘global governance’.</p>
<p>As austerity hits the west, the middle class will vanish in obscurity, as they will be absorbed into the lower, labour-oriented working class.[53] The youth of the western middle class, comprising the majority of the educated youth, will be exposed to a ‘poverty of expectations’ in which they grew up in a world in which they were promised everything, and from whom everything was so quickly taken. The inevitability of protests, riots and possible rebellion is as sure as the sun rises.[54]</p>
<p>In the United States, the emergence of the Tea Party movement is representative of – in large part – a growing dissatisfaction with the government and the economy. Naturally, like any group, it has its radical and fringe elements, which tend to draw the majority of media attention in an effort to shape public opinion, but the core and the driving force of the movement is the notion of popular dissatisfaction with government. Whatever one thinks of the legitimacy of such protestations, people are not pleased, and people are taking to the streets. And so it begins.</p>
<p>Even intellectuals of the left have spoken publicly warning people not to simply and so easily discount the Tea Party movement as fringe or radical. One such individual, Noam Chomsky, while speaking at a University in April of 2010, warned that he felt fascism was coming to America, and he explained that, “Ridiculing the tea party shenanigans is a serious error,” as their attitudes “are understandable.” He explained, “For over 30 years, real incomes have stagnated or declined. This is in large part the consequence of the decision in the 1970s to financialize the economy.” This constitutes ‘class resentment’, as “The bankers, who are primarily responsible for the crisis, are now reveling in record bonuses while official unemployment is around 10 percent and unemployment in the manufacturing sector is at Depression-era levels.” This same financial industry is directly linked to Obama, who is supporting their interests, and people are noticing.[55]</p>
<p>Another notable feminist intellectual of the left, Naomi Wolf, who wrote a book during the Bush administration on the emergence of fascism in America, and much of her message is being picked up by the Tea Party movement, as those on the right who were listening and agreeing with Wolf during the Bush administration (a considerable minority), then provided the impetus for the emergence of the Tea Party movement and many of its core or original ideas. In an interview in March 2010, Wolf explained that her ideas are even more relevant under Obama than Bush. She explained, “Bush legalized torture, but Obama is legalizing impunity. He promised to roll stuff back, but he is institutionalizing these things forever. It is terrifying and the left doesn’t seem to recognize it.” She explained how the left, while active under Bush, has been tranquilized under Obama, and that there is a potential for true intellectuals and for people more generally and more importantly, to reach out to each other across the spectrum. She explained:</p>
<blockquote><p>I was invited by the Ron Paul supporters to their rally in Washington last summer and I loved it. I met a lot of people I respected, a lot of “ordinary” people, as in not privileged. They were stepping up to the plate, when my own liberal privileged fellow demographic habituates were lying around whining. It was a wake-up call to the libertarians that there’s a progressive who cares so much about the same issues. Their views of liberals are just as distorted as ours are of conservatives.[56]</p></blockquote>
<p>In regards to the Tea Party movement, Wolf had this to say: “The Tea Party is not monolithic. There is a battle between people who care about liberty and the Constitution and the Republican Establishment who is trying to take ownership of it and redirect it for its own purposes.” Further, she explained that the Tea Party is “ahead of their time” on certain issues, “I used to think “End the Fed people” were crackpots. The media paints them as deranged. But it turned out we had good reason to have more oversight.”[57]</p>
<p>In time, others will join with the Tea Party movement and new activist groups, the anti-war movement will have to revitalize itself or die away; since Obama became President their influence, their voice, and their dignity has all but vanished. They have become a pacified voice, and their silence is complicity; thus, the anti-war movement must reignite and reinvigorate or it will decompose. The ‘Left’s’ distrust of corporations must merge with the ‘Right’s’ distrust of government to create a trust in ‘people’. Soon students will be joining protests, and the issues of the Tea Party movement and others like it can become more refined and informed.</p>
<p>When the middle classes of the west are plunged into poverty, it will force an awakening, for when people have nothing, they have nothing left to lose. The only way that the entrenched powers of the world have been able to expand their power and maintain their power is with the ignorant consent of the populations of the west. Issues of war, empire, economics and terror shape public opinion and allow social planners to redirect and reconstitute society. The people of the west have allowed themselves to be ruled as such and have allowed our rulers to be so ruthless in our names. People have been blinded by consumerism and entertainment. Images of celebrities, professional sports, Hollywood, iPods, blackberrys, and PCs consume the minds of people, and especially the youth of the west today. It has been the illusion of being the consuming class that has allowed our societies to be run so recklessly. So long as we have our TVs and PCs we won’t pay attention to anything else!</p>
<p>When the ability to consume is removed, the people will enter into a period of a great awakening. This will give rise to major new political movements, many progressive but some regressive, some fringe and radical, some violent and tyrannical, but altogether new and ultimately global. This is when the people of the west will come to realize the plight of the rest. This will be the era in which people begin to understand the realization that there is great truth in Dr. Martin Luther King’s words, “Injustice anywhere is a threat to justice everywhere.” Thus, the struggle of Africans will become the struggle of Americans: it must be freedom for all or freedom for none.</p>
<p>This is the major geopolitical reality and the pre-eminent global threat to world power structures. No development in all of human history presents such a monumental challenge to the status quo. As global power structures have never resembled such a monumental threat to mankind, mankind has never posed such an immense threat to institutionalized power. For every action, there is an equal and opposite reaction. Even if elites <strong>think</strong> that they truly do run the world, human nature has a way of exposing the flaws in that assumption. Human nature is not meant to be ‘controlled,’ but rather is meant to be nurtured.</p>
<p><strong>A View From the Top</strong></p>
<p>Again, it is important to go to Brzezinski’s own words in describing this new geopolitical reality, as it provides great insight into not only how the ‘global political awakening’ is defined; but more importantly, how it is perceived by those who hold power. In 2004, Brzezinski gave a speech at the Carnegie Council on his 2004 book, “The Choice”. The Carnegie Council is an elite think tank based in the United States, so Brzezinski is speaking to those who are potentially negatively affected by such an awakening. Brzezinski stated that America’s foreign policy in the wake of 9/11 – the “War on Terror” – is presenting a major challenge to American hegemony, as it is increasingly isolating the United States and damaging the nation’s credibility, as well as hiding the issues in virulent rhetoric which only further inflames the real and true challenge: the global political awakening. He states:</p>
<blockquote><p>The misdiagnosis [of foreign policy] pertains to a relatively vague, excessively abstract, highly emotional, semi-theological definition of the chief menace that we face today in the world, and the consequent slighting of what I view as <strong>the unprecedented global challenge arising out of the unique phenomenon of a truly massive global political awakening of mankind</strong>. We live in an age in which mankind writ large is becoming politically conscious and politically activated to an unprecedented degree, <strong>and it is this condition which is producing a great deal of international turmoil</strong>.</p>
<p>But we are not focusing on that. We are focusing specifically on one word, which is being elevated into a specter, defined as an entity, presented as somehow unified but unrelated to any specific event or place—and that word is terrorism. The global challenge today on the basis of which we tend to operate politically is the definition of terrorism with a global reach as the principal challenge of our time.</p>
<p>I don’t deny that terrorism is a reality, a threat to us, an ugly menace and a vicious manifestation. But it is <strong>a symptom of something larger and more complicated</strong>, related to the global turmoil that takes place in many parts of the world and manifests itself in different ways.</p>
<p><strong>That turmoil is the product of the political awakening, the fact that today vast masses of the world are not politically neutered, as they have been throughout history</strong>. They have political consciousness. It may be undefined, it may point in different directions, it may be primitive, it may be intolerant, it may be hateful, but it is a form of political activism.[58]</p></blockquote>
<p>Brzezinski explains that literacy has made for greater political awareness, while TV has made for immediate awareness of global disparities, and the Internet has provided instant communications. Further, says Brzezinski, “Much of this is also spurred by America&#8217;s impact on the world,” or in other words, American economic, political, and cultural imperialism; and further, “Much of it is also fueled by globalization, which the United States propounds, favors and projects by virtue of being a globally outward-thrusting society.” Brzezinski warns, “But that also contributes to instability, and <strong>is beginning to create something altogether new: namely, some new ideological or doctrinal challenge which might fill the void created by the disappearance of communism</strong>.” Brzezinski explains that Communism emerged in the last century as an alternative, however, today:</p>
<blockquote><p>it is now totally discredited, and we have a pragmatic vacuum in the world today regarding doctrines. <strong>But I see the beginnings, in writings and stirrings, of the making of a doctrine which combines anti-Americanism with anti-globalization, and the two could become a powerful force in a world that is very unequal and turbulent</strong>.[59]</p></blockquote>
<p>A question following Brzezinski’s speech asked him to expand upon how to address the notion of and deal with the ‘global political awakening’. Brzezinski explained that, “We deal with the world as it is and we are as we are. If we are to use our power intelligently and if we are to move in the right direction, we have no choice but do it incrementally.”[60] In other words, as Brzezinski has detailed his vision of a solution to world problems in creating the conditions for global governance; they must do it “incrementally,” for that is how to “use [their] power intelligently.” The solution to the ‘global political awakening’, in the view from the top, is to continue to create the apparatus of an oppressive global government.</p>
<p>On April 23, 2010, Zbigniew Brzezinski went to the Montreal Council on Foreign Relations to give a speech at an event jointly-hosted by the Canadian International Council (CIC), the Canadian counterpart to the Council on Foreign Relations in the US and Chatham House in the U.K. These are many of the intellectual, social, political and economic elite of Canada. In his speech, Brzezinski gives a breakdown of the modern geopolitical realities:</p>
<blockquote><p>Let me begin by making just a thumbnail definition of the geopolitical context in which we all find ourselves, including America. And in my perspective, that geopolitical context is very much defined by new – by two new global realities. The first is that global political leadership – by which I mean the role of certain leading powers in the world – has now become much more diversified unlike what it was until relatively recently. <strong>Relatively recently still, the world was dominated by the Atlantic world, as it had been for many centuries. It no longer is. Today, the rise of the Far East has created a new but much more differentiated global leadership</strong>. One which in a nutshell involves a wanton hazard, an arbitrary list of the primary players in the world scene: the United States, clearly; maybe next to it – but maybe – the European Union, I say maybe because it is not yet a political entity; certainly, increasingly so, and visibly so, China; Russia, mainly in one respect only because it is a nuclear power co-equal to the United States, but otherwise very deficient in all of the major indices of what constitutes global power. Behind Russia, perhaps individually, but to a much lesser extent, Germany, France, Great Britain, Japan, certainly, although it does not have the political assertive posture; India is rising, and then in the background of that <strong>we have the new entity of the G20, a much more diversified global leadership, lacking internal unity, with many of its members in bilateral antagonisms. That makes the context much more complicated</strong>.</p>
<p>The other major change in international affairs is that for the first time, in all of human history, <strong>mankind has been politically awakened. That is a total new reality – total new reality. It has not been so for most of human history until the last one hundred years</strong>. And in the course of the last one hundred years, the whole world has become politically awakened. And no matter where you go, politics is a matter of social engagement, and <strong>most people know what is generally going on –generally going on – in the world, and are consciously aware of global inequities, inequalities, lack of respect, exploitation. Mankind is now politically awakened and stirring</strong>. The combination of the two: the diversified global leadership, politically awakened masses, makes a much more difficult context for any major power including, currently, the leading world power: the United States.[61]</p></blockquote>
<p><strong>Conclusion</strong></p>
<p>So, <strong><em>the Technological Revolution has led to a diametrically opposed, antagonistic, and conflicting geopolitical reality</em></strong>: never before has humanity been so awakened to issues of power, exploitation, imperialism and domination; and simultaneously, never before have elites been so transnational and global in orientation, and with the ability to impose such a truly global system of scientific despotism and political oppression. These are the two major geopolitical realities of the world today. Reflect on that. Never in all of human history has mankind been so capable of achieving a true global political psycho-social awakening; nor has humanity ever been in such danger of being subjected to a truly global scientific totalitarianism, potentially more oppressive than any system known before, and without a doubt more technologically capable of imposing a permanent despotism upon humanity. So we are filled with hope, but driven by urgency. <strong>In all of human history, never has the potential nor the repercussions of human actions and ideas ever been so monumental.</strong></p>
<p>Suddenly, global elites are faced with the reality of seeking to dominate populations that are increasingly becoming self-aware and are developing a global consciousness. Thus, a population being subjected to domination in Africa has the ability to become aware of a population being subjected to the same forms of domination in the Middle East, South America or Asia; and they can recognize that they are all being dominated by the same global power structures. That is a key point: <strong>not only is the awakening global in its reach, but in its nature; it creates within the individual, an awareness of the global condition. So it is a ‘global awakening’ both in the <em>external environment</em>, and in the <em>internal psychology</em></strong>.</p>
<p>This new reality in the world, coupled with the fact that the world’s population has never been so vast, presents a challenge to elites seeking to dominate people all over the world who are aware and awakened to the realities of social inequality, war, poverty, exploitation, disrespect, imperialism and domination. <strong><em>This directly implies that these populations will be significantly more challenging to control: economically, politically, socially, psychologically and spiritually</em></strong>. Thus, from the point of view of the global oligarchy, the only method of imposing order and control – on this unique and historical human condition – is through the organized chaos of economic crises, war, and the rapid expansion and institutionalization of a global scientific dictatorship. Our hope is their fear; and our greatest fear is their only hope.</p>
<p>As Charles Dickens once wrote, “It was the best of times, it was the worst of times.” That has never been so true as it is today.</p>
<p>&#160;</p>
<hr />
<p>This has been Part 1 in the three-part series, “<strong>The Technological Revolution and the Future of Freedom</strong>.”</p>
<p>Part 2 will examine the nature of the global awakening in the ‘west’, particularly the United States, and the potential for revolution within that awakening; as well as the state systems of control and oppression being constructed to deal with it; notably, the construction of a Homeland Security State.</p>
<p>Part 3 will examine the evolution of the idea and reality of a scientific dictatorship, the technological revolution’s effect on power, and the emergence of new systems of social control based upon a modern implementation of eugenics.</p>
<p>&#160;</p>
<hr />
<p><strong>Endnotes</strong></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[1]        Zbigniew Brzezinski, The Global Political Awakening. The New York Times: December 16, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.nytimes.com/2008/12/16/opinion/16iht-YEbrzezinski.1.18730411.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.nytimes.com/2008/12/16/opinion/16iht-YEbrzezinski.1.18730411.html</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[2]        Zbigniew Brzezinski, “Major Foreign Policy Challenges for the Next US President,” International Affairs, 85: 1, (2009), page 53 (emphasis added)<br />
</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[3]        AFP, A new brain for Barack Obama. The Economist: March 14, 2007: </span><a href="http://www.economist.com/blogs/democracyinamerica/2007/03/a_new_brain_for_barack_obama"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.economist.com/blogs/democracyinamerica/2007/03/a_new_brain_for_barack_obama</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[4]        Zbigniew Brzezinski, The Dilemma of the Last Sovereign. The American Interest Magazine, Autumn 2005: </span><a href="http://www.the-american-interest.com/article.cfm?piece=56"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.the-american-interest.com/article.cfm?piece=56</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[5]        Ibid.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[6]        Ibid. </span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[7]        Ibid.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[8]        Ibid.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[9]        Ibid.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[10]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[11]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[12]      Michael Collins, Brzezinski: On The Path To War With Iran. Global Research: February 25, 2007: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=4920"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=4920</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[13]      Andrew Gavin Marshall, Origins of the American Empire: Revolution, World Wars and World Order. Global Research: July 28, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14552"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14552</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"> ; see sections, “World War Restructures World Order,” and “Empire, War and the Rise of the New Global Hegemon,” for a look at this interlocking network of think tanks.<br />
</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[14]      John Stauber and Sheldon Rampton, The Father of Spin: Edward L. Bernays &#38; The Birth of PR. PR Watch, Second Quarter 1999, Volume 6, No. 2: </span><a href="http://www.prwatch.org/prwissues/1999Q2/bernays.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.prwatch.org/prwissues/1999Q2/bernays.html</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[15]      Andrew Gavin Marshall, Origins of the American Empire: Revolution, World Wars and World Order. Global Research: July 28, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14552"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14552</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"> ; Andrew Gavin Marshall, Controlling the Global Economy: Bilderberg, the Trilateral Commission and the Federal Reserve. Global Research: August 3, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14614"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14614</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[16]      Andrew Gavin Marshall, Controlling the Global Economy: Bilderberg, the Trilateral Commission and the Federal Reserve. Global Research: August 3, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14614"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14614</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[17]      Zbigniew Brzezinski, Between Two Ages: America’s Role in the Technetronic Era. (Viking Press, New York, 1970), page 10</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[18]      Ibid, page 12.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[19]      Ibid, page 29.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[20]      Ibid, page 97.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[21]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[22]      Andrew Gavin Marshall, Controlling the Global Economy: Bilderberg, the Trilateral Commission and the Federal Reserve. Global Research: August 3, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14614"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14614</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[23]      Michel J. Crozier, Samuel P. Huntington and Joji Watanuki, The Crisis of Democracy. (Report on the Governability of Democracies to the Trilateral Commission, New York University Press, 1975), page 61</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[24]      Ibid, page 62.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[25]      Ibid, page 71.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[26]      Ibid, pages 74-75</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[27]      Ibid, page 77.<br />
</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[28]      Ibid, page 93.<br />
</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[29]      Ibid, pages 113-114.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[30]      Ibid, page 115.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[31]      Andrew Gavin Marshall, Forging a “New World Order” Under a One World Government. Global Research: August 13, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14712"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14712</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[32]      Anne-Marie Slaughter, The Real New World Order. Foreign Affairs: September/October, 1997: pages 184-185</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[33]      Richard N. Gardner, The Hard Road to World Order. Foreign Affairs: April, 1974: page 556</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[34]      Ibid, page 558.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[35]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[36]      Strobe Talbott, America Abroad. Time Magazine: July 20, 1992: </span><a href="http://www.time.com/time/magazine/article/0,9171,976015,00.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.time.com/time/magazine/article/0,9171,976015,00.html</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[37]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[38]      David Rothkopf, Superclass: The Global Power Elite and the World They are Making. (Toronto: Penguin Books, 2008), pages 315-316</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[39]      Gideon Rachman, And now for a world government. The Financial Times: December 8, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.ft.com/cms/s/0/7a03e5b6-c541-11dd-b516-000077b07658.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.ft.com/cms/s/0/7a03e5b6-c541-11dd-b516-000077b07658.html</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[40]      Ibid.<br />
</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[41]      Jeff Gates, Statistics on Poverty and Inequality. Global Policy Forum: May 1999: </span><a href="http://www.globalpolicy.org/component/content/article/218/46377.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalpolicy.org/component/content/article/218/46377.html</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[42]      Social &#38; Economic Injustice, World Centric, 2004: </span><a href="http://worldcentric.org/conscious-living/social-and-economic-injustice"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://worldcentric.org/conscious-living/social-and-economic-injustice</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[43]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[44]      GPF, Press Release: Pioneering Study Shows Richest Own Half World Wealth. Global Policy Forum: December 5, 2006: </span><a href="http://www.globalpolicy.org/component/content/article/218/46555.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalpolicy.org/component/content/article/218/46555.html</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[45]      UN, The Millennium Development Goals Report 2009. United Nations, New York, 2009: page 4</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[46]      G20 Summit: Bank bailout would end global poverty, says Oxfam. The Telegraph: April 1, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/financetopics/g20-summit/5087404/G20-Summit-Bank-bailout-would-end-global-poverty-says-Oxfam.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/financetopics/g20-summit/5087404/G20-Summit-Bank-bailout-would-end-global-poverty-says-Oxfam.html</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[47]      Press Release, 100 people every minute pushed into poverty by economic crisis. Oxfam International: September 24, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.oxfam.org/en/pressroom/pressrelease/2009-09-24/100-people-every-minute-pushed-poverty-economic-crisis"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.oxfam.org/en/pressroom/pressrelease/2009-09-24/100-people-every-minute-pushed-poverty-economic-crisis</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[48]      Press Release, Financial crisis to deepen extreme poverty, increase child mortality rates – UN report. UN News Center: March 3, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.un.org/apps/news/story.asp?NewsID=30070"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.un.org/apps/news/story.asp?NewsID=30070</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[49]      Andrew Gavin Marshall, Western Civilization and the Economic Crisis: The Impoverishment of the Middle Class. Global Research: March 30, 2010: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=18386"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=18386</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[50]      Andrew Gavin Marshall, Debt Dynamite Dominoes: The Coming Financial Catastrophe. Global Research: February 22, 2010: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=17736"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=17736</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[51]      Reuters, G20 communique after meeting in South Korea. G20 Communiqué: June 5, 2010: </span><a href="http://www.reuters.com/article/idUSTRE6540VN20100605"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.reuters.com/article/idUSTRE6540VN20100605</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[52]      Andrew Gavin Marshall, Forging a “New World Order” Under a One World Government. Global Research: August 13, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14712"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14712</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"> ; or for a more succinct analysis, Andrew Gavin Marshall, The Financial New World Order: Towards a Global Currency and World Government. Global Research: April 6, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=13070"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=13070</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[53]      Andrew Gavin Marshall, Western Civilization and the Economic Crisis: The Impoverishment of the Middle Class. Global Research: March 30, 2010: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=18386"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=18386</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[54]      Andrew Gavin Marshall, The Global Economic Crisis: Riots, Rebellion and Revolution. Global Research: April 7, 2010: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=18529"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=18529</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[55]      Matthew Rothschild, Chomsky Warns of Risk of Fascism in America. The Progressive: April 12, 2010: </span><a href="http://www.progressive.org/wx041210.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.progressive.org/wx041210.html</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[56]      Justine Sharrock, Naomi Wolf Thinks the Tea Parties Help Fight Fascism &#8212; Is She Onto Something or in Fantasy Land? Alternet: March 30, 2010: </span><a href="http://www.alternet.org/news/146184/naomi_wolf_thinks_the_tea_parties_help_fight_fascism_--_is_she_on_to_something_or_in_fantasy_land__"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.alternet.org/news/146184/naomi_wolf_thinks_the_tea_parties_help_fight_fascism_&#8211;_is_she_on_to_something_or_in_fantasy_land__</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[57]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[58]      Zbigniew Brzezinski, The Choice: Global Domination or Global Leadership. Speech at the Carnegie Council: March 25, 2004: </span><a href="http://www.cceia.org/resources/transcripts/4424.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.cceia.org/resources/transcripts/4424.html</span></a></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[59]      Ibid.</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[60]      Ibid.<br />
</span></p>
<p><span style="font-size:x-small;">[61]      Zbigniew Brzezinski, America’s Geopolitical Dilemmas. Speech at the Canadian International Council and Montreal Council on Foreign Relations: April 23, 2010: </span><a href="http://www.onlinecic.org/resourcece/multimedia/americasgeopoliticaldilemmas"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.onlinecic.org/resourcece/multimedia/americasgeopoliticaldilemmas</span></a></p>
</div>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[Global War and Dying Democracy: The Revolution of the Elites]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/11/global-war-and-dying-democracy-the-revolution-of-the-elites/</link>
<pubDate>Mon, 11 Jul 2011 04:08:37 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/11/global-war-and-dying-democracy-the-revolution-of-the-elites/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[Global War and Dying Democracy: The Revolution of the Elites Global Power and Global Government: Par]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<table width="100%" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td align="left" valign="top">
<div><strong>Global War and Dying Democracy: The Revolution of the Elites</strong></div>
<div><strong>Global Power and Global Government: Part 5</strong></div>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" align="left" nowrap="nowrap">
<div><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/">Global Research</a>, August 19, 2009</div>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" align="left">
<div>
<p align="justify">This article is the 5th and final part in the series, <em><strong>&#8220;Global Power and Global Government,&#8221;</strong></em> published by Global Research.</p>
<p><strong>Part 1: </strong><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14464" target="_new"><strong>Global Power and Global Government: Evolution and Revolution of the Central Banking System</strong></a><br />
<strong>Part 2: </strong><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14552" target="_new"><strong>Origins of the American Empire: Revolution, World Wars and World Order</strong></a><br />
<strong>Part 3: </strong><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14614" target="_new"><strong>Controlling the Global Economy: Bilderberg, the Trilateral Commission and the Federal Reserve</strong></a><br />
<strong>Part 4: <a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14712" target="_new">Forging a “New World Order” Under a One World Government</a></strong></p>
<hr />
<p><strong>Transnational Totalitarianism<br />
</strong><br />
Global trends in political economy suggest that “democracy” as we know it, is a fading concept, where even Western industrialized nations are retreating from the system. Arguably, through party politics and financial-corporate interests, democracy is something of a façade as it is. However, we are entering into an era in which even the institutions and image of democracy are in retreat, and the slide into totalitarianism seems inevitable.</p>
<p align="justify">
The National Intelligence Council report, Global Trends 2025, stated that many governments will be “expanding domestic security forces, surveillance capabilities, and the employment of special operations-type forces.” Counterterrorism measures will increasingly “involve urban operations as a result of greater urbanization,” and governments “may increasingly erect barricades and fences around their territories to inhibit access. Gated communities will continue to spring up within many societies as elites seek to insulate themselves from domestic threats.”[1] Essentially, expect a continued move towards and internationalization of domestic police state measures to control populations.</p>
<p align="justify">
The nature of totalitarianism is such that it is, “by nature (or rather by definition), a global project that cannot be fully accomplished in just one community or one country. Being fuelled by the need to suppress any alternative orders and ideas, it has no natural limits and is bound to aim at totally dominating everything and everyone.” David Lyon explained in Theorizing Surveillance, that, “The ultimate feature of the totalitarian domination is the absence of exit, which can be achieved temporarily by closing borders, but permanently only by a truly global reach that would render the very notion of exit meaningless. This in itself justifies questions about the totalitarian potential of globalization.” The author raises the important question, “Is abolition of borders intrinsically (morally) good, because they symbolize barriers that needlessly separate and exclude people, or are they potential lines of resistance, refuge and difference that may save us from the totalitarian abyss?” Further, “if globalization undermines the tested, state-based models of democracy, the world may be vulnerable to a global totalitarian etatization.”[2]</p>
<p align="justify">
Russia Today, a major Russian media source, published an article by the Strategic Cultural Fund, in which it stated that, “the current crisis is being used as a mechanism for provoking some deepening social upheavals that would make mankind – plunged as it is already into chaos and frightened by the ghost of an all-out violence – urge of its own free will that a ‘supranational’ arbitrator with dictatorial powers intervene into the world affairs.” The author pointed out that, “The events are following the same path as the Great Depression in 1929-1933: a financial crisis, an economic recession, social conflicts, establishing totalitarian dictatorships, inciting a war to concentrate power, and capital in the hands of a narrow circle.” However, as the author noted, this time around, it’s different, as this “is the final stage in the ‘global control’ strategy, where a decisive blow should be dealt to the national state sovereignty institution, followed by a transition to a system of private power of transnational elites.”</p>
<p align="justify">
The author explained that a global police state is forming, as “Intelligence activities, trade of war, penitentiary system, and information control are passing into private hands. This is done through so-called outsourcing, a relatively new business phenomenon that consists of trusting certain functions to private firms that act as contractors and relying on individuals outside an organization to solve its internal tasks.” Further, “he biggest achievements have been made over the last few years in the area of establishing electronic control over people’s identities, carried out under the pretext of counterterrorism. Currently, the FBI is creating the world’s biggest database of biometric indexes (fingerprints, retina scans, face shapes, scar shapes and allocation, speech and gesture patterns, etc.) that now contains 55 million fingerprints.”[3]</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify"><strong>Global War</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">Further, the prospects of war are increasing with the deepening of the economic crisis. It must be noted that historically, as empires are in decline, international violence increases. The scope of a global depression and the undertaking of restructuring the entire global political economy may also require and produce a global war to serve as a catalyst for formation of the New World Order.</p>
<p align="justify">
The National Intelligence Council document, Global Trends 2025, stated that there is a likely increase in the risk of a nuclear war, or in the very least, the use of a nuclear weapon by 2025, as, “Ongoing low-intensity clashes between India and Pakistan continue to raise the specter that such events could escalate to a broader conflict between those nuclear powers.”[4]</p>
<p align="justify">
The report also predicts a resurgence of mercantilist foreign policies of the great powers in competition for resources, which “could lead to interstate conflicts if government leaders deem assured access to energy resources to be essential to maintaining domestic stability and the survival of their regime.” In particular, “Central Asia has become an area of intense international competition for access to energy.”[5]</p>
<p align="justify">
Further, “Sub-Saharan Africa will remain the most vulnerable region on Earth in terms of economic challenges, population stresses, civil conflict, and political instability.  The weakness of states and troubled relations between states and societies probably will slow major improvements in the region’s prospects over the next 20 years unless there is sustained international engagement and, at times, intervention.  Southern Africa will continue to be the most stable and promising sub-region politically and economically.” This seems to suggest that there will be many more cases of “humanitarian intervention,” likely under the auspices of a Western dominated international organization, such as the UN. There will also be a democratic “backslide” in the most populous African countries, and that, “the region will be vulnerable to civil conflict and complex forms of interstate conflict—with militaries fragmented along ethnic or other divides, limited control of border areas, and insurgents and criminal groups preying on unarmed civilians in neighboring countries.  Central Africa contains the most troubling of these cases, including Congo-Kinshasa, Congo-Brazzaville, Central African Republic, and Chad.”[6]</p>
<p align="justify">
In 2007, the British Defense Ministry released a report in which they analyzed future trends in the world. Among many of the things predicted within 30 years are: “Information chips implanted in the brain. Electromagnetic pulse weapons. The middle classes becoming revolutionary, taking on the role of Marx&#8217;s proletariat. The population of countries in the Middle East increasing by 132%, while Europe&#8217;s drops as fertility falls. ‘Flashmobs’ &#8211; groups rapidly mobilised by criminal gangs or terrorists groups.”</p>
<p align="justify">
It further reported that, “The development of neutron weapons which destroy living organisms but not buildings ‘might make a weapon of choice for extreme ethnic cleansing in an increasingly populated world’. The use of unmanned weapons platforms would enable the ‘application of lethal force without human intervention, raising consequential legal and ethical issues’. The ‘explicit use’ of chemical, biological, radiological, and nuclear weapons and devices delivered by unmanned vehicles or missiles.” Further, “an implantable ‘information chip’ could be wired directly to the brain. A growing pervasiveness of information communications technology will enable states, terrorists or criminals, to mobilise ‘flashmobs’, challenging security forces to match this potential agility coupled with an ability to concentrate forces quickly in a small area.”</p>
<p align="justify">
In regards to social problems, “The middle classes could become a revolutionary class, taking the role envisaged for the proletariat by Marx.” Interestingly, “The thesis is based on a growing gap between the middle classes and the super-rich on one hand and an urban under-class threatening social order: ‘The world&#8217;s middle classes might unite, using access to knowledge, resources and skills to shape transnational processes in their own class interest’. Marxism could also be revived, it says, because of global inequality. An increased trend towards moral relativism and pragmatic values will encourage people to seek the ‘sanctuary provided by more rigid belief systems, including religious orthodoxy and doctrinaire political ideologies, such as popularism and Marxism’.”</p>
<p align="justify">
The report also forecasts that, “Globalisation may lead to levels of international integration that effectively bring inter-state warfare to an end. But it may lead to &#8220;inter-communal conflict&#8221; &#8211; communities with shared interests transcending national boundaries and resorting to the use of violence.”[7]</p>
<p align="justify">
RAND corporation, a Pentagon-linked powerhouse think tank, connected to the Blderberg Group, Trilateral Commission and Council on Foreign Relations, came up with a solution to the financial crisis in October of 2008: for the United States to start a major war. Chinese media reported that RAND “presented a shocking proposal to the Pentagon in which it lobbied for a war to be started with a major foreign power in an attempt to stimulate the American economy and prevent a recession.” Further, “the target country would have to be a major influential power,” and Chinese media “speculated that the target of the new war would probably be China or Russia, but that it could also be Iran or another middle eastern country.”[8]</p>
<p align="justify">
Gerald Celente, the CEO of Trends Research Institute, the most highly respected trend forecaster in the United States, has been sounding the alarm over the trends to come in the next few years. Having previously predicted the 1987 stock market crash, the fall of the Soviet Union, the dot-com bubble burst, and the 2008 housing bubble burst, these forecasts should not be taken lightly.</p>
<p align="justify">
Celente told Fox News that, “by 2012 America will become an undeveloped nation, that there will be a revolution marked by food riots, squatter rebellions, tax revolts and job marches, and that holidays will be more about obtaining food, not gifts.” He stated that this will be “worse than the great depression.” In another interview, Celente stated that, “There will be a revolution in this country,” and, “It’s not going to come yet, but it’s going to come down the line and we’re going to see a third party and this was the catalyst for it: the takeover of Washington, D. C., in broad daylight by Wall Street in this bloodless coup. And it will happen as conditions continue to worsen.” He further explained, “The first thing to do is organize with tax revolts. That’s going to be the big one because people can’t afford to pay more school tax, property tax, any kind of tax. You’re going to start seeing those kinds of protests start to develop.”[9]</p>
<p align="justify">
In June of 2009, Gerald Celente reported that, “The measures taken by successive governments to save the politically corrupt, morally bankrupt, physically decrepit [American] giant from collapse have served to only hasten its demise. While the decline has been decades in the making, the acceleration of ruinous policies under the current Administration is leading the United States — and much of the world — to the point of no return.” This coming catastrophe, which Celente refers to as “Obamageddon,” will become the “Greatest Depression.”[10]</p>
<p align="justify">
In May of 2009, Celente forecasted that a major issue is the “bailout bubble” which is bigger than the dot-com bubble or the real estate bubble that preceded it, and is made up of 12.8 trillion dollars. He states that with the bursting of this bubble, the next trend would be what he calls “fascism light” and that it will be followed by war.[11] He stated that, “this bubble will be the last one.  After the final blowout of the bailout bubble, we are concerned that the government will take the nation into war.   This is a historical precedent that’s been done over and over again.” He elaborated, “So, it’s not the dollar that will survive.  We may not even survive.  Look at the German mess after WWI.  It gave rise to Fascism and WWII.  The next war will be fought with weapons of mass destruction.”[12]</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify"><strong>The Imperial Project</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">War should not be understood as a recent phenomenon in regards to accelerating capitalism through expansion and transition, as this has been a continual theme throughout the history of capitalism. The notion of “surplus imperialism” is what describes the function and role of war and militarism within capitalism. The concept is built around the function of “constant war.”</p>
<p align="justify">
Ellen Wood explains the notion of ‘surplus imperialism,’ in that, “Boundless domination of a global economy, and of the multiple states that administer it, requires military action without end, in purpose or time.”[13] Further, “Imperial dominance in a global capitalist economy requires a delicate and contradictory balance between suppressing competition and maintaining conditions in competing economies that generate markets and profit. This is one of the most fundamental contradictions of the new world order.”[14]</p>
<p align="justify">
Shortly after George Bush Sr. declared a “new world order coming into view,” in 1991, the US strategic community began setting forth a new strategy for the United States in the world. This first emerged in 1992, with the Defense Planning Guidance. The New York Times broke the story, reporting that, “In a broad new policy statement that is in its final drafting phase, the Defense Department asserts that America’s political and military mission in the post-cold-war era will be to ensure that no rival superpower is allowed to emerge in Western Europe, Asia or the territories of the former Soviet Union,” and that, “The classified document makes the case for a world dominated by one superpower whose position can be perpetuated by constructive behavior and sufficient military might to deter any nation or group of nations from challenging American primacy.”</p>
<p align="justify">
The main figure that drafted this policy was the Pentagon’s Under Secretary for Policy Paul Wolfowitz, who would later become Deputy Secretary of Defense in the George W. Bush administration, as well as President of the World Bank. Wolfowitz is also a member of the Bilderberg Group, the Trilateral Commission, the Council on Foreign Relations, and is currently a scholar at the American Enterprise Institute, a neo-conservative think tank.</p>
<p align="justify">
The document places emphasis “on using military force, if necessary, to prevent the proliferation of nuclear weapons and other weapons of mass destruction in such countries as North Korea, Iraq, some of the successor republics to the Soviet Union and in Europe,” and that, “What is most important, it says, is ‘the sense that the world order is ultimately backed by the U.S.’ and ‘the United States should be postured to act independently when collective action cannot be orchestrated’ or in a crisis that demands quick response.” Further, “the new draft sketches a world in which there is one dominant military power whose leaders ‘must maintain the mechanisms for deterring potential competitors from even aspiring to a larger regional or global role’.” Among the necessary challenges to American supremacy, the document “postulated regional wars against Iraq and North Korea,” and identified China and Russia as its major threats. It further “suggests that the United States could also consider extending to Eastern and Central European nations security commitments similar to those extended to Saudi Arabia, Kuwait and other Arab states along the Persian Gulf.”[15] The Secretary of Defense at the time of this document’s writing was none other than Dick Cheney.</p>
<p align="justify">
When George Bush Sr. was replaced by Bill Clinton in 1993, the neo-conservative hawks in the Bush administration formed a think tank called the Project for the New American Century, or PNAC. In 2000, they published a report called, Rebuilding America’s Defenses: Strategy, Forces, and Resources for a New Century. Building upon the Defense Policy Guidance document, they state that, “the United States must retain sufficient forces able to rapidly deploy and win multiple simultaneous large-scale wars,”[16] that there is “need to retain sufficient combat forces to fight and win, multiple, nearly simultaneous major theatre wars,”[17] and that “the Pentagon needs to begin to calculate the force necessary to protect, independently, US interests in Europe, East Asia and the Gulf at all times.”[18] Further, “the United States has for decades sought to play a more permanent role in Gulf regional security. While the unresolved conflict with Iraq provides the immediate justification, the need for a substantial American force presence in the Gulf transcends the issue of the regime of Saddam Hussein.”[19] In describing the need for massive increases in military spending, rapidly expanding the armed forces and “dealing” with threats such as Iraq, North Korea and Iran, they state, “Further, the process of transformation, even if it brings revolutionary change, is likely to be a long one, absent some catastrophic and catalyzing event – like a new Pearl Harbor.”[20]</p>
<p align="justify">
Zbigniew Brzezinski, co-founder of the Trilateral Commission with David Rockefeller, former National Security Adviser and key foreign policy architect in Jimmy Carter’s administration, also wrote a book on American geostrategy. Brzezinski is also a member of the Council on Foreign Relations and the Bilderberg Group, and has also been a board member of Amnesty International, the Atlantic Council and the National Endowment for Democracy. Currently, he is a trustee and counselor at the Center for Strategic and International Studies (CSIS), a major US policy think tank.</p>
<p align="justify">
In his 1997 book, The Grand Chessboard, Brzezinski outlined a strategy for America in the world. He wrote, “For America, the chief geopolitical prize is Eurasia. For half a millennium, world affairs were dominated by Eurasian powers and peoples who fought with one another for regional domination and reached out for global power.” Further, “how America ‘manages’ Eurasia is critical. Eurasia is the globe’s largest continent and is geopolitically axial. A power that dominates Eurasia would control two of the world’s three most advanced and economically productive regions. A mere glance at the map also suggests that control over Eurasia would almost automatically entail African subordination.”[21] Brzezinski explained that, “the pursuit of power is not a goal that commands popular passion, except in conditions of a sudden threat or challenge to the public’s sense of domestic well-being. The economic self-denial (that is, defense spending) and the human sacrifice (casualties even among professional soldiers) required in the effort are uncongenial to democratic instincts. Democracy is inimical to imperial mobilization.”[22] Brzezinski also outlines Russia and China, in cooperation with Iran and possibly Pakistan, as the most significant coalition that could challenge US hegemony.</p>
<p align="justify">
With the George W. Bush administration, the neo-conservative war hawks put into action the plans set out in their American imperial strategic documents. This made up the Bush doctrine, which called for “a unilateral and exclusive right to preemptive attack, any time, anywhere, unfettered by any international agreements, to ensure that ‘[o]ur forces will be strong enough to dissuade potential adversaries from pursuing a military build-up in hope of surpassing, or equaling, the power of the United States’.”[23]</p>
<p align="justify">
In 2000, the Pentagon released a document called Joint Vision 2020, which outlined a project to achieve what they termed, “Full Spectrum Dominance,” as the blueprint for the Department of Defense in the future. “Full-spectrum dominance means the ability of U.S. forces, operating alone or with allies, to defeat any adversary and control any situation across the range of military operations.” The report “addresses full-spectrum dominance across the range of conflicts from nuclear war to major theater wars to smaller-scale contingencies. It also addresses amorphous situations like peacekeeping and noncombat humanitarian relief.” Further, “The development of a global information grid will provide the environment for decision superiority.”[24]</p>
<p align="justify">
The War on Terrorism, as a war with invisible enemies and borderless boundaries, a truly global war, marks a major stage in the evolution of the constant war “surplus imperialism” of the American empire. The US military, while being used as a vehicle for surplus imperialism; is also creating and maintaining and expanding NATO. NATO is expanding its role in the world. The wars in Yugoslavia following the collapse of the Soviet Union were used to legitimize NATO’s continued existence, which was created to have an alliance against the USSR. When the USSR vanished, so too did NATO’s purpose, until it found a new calling: becoming a global policeman. NATO has undergone its first major war in Afghanistan and its expansion into Eastern Europe is enclosing Russia and China.</p>
<p align="justify">
Ivo Daalder, the US representative to NATO, also a Senior Fellow at the Brookings Institution and member of the Council on Foreign Relations, wrote an article for Foreign Affairs in which he advocated for a “global NATO” to “address the global challenges of the day.”[25] In April of 2009, NATO began to review its Strategic Concept “in order to stay relevant in a changing security environment,” and that, “The leaders envisage cyber-attacks, energy security and climate change as new threats to NATO, which would mean big changes in NATO&#8217;s future operations.”[26] Since 2008, NATO has been re-imagining its strategy and moving to a doctrine of advocating for pre-emptive nuclear warfare.[27]</p>
<p align="justify">
As George Orwell wrote in 1984, “The war is not meant to be won, it is meant to be continuous. Hierarchical society is only possible on the basis of poverty and ignorance. This new version is the past and no different past can ever have existed. In principle the war effort is always planned to keep society on the brink of starvation. The war is waged by the ruling group against its own subjects and its object is not the victory over either Eurasia or East Asia, but to keep the very structure of society intact.”</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify"><strong>The Revolution of the New World Order</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">The new system being formed is not one based upon any notion of competition or “free markets” or “socialist morality”, but is, instead a system based upon consolidation of power and wealth; thus, the fewer, the better; one government, one central bank, one army, one currency, one authority, one ruler. This is a much more “efficient” and “controllable” system, and thus requires a much smaller population or class to run it, as well as a much smaller population to serve it. Also, with such a system, a smaller global population would be ideal for the rulers, for it limits their risk, in terms of revolt, uprising, and revolution, and created a more malleable and manageable population. In this new capitalist system, the end goal is not profit, but power. In a sense, this is how the whole capitalist system has functioned, as profit has always acted as a means and lever to achieve power. Power itself, was the goal, profit was merely the means of achieving such a goal.</p>
<p align="justify">
Shortly following the origins of the capitalist system, central banking emerged. It was through the central banking system that the most powerful figures and individuals in the world were able to consolidate power, controlling both industry and governments. Through central banks, these figures would collapse economies, destroying industry and thus, profits; bankrupt countries and collapse their political structures, destroying a base for the exercise of power; but in doing so, they would consolidate their authority over these governments and industry, wiping out competition and eliminating dissent. It is these individuals who have played the greatest roles in shaping and reshaping the capitalist system, and are the main figures in the current reorganization of world order.</p>
<p align="justify">
However, such is the nature of individuals whose lives revolve around the acquisition and exercise of power. Like the saying goes, “Power corrupts, and absolute power corrupts, absolutely.” Those who are driven by the lust for power often eliminate and remove all of those who helped them reach such a position. Hitler undertook the Night of Long Knives, in which a series of political executions were carried out, targeting prominent figures of the SA, who helped Hitler rise to power. Stalin similarly, also purged the Soviet Union of those who helped him rise to power.</p>
<p align="justify">
Power alters the psychology of the individual that holds it. It is an extremely lonely condition, in which, once power is achieved, and with no more power to gain, the obsession turns to the preservation of power, and with that, paranoia of losing it. This is why those that assist the powerful in gaining more power are doomed to a fate that is similar or worse than those who fight against such a power. This, ultimately, is why it is futile to join forces with such systems of power, or ally oneself with such powerful figures.</p>
<p align="justify">
Power is a cancer; it eats away at its host. The greater the power held, the more cancerous it is, the more malignant it becomes. The less power held by individuals, the less chance there is for growth of this cancer, or for it to become malignant. Power must be shared among all people, for the risk carried thus becomes a risk to all, and there is a greater degree of cooperation, support, and there is a more efficient and effective means through which everyone can act as a check against the abuse of power.</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify"><strong>Theoretical Foundations of Global Revolution</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">Currently, we are witnessing, in the wake of the massive economic crisis, a revolution in the global political economy. This revolution, like all revolutions, is not simply a top-down or a bottom-up revolution. Historically, revolutions are driven by a combination of both the grassroots and the elite. Often, this materializes in clashes between social groups, such as with the American Revolution. Although, the American Revolution itself was primarily waged by the American landed elite against the foreign imperial elite of Great Britain. The French Revolution was the combination of the banking and aristocratic elite co-opting, manipulating and controlling the grassroots opposition to the established order. The Russian Revolution, also being able to see rising social tensions among the lower classes, was co-opted by an international banking elite.</p>
<p align="justify">
Currently, the transnational elite are very aware of the increasing social tensions among the worlds majority. As the crisis deepens, tensions will rise, and the chances of revolt and revolution from below greatly increase. Governments everywhere, particularly in the Western industrialized nations are building massive police states to monitor and control populations, and are actively preparing for martial law and military rule in the event of such a situation unfolding.</p>
<p align="justify">
However, the transnational elite are undertaking their own revolution from above. This revolution is encompassing the restructuring of the global political economy through their orchestrated economic crisis.</p>
<p align="justify">
Neo-Gramscian political economic theory can help us understand how this revolution has been and is currently being undertaken. Neo-Gramscian IPE (International Political Economy) emerged in the 1980s within the critical camp of theory. Largely based off of the Italian Marxist writer, Antonio Gramsci, it places a great focus on analysis of global power, order and structure. There has been much analysis within Neo-Gramscian theory on the nature and structure of the transnational capitalist class.  Among the analysis of transnational classes, Neo-Gramscian theory also places emphasis on the notions of hegemony and resistance, or counter-hegemony.</p>
<p align="justify">
The Gramscian notion of hegemony differs from other perspectives in, particularly mainstream, Global Political Economy. With the Gramscian concept of hegemony, it does not focus simply on the use of state power at exerting power, but rather defines hegemony as a system of power that is dual; it requires both coercion and consent. Consent is key, as it implies the active consent of “subaltern” or “subordinate” groups (in other words, the great majority of the world’s people), to being submissive to the system itself. This hegemony is built around the notion of conformity; thus, conformity is an active consent to hegemony. By conforming, one is submitting to the system and their place within it. This is also an internationalizing concept, in that this hegemony is not nation-based, but transnational, and backed by the threat of coercive force.</p>
<p align="justify">
In discussing resistance to hegemony, or counter-hegemony, Gramsci identified two forms of resistance; the war of position and the war of movement. Robert Cox, the most well known Neo-Gramscian theorist, analyzed how Gramsci defined these notions by comparing the experiences of Russia with the Bolshevik Revolution as compared with experiences in Western Europe. As Cox explained, “The basic difference between Russia and Western Europe was in the relative strengths of state and civil society. In Russia, the administrative and coercive apparatus of the state was formidable but proved to be vulnerable, while civil society was undeveloped. A relatively small working class led by a disciplined avant-garde was able to overwhelm the state in a war of movement and met no effective resistance from the rest of civil society.”[28]</p>
<p align="justify">
So a war of movement was characterized by a small vanguard seizing power and overthrowing the state. “In Western Europe, by contrast, civil society, under bourgeois hegemony, was much more fully developed and took manifold forms. A war of movement might conceivably, in conditions of exceptional upheaval, enable a revolutionary vanguard to seize control of the state apparatus; but because of the resiliency of civil society such an exploit would in the long run be doomed to failure.” As Gramsci himself noted, “In Russia, the State was everything, civil society was primordial and gelatinous; in the West, there was a proper relation between State and civil society, and when the State trembled a sturdy structure of civil society was at once revealed.”[29]</p>
<p align="justify">
In this instance, a war of movement was impossible to achieve in Western Europe, and thus, “The alternative strategy is the war of position which slowly builds up the strength of the social foundations of a new state. In Western Europe, the struggle had to be won in civil society before an assault on the state could achieve success.” This undertaking is massive to say the least, as it implies as a necessity, “creating alternative institutions and alternative intellectual resources within existing society and building bridges between workers and other subordinate classes. It means actively building counter-hegemony within an established hegemony while resisting the pressures and temptations to relapse into pursuit of incremental gains for subaltern groups within the framework of bourgeois hegemony.” In other words, it is a “long-range revolutionary strategy,” as compared to social democracy, which is “a policy of making gains within the established order.”[30]</p>
<p align="justify">
However, I wish to take the concept and notion of the “war of position” and re-imagine it, not as a means of counter-hegemony, but as a means of supra-hegemony. This is not a war of position on the part of a counter-hegemonic group (grassroots opposition, etc), but is rather a war of position on the part of an embedded international elite, or supra-hegemonic group. Supra is Latin for “above,” which implies that this group is above hegemony, just as supra-national institutions (such as the European Union) are above nations. This is the elite of the elite, beyond national elites, and composing the top tier of the hierarchy within the transnational superclass. In terms of composition, this group is the highly concentrated international bankers, the dynastic banking families such as the Rothschilds and Rockefellers, who control the major banking institutions of the world, which in turn, control the international central banking system. Their centralized power is exemplified in the Bank for International Settlements.</p>
<p align="justify">
I will refer to this group as the Global Cartel. This Cartel has usurped global authority and power through an incremental, multi-century spanning war of position. The Peace of Westphalia, signed in 1648, constituting two separate treaties, created the notion of the nation state and state sovereignty within Western Europe. Feudalism dominated Europe from the medieval period through the 16th century, and was slowly replaced by the emergence of Capitalism. Major European empires had, since the 15th century, been pursuing empire building, such as with the trans-Atlantic slave trade and expansion into the Americas. This formed the first truly global economy. The empires worked under and in service to the monarchies that oversaw them.</p>
<p align="justify">
It was with the founding of the Bank of England in 1694 that a European group of bankers overtook one of the major European empires. Great Britain then became the dominant empire, experiencing the Industrial Revolution prior to any other nation, and became a global hegemon. With the French Revolution, these European bankers took over another major empire through the establishment of the Bank of France, and then financed and profited off of all sides of every major war, and expanded imperial reach.</p>
<p align="justify">
Through the expansion of the central banking system, a highly concentrated group of European bankers were able to overtake the major nations of the world. The entire history of the United States is the story of a Republic’s struggle and battle against a central bank. Finally, the bankers usurped monetary authority with the establishment of the Federal Reserve, and built up and created the American empire.</p>
<p align="justify">
It was in the 20th century that the war of position of the cartel is most apparent. As the world globalized, so too did the war of position. The major banking dynasties founded powerful philanthropies, such as the Carnegie Endowment and the Rockefeller and Ford Foundations. These organizations shaped civil society in the United States and set their sights internationally in scope. Through the establishment of think tanks like the Royal Institute of International Affairs (RIIA) in Britain and the Council on Foreign Relations (CFR) in the United States, this cartel was able to bring in and centralize the intellectual, academic, strategic, military, economic and political establishments under the cartel’s influence. This was expanded by the cartel through organizations such as the Bilderberg Group and the Trilateral Commission.</p>
<p align="justify">
Centralizing and controlling debate and discussion within these vital socio-political-economic realms was a vital component of institutionalizing hegemony, as Gramsci understands it, in that the cartel used their monetary and financial hegemony (controlling the printing and value of currencies) to stimulate an active consent among the socio-political-economic elite. National elites consented to the hegemony of the cartel, whose coercive hegemony was in their ability to destroy a national economy through monetary policy.</p>
<p align="justify">
This hegemony, both coercive and consenting, based within the elite class themselves, facilitated the war of position of the cartel to advance their interests and proceed with their incremental revolution. The aim of this cartel, like many tyrants and power-hungry people before it, was world domination. Bankers command no army, lead no nation, and motivate no people. Their influence lies in co-opting the commanders, controlling the leaders, and manipulating motivation.</p>
<p align="justify">
Thus, it was of absolute necessity for the cartel to undertake their ultimate aim of world domination and world government through a war of position, as no person would fight for, surrender a nation to, or be motivated to help any banker achieve their own selfish goals. Rather, they had to slowly usurp power incrementally; control money, buy politicians, own economies, build empires, engineer wars, mold civil society, control their opposition, overtake educational institutions and ultimately, control thought.</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify"><strong>Conclusion</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">As George Orwell wrote, “Power is not a means, it is an end. One does not establish a dictatorship in order to safeguard a revolution; one makes the revolution in order to establish the dictatorship. The object of persecution is persecution. The object of torture is torture. The object of power is power.”</p>
<p align="justify">
The more people that think for themselves; the worse it is for the cartel. People, free thinking individuals, are the greatest threat to this cartel and their war of position. That is why the answer and solution to exposing the supra-hegemonic war of position, challenging and triumphing over the New World Order, lies in the free-thinking individual. The challenge is global and globalized; the solution is local and localized. The problem is conformity and controlled thought; the answer is individuality and free thought.</p>
<p align="justify">
While humanity is faced with such monumental crises the likes of which in scope and size, we have never before faced, so too, are we faced with the greatest opportunities for an ultimate change in the right direction. While people are controlled and manipulated through crisis and disorder, so too can people be awoken to seeing the necessity of knowledge and critical thought. When one’s life is thrown into disorder and chaos, suddenly observation, information and knowledge become important in understanding how one got into that situation, and how one can escape it.</p>
<p align="justify">
With this in mind, while facing the potential for the greatest struggle humanity has ever faced, so too are we facing the greatest potential for a new Enlightenment or a new Renaissance; an age of new thought, new life, new potential, and peace. No matter how much elites think they control all things, life has a way of making one realize that there are things outside the control of people. With every action, comes an equal and opposite reaction.</p>
<p align="justify">
We may not reach a new age of thinking and peace before we enter into a new age of oppression and war. In fact, the former may not be possible without the latter. People must awake from their slumber; their immersion in consumerist society and pop culture distractions, and awake to both the malevolence of world systems and the wonder of life and its potential. Through crisis, comes control; through control, comes power; through power, comes resistance; through resistance, comes thinking; through thinking, comes potential; through potential, comes peace.</p>
<p align="justify">
We may very well be entering into the most oppressive and destructive order the world has yet seen, but from its ruins and ashes, which are as inevitable as the tides and as sure as the sun rises, we may see the rise of a truly peaceful world order; in which we see the triumphs of individualism merge with the interests of the majority; a people’s world order of peace for all. We must maintain, as Antonio Gramsci once wrote, “Pessimism of the intellect, optimism of the will.”</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Notes</strong></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[1]        NIC, Global Trends 2025: A Transformed World. The National Intelligence Council’s 2025 Project: November, 2008: pages 70-72:  </span><a href="http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[2]        David Lyon, Theorizing surveillance: the panopticon and beyond. Willan Publishing, 2006: page 71</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[3]        Olga Chetverikova, Crisis as a way to build a global totalitarian state. Russia Today: April 20, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.russiatoday.com/Politics/2009-04-20/Crisis_as_a_way_to_build_a_global_totalitarian_state.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.russiatoday.com/Politics/2009-04-20/Crisis_as_a_way_to_build_a_global_totalitarian_state.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[4]        NIC, Global Trends 2025: A Transformed World. The National Intelligence Council’s 2025 Project: November, 2008: pages 67:  </span><a href="http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[5]        NIC, Global Trends 2025: A Transformed World. The National Intelligence Council’s 2025 Project: November, 2008: pages 63:  </span><a href="http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[6]        NIC, Global Trends 2025: A Transformed World. The National Intelligence Council’s 2025 Project: November, 2008: pages 56:  </span><a href="http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[7]        Richard Norton-Taylor, Revolution, flashmobs, and brain chips. A grim vision of the future. The Guardian: April 9, 2007: </span><a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/science/2007/apr/09/frontpagenews.news"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.guardian.co.uk/science/2007/apr/09/frontpagenews.news</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[8]        Paul Joseph Watson &#38; Yihan Dai, RAND Lobbies Pentagon: Start War To Save U.S. Economy. Prison Planet: October 30, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.prisonplanet.com/rand-lobbies-pentagon-start-war-to-save-us-economy.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.prisonplanet.com/rand-lobbies-pentagon-start-war-to-save-us-economy.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[9]        Paul Joseph Watson, Celente Predicts Revolution, Food Riots, Tax Rebellions By 2012. Prison Planet: November 13, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.prisonplanet.com/celente-predicts-revolution-food-riots-tax-rebellions-by-2012.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.prisonplanet.com/celente-predicts-revolution-food-riots-tax-rebellions-by-2012.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[10]      Gerald Celente, Obamageddon — 2012. Prison Planet: June 30: 2009: </span><a href="http://www.infowars.com/obamageddon-2012/"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.infowars.com/obamageddon-2012/</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[11]      CNBC, Gerald Celente. May 21, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=akH5C3f4aTI"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=akH5C3f4aTI</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[12]      Terry Easton, Exclusive Interview with Future Prediction Expert Gerald Celente. Human Events: June 5, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.humanevents.com/article.php?id=32152"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.humanevents.com/article.php?id=32152</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[13]      Ellen Wood, Empire of Capital. Verso, 2003: page 144<br />
</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[14]      Ellen Wood, Empire of Capital. Verso, 2003: page 157<br />
</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[15]      Tyler, Patrick E. U.S. Strategy Plan Calls for Insuring No Rivals Develop: A One Superpower World. The New York Times: March 8, 1992. </span><a href="http://work.colum.edu/%7Eamiller/wolfowitz1992.htm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://work.colum.edu/~amiller/wolfowitz1992.htm</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[16]      PNAC, Rebuilding America’s Defenses. Project for the New American Century: September 2000, page 6: </span><a href="http://www.newamericancentury.org/publicationsreports.htm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.newamericancentury.org/publicationsreports.htm</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[17]      Ibid. Page 8</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[18]      Ibid. Page 9</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[19]      Ibid. Page 14</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[20]      Ibid. Page 51</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[21]      Brzezinski, Zbigniew. The Grand Chessboard: American Primacy and its Geostrategic Imperatives. Basic Books, 1997: Pages 30-31</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[22]      Ibid. Page 36</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[23]      Ellen Wood, Empire of Capital. Verso, 2003: page 160</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[24]      Jim Garamone, Joint Vision 2020 Emphasizes Full-spectrum Dominance. American Forces Press Service: June 2, 2000: </span><a href="http://www.defenselink.mil/news/newsarticle.aspx?id=45289"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.defenselink.mil/news/newsarticle.aspx?id=45289</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[25]      Ivo Daalder and James Goldgeier, Global NATO. Foreign Affairs: Sep/Oct2006, Vol. 85, Issue 5</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[26]      Xinhua, NATO changes to stay relevant. Xinhua News Agency: April 5, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.china.org.cn/international/2009-04/05/content_17554731.htm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.china.org.cn/international/2009-04/05/content_17554731.htm</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[27]      Ian Traynor, Pre-emptive nuclear strike a key option, Nato told. The Guardian: January 22, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/2008/jan/22/nato.nuclear"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/2008/jan/22/nato.nuclear</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">Michel Chossudovsky, The US-NATO Preemptive Nuclear Doctrine: Trigger a Middle East Nuclear Holocaust to Defend &#8220;The Western Way of Life&#8221;. Global Research: February 11, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=8048"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=8048</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[28]      Robert W. Cox, Gramsci, Hegemony and International Relations: An Essay in Method. Millennium: Journal of International Studies, Vol. 12, No. 2: pages 164-165</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[29]      Robert W. Cox, Gramsci, Hegemony and International Relations: An Essay in Method. Millennium: Journal of International Studies, Vol. 12, No. 2: page 165</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[30]      Robert W. Cox, Gramsci, Hegemony and International Relations: An Essay in Method. Millennium: Journal of International Studies, Vol. 12, No. 2: page 165</span></p>
</div>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[Forging a “New World Order” Under a One World Government]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/10/forging-a-%e2%80%9cnew-world-order%e2%80%9d-under-a-one-world-government/</link>
<pubDate>Mon, 11 Jul 2011 01:17:12 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/10/forging-a-%e2%80%9cnew-world-order%e2%80%9d-under-a-one-world-government/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[Forging a “New World Order” Under a One World Government Global Power and Global Government: Part 4]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<table width="100%" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td align="left" valign="top">
<div><strong>Forging a “New World Order” Under a One World Government</strong></div>
<div><strong>Global Power and Global Government: Part 4</strong></div>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" align="left" nowrap="nowrap">
<div><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/">Global Research</a>, August 13, 2009</div>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" align="left">
<div>
<p align="justify">This article is Part 4 in the series, <em><strong>&#8220;Global Power and Global Government,&#8221;</strong></em> published by Global Research.</p>
<p><strong>Part 1: </strong><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14464" target="_new"><strong>Global Power and Global Government: Evolution and Revolution of the Central Banking System</strong></a><br />
<strong>Part 2: </strong><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14552" target="_new"><strong>Origins of the American Empire: Revolution, World Wars and World Order</strong></a><br />
<strong>Part 3: <a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=14614" target="_new">Controlling the Global Economy: Bilderberg, the Trilateral Commission and the Federal Reserve</a><br />
</strong><br />
<strong> </strong></p>
<hr />
<p><strong><br />
Globalization and the New World Order</strong></p>
<p align="justify">The 1990s saw the emergence of what was called the New World Order. This was a term that emerged in the early 1990s to describe a more unipolar world, addressing the collapse of the Soviet Union and the newfound role of the United States as the sole and unchallenged global power. The New World Order was meant to represent a new phase in the global political economy in which world authority rested in one place, and for the time, that place was to be the United States.</p>
<p align="justify">
This era saw the continual expansion and formation of regional blocs, with the formation of the European Union, the signing of the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) and the creation of the WTO. The World Trade Organization was officially formed in 1995, as the successor to the General Agreements on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), which was formed in 1944 at the Bretton-Woods Conference. The WTO manages the international liberal trading order.</p>
<p align="justify">
The first Director-General of the WTO was Peter D. Sutherland, who was previously the director general of GATT, former Attorney General of Ireland, and currently is Chairman of British Petroleum and Goldman Sachs International, as well as being special representative of the United Nations secretary-general for migrations. He is also a member of the board of the Royal Bank of Scotland Group, the Foundation Board of the World Economic Forum, goodwill ambassador to the United Nations Industrial Development Organisation, is a member of the Bilderberg Group, and is European Chairman of the Trilateral Commission, and he was presented with the Robert Schuman Medal for his work on European Integration and the David Rockefeller Award of the Trilateral Commission.[1] Clearly, the WTO was an organ of the western banking elite to be used as a tool in expanding and institutionalizing their control over world trade.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>The European Superstate</strong></p>
<p align="justify">In 1992, the Maastricht Treaty was signed, which officially formed the European Union in 1993. In 1994, the European Monetary Institute (EMI) was formed, with the European Central Bank (ECB) being formed in 1998, and the single European currency, the Euro, debuting in 1999. In 2004, the European Constitution was to be signed by all 25-member states of the EU, which was a treaty to establish a constitution for the entire European Union.</p>
<p align="justify">
The Constitution was a move towards creating a European superstate, creating an EU foreign minister, and with it, coordinated foreign policy, with the EU taking over the seat of Britain on the UN Security Council, representing all EU member states, forcing the nations to “actively and unreservedly” follow an EU foreign policy; set out the framework to create an EU defence policy, as an appendage to or separate from NATO; the creation of a European Justice system, with the EU defining “minimum standards in defining offences and setting sentences,” and creates common asylum and immigration policy; and it would also hand over to the EU the power to “ensure co-ordination of economic and employment policies”; and EU law would supercede all law of the member states, thus making the member nations relative to mere provinces within a centralized federal government system.[2]</p>
<p align="justify">
Vaclav Klaus, President of the Czech Republic, had stated that he feared that the concept of a stronger and more centralized European Union, as “the developments in the E.U. are really dangerous with regard to moving out of a free society and moving more and more toward masterminding control and regulation,” and that, “We [the Czech Republic] spent a half-century under communist eyes. We are more sensitive than some other West Europeans. We feel things, we see things, we touch things that we don&#8217;t like. For us, the European Union reminds us of COMECON [Moscow's organization for economic control of the Soviet bloc].” He elaborated saying that the similarity with COMECON is not ideologically based, but in its structure, “The decisions are made not in your own country. For us who lived through the communist era, this is an issue.”[3]</p>
<p align="justify">
The Constitution was largely written up by Valéry Giscard d’Estaing, former President of the French Republic from 1974 to 1981. Giscard d’Estaing also happens to be a member of the Bilderberg Group, the Trilateral Commission, and is also a close friend of Henry Kissinger, having co-authored papers with him. In 2005, French and Dutch voters answered the referendums in their countries, in which they rejected the EU Constitution, which required total unanimity in order to pass.</p>
<p align="justify">
In 2007, a move was undertaken to introduce what was called the Lisbon Treaty, to be approved by all member-states. Giscard d’Estaing wrote an article for the Independent in which he stated that, “The difference between the original Constitution and the present Lisbon Treaty is one of approach, rather than content.” He described the process of creating the Lisbon Treaty: “It was the legal experts for the European Council who were charged with drafting the new text. They have not made any new suggestions. They have taken the original draft constitution, blown it apart into separate elements, and have then attached them, one by one, to existing treaties. The Treaty of Lisbon is thus a catalogue of amendments. It is unpenetrable for the public.” The main difference was that the word “constitution” was removed and banished from the text.[4]</p>
<p align="justify">
The Telegraph reported that though the Treaty dropped the word “constitution,” it remained the same in “giving the EU the trappings of a global power and cutting national sovereignty.” It contained plans to create an EU President, who “will serve a two and half year term but unlike democratic heads of state he or she will be chosen by Europe&#8217;s leaders not by voters” and “will take over key international negotiations from national heads of government.” The Constitution’s “Foreign Minister” becomes the “High Representative,” who “will run a powerful EU diplomatic service and will be more important on the global and European stage than national foreign ministers.” It sets out to create an “Interior Ministry” which will “centralise databases holding fingerprints and DNA,” and “make EU legislation on new police and surveillance powers.” The ability for EU nations to use vetoes will end, and the Treaty “includes a clause hardwiring an EU &#8220;legal personality&#8221; and ascendancy over national courts.”[5]</p>
<p align="justify">
One country in Europe has it written into its constitution that it requires a referendum on treaties, and that country is Ireland. In June of 2008, the Irish went to vote on the Treaty of Lisbon, after weeks and months of being badgered by EU politicians and Eurocrats explaining that the Irish “owe” Europe a “Yes” vote because of the benefits the EU had bestowed upon Ireland. History will show, however, that the Irish don’t take kindly to being bossed around and patronized, so when they went to the polls, “No” was on their lips and on their ballots. The Irish thus rejected the Lisbon Treaty.</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify"><strong>North American Integration</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">The Canada-US Free Trade Agreement of 1989, was signed by President George HW Bush and Canadian Prime Minister Brian Mulroney. The FTA had devastating consequences for the people of Canada and the United States, while enriching the corporate and political elite. For example, GDP growth decreased, unemployment increased the most since the Great Depression,[6] and meanwhile, Brian Mulroney entered the corporate world, of which he now sits as a board member of Barrick Gold Corporation, as well as sitting on the International Advisory Board of the Council on Foreign Relations,[7] of which David Rockefeller remains on as Honorary Chairman.</p>
<p align="justify">
In 1990, the private sector lobbying groups and think tanks began the promotion of the North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA) to expand the Canada-US Free Trade Agreement to include Mexico. NAFTA was signed by then Canadian Prime Minister Jean Chrétien, US President George H.W. Bush and Mexican President Carlos Salinas, in 1993, and went into effect in 1994. It was negotiated during a time in which Mexico was undergoing liberal economic reforms, so NAFTA had the effect of cementing those reforms in an “economic constitution for North America.”[8]</p>
<p align="justify">
David Rockefeller played a role in the push for NAFTA. In 1965, he had founded the Council for Latin America (CLA), which, as he wrote in a 1966 article in Foreign Affairs, was to mobilize private enterprise throughout the hemisphere “to stimulate and support economic integration.” The CLA, David wrote, “provides an effective channel of cooperation between businessmen in the United States and their counterparts in the countries to the south. It also offers a means of continuing communication and consultation with the White House, the State Department and other agencies of our government.”[9]</p>
<p align="justify">
The CLA later changed its name to the Council of the Americas (CoA) and maintains a very close relationship with the Americas Society, founded at the same time as the CLA, of which David Rockefeller remains to this day as Chairman of both organizations. As David wrote in his autobiography, Memoirs, in the lead up to NAFTA, the Council of the Americas sponsored a Forum of the Americas, which was attended by President George H.W. Bush, which resulted in the call for a “Western Hemisphere free trade area.”[10]</p>
<p align="justify">
In 1993, David Rockefeller wrote an article for the Wall Street Journal, in the run up to NAFTA, in which he advocated for the signing of NAFTA as essential, describing it as a vital step on the road to fulfilling his life long work, and that, “Everything is in place &#8212; after 500 years &#8212; to build a true &#8220;new world&#8221; in the Western Hemisphere,” and further, that “I truly don&#8217;t think that &#8220;criminal&#8221; would be too strong a word to describe an action on our part, such as rejecting Nafta, that would so seriously jeopardize all the good that has been done &#8212; and remains to be done.”[11]</p>
<p align="justify">
In 1994, Mexico entered into a financial crisis, often referred to as the Mexican peso crisis. The 1980s debt crisis, instigated by the Federal Reserve’s interest rate hikes on international loans, caused Mexico to default on its loans. The IMF had to enter the scene with its newly created Structural Adjustment Programs (SAPs) and reform Mexico’s economy along neoliberal economic policies.</p>
<p align="justify">
In the late 1980s, “the United States accounted for 73 percent of Mexico’s foreign trade,”[12] and when NAFTA came into effect in 1994, it “immediately opened US and Canadian markets to 84 percent of Mexican exports.”[13] Mexico even became a member of the World Trade Organization (WTO). The peso crisis, which began at the end of 1994, with the ascension of Mexican President Zedillo, went into 1995, and the US organized a bailout worth $52 billion.[14] The bailout did not help the Mexican economy, as it was simply funneled into paying back loans to banks, primarily American banks, and the “crisis in 1995 was declared [by the IMF to be] over as soon as the banks and international lenders started to get repaid; but five years after the crisis, workers were just getting back to where they were beforehand.”[15]</p>
<p align="justify">
In 2002, Robert Pastor, Director of the Center for North American Studies at the American University in Washington, D.C., prepared a report that he presented to the Trilateral Commission meeting of that same year. The report, A North American Community: A Modest Proposal to the Trilateral Commission, advocated a continuation of the policy of “deep integration” in North America, recommending, “a continental plan for infrastructure and transportation, a plan for harmonizing regulatory policies, a customs union, [and] a common currency.”[16] The report advocated the formation of a North American Community and Pastor wrote that, “<span style="font-family:Times New Roman;">a</span> <span style="font-family:Times New Roman;">majority of the public in all three countries is prepared to join a larger North American country.”[17]</span></p>
<p align="justify">
In 2003, prior to Paul Martin becoming Prime Minister of Canada, the Canadian Council of Chief Executives (CCCE), formerly the BCNI, published on their website, a press release in which they, “urged Paul Martin to take the lead in forging a new vision for North America.” Thomas d’Aquino, CEO of the Council, “urged that Mr. Martin champion the idea of a yearly summit of the leaders of Canada, Mexico and the United States in order to give common economic, social and security issues the priority they deserve in a continental, hemispheric and global context.” Among the signatories to this statement were all the Vice Chairmen of the CCCE, including David Emerson, who would go on to join Martin’s Cabinet.[18]</p>
<p align="justify">
The CCCE then launched the North American Security and Prosperity Initiative, advocating “redefining borders, maximizing regulatory efficiencies, negotiation of a comprehensive resource security pact, reinvigorating the North American defence alliance, and creating a new institutional framework.”[19]</p>
<p align="justify">
The Independent Task Force on the Future of North America was then launched in 2005, composed of an alliance and joint project between the CCCE in Canada, the Council on Foreign Relations (CFR) in the United States, and the Mexican Council on Foreign Relations in Mexico. A press release was given on March 14, 2005, in which it said, “The chairs and vice-chairs of the Independent Task Force on the Future of North America today issued a statement calling for a North American economic and security community by 2010.”[20]</p>
<p align="justify">
On March 23, 2005, a mere nine days following the Task Force press release, the leaders of Canada, the US, and Mexico, (Paul Martin, George W. Bush, and Vicente Fox, respectively), announced “the establishment of the Security and Prosperity Partnership of North America,” which constituted a course of “action into a North American framework to confront security and economic challenges.”[21]</p>
<p align="justify">
Within two months, the Independent Task Force on the Future of North America released their final report, Building a North American Community, proposing the continuation of “deep integration” into the formation of a North American Community, that “applauds the announced ‘Security and Prosperity Partnership of North America,’ but proposes a more ambitious vision of a new community by 2010 and specific recommendations on how to achieve it.”[22]</p>
<p align="justify">
At the 2006 meeting of the SPP, the creation of a new group was announced, called the North American Competitiveness Council (NACC), made up of corporate leaders from all three countries who produce an annual report and advise the three governments on how to implement the SPP process of “deep integration”. The Secretariat in Canada is the CCCE, and the Secretariat of the group in the US is made up of the US Chamber of Commerce and the Council of the Americas.[23] The Council of the Americas was founded by David Rockefeller, of which he is still Honourary Chairman, and other board members include individuals from J.P. Morgan, Merck, McDonald’s, Ford, the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, General Electric, Chevron, Shell, IBM, ConocoPhillips, Citigroup, Microsoft, Pfizer, Wal-Mart, Exxon, General Motors, Merrill Lynch, Credit Suisse and the US Department of Treasury.[24]</p>
<p align="justify">
The process of integration is still underway, and the formation of a North American Community is not far off, only to be followed by a North American Union, modeled on the structure of the European Union, with talk of a North American currency being formed in the future,[25] which was even proposed by Canada’s former Governor of the Bank of Canada.[26]</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify"><strong>The New World Order in Theory</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">In a 1997 article of Foreign Affairs, the journal of the Council on Foreign Relations, Anne-Marie Slaughter discussed the theoretical foundations of the New World Order. Building on George HW Bush’s proclamation of a New World Order in 1991, Slaughter wrote that many saw this as “the promise of 1945 fulfilled, a world in which international institutions, led by the United Nations, guaranteed international peace and security with the active support of the world&#8217;s major powers.” However, this concept, she explained, was largely infeasible, as “It requires a centralized rule-making authority, a hierarchy of institutions, and universal membership.” Instead, she explains the emergence of what she called a “new medievalism” as opposed to liberal internationalism. “Where liberal internationalists see a need for international rules and institutions to solve states&#8217; problems, the new medievalists proclaim the end of the nation-state,” where “The result is not world government, but global governance. If government denotes the formal exercise of power by established institutions, governance denotes cooperative problem- solving by a changing and often uncertain cast.”[27]</p>
<p align="justify">
However, Slaughter challenges the assumptions of both the liberal internationalists and the new medievalists, and states that, “The state is not disappearing, it is disaggregating into its separate, functionally distinct parts. These parts—courts, regulatory agencies, executives, and even legislatures—are networking with their counterparts abroad, creating a dense web of relations that constitutes a new, transgovernmental order,” and that, “transgovernmentalism is rapidly becoming the most widespread and effective mode of international governance.”[28] Slaughter was Dean of the Woodrow Wilson School of Public and International Affairs at Princeton University from 2002-2009, is currently Director of Policy Planning for the United States Department of State, and has previously served on the board of the Council on Foreign Relations.</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify"><strong>Reconstructing Class Structure Under a World Government</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">Bank of Canada Governor Mark Carney, a former executive with Goldman Sachs, stated in his speech at the International Economic Forum of the Americas, that, “Globalized product, capital, and labour markets lie at the heart of the New World Order to which we should aspire. However, the next wave of globalization needs to be more firmly grounded and its participants more responsible,” and that, “Within our economies, major stock adjustments in inventories, labour, and capital will be required.” It is worth quoting him at length in saying:</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">Although global demand and trade levels appear to be approaching bottom, and inventory and labour adjustments have already been substantial, there is still more to come. <em>Unemployment will likely rise further across the G-7, with the sharpest increases still to come in those economies with the least-flexible labour markets</em>. Uncertainty over the employment outlook will weigh on consumption in most major economies for some time. The capital stock adjustment process will take longer, and global investment growth is likely to remain negative well into 2010. <em>This will serve as a significant drag on global growth and can be expected to reduce potential growth in most major economies</em>.[29] [Emphasis added]</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">In terms of labour adjustments within the New World Order, there are some important and vital factors to take into account. Primary among these concerns is the notion of transnational classes. Capitalism largely functions through class divides, with the ruling class owning the means of production, which, as a class, is subject to its own hierarchy over which those that control and issue currencies preside.</p>
<p align="justify">
In Western, industrialized nations, there has been a large middle class which thrives on consumption, enriching the upper class bourgeoisie, while the lower class, (or proletariat in Marxist terms), consists of the labour class. In non-western, industrialized nations, generally referred to as the “Third World”, “developing world” or the “Global South” (consisting of Latin America, Africa, and parts of Asia), there is a greater divide in terms in class lines, where there is a ruling class, and a labour class, largely remaining vacant of a vast, educated middle class. Class structures vary from country to country and region to region.</p>
<p align="justify">
However, in the past several decades, the reality of class structures has been undergoing drastic changes, and with this, the structure of labour has changed. In the past few decades, a concurrent class restructuring has been taking place, in which the middle classes of the world descend into debt bondage while the upper classes of the world have began a process of transnationalizing. What we have witnessed and are witnessing with recent events, is the transnationalization of class structures, and with that, labour forces.</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify"><em>Social Constructivism</em></p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">A fascinating theoretical school of thought within the field of Global Political Economy is that of Social Constructivism. Social Constructivists argue that, “The social and political world, including the world of international relations, is not a physical entity or material object that is outside human consciousness. Consequently, the study of international relations must focus on the ideas and beliefs that inform the actors on the international scene as well as the shared understandings between them.” Expanding upon this idea:</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">The international system is not something ‘out there’ like the solar system. It does not exist on its own. It exists only as an intersubjective awareness among people; in that sense the system is constituted by ideas, not by material forces. It is a human invention or creation not of a physical or material kind but of a purely intellectual and ideational kind. It is a set of ideas, a body of thought, a system of norms, which has been arranged by certain people at a particular time and place.</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">Examples of socially constructed structures within the global political economy are national borders, as they have no physical line, but are rather formed by a shared understanding between various actors as to where the border is. The nation itself is a social construct, as it has no physical, over-arching form, but is made up of a litany of shared values, ideas, concepts, institutions, beliefs and symbols. Thus, “If the thoughts and ideas that enter into the existence of international relations change, then the system itself will change as well, because the system consists in thoughts and ideas. That is the insight behind the oft-repeated phrase by constructivist Alexander Wendt: ‘anarchy is what states make of it’.”[30]</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify"><em>Class Structure and Social Constructivism</em></p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">William I. Robinson and Jerry Harris write in Science &#38; Society Journal, that, “One process central to capitalist globalization is transnational class formation, which has proceeded in step with the internationalization of capital and the global integration of national productive structures. Given the transnational integration of national economies, the mobility of capital and the global fragmentation and decentralization of accumulation circuits, class formation is progressively less tied to territoriality.”[31] They argued that a Transnational Capitalist Class (TCC) has emerged, “and that this TCC is a global ruling class. It is a ruling class because it controls the levers of an emergent transnational state apparatus and of global decision making.”[32] This class has no borders, and is composed of the technocratic, media, corporate, banking, social and political elite of the world.</p>
<p align="justify">
As Jackson and Sorenson point out in relation to social constructivist theory, “If ‘anarchy is what states make of it’ there is nothing inevitable or unchangeable about world politics,” and that, “The existing system is a creation of states and if states change their conceptions of who they are, what their interests are, what they want, etc. then the situation will change accordingly.” As an example, they stated that states could decide “to reduce their sovereignty or even to give up their sovereignty. If that happened there would no longer be an international anarchy as we know it. Instead, there would be a brave new, non-anarchical world – perhaps one in which states were subordinate to a world government.”[33]</p>
<p align="justify">
As Robinson and Harris explain in their essay, with the rise of the Transnational Capitalist Class (TCC), there is also a rise in the apparatus of a Transnational State (TNS), which is “an emerging network that comprises transformed and externally integrated national states, together with the supranational economic and political forums; it has not yet acquired any centralized institutional form.”[34] Among the economic apparatus of the TNS we see the IMF, World Bank, WTO and regional banks. On the political side we see the Group of 7, Group of 22, United Nations, OECD, and the European Union. This was further accelerated with the Trilateral Commission, “which brought together transnationalized fractions of the business, political, and intellectual elite in North America, Europe, and Japan.” Further, the World Economic Forum has made up an important part of this class, and, I might add, the Bilderberg Group. Robinson and Harris point out that, “Studies on building a global economy and transnational management structures flowed out of think tanks, university centers, and policy planning institutes in core countries.”[35]</p>
<p align="justify">
The TNS apparatus has been a vital principle of organization and socialization for the transnational class, “as have world class universities, transnationally oriented think tanks, the leading bourgeois foundations, such as Harvard’s School of International Business, the Ford [and Rockefeller] and the Carnegie Foundations, [and] policy planning groups such as the Council on Foreign Relations.” These “elite planning groups are important forums for integrating class groups, developing new initiatives, collective strategies, policies and projects of class rule, and forging consensus and a political culture around these projects.”[36]</p>
<p align="justify">
Robinson and Harris identify the World Economic Forum as “the most comprehensive transnational planning body of the TCC and the quintessential example of a truly global network binding together the TCC in a transnational civil society.”[37] I would take issue with this, and instead propose the Bilderberg Group, of which they make no mention in their article, as THE quintessential transnational planning body of the TCC, as it is composed of the elite of the elite, totally removed from public scrutiny, and acts as “a secretive global think-tank” of the world’s 130 most powerful individuals.[38]</p>
<p align="justify">
Many Bilderberg critics will claim that the group acts as a “secret world government” or as the organization “that makes all the key decisions for the world.” However, this is not the case. Bilderberg is simply the most influential planning body, sitting atop a grand hierarchy of various planning bodies and institutions, and is itself a key part of the apparatus of the formation of a Transnational State, but is not, in and of itself, a “world government.” It is a global think tank, which holds the concept of a “world government” in high regard and often works to achieve these ends, but it should not be confused with being the end it seeks.</p>
<p align="justify">
The economic crisis is perhaps the greatest “opportunity” ever given to the TCC in re-shaping the world order according to their designs, ideals and goals. Through destruction, comes creation; and for these high-placed individuals within the TCC, destruction is itself a form of creation.</p>
<p align="justify">
In terms of reshaping labour and class structures, the economic crisis provides the ground on which a new global class structure will be built. A major problem for the Transnational Capitalist Class and the formation of a Transnational State, or world government, is the lack of continuity in class structures and labour markets throughout the world. A transnational ruling class, or “Superclass” as David Rothkopf referred to it in his book of the same name (and is, himself, a member of the Superclass), has emerged. It has no borders, yet has built a general continuity and consensus of goals among its members, albeit there are differences and conflicts within the class, but they are based upon the means of achieving the stated ends, rather than on the ends itself. There is not dissent within the ruling class on the aims of achieving a world governing body; the dissent is in how to achieve this, and in terms of what kind of structure, theoretical and philosophical leanings, and political orientation such a government would have.</p>
<p align="justify">
To achieve these ends, however, all classes must be transnationalized, not simply the ruling class. The ruling class is the first class to be transnationalized, because transnationalization was the goal of the ruling classes based in the powerful Western European nations, (and later in the United States), that started the process of transnationalization or internationalization. Now that there is an established “Superclass” of a transnational composition, the other classes must follow suit. The middle class is targeted for elimination in this sense, because most of the world has no middle class, and to fully integrate and internationalize a middle class, this would require industrialization and development in places such as Africa, and certain places in Asia and Latin America, and would represent a massive threat to the Superclass, as it would be a valve through which much of their wealth and power would escape them. Their goal is not to lose their wealth and power to a transnational middle class, but rather to extinguish the notion of a middle class, and transnationalize a lower, uneducated, labour oriented class, through which they will secure ultimate wealth and power.</p>
<p align="justify">
The economic crisis serves these ends, as whatever remaining wealth the middle class holds is in the process of being eliminated, and as the crisis progresses, or rather, regresses, and accelerates, the middle classes of the world will suffer, while a great percentage of lower classes of the world, poverty-stricken even prior to the crisis, will suffer the greatest, most probably leading to a massive reduction in population levels, particularly in the “developed” or “Third World” states.</p>
<p align="justify">
Many would take issue with such a thesis as being an objective of the Transnational Capitalist Class, as capitalism needs a large population, specifically a middle class population, in order to have a market of consumers for their products. Though this is true with how we presently understand the capitalist system and structure, we must also take note that capitalism, itself, is always changing and redefining itself. Through a social constructivist perspective, which I would argue, is very apt in this analysis, such a notion is not inconceivable, as if the capitalist class were to redefine capitalism itself, capitalism itself would change.</p>
<p align="justify">
It must be addressed that there would be a great many individuals within the TCC or Superclass (Rothkopf estimates the number at 6,000 individuals within the ruling class), who would take issue with eliminating their base for profit making, however, as a total restructuring of the capitalist system and global political economy as a whole is undertaken, the TCC itself is not immune to such drastic and rapid changes itself. In fact, it would be unimaginable to think that it would remain as it currently is.</p>
<p align="justify">
Rothkopf explains that with 6,000 members of the Superclass, that equals roughly one member of the superclass for every 1 million people in the world. As the composition, class structures, and numbers of the world population drastically alter over the next years and decades, so too will the superclass itself. It too, will be subject to a “cleansing” so to speak, in which the big players will collapse and consolidate many of the smaller players.</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify"><strong>The Monetary Structure of a Global Government</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify"><em>A Global Currency</em></p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">Following the April 2009 G20 Summit, leaders issued a communiqué which set the groundwork for the creation of a global currency to replace the US dollar as the world reserve currency. The communiqué stated that, “We have agreed to support a general SDR allocation which will inject $250bn (£170bn) into the world economy and increase global liquidity.” SDRs, or Special Drawing Rights, are “a synthetic paper currency issued by the International Monetary Fund.” As the Telegraph reported, “the G20 leaders have activated the IMF&#8217;s power to create money and begin global &#8220;quantitative easing&#8221;. In doing so, they are putting a de facto world currency into play. It is outside the control of any sovereign body. Conspiracy theorists will love it.”[39]</p>
<p align="justify">
In 1988, the Economist featured an article called “Get Ready for the Phoenix,” which said, “THIRTY years from now, Americans, Japanese, Europeans, and people in many other rich countries and some relatively poor ones will probably be paying for their shopping with the same currency. Prices will be quoted not in dollars, yen or D-marks but in, let&#8217;s say, the phoenix. The phoenix will be favoured by companies and shoppers because it will be more convenient than today&#8217;s national currencies, which by then will seem a quaint cause of much disruption to economic life in the late twentieth century.” The article, written in the wake of the 1987 stock market crash, stated that, “<em><strong>Several more big exchange-rate upsets, a few more stockmarket crashes and probably a slump or two will be needed before politicians are willing to face squarely up to that choice</strong></em>. This points to a muddled sequence of emergency followed by patch-up followed by emergency, stretching out far beyond 2018-except for two things. As time passes, the damage caused by currency instability is gradually going to mount; and the very trends that will make it mount are making the utopia of monetary union feasible.”[emphasis added][40]</p>
<p align="justify">
Paul Volcker, former Governor of the Federal Reserve System, said in 2000, that, “If we are to have a truly global economy, a single world currency makes sense,” and a member of the Executive Board of the European Central Bank reaffirmed Volcker’s comment, stating that, “we might one day have a single world currency. Maybe European integration, in the same way as any other regional integration, could be seen as a step towards the ideal situation of a fully integrated world. If and when this world will see the light of day is impossible to say. However, what I can say is that this vision seems as impossible now to most of us as a European monetary union seemed 50 years ago, when the process of European integration started.”[41]</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify"><em>A Central Bank of the World</em></p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">Jeffrey Garten has written several articles calling for the creation of a global central bank, or a “global fed.” Garten was former Dean of the Yale School of Management, former Undersecretary of Commerce for International Trade in the Clinton administration, previously served on the White House Council on International Economic Policy under the Nixon administration and on the policy planning staffs of Secretaries of State Henry Kissinger and Cyrus Vance of the Ford and Carter administrations, former Managing Director at Lehman Brothers, and is a member of the Council on Foreign Relations.</p>
<p align="justify">
In 1998, he wrote an article for the New York Times stating that the world “needs a global central bank,” and that, “An independent central bank with responsibility for maintaining global financial stability is the only way out. No one else can do what is needed: inject more money into the system to spur growth, reduce the sky-high debts of emerging markets, and oversee the operations of shaky financial institutions. A global central bank could provide more money to the world economy when it is rapidly losing steam.”[42]</p>
<p align="justify">
Following the outbreak of the current financial crisis, Garten wrote an article for the Financial Times in which he called for the “establishment of a Global Monetary Authority to oversee markets that have become borderless.”[43] In October of 2008, he wrote an article for Newsweek stating that, “leaders should begin laying the groundwork for establishing a global central bank.” He explained that, “There was a time when the U.S. Federal Reserve played this role [as governing financial authority of the world], as the prime financial institution of the world&#8217;s most powerful economy, overseeing the one global currency. But with the growth of capital markets, the rise of currencies like the euro and the emergence of powerful players such as China, the shift of wealth to Asia and the Persian Gulf and, of course, the deep-seated problems in the American economy itself, the Fed no longer has the capability to lead single-handedly.”[44]</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify"><strong>Regionalism</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">Building upon the model of the European Union, the world is being divided into large continental regional blocs, with regional monetary systems and governments. This will make up the managed blocs of a global government, and mark a significant process in the “hard road to world order,” as Richard N. Gardner called it, in which national sovereignty is eroded piece by piece. Regionalism marks the current phase of the move to the formation of a global government. Friedrich List critiqued liberal cosmopolitanism, stating that economic integration had never preceded political integration, however the elites have and are successfully challenging this notion. In the New World Order, economic integration is preceding political integration into a world governance structure.</p>
<p align="justify">
The European Union began as a series of free trade agreements, became a monetary union, and is in the process of being formed into a single continental superstate. North American integration began with a series of free trade agreements, defense and security agreements, and is in the process of moving towards monetary and bureaucratic integration into a North American Community. A Union and North American superstate are not far in the distance. A North American currency is openly discussed and proposed by leading think tanks, billionaire investors, as well as the Governor of the Bank of Canada. The likely name of such a currency is the Amero.[45]</p>
<p align="justify">
Meanwhile, globally, markets are heavily integrating. In 2007, it was reported that the European Union and the United States were beginning the process of transatlantic economic integration.[46] In 2008, it was announced that, “Canadian and European officials say they plan to begin negotiating a massive agreement to integrate Canada’s economy with the 27 nations of the European Union,” under “deep economic integration negotiations,” and “The proposed pact would far exceed the scope of older agreements such as NAFTA.”[47] This, essentially, is a means of integrating with the North American Community before the Community is officially formed; an act of pre-emptive integration.</p>
<p align="justify">
In 2007, the Council on Foreign Relations journal, Foreign Affairs, ran an article titled, “The End of National Currency.” Discussing the volatility of national currencies, the article stated that, “The right course is not to return to a mythical past of monetary sovereignty, with governments controlling local interest and exchange rates in blissful ignorance of the rest of the world. Governments must let go of the fatal notion that nationhood requires them to make and control the money used in their territory. National currencies and global markets simply do not mix; together they make a deadly brew of currency crises and geopolitical tension and create ready pretexts for damaging protectionism. In order to globalize safely, countries should abandon monetary nationalism and abolish unwanted currencies, the source of much of today&#8217;s instability.”</p>
<p align="justify">
Further, “Monetary nationalism is simply incompatible with globalization. It has always been, even if this has only become apparent since the 1970s, when all the world&#8217;s governments rendered their currencies intrinsically worthless.” The author states that, “Since economic development outside the process of globalization is no longer possible, countries should abandon monetary nationalism. Governments should replace national currencies with the dollar or the euro or, in the case of Asia, collaborate to produce a new multinational currency over a comparably large and economically diversified area.”[48]</p>
<p align="justify">
In 2008, the Union of South American Nations (UNASUR) was formed, “a regional body aimed at boosting economic and political integration in the region,”[49] which will “seek a common currency as part of the region&#8217;s integration efforts,” as well as a common central bank.[50]</p>
<p align="justify">
The Gulf Cooperation Council, a regional bloc of Arab Middle Eastern governments, is pursuing economic integration in the form of a common central bank and a common currency.[51] Similarly, there has been much discussion of an Asian Monetary Union and East Asian economic integration, specifically being touted as a solution to the prevention of future economic crises in East Asia like that which hit it in 1997.[52] Integration would be modeled upon the East Asian regional block of ASEAN (Association of Southeast Asian Nations), and in 2008, “ASEAN bank deputy governors and financial deputy ministers have met in Vietnam&#8217;s central Da Nang city, discussing issues on the financial and monetary integration and cooperation in the region.”[53] Further, Africa is being organized as a regional bloc under the African Union, and is also pursuing regional economic integration, and has even set the agenda for the creation of a continental African central bank and the formation of a single African currency.[54]</p>
<p align="justify">
In 2006, the Bank for International Settlements “suggested ditching many national currencies in favour of a small number of formal currency blocks based on the dollar, euro and renminbi or yen.”[55]</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify"><strong>Constructing the Political Structure of a Global Government</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">Strobe Talbott, Deputy Secretary of State in the Clinton administration from 1994 to 2001, is also a member of the Council on Foreign Relations and the Trilateral Commission and is currently President of the Brookings Institution, a prominent US think tank. In 1992, before becoming Deputy Secretary of State, he wrote an article for Time Magazine originally titled, “The Birth of the Global Nation,” which has now, in the Time Magazine archives, been renamed “America Abroad.” In the article, he states that within the next 100 years, “nationhood as we know it will be obsolete; all states will recognize a single, global authority. A phrase briefly fashionable in the mid-20th century &#8212; &#8220;citizen of the world&#8221; &#8212; will have assumed real meaning by the end of the 21st.”</p>
<p align="justify">
Interestingly, Talbott endorses the social constructivist perspective of nation-states and international order, stating that, “All countries are basically social arrangements, accommodations to changing circumstances. No matter how permanent and even sacred they may seem at any one time, in fact they are all artificial and temporary. Through the ages, there has been an overall trend toward larger units claiming sovereignty and, paradoxically, a gradual diminution of how much true sovereignty any one country actually has.”</p>
<p align="justify">
He explained that empires “were a powerful force for obliterating natural and demographic barriers and forging connections among far-flung parts of the world,” and following that, “Empire eventually yielded to the nation-state,” and that, “The main goal driving the process of political expansion and consolidation was conquest. The big absorbed the small, the strong the weak. National might made international right. Such a world was in a more or less constant state of war.” Talbott states that, “perhaps national sovereignty wasn&#8217;t such a great idea after all.”</p>
<p align="justify">
He continued, saying that, “it has taken the events in our own wondrous and terrible century to clinch the case for world government. With the advent of electricity, radio and air travel, the planet has become smaller than ever, its commercial life freer, its nations more interdependent and its conflicts bloodier.” Further, “Each world war inspired the creation of an international organization, the League of Nations in the 1920s and the United Nations in the &#8217;40s.” He explained, “The plot thickened with the heavy-breathing arrival on the scene of a new species of ideology &#8212; expansionist totalitarianism &#8212; as perpetrated by the Nazis and the Soviets. It threatened the very idea of democracy and divided the world. [Thus] The advocacy of any kind of world government became highly suspect.” However, as Talbott points out, Soviet expansion led the way for NATO expansion, and “The cold war also saw the European Community pioneer the kind of regional cohesion that may pave the way for globalism.”</p>
<p align="justify">
On top of that, “the free world formed multilateral financial institutions that depend on member states&#8217; willingness to give up a degree of sovereignty. The International Monetary Fund can virtually dictate fiscal policies, even including how much tax a government should levy on its citizens. The General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade regulates how much duty a nation can charge on imports. These organizations can be seen as the protoministries of trade, finance and development for a united world.” In addressing crises, Talbott wrote that, “Globalization has also contributed to the spread of terrorism, drug trafficking, AIDS and environmental degradation. But because those threats are more than any one nation can cope with on its own, they constitute an incentive for international cooperation.” Thus, out of crisis, comes opportunity; out of chaos comes order.</p>
<p align="justify">
In prescribing a solution, Talbott postulates that, “The best mechanism for democracy, whether at the level of the multinational state or that of the planet as a whole, is not an all-powerful Leviathan or centralized superstate, but a federation, a union of separate states that allocate certain powers to a central government while retaining many others for themselves.”[56]</p>
<p align="justify">
In a 1974 issue of Foreign Affairs, Richard N. Gardner wrote about the formation of the New World Order. Gardner, a former American ambassador to the United Nations, Italy and Spain, is also a member of the Trilateral Commission. In his article, The Hard Road to World Order, Gardner wrote that, “The quest for a world structure that secures peace, advances human rights and provides the conditions for economic progress—for what is loosely called world order—has never seemed more frustrating but at the same time strangely hopeful.”[57] He explained that, “few people retain much confidence in the more ambitious strategies for world order that bad wide backing a generation ago—‘world federalism,’ ‘charter review,’ and &#8220;world peace through world law’.” Further, “The same considerations suggest the doubtful utility of bolding a [UN] Charter review conference.”[58]</p>
<p align="justify">
Gardner wrote, “If instant world government, Charter review, and a greatly strengthened International Court do not provide the answers, what hope for progress is there? The answer will not satisfy those who seek simple solutions to complex problems, but it comes down essentially to this: The hope for the foreseeable future lies, not in building up a few ambitious central institutions of universal membership and general jurisdiction as was envisaged at the end of the last war, but rather in the much more decentralized, disorderly and pragmatic process of inventing or adapting institutions of limited jurisdiction and selected membership to deal with specific problems on a case-by-case basis, as the necessity for cooperation is perceived by the relevant nations.”</p>
<p align="justify">
He then stated, “In short, the &#8220;house of world order&#8221; will have to be built from the bottom up rather than from the top down. It will look like a great &#8220;booming, buzzing confusion,&#8221; to use William James&#8217; famous description of reality, but an end run around national sovereignty, eroding it piece by piece, will accomplish much more than the old-fashioned frontal assault.”[59]</p>
<p align="justify">
In the 2001 issue of Foreign Affairs, Richard Falk and Andrew Strauss wrote an article titled, “Toward Global Parliament.” They wrote that, “International governance is no longer limited to such traditional fare as defining international borders, protecting diplomats, and proscribing the use of force. Many issues of global policy that directly affect citizens are now being shaped by the international system. Workers can lose their jobs as a result of decisions made at the WTO or within regional trade regimes.”[60] In 2006, a UN report stated that, “the nation-state is an old-fashioned concept that has no role to play in a modern globalised world.”[61]</p>
<p align="justify">
Further, “As with citizen groups, elite business participation in the international system is becoming institutionalized. The best example is the World Economic Forum in Davos, Switzerland. In the 1980s, the WEF transformed itself from an organization devoted to humdrum management issues into a dynamic political forum. Once a year, a thousand of the world s most powerful business executives get together with another thousand of the world&#8217;s senior policymakers to participate in a week of roundtables and presentations. The WEF also provides ongoing arenas for discussion and recommendations on shaping global policy.” They continue in explaining that, “The Davos assembly and overlapping networks of corporate elites, such as the International Chamber of Commerce, have been successful in shaping compatible global policies. Their success has come in the expansion of international trade regimes, the modest regulation of capital markets, the dominance of neoliberal market philosophy, and the supportive collaboration of most governments, especially those of rich countries.”[62]</p>
<p align="justify">
In explaining the purpose of a global parliament, essentially to address the “democratic deficit” created by international organizations, the authors wrote that, “Some business leaders would certainly oppose a global parliament because it would broaden popular decision-making and likely press for transnational regulations. But others are coming to believe that the democratic deficit must be closed by some sort of stakeholder accommodation. After all, many members of the managerial class who were initially hostile to such reform came to realize that the New Deal—or its social-democratic equivalent in Europe—was necessary to save capitalism. Many business leaders today similarly agree that democratization is necessary to make globalization politically acceptable throughout the world.” Essentially, its purpose would be to give globalization “grassroots acceptance and legitimacy.”[63]</p>
<p align="justify">
David Rothkopf, a scholar at the Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, former Deputy Undersecretary of Commerce for International Trade in the Clinton administration, former managing director of Kissinger and Associates, and a member of the Council on Foreign Relations, recently wrote a book titled, Superclass: The Global Power Elite and the World They are Making. As a member of that “superclass,” his writing should provide a necessary insight into the construction of this “New World Order.” He states that, “In a world of global movements and threats that don’t present their passports at national borders, it is no longer possible for a nation-state acting alone to fulfill its portion of the social contract.” He wrote that, “progress will continue to be made,” however, it will be challenging, because it “undercuts many national and local power structures and cultural concepts that have foundations deep in the bedrock of human civilization, namely the notion of sovereignty.” He further wrote that, “Mechanisms of global governance are more achievable in today’s environment,” and that these mechanisms “are often creative with temporary solutions to urgent problems that cannot wait for the world to embrace a bigger and more controversial idea like real global government.”[64]</p>
<p align="justify">
Jacques Attali, founder and former President of the European Bank for Reconstruction and Development, and economic adviser to French President Nicholas Sarkozy, interviewed on EuroNews, said that, “either we’re heading towards a world government or we’re going to put national issues first.” The interviewer stated that the idea of world government will frighten many people, to which Attali responded, “Indeed, that’s only to be expected, because it seems like a fantasy. But there is already global authority in many areas,” and that, “even if it’s hard to think of a European government at the moment, which is there, but very weak, Europe can at least press on its experience to the world. If they’re not capable of creating an economic framework along side a political framework, then they’re never going to do it on a global scale. And then the world economic model will break up, and we’ll be back to the Great Depression.”[65]</p>
<p align="justify">
In December of 2008, the Financial Times published an article titled, “And Now for A World Government,” in which the author, former Bilderberg attendee, Gideon Rachman, wrote that, “for the first time in my life, I think the formation of some sort of world government is plausible,” and that, “A ‘world government’ would involve much more than co-operation between nations. It would be an entity with state-like characteristics, backed by a body of laws. The European Union has already set up a continental government for 27 countries, which could be a model. The EU has a supreme court, a currency, thousands of pages of law, a large civil service and the ability to deploy military force.”</p>
<p align="justify">
He stated that, “it is increasingly clear that the most difficult issues facing national governments are international in nature: there is global warming, a global financial crisis and a ‘global war on terror’.” He wrote that the European model could “go global” and that a world government “could be done,” as “The financial crisis and climate change are pushing national governments towards global solutions, even in countries such as China and the US that are traditionally fierce guardians of national sovereignty.” He quoted an adviser to French President Nicolas Sarkozy as saying, “Global governance is just a euphemism for global government,” and that the “core of the international financial crisis is that we have global financial markets and no global rule of law.” However, Rachman states that any push towards a global government “will be a painful, slow process.” He then states that a key problem in this push can be explained with an example from the EU, which “has suffered a series of humiliating defeats in referendums, when plans for ‘ever closer union’ have been referred to the voters. In general, the Union has progressed fastest when far-reaching deals have been agreed by technocrats and politicians – and then pushed through without direct reference to the voters. <em><strong>International governance tends to be effective, only when it is anti-democratic.</strong></em> [Emphasis added]”[66]</p>
<p align="justify">
In November of 2008, the United States National Intelligence Council (NIC), the US intelligence community’s “center for midterm and long-term strategic thinking,” released a report that it produced in collaboration with numerous think tanks, consulting firms, academic institutions and hundreds of other experts, among them are the Atlantic Council of the United States, the Wilson Center, RAND Corporation, the Brookings Institution, American Enterprise Institute, Texas A&#38;M University, the Council on Foreign Relations and Chatham House in London.[67]</p>
<p align="justify">
Outlining the global trends that the world will be going through up to the year 2025, the report states that the financial crisis “will require long-term efforts to establish a new international system.” It suggests that as the “China-model” for development becomes increasingly attractive, there may be a “decline in democratization” for emerging economies, authoritarian regimes, and “weak democracies frustrated by years of economic underperformance.” Further, the dollar will cease to be the global reserve currency, as there would likely be a “move away from the dollar.”[68]</p>
<p align="justify">
Further, the dollar will become “something of a first among equals in a basket of currencies by 2025. This could occur suddenly in the wake of a crisis, or gradually with global rebalancing.”[69] The report elaborates on the construction of a new international system, stating that, “By 2025, nation-states will no longer be the only – and often not the most important – actors on the world stage and the ‘international system’ will have morphed to accommodate the new reality. But the transformation will be incomplete and uneven.” Further, it would be “unlikely to see an overarching, comprehensive, unitary approach to global governance. Current trends suggest that global governance in 2025 will be a patchwork of overlapping, often ad hoc and fragmented efforts, with shifting coalitions of member nations, international organizations, social movements, NGOs, philanthropic foundations, and companies.” It also notes that, “Most of the pressing transnational problems – including climate change, regulation of globalized financial markets, migration, failing states, crime networks, etc. – are unlikely to be effectively resolved by the actions of individual nation-states. The need for effective global governance will increase faster than existing mechanisms can respond.”[70]</p>
<p align="justify">
The report discusses regionalism, and stated that, “Asian regionalism would have global implications, possibly sparking or reinforcing a trend toward three trade and financial clusters that could become quasi-blocs (North America, Europe, and East Asia).” These blocs “would have implications for the ability to achieve future global World Trade Organization agreements and regional clusters could compete in the setting of trans-regional product standards for IT, biotech, nanotech, intellectual property rights, and other ‘new economy’ products.”[71]</p>
<p align="justify">
In discussing democracy and democratization, the report stated that, “advances are likely to slow and globalization will subject many recently democratized countries to increasing social and economic pressures that could undermine liberal institutions.” This is largely because “the better economic performance of many authoritarian governments could sow doubts among some about democracy as the best form of government.  The surveys we consulted indicated that many East Asians put greater emphasis on good management, including increasing standards of livings, than democracy.” Further, “even in many well-established democracies, surveys show growing frustration with the current workings of democratic government and questioning among elites over the ability of democratic governments to take the bold actions necessary to deal rapidly and effectively with the growing number of transnational challenges.”[72] In other words, “well established democracies,” such as those in Western Europe and North America, will, through successive crises (climate, finance, war), erode and replace their democratic systems of government with totalitarian structures that are able to “take the bold actions necessary” to deal with “transnational challenges.”</p>
<p align="justify">
David Rockefeller wrote in his book, Memoirs, that, “For more than a century ideological extremists at either end of the political spectrum have seized upon well-publicized incidents such as my encounter with Castro to attack the Rockefeller family for the inordinate influence they claim we wield over American political and economic institutions. Some even believe we are part of a secret cabal working against the best interests of the United States, characterizing my family and me as &#8216;internationalists&#8217; and of conspiring with others around the world to build a more integrated global political and economic structure&#8211;one world, if you will. <em><strong>If that&#8217;s the charge, I stand guilty, and I am proud of it</strong></em>.” (Empahsis added) [73]</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify"><strong>The Global Economic Crisis in Context</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">The current global economic crisis has its roots not in the Bush administration, which is linear and diluted thinking at best, but in the systematic nature of the global capitalist system. Crisis is not separate from capital; crisis is capitalist expansion. In addressing the foundations of the economic crisis, neo-Marxist theory can help explain much of the actions and functions that led to the crisis.</p>
<p align="justify">
In 2006, Walden Bello wrote an article for Third World Quarterly, in which he explained that, “The crisis of globalisation and over-accumulation is one of the three central crises that are currently eroding US hegemony. The other two are the over-extension of US military power and the crisis of legitimacy of liberal democracy.” He explained that, “Monetary manipulation, via the high interest rate regime initiated by Federal Reserve Chief Paul Volcker in the late 1980s, while directed at fighting inflation, was also geared strategically at channeling global savings to the USA to fuel economic expansion. One key consequence of this momentous move was the Third World debt crisis of the early 1980s, which ended the boom of the economies of the South and led to their resubordination to the Northern capitalist centres.”[74]</p>
<p align="justify">
The economic foundations of the current crisis were laid in the “Clinton globalist project.” As Bello explained, “The administration embraced globalisation as its ‘Grand Strategy’—that is, its fundamental foreign policy posture towards the world.” Further, “The dominant position of the USA allowed the liberal faction of the US capitalist class to act as a leading edge of a transnational ruling elite in the process of formation—a transnational elite alliance that could act to promote the comprehensive interest of the international capitalist class.”[75]</p>
<p align="justify">
Bello then explained that, “the dominant dynamic of global capitalism during the Clinton period—one that was the source of its strength as well as its Achilles’ Heel—was not the movement of productive capital but the gyrations of finance capital.” The dominance of finance capital was “a result of the declining profitability of industry brought about by the crisis of overproduction. By 1997 profits in US industry had stopped growing. Financial speculation, or what one might conceptualise as the squeezing of value from already created value, became the most dynamic source of profitability.” This was termed “financialization,” and it had many components that composed its structure and led way for its dominance. Among these were the “Elimination of restrictions dating back to the 1930s that had created a Chinese Wall between investment banking and commercial banking in the USA opened up a new era of rapid consolidation in the US financial sector.”[76]</p>
<p align="justify">
Specifically, this is in reference to the repealing of the Glass-Steagall Act, put in place in 1933 in response to the actions that created the Great Depression, which undertook banking reforms, specifically those designed to limit speculation. In 1987, the Federal Reserve Board voted to ease regulations under Glass-Steagall, after hearing “proposals from Citicorp, J.P. Morgan and Bankers Trust advocating the loosening of Glass-Steagall restrictions to allow banks to handle several underwriting businesses, including commercial paper, municipal revenue bonds, and mortgage-backed securities.” And, “In August 1987, Alan Greenspan &#8212; formerly a director of J.P. Morgan and a proponent of banking deregulation – [became] chairman of the Federal Reserve Board.” In 1989, “the Fed Board approve[d] an application by J.P. Morgan, Chase Manhattan, Bankers Trust, and Citicorp to expand the Glass-Steagall loophole to include dealing in debt and equity securities in addition to municipal securities and commercial paper.” In 1990, “J.P. Morgan [became] the first bank to receive permission from the Federal Reserve to underwrite securities.”</p>
<p align="justify">
In 1998, the House of Representatives passed “legislation by a vote of 214 to 213 that allow[ed] for the merging of banks, securities firms, and insurance companies into huge financial conglomerates.” And in 1999, “After 12 attempts in 25 years, Congress finally repeal[ed] Glass-Steagall, rewarding financial companies for more than 20 years and $300 million worth of lobbying efforts.”[77]</p>
<p align="justify">
It was in “the late 1990s, with the stock market surging to unimaginable heights, large banks merging with and swallowing up smaller banks, and a huge increase in banks having transnational branches, Wall Street and its many friends in congress wanted to eliminate the regulations that had been intended to protect investors and stabilize the financial system. Hence the Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act of 1999 repealed key parts of Glass-Steagall and the Bank Holding Act and allowed commercial and investment banks to merge, to offer home mortgage loans, sell securities and stocks, and offer insurance.”[78]</p>
<p align="justify">
One of the architects of the repeal of Glass-Steagall was Clinton Treasury Secretary Robert Rubin. Rubin spent 26 years with Goldman Sachs before entering the Treasury. Robert Rubin worked closely with Alan Greenspan to oppose the regulation of derivatives, and was backed up by his Deputy Treasury Secretary, Lawrence Summers. Rubin, upon leaving the Treasury, went to work as an executive with Citigroup.[79] Robert Rubin is currently the Co-Chairman of the Council on Foreign Relations. Lawrence Summers was a former Chief Economist for the World Bank before being Deputy Treasury Secretary in the Clinton administration. He then became President of Harvard University, and is now Director of the White House National Economic Council in the Obama administration. The current Treasury Secretary, Timothy Geithner, was former President of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, and is also a Robert Rubin protégé.</p>
<p align="justify">
The Clinton years saw the rise of derivatives, which are financial instruments (or contracts), the prices of which are derived from one or more underlying assets, indexes, or other items. The value of a derivative changes as the value of the underlying asset changes. They are used to hedge risks but also as instruments of speculation. Derivatives, “which monetised and traded risk in the exchange of a whole range of commodities,” are a key factor that led to the economic crisis.</p>
<p align="justify">
Another cause of the crisis was “The creation of massive consumer credit to fuel consumption, with much of the source of this capital coming from foreign investors,” which “created a dangerous gap between the consumers’ debt and their income, opening up the possibility of consumer collapse or default that would carry away both consumers and their creditors.” Further, the stock market’s role in driving growth played a part in paving the way for a financial crisis. “Stock market activity drove, in particular, the so-called technology sector, creating a condition of ‘virtual capitalism’ whose dynamics were based on the expectation of future profitability rather than on current performance, which was the iron rule in the ‘real economy’.”[80]</p>
<p align="justify">
The Federal Reserve, under Alan Greenspan, initially created the dot-com bubble, providing liquidity for speculation into the stock market and “virtual capitalism,”[81] and when that dot-com bubble burst, as all bubbles do, Greenspan and the Fed created the housing bubble by cutting interests rates and offering more Adjustable Rate Mortgages (AMRs), with Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac encouraging banks to make the high-risk loans.[82]</p>
<p align="justify">
Speculation had proven itself to be a powerful weapon of finance capital. In the 1990s, this was first exemplified by “a speculative attack on the peso that had investors in panic cashing their pesos for dollars, leading to the devaluation and collapse of the Mexican economy in 1994,” and later in “East Asia in 1997. One hundred billion dollars in speculative capital flooded into the region between 1994 and 1997 as countries liberalised their capital accounts.” This speculative money flowed into real estate and the stock market, which resulted in over-investment, and “Smelling crisis in the air, hedge funds and other speculators targeted the Thai baht, Korean won and other currencies, triggering a massive financial panic that led to the drastic devaluation of these currencies and laid low Asia’s tiger economies. In a few short weeks in the summer of 1997 some $100 billion rushed out of the Asian economies, leading to a drastic reversal of the sizzling growth that had marked those economies in the preceding decade. In less than a month, some 21 million Indonesians and one million Thais found themselves thrust under the poverty line.”[83] This was known as the East Asian Financial Crisis.</p>
<p align="justify">
This crisis “helped precipitate the Russian financial crisis in 1998, as well as financial troubles in Brazil and Argentina that contributed to the spectacular unraveling of Argentina’s economy in 2001 and 2002, when the economy that had distinguished itself as the most faithful follower of the IMF’s prescriptions of trade and financial liberalisation found itself forced to declare a default on $100 billion of its $140 billion external debt.”[84]</p>
<p align="justify">
The current crisis is not over. The parallels between the current crisis and the Great Depression are frightening. This trend of building speculative bubbles is reminiscent of the 1920s stock market speculation-driven bubble; built by the Federal Reserve, which eased interest rates, provided liquidity to the banks and actively encouraged speculation. Bubbles that were created then burst.</p>
<p align="justify">
In 1932, Congressman Louis T. McFadden stated before the Congress that the Federal Reserve banks are not government agencies, but “are private credit monopolies which prey upon the people of the United States for the benefit of themselves and their foreign customers; foreign and domestic speculators and swindlers; and rich and predatory money lenders.”[85] Following the creation of the Fed in 1913, Congressman Charles A. Lindbergh said, “From now on, depressions will be scientifically created.” Indeed, he was right. The current crisis, likely leading to a Great Depression, is being used as the primary means through which a global government is being constructed.</p>
<p align="justify">
In 2007, UK Prime Minister Gordon Brown called for a new world order in reforming the UN, World Bank, IMF and G7.[86] When the bank Bear Stearns collapsed, due to its heavy participation in the mortgage securities market, the Federal Reserve purchased the bank for JP Morgan Chase, whose CEO sits on the board of the New York Federal Reserve Bank. Shortly after this action, a major financial firm released a report saying that banks face a “new world order” of “consolidation and acquisitions.”[87]</p>
<p align="justify">
In October of 2008, Gordon Brown said that we “must have a new Bretton Woods &#8211; building a new international financial architecture for the years ahead.” He continued in saying that, “we must now reform the international financial system around the agreed principles of transparency, integrity, responsibility, good housekeeping and co-operation across borders.” An article in the Telegraph reported that Gordon Brown would want “to see the IMF reformed to become a ‘global central bank’ closely monitoring the international economy and financial system.”[88] In an op-ed for the Washington Post, Gordon Brown wrote that the “new Bretton Woods” should build upon the concept of  “global governance.”[89] There were also calls for a “global economic policeman,” perhaps in the form of the Bank for International Settlements (BIS).[90] In November of 2008, it was reported that Baron David de Rothschild “shares most people’s view that there is a new world order. In his opinion, banks will deleverage and there will be a new form of global governance.”[91]</p>
<p align="justify">
Out of the ashes of the financial crisis, a new world order will emerge in constructing a global government.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Notes</strong></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[1]        Membership, Peter Sutherland. The Trilateral Commission: October 2007: </span><a href="http://www.trilateral.org/membship/bios/ps.htm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.trilateral.org/membship/bios/ps.htm</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[2]        Daily Mail, EU Constitution &#8211; the main points. The Daily Mail: June 19, 2004: </span><a href="http://www.dailymail.co.uk/news/article-307249/EU-Constitution--main-points.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.dailymail.co.uk/news/article-307249/EU-Constitution&#8211;main-points.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[3]        Time, 10 Questions For Vaclav Klaus. Time Magazine: March 13, 2005: </span><a href="http://www.time.com/time/magazine/article/0,9171,1037613,00.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.time.com/time/magazine/article/0,9171,1037613,00.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[4]        Valéry Giscard d&#8217;Estaing, Valéry Giscard d&#8217;Estaing: The EU Treaty is the same as the Constitution. The Independent: October 30, 2007: </span><a href="http://www.independent.co.uk/opinion/commentators/valeacutery-giscard-destaing-the-eu-treaty-is-the-same-as-the-constitution-398286.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.independent.co.uk/opinion/commentators/valeacutery-giscard-destaing-the-eu-treaty-is-the-same-as-the-constitution-398286.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[5]        Bruno Waterfield, Lisbon Treaty resurrects the defeated EU Constitution. The Telegraph: June 13, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/newstopics/eureferendum/2123045/EU-Treaty-Lisbon-Treaty-resurrected-defeated-EU-Constitution.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.telegraph.co.uk/news/newstopics/eureferendum/2123045/EU-Treaty-Lisbon-Treaty-resurrected-defeated-EU-Constitution.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[6]        Mel Hurtig, The Vanishing Country: Is It Too Late to Save Canada? (McClelland &#38; Stewart Ltd., 2002), page 365</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[7]        CFR, Brian Mulroney. About US, Leadership and Staff: International Advisory Board: </span><a href="http://www.cfr.org/bios/9841/brian_mulroney.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.cfr.org/bios/9841/brian_mulroney.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[8]        Robert O’Brien and Marc Williams, Global Political Economy: Evolution and Dynamics, 2nd ed. (Palgrave Macmillan: 2007), page 226</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[9]        David Rockefeller, What Private Enterprise Means to Latin America. Foreign Affairs: Vol. 44, No. 3 (April, 1966): page 411<br />
</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[10]      David Rockefeller, Memoirs. New York: Random House: 2002: Pages 436-437</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[11]      David Rockefeller, A hemisphere in the balance. The Wall Street Journal: October 1, 1993</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[12]      Alexander Dawson, First World Dreams: Mexico Since 1989. Fernwood Books, 2006: Pages 8-9</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[13]      Alexander Dawson, First World Dreams: Mexico Since 1989. Fernwood Books, 2006: Page 29</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[14]      Alexander Dawson, First World Dreams: Mexico Since 1989. Fernwood Books, 2006: Page 120</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[15]      Joseph Stiglitz, Globalization and its Discontents. W.W. Norton &#38; Co.: 2003: page 121</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[16]      Robert Pastor, A North American Community: A Modest Proposal to the Trilateral Commission. The Trilateral Commission: Toronto, Ontario: November 1-2, 2002: </span><a href="http://www.american.edu/internationalaffairs/cnas/PastorTrilateral.pdf"><span style="font-size:x-small;">www.american.edu/internationalaffairs/cnas/PastorTrilateral.pdf</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"> : page 4</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[17]      Robert Pastor, A North American Community: A Modest Proposal to the Trilateral Commission. The Trilateral Commission: Toronto, Ontario: November 1-2, 2002: </span><a href="http://www.american.edu/internationalaffairs/cnas/PastorTrilateral.pdf"><span style="font-size:x-small;">www.american.edu/internationalaffairs/cnas/PastorTrilateral.pdf</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"> : page 6</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[18]      News and Information, Paul Martin Urged to Take the Lead in Forging a New Vision for North American Cooperation. CCCE: November 5, 2003: </span><a href="http://www.ceocouncil.ca/en/view/?document_id=38&#38;type_id=1"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.ceocouncil.ca/en/view/?document_id=38&#38;type_id=1</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[19]      CCCE, North American Security and Prosperity. </span><a href="http://www.ceocouncil.ca/en/north/north.php"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.ceocouncil.ca/en/north/north.php</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[20]      News and Information, Trinational Call for a North American Economic and Security Community by 2010. CCCE: March 14, 2005: </span><a href="http://www.ceocouncil.ca/en/view/?document_id=395"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.ceocouncil.ca/en/view/?document_id=395</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[21]      Office of the Press Secretary, Joint Statement by President Bush, President Fox, and Prime Minister Martin. The White House: March 23, 2005: </span><a href="http://www.whitehouse.gov/news/releases/2005/03/20050323-2.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.whitehouse.gov/news/releases/2005/03/20050323-2.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[22]      CFR, Building a North American Community. Independent Task Force on the Future of North America: May 2005: </span><a href="http://www.cfr.org/publication/8102/building_a_north_american_community.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.cfr.org/publication/8102/building_a_north_american_community.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[23]      Issues Center, North American Competitiveness Council (NACC). US Chamber of Commerce: </span><a href="http://www.uschamber.com/issues/index/international/nacc.htm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.uschamber.com/issues/index/international/nacc.htm</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[24]      CoA, Board of Directors. The Council of the Americas: </span><a href="http://coa.counciloftheamericas.org/page.php?k=bod"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://coa.counciloftheamericas.org/page.php?k=bod</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[25]      Herbert Grubel, Fix the Loonie. The Financial Post: January 18, 2008:</span></p>
<p align="justify"><a href="http://www.nationalpost.com/opinion/story.html?id=245165"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.nationalpost.com/opinion/story.html?id=245165</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">Herbert Grubel, The Case for the Amero. The Fraser Institute: September 1, 1999:</span></p>
<p align="justify"><a href="http://www.fraserinstitute.org/Commerce.Web/publication_details.aspx?pubID=2512"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.fraserinstitute.org/Commerce.Web/publication_details.aspx?pubID=2512</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">Thomas Courchene and Richard Harris, From Fixing to Monetary Union: Options for  North American Currency Integration. C.D. Howe Institute, June 1999:</span></p>
<p align="justify"><a href="http://www.cdhowe.org/display.cfm?page=research-fiscal&#38;year=1999"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.cdhowe.org/display.cfm?page=research-fiscal&#38;year=1999</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">Consider a Continental Currency, Jarislowsky Says. The Globe and Mail: November  23, 2007:</span></p>
<p align="justify"><a href="http://www.theglobeandmail.com/servlet/story/LAC.20071123.RDOLLAR23/TPStory/?query=%22Steven%2BChase%22b"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.theglobeandmail.com/servlet/story/LAC.20071123.RDOLLAR23/TPStory/?query=%22Steven%2BChase%22b</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[26]      Barrie McKenna, Dodge Says Single Currency ‘Possible’. The Globe and Mail: May 21, 2007</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[27]      Anne-Marie Slaughter, The Real New World Order. Foreign Affairs: September/October, 1997: pages 183-184</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[28]      Anne-Marie Slaughter, The Real New World Order. Foreign Affairs: September/October, 1997: pages 184-185</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[29]      Mark Carney, Remarks by Mark Carney, Governor of the Bank of Canada to the International Economic Forum of the Americas / Conference of Montreal. The Bank of Canada: June 11, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.bankofcanada.ca/en/speeches/2009/sp110609.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.bankofcanada.ca/en/speeches/2009/sp110609.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[30]      Robert Jackson and Georg Sørensen, Introduction to International Relations: Theories and Approaches, Third Edition, OUP 2006: page 162<br />
</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[31]      William I. Robinson and Jerry Harris, Towards a Global Ruling Class? Globalization and the Transnational Capitalist Class. Science &#38; Society, Vol. 64, No. 1, Spring 2000: pages 11-12</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[32]      William I. Robinson and Jerry Harris, Towards a Global Ruling Class? Globalization and the Transnational Capitalist Class. Science &#38; Society, Vol. 64, No. 1, Spring 2000: page 12</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[33]      Robert Jackson and Georg Sørensen, Introduction to International Relations: Theories and Approaches, Third Edition, OUP 2006: page 258</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[34]      William I. Robinson and Jerry Harris, Towards a Global Ruling Class? Globalization and the Transnational Capitalist Class. Science &#38; Society, Vol. 64, No. 1, Spring 2000: page 27</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[35]      William I. Robinson and Jerry Harris, Towards a Global Ruling Class? Globalization and the Transnational Capitalist Class. Science &#38; Society, Vol. 64, No. 1, Spring 2000: page 28</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[36]      William I. Robinson and Jerry Harris, Towards a Global Ruling Class? Globalization and the Transnational Capitalist Class. Science &#38; Society, Vol. 64, No. 1, Spring 2000: page 29</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[37]      William I. Robinson and Jerry Harris, Towards a Global Ruling Class? Globalization and the Transnational Capitalist Class. Science &#38; Society, Vol. 64, No. 1, Spring 2000: page 30</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[38]      Glen McGregor, Secretive power brokers meeting coming to Ottawa? Ottawa Citizen: May 24, 2006: </span><a href="http://www.canada.com/topics/news/world/story.html?id=ff614eb8-02cc-41a3-a42d-30642def1421&#38;k=62840"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.canada.com/topics/news/world/story.html?id=ff614eb8-02cc-41a3-a42d-30642def1421&#38;k=62840</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[39]      Ambrose Evans-Pritchard, The G20 moves the world a step closer to a global currency. The Telegraph: April 3, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/comment/ambroseevans_pritchard/5096524/The-G20-moves-the-world-a-step-closer-to-a-global-currency.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/comment/ambroseevans_pritchard/5096524/The-G20-moves-the-world-a-step-closer-to-a-global-currency.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[40]      Get ready for the phoenix. The Economist: Vol. 306: January 9, 1988: pages 9-10</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[41]      ECB, The euro and the dollar &#8211; new imperatives for policy co-ordination. Speeches and Interviews: September 18, 2000: </span><a href="http://www.ecb.int/press/key/date/2000/html/sp000918.en.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.ecb.int/press/key/date/2000/html/sp000918.en.html</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[42]      Jeffrey E. Garten, Needed: A Fed for the World. The New York Times: September 23, 1998: </span><a href="http://www.nytimes.com/1998/09/23/opinion/needed-a-fed-for-the-world.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.nytimes.com/1998/09/23/opinion/needed-a-fed-for-the-world.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[43]      Jeffrey Garten, Global authority can fill financial vacuum. The Financial Times: September 25, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.ft.com/cms/s/0/7caf543e-8b13-11dd-b634-0000779fd18c.html?nclick_check=1"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.ft.com/cms/s/0/7caf543e-8b13-11dd-b634-0000779fd18c.html?nclick_check=1</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[44]      Jeffrey Garten, We Need a Bank Of the World. Newsweek: October 25, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.newsweek.com/id/165772"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.newsweek.com/id/165772</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[45]      Andrew Gavin Marshall, North-American Monetary Integration: Here Comes the Amero. Global Research: January 20, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=7854"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=7854</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[46]      Commission Européenne, EU and US to sign up to transatlantic economic integration plan at Washington Summit on 30 April. UN: April 27, 2007: </span><a href="http://www.eu-un.europa.eu/articles/fr/article_6987_fr.htm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.eu-un.europa.eu/articles/fr/article_6987_fr.htm</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[47]      Andrew Coyne, The crossroads of international trade. Macleans: September 18, 2008: </span><a href="http://www2.macleans.ca/tag/council-of-canadians/"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www2.macleans.ca/tag/council-of-canadians/</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[48]      Benn Steil, The End of National Currency. Foreign Affairs: Vol. 86, Issue 3, May/June 2007: pages 83-96</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[49]      BBC, South America nations found union. BBC News: May 23, 2008: </span><a href="http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/americas/7417896.stm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/americas/7417896.stm</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[50]      CNews, South American nations to seek common currency. China View: May 26, 2008: </span><a href="http://news.xinhuanet.com/english/2008-05/27/content_8260847.htm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://news.xinhuanet.com/english/2008-05/27/content_8260847.htm</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[51]      AME Info, GCC: Full steam ahead to monetary union. September 19, 2005: </span><a href="http://www.ameinfo.com/67925.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.ameinfo.com/67925.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">John Irish, GCC Agrees on Monetary Union but Signals Delay in Common Currency. Reuters: June 10, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.arabnews.com/?page=6&#38;section=0&#38;article=110727&#38;d=10&#38;m=6&#38;y=2008"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.arabnews.com/?page=6&#38;section=0&#38;article=110727&#38;d=10&#38;m=6&#38;y=2008</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">Forbes, TIMELINE-Gulf single currency deadline delayed beyond 2010. Forbes: March 23, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.forbes.com/feeds/afx/2009/03/24/afx6204462.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.forbes.com/feeds/afx/2009/03/24/afx6204462.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">Agencies, &#8216;GCC need not rush to form single currency&#8217;. Business 24/7: March 26, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.business24-7.ae/articles/2009/3/pages/25032009/03262009_4e19de908b174f04bfb3c37aec2f17b3.aspx"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.business24-7.ae/articles/2009/3/pages/25032009/03262009_4e19de908b174f04bfb3c37aec2f17b3.aspx</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[52]      Barry Eichengreen, International Monetary Arrangements: Is There a Monetary Union in Asia&#8217;s Future? The Brookings Institution: Spring 1997: </span><a href="http://www.brookings.edu/articles/1997/spring_globaleconomics_eichengreen.aspx"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.brookings.edu/articles/1997/spring_globaleconomics_eichengreen.aspx</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">atimes.com, After European now Asian Monetary Union? Asia Times Online: September 8, 2001: </span><a href="http://www.atimes.com/editor/CI08Ba01.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.atimes.com/editor/CI08Ba01.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">ASEAN, China, Japan, SKorea, ASEAN Makes Moves for Asian Monetary Fund. Association of Southeast Asian Nations: May 6, 2005: </span><a href="http://www.aseansec.org/afp/115.htm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.aseansec.org/afp/115.htm</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">Reuven Glick, Does Europe&#8217;s Path to Monetary Union Provide Lessons for East Asia? Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco: August 12, 2005: </span><a href="http://www.frbsf.org/publications/economics/letter/2005/el2005-19.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.frbsf.org/publications/economics/letter/2005/el2005-19.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">AFP, Asian Monetary Fund may be needed to deal with future shocks. Channel News Asia: July 2, 2007: </span><a href="http://www.channelnewsasia.com/stories/afp_world_business/view/285700/1/.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.channelnewsasia.com/stories/afp_world_business/view/285700/1/.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">AFX News Limited, East Asia monetary union &#8216;feasible&#8217; but political will lacking – ADB. Forbes: September 19, 2007: </span><a href="http://www.forbes.com/feeds/afx/2007/09/19/afx4133743.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.forbes.com/feeds/afx/2007/09/19/afx4133743.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[53]      Lin Li, ASEAN discusses financial, monetary integration. China View: April 2, 2008: </span><a href="http://news.xinhuanet.com/english/2008-04/02/content_7906391.htm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://news.xinhuanet.com/english/2008-04/02/content_7906391.htm</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[54]      Paul De Grauwe, Economics of Monetary Union. Oxford University Press, 2007: pages 109-110</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">Heather Milkiewicz and Paul R. Masson, Africa&#8217;s Economic Morass—Will a Common Currency Help? The Brookings Institution: July 2003: </span><a href="http://www.brookings.edu/papers/2003/07africa_masson.aspx"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.brookings.edu/papers/2003/07africa_masson.aspx</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">John Gahamanyi, Rwanda: African Central Bank Governors Discuss AU Financial Institutions. The New Times: August 23, 2008: </span><a href="http://allafrica.com/stories/200808230124.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://allafrica.com/stories/200808230124.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">Eric Ombok, African Union, Nigeria Plan Accord on Central Bank. Bloomberg: March 2, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.bloomberg.com/apps/news?pid=20601116&#38;sid=afoY1vOnEMLA&#38;refer=africa"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.bloomberg.com/apps/news?pid=20601116&#38;sid=afoY1vOnEMLA&#38;refer=africa</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">Ministry of Foreign Affairs, AFRICA IN THE QUEST FOR A COMMON CURRENCY. Republic of Kenya: March 2009: </span><a href="http://www.mfa.go.ke/mfacms/index.php?option=com_content&#38;task=view&#38;id=346&#38;Itemid=62"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.mfa.go.ke/mfacms/index.php?option=com_content&#38;task=view&#38;id=346&#38;Itemid=62</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[55]      Edmund Conway, UK policy blamed for soaring debt levels. The Telegraph: February 20, 2006: </span><a href="http://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/2932605/UK-policy-blamed-for-soaring-debt-levels.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/2932605/UK-policy-blamed-for-soaring-debt-levels.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[56]      Strobe Talbott, America Abroad. Time Magazine: July 20, 1992: </span><a href="http://www.time.com/time/magazine/article/0,9171,976015,00.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.time.com/time/magazine/article/0,9171,976015,00.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[57]      Richard N. Gardner, The Hard Road to World Order. Foreign Affairs: April, 1974: page 556</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[58]      Richard N. Gardner, The Hard Road to World Order. Foreign Affairs: April, 1974: page 557</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[59]      Richard N. Gardner, The Hard Road to World Order. Foreign Affairs: April, 1974: page 558</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[60]      Richard Falk and Andrew Strauss, Toward Global Parliament. Foreign Affairs: January/February, 2001: page 213<br />
</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[61]      Philip Thornton, UN unveils plan to release untapped wealth of&#8230;$7 trillion (and solve the world&#8217;s problems at a stroke). The Independent: January 30, 2006: </span><a href="http://www.independent.co.uk/news/world/politics/un-unveils-plan-to-release-untapped-wealth-of7-trillion-and-solve-the-worlds-problems-at-a-stroke-525173.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.independent.co.uk/news/world/politics/un-unveils-plan-to-release-untapped-wealth-of7-trillion-and-solve-the-worlds-problems-at-a-stroke-525173.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[62]      Richard Falk and Andrew Strauss, Toward Global Parliament. Foreign Affairs: January/February, 2001: page 215</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[63]      Richard Falk and Andrew Strauss, Toward Global Parliament. Foreign Affairs: January/February, 2001: page 218<br />
</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[64]      David Rothkopf, Superclass: The Global Power Elite and the World They are Making. (Toronto: Penguin Books, 2008), pages 315-316</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[65]      EuroNews, European Elections. Jacques Attali: the euronews interview: April 6, 2009: </span><a href="http://www.euronews.net/2009/06/04/jacques-attali-the-euronews-interview/"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.euronews.net/2009/06/04/jacques-attali-the-euronews-interview/</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[66]      Gideon Rachman, And now for a world government. The Financial Times: December 8, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.ft.com/cms/s/0/7a03e5b6-c541-11dd-b516-000077b07658.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.ft.com/cms/s/0/7a03e5b6-c541-11dd-b516-000077b07658.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[67]      NIC, Global Trends 2025: A Transformed World. The National Intelligence Council’s 2025 Project: November, 2008: Acknowledgements: </span><a href="http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[68]      NIC, Global Trends 2025: A Transformed World. The National Intelligence Council’s 2025 Project: November, 2008: pages 11-12:  </span><a href="http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[69]      NIC, Global Trends 2025: A Transformed World. The National Intelligence Council’s 2025 Project: November, 2008: pages 94:  </span><a href="http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[70]      NIC, Global Trends 2025: A Transformed World. The National Intelligence Council’s 2025 Project: November, 2008: pages 81:  </span><a href="http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[71]      NIC, Global Trends 2025: A Transformed World. The National Intelligence Council’s 2025 Project: November, 2008: pages 83:  </span><a href="http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[72]      NIC, Global Trends 2025: A Transformed World. The National Intelligence Council’s 2025 Project: November, 2008: pages 87:  </span><a href="http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.dni.gov/nic/NIC_2025_project.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[73]      David Rockefeller, Memoirs. Random House, New York, 2002: page 405</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[74]      Walden Bello, The Capitalist Conjuncture: Over-accumulation, Financial Crises, and the retreat from globalization. Third World Quarterly: Vol. 27, No. 8: 2006: pages 1346-1348</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[75]      Walden Bello, The Capitalist Conjuncture: Over-accumulation, Financial Crises, and the retreat from globalization. Third World Quarterly: Vol. 27, No. 8: 2006: pages 1348-1349</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[76]      Walden Bello, The Capitalist Conjuncture: Over-accumulation, Financial Crises, and the retreat from globalization. Third World Quarterly: Vol. 27, No. 8: 2006: page 1350</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[77]      PBS, The Long Demise of Glass-Steagall. Frontline: </span><a href="http://www.pbs.org/wgbh/pages/frontline/shows/wallstreet/weill/demise.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.pbs.org/wgbh/pages/frontline/shows/wallstreet/weill/demise.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[78]      Robert Buzzanco, Bring Back Glass-Steagall? History News Network: October 21, 2008: </span><a href="http://hnn.us/articles/55548.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://hnn.us/articles/55548.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[79]      PETER S. GOODMAN, Taking Hard New Look at a Greenspan Legacy. The New York Times: October 8, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.nytimes.com/2008/10/09/business/economy/09greenspan.html?_r=1"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.nytimes.com/2008/10/09/business/economy/09greenspan.html?_r=1</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[80]      Walden Bello, The Capitalist Conjuncture: Over-accumulation, Financial Crises, and the retreat from globalization. Third World Quarterly: Vol. 27, No. 8: 2006: page 1350</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[81]      Bill Virgin, et. al, The Insider: Dot-com boom just another of &#8216;Greenspan&#8217;s Bubbles&#8217;. Seattle PI: February 10, 2008: </span><a href="http://seattlepi.nwsource.com/business/350766_theinsider11.html?source=rss"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://seattlepi.nwsource.com/business/350766_theinsider11.html?source=rss</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[82]      Richard C. Cook, They Did It On Purpose: The Housing Bubble &#38; Its Crash were Engineered by the US Government, the Fed &#38; Wall Street. Global Research: October 23, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=10654"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&#38;aid=10654</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[83]      Walden Bello, The Capitalist Conjuncture: Over-accumulation, Financial Crises, and the retreat from globalization. Third World Quarterly: Vol. 27, No. 8: 2006: pages 1351-1352</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[84]      Walden Bello, The Capitalist Conjuncture: Over-accumulation, Financial Crises, and the retreat from globalization. Third World Quarterly: Vol. 27, No. 8: 2006: page 1352</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[85]      Louis T. McFadden, Congressional Record. June 10, 1932: pages 12595-12596 </span><a href="http://www.scribd.com/doc/16502353/Congressional-Record-June-10-1932-Louis-T-McFadden"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.scribd.com/doc/16502353/Congressional-Record-June-10-1932-Louis-T-McFadden</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[86]      Larry Elliott, Brown calls for overhaul of UN, World Bank and IMF. The Guardian: January 17, 2007: </span><a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/business/2007/jan/17/globalisation.internationalaidanddevelopment"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.guardian.co.uk/business/2007/jan/17/globalisation.internationalaidanddevelopment</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[87]      Andrea Ricci, Banks face &#8220;new world order,&#8221; consolidation: report. Reuters: March 17, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.reuters.com/article/innovationNews/idUSN1743541720080317"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.reuters.com/article/innovationNews/idUSN1743541720080317</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[88]      Robert Winnett, Financial Crisis: Gordon Brown calls for &#8216;new Bretton Woods&#8217;. The Telegraph: October 13, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/financetopics/financialcrisis/3189517/Financial-Crisis-Gordon-Brown-calls-for-new-Bretton-Woods.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/financetopics/financialcrisis/3189517/Financial-Crisis-Gordon-Brown-calls-for-new-Bretton-Woods.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[89]      Gordon Brown, Out of the Ashes. The Washington Post: October 17, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.washingtonpost.com/wp-dyn/content/article/2008/10/16/AR2008101603179.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.washingtonpost.com/wp-dyn/content/article/2008/10/16/AR2008101603179.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[90]      Gordon Rayner, Global financial crisis: does the world need a new banking &#8216;policeman&#8217;? The Telegraph: October 8, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/financetopics/financialcrisis/3155563/Global-financial-crisis-does-the-world-need-a-new-banking-policeman.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.telegraph.co.uk/finance/financetopics/financialcrisis/3155563/Global-financial-crisis-does-the-world-need-a-new-banking-policeman.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[91]      Rupert Wright, The first barons of banking. The National: November 6, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.thenational.ae/article/20081106/BUSINESS/167536298/1005"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.thenational.ae/article/20081106/BUSINESS/167536298/1005</span></a></p>
</div>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>
<item>
<title><![CDATA[Global Power and Global Government: Evolution and Revolution of the Central Banking System]]></title>
<link>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/10/global-power-and-global-government-evolution-and-revolution-of-the-central-banking-system/</link>
<pubDate>Sun, 10 Jul 2011 06:02:20 +0000</pubDate>
<dc:creator>Andrew Gavin Marshall</dc:creator>
<guid>http://andrewgavinmarshall.com/2011/07/10/global-power-and-global-government-evolution-and-revolution-of-the-central-banking-system/</guid>
<description><![CDATA[Global Power and Global Government: Evolution and Revolution of the Central Banking System Part 1 Gl]]></description>
<content:encoded><![CDATA[<table width="100%" border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="4">
<tbody>
<tr>
<td align="left" valign="top">
<div><strong>Global Power and Global Government: Evolution and Revolution of the Central Banking System</strong></div>
<div><strong>Part 1</strong></div>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" align="left" nowrap="nowrap"></td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" align="left" nowrap="nowrap">
<div><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/">Global Research</a>, July 21, 2009</div>
</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td colspan="2" align="left">
<div>
<p align="justify"><strong>Introduction</strong></p>
<p align="justify">Humanity is on the verge of entering into the most tumultuous period in our history. The prospects of a global depression, the likes of which have never been seen before; a truly global war, on a scale never before imagined; and societal collapse, for which nations of the world are building totalitarian police states to control populations; are increasing by the day. The major global trend forecasters are sounding the alarms on economic depression, war, a return to fascism and a total reorganization of society.   Through crisis, we are seeing the reorganization of the global political economy, and the transformation of capitalism into a totalitarian capitalist world government. Capitalism has never stayed the same through its history; it has always changed and will continue to do so. Its changes are explained and analyzed through political-economic theory, both mainstream theory and critical. The changes are undertaken over years, decades and centuries. The next phase of capitalism is one in which the world moves to a state-controlled economic system, much like China, of totalitarian capitalism.</p>
<p align="justify">
The global political economy itself is being reorganized into a world government body, consisting of one center of global power where the socio-political-economic power of the world is centralized in one institution. This is not a conspiracy theory; it is a reality. Nor is this a subject confined to the realm of “internet conspiracy theorists,” but in fact, the concept of world government originates and evolves throughout the history of capitalism and the global political economy. Mainstream and critical political-economic theory has addressed the concept of world government for centuries.</p>
<p align="justify">
The notion of a world government has such a long history, as the forces driving the world into such a structure intertwine with the history of the modern global political economy itself. The purpose of this report is to examine the history of the global political economy in taking steps toward forming a world government, in both theory and practice.</p>
<p align="justify">
How did we get here and where are we going?</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Why Study Theory?</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
Within the academic realm of Political Science, specifically the field of Global Political Economy (GPE), it is essential to understand the various theoretical perspectives of political economy so as to understand the actions and directions taken within the global political economy, and how capitalism has been and continues to be reorganized and altered. Theory provides the foundation upon which actors are understandable and actions are undertaken. As the political economist Robert Cox once stated, “Theory is always for someone and for some purpose.” It is important to understand and analyze the theoretical leanings of those making changes in the global political economy, in order to understand the changes being made, specifically the theoretical foundations of a world government. As well as this, it is important to examine critical theory in how it interprets both how and why a world government is being constructed.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Mercantilism</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
The history of political economic theory shows a continued fascination with the concept of constructing such a cosmopolitan or global community. The earliest forms of western Global Political Economy theorists lie in the early mercantilist period, and with the emergence of Liberal theory, following Adam Smith’s Wealth of Nations, mercantilist writers such as Friedrich List and Alexander Hamilton wrote critiques of the underlying Liberal concepts. List wrote in Political and Cosmopolitical Economy that Smith dispersed with the idea of a “national economy” in which nation’s determined economic conditions, and instead advocated replacing the “national” economy with a “cosmopolitical or world-wide economy.” List discusses the perspective of Jean-Baptiste Say (J.B. Say), a French liberal economist, saying that Say “openly demands that we should imagine the existence of a universal republic in order to comprehend the idea of general free trade.”[1]</p>
<p align="justify">
List states that, “If, as the prevailing school [of political-economic thought] requires, we assume a universal union or confederation of nations as the guarantee for an everlasting peace, the principle of international free trade seems to be perfectly justified,” however, this prevailing thought “assumes the existence of a universal union and a state of perpetual peace, and deduces therefrom the great benefits of free trade. In this manner it confounds effects with causes.” List elaborates in explaining that, “Among the provinces and states which are already politically united, there exists a state of perpetual peace; from this political union originates their commercial union.” Further, “All examples which history can show are those in which the political union has led the way, and the commercial union has followed. Not a single instance can be adduced in which the latter has taken the lead, and the former has grown up from it.”[2]</p>
<p align="justify">
It must be addressed that List is a mercantilist theorist. This means that he views the realm of the political and economic as an interacting realm in which they are intertwined and merged, however, the political realm remains above the economic, which is subject to the dictates of the political element. Liberal theorists believe that the political and economic realms are separate, and that they should be separated, so that political elements interact separately and without influence over the economic realm, which itself acts independently and separately of the political. This is the foundation for the ideas of the “free market” and the oft-quoted Adam Smith phrase, “the invisible hand of the free market,” which was only mentioned once in his entire volume of the Wealth of Nations. The ascension of liberal theorists marked a separation in the academic and theoretical studies, in which Political Economy was separated as a field, and saw the emergence of Political Science and Economics as separate studies.</p>
<p align="justify">
As political economist Robert Cox stated, “Theory is always for someone and for some purpose.” The purpose of this separation was to compartmentalize academic thought and separate the realms of politics and economy, so as to better control both – as the banking interests, which dominated both the realms of politics and economics since the late 1600s, continued to view the world in terms of political-economic theory. It was a strategy of “divide and conquer,” in which theory and academia was divided in order to conquer and control thought on both sides. This separation continues to this day, as even the field of Political Economy is placed underneath and subjective to Political Science, whereas it would make more sense that Political Science and Economics would be under the umbrella of Political Economy. Again, compartmentalize thought and then the control of discussion and debate becomes much easier.</p>
<p align="justify">
What List was arguing in his essay was a critique of the liberal concept of a cosmopolitical society, in which all nations are united in a world federation. Naturally, this was not the case in that era, it was an incorrect and dubious assumption on the part of liberal theorists. List explained that never before had economic or commercial interdependence and union led to a political union. List postulated that history showed that political union had to precede an economic union. However, List was writing in the first half of the 19th century, and history has changed the course of events and Political Economic theory. I would argue that the major banking interests, essentially made up of a dynasty of banking families (the Rothschilds, Warburgs, and later the Morgans and Rockefellers, among many others), decided to chart a different course, in which they would pursue a strategy in which economic union would be incrementally undertaken with the aim of constructing a political union to follow in its footsteps.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Central Banking</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
Thus, liberal economic theory came to the forefront, championed by the global hegemonic power of the day, Great Britain, which was firmly under the control of the banking dynasties. In 1694, the Bank of England was formed as a private central bank, which would issue the currency of the nation, lending it to the government and industry at interest, which would be paid back to the Bank of England’s shareholders, made up of these private banking dynasties.[3] The 16th to the 19th centuries was the period in which both the nation-state and capitalism emerged, soon followed by central banking in the late 1600s. This is when the origins of what was known as a “world economy” took place. Mercantilist economic theory dominated this period, in which the economy was secondary and submissive to the political structure of nations.</p>
<p align="justify">
Liberal theorists rose in opposition to this. Adam Smith wrote the Wealth of Nations in 1776, the same year that the American colonies revolted against the British imperial forces in the country, and ultimately gained independence from the British Empire. Among many of the primary motivating factors for the Revolution were the British military presence in the American colonies, acting above the law; a heavy imposition of colonial taxes, particularly on tea and other imports from foreign nations such as France, in an effort to promote the mercantilist assumptions that the colony should only survive and trade with the metropole (imperial hegemon) – which extracts the resources of the nation in trade for material goods to that nation, creating a dependence upon the colonial power. Arguably one of the primary motivations for the Revolution was the control of currency by a foreign imperial power, with the ability to control inflation and devaluation, essentially controlling the entire economic conditions of the colony from abroad. The Founding Fathers of the United States understood the necessity of controlling one’s own currency if one was to preserve sovereignty and independence.</p>
<p align="justify">
Following Britain’s humiliating defeat, which was aided by the French who supported the American revolt, European banking interests suffered a significant blow against their mercantilist expansion. Capitalism functions in that it constantly needs to expand and consume more. Central banking functions in a very similar, although much more dubious manner, in which it needs to expand its control over industry, nations and people through the expansion of debt, continually needing to bring more individuals, nations and industries under debt bondage. Debt is the source of all power and wealth for the central banking system – as they do not actually produce any tradable good, such as industry; nor do they provide any necessary service, such as government. Interest on debt is the source of income and authority for the central banking system, and thus, it needs to continually advance credit and expand debt. Thus, the loss of the American colonies as a source of expansionary credit and debt was a massive blow to their entrenched interests.</p>
<p align="justify">
The European banking interests quickly learned their lesson regarding not falling under the imperial hubris of believing people of a given region or nation could never defeat imperial might and armies. Revolution had become a great threat to the entrenched capitalist, and particularly, banking interests.</p>
<p align="justify">
Within a decade of the American Revolutionary War, which ended in 1783, another nation was going down the road of revolutionary zeal, in part inspired by the American example. However, this nation was no colony, but rather a mercantilist imperial power, and thus, its loss would be too great a loss to allow. In 1788, the French Monarchy was bankrupt, and as tensions grew between the increasingly desperate people of France and the aristocratic and particularly monarchic establishment, European bankers decided to pre-empt and co-opt the revolution. In 1788, prominent French bankers refused “to extend necessary short-term credit to the government,”[4] and they arranged to have shipments of grain and food to Paris “delayed” which triggered the hunger riots of the Parisians.[5] This sparked the Revolution, in which a new ruling class emerged, driven by violent oppression and political and actual terrorism. However, its violence grew, and with that, so too did discontentment with the Revolutionary Regime, and its stability and sustainability was in question. Thus, the bankers threw their weight behind a general in the Revolutionary Army named Napoleon, whom they entrusted to restore order. Napoleon then gave the bankers his support, and in 1800, created the Bank of France, the privately owned central bank of France, and gave the bankers authority over the Bank. The bankers owned its shares, and even Napoleon himself bought shares in the bank.[6]</p>
<p align="justify">
The bankers thus sought to control commerce and government and restore order to their newly acquired and privately owned and operated empire. However, Napoleon continued with his war policies beyond the patience of the bankers, which had a negative impact upon commercial activities,[7] and Napoleon himself was interfering in the operations of the Bank of France and even declared that the Bank “belongs more to the Emperor than to the shareholders.”[8] With that, the bankers again shifted their influence, and remained through regime change.[9]</p>
<p align="justify">
The Rothschilds ascended to the throne of international banking with the Battle of Waterloo. After having established banking houses in London, Paris, Frankfurt, Vienna and Naples, they profited off of all sides in the Napoleonic wars.[10] The British patriarch, Nathan Rothschild, was known for being the first with news in London, ahead of even the monarchy and the Parliament, and so everyone watched his moves on the stock market during the Battle of Waterloo. Following the battle, Nathan got the news that the British won over 24 hours before the government itself had news, and he quietly went into the London Stock Exchange and sold everything he had, implying to those watching that the British lost. A panic selling ensued, in which everyone sold stock, stock prices crumbled, and the market crashed. What resulted was that Rothschild then bought up the near-entire British stock market for pennies on the dollar, as when news arrived of the British victory at Waterloo, Rothschild’s newly acquired stocks soared in value, as did his fortune, and his rise as the pre-eminent economic figure in Britain.[11]</p>
<p align="justify">
As Goergetown University History professor, Carroll Quigley wrote in his monumental Tragedy and Hope, “The merchant bankers of London had already at hand in 1810-1850 the Stock Exchange, the Bank of England, and the London money market,” and that:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">In time they brought into their financial network the provincial banking centers, organized as commercial banks and savings banks, as well as insurance companies, to form all of these into a single financial system on an international scale which manipulated the quantity and flow of money so that they were able to influence, if not control, governments on one side and industries on the other.[12]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">
The period from 1815 to 1914 was known as the British Imperial Century, in which they adopted the liberal economic concepts of Adam Smith, and manipulated and distorted them for their own imperial ambitions. Mercantilism was still strong in practice, but rode under the banner of a liberal economic order, “free markets” and the “invisible hand.” The “invisible hand” was in fact, connected to a body made up of government and industry, molding the “free market” according to its designs, and the body was controlled by the brain, the central bank, the Bank of England. Markets were hardly “free” and the hand was visible to those who could see the rest of the body.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>The Liberal Revolution</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
It was during this British imperial century that other nations, such as Germany and the United States, were pursuing mercantilist economic practices in order to protect their own nations from the British free-trade imperialism. It was in this context that mercantilist theorists such as Alexander Hamilton in the United States, and Friedrich List in Germany were writing in criticism of liberal economic theory.</p>
<p align="justify">
Mercantilism was dominant in political-economic theory until the mid 19th century when the ‘liberal revolution’ manifested, largely in critical opposition to mercantilism. In liberal economic theory, the economic realm is autonomous and separate from the political realm, and functions according to its own logic. Within this theory, politics and economics, though separate spheres, are still connected, but remain independent of one another. Whereas mercantilists see the state as the primary actor in the global political economy, liberals see the individual (both producer and consumer) as being the major actor.</p>
<p align="justify">
Mercantilists see the international arena as inherently conflictual, justifying their policies of colonialism and empire building in an international arena in which if one state does not colonize foreign lands and extract resources, another state will, and thus, will deprive the state that does not create an empire of resources and economic growth. In this sense, mercantilists view the world in terms of a zero-sum gain, in which the progress of one state requires the regression of another. Liberal theorists argue that the international arena, made up of individuals, constitutes a positive-sum gain, in which all individuals act according to self-interest, and in doing so, benefit everyone, and foster cooperation and interdependence. In this sense, the international arena is not inherently conflictual, but rather a cooperative and interdependent sphere in which order and stability is upheld by international regimes – such as the British liberal imperial order and the gold standard it instituted.</p>
<p align="justify">
Where mercantilists view history as an amalgamation of conflicts and decisions made by states, liberal theorists view history as the sum of the unintended consequences of actions made by private individuals and activities. This implies almost an inherently natural progression of history – that it is not shaped by powerful forces in any designed or intended way, but is merely a natural response and reaction to the actions of individuals. This ties into the liberal concept of the natural state of a liberal economic order, bringing in the idea of the “invisible hand of the free market” which will determine economic activities.</p>
<p dir="ltr" align="justify">
Adam Smith’s notion of the “invisible hand” has been used to advance the idea that private individuals who seek personal wealth and gain through self-interest will unintentionally aid the interests of all of society. However, the “invisible hand” was mentioned merely once in Smith’s monumental Wealth of Nations, and was taken out of context. Smith was discussing how “Every individual naturally inclines to employ his capital in the manner in which it is likely to afford the greatest support to domestic industry, and to give revenue and employment to the greatest number of people of his own country.” In addition to employing “his capital in the support of domestic industry,” the private individual would “direct that industry that its produce may be of the greatest value.” Therefore, the individual “neither intends to promote the public interest, nor knows how much he is promoting it.” Smith explains that:</p>
<blockquote>
<p dir="ltr" align="justify">
&#8220;By preferring the support of domestic to that of foreign industry, he intends only his own security; and by directing that industry in such a manner as its produce may be of the greatest value, he intends only his own gain, and he is in this, as in many other cases, led by an invisible hand to promote an end which was no part of his intention.&#8221;[13]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">
Smith had conceptualized the “invisible hand” as the “natural inclination” of an individual to promote domestic interests, yet the phrase has been manipulated to promote the concept of a “self regulating market” in which the less regulation and restrictions there are, the better all society will be, because industry will naturally benefit all people. The manipulation of this phrase has taken the notion of the “invisible hand” away from the actions of individuals and transferred it to promoting non-regulation of economic activities. That is a far cry from Smith’s contention.</p>
<p align="justify">
Smith even stated in the Wealth of Nations that, “People of the same trade seldom meet together, even for merriment and diversion, but the conversation ends in a conspiracy against the public, or in some contrivance to raise prices. It is impossible indeed to prevent such meetings, by any law which either could be executed, or would be consistent with liberty and justice. But though the law cannot hinder people of the same trade from sometimes assembling together, it ought to do nothing to facilitate such assemblies; much less to render them necessary.”[14]</p>
<p align="justify">
In discussing regulation regarding wages for workers and resolving equity issues between the employers, or “masters” and the labour class of “workers,” Smith explained that, “Whenever the legislature attempts to regulate the differences between masters and their workmen, its counselors are always the masters. When the regulation, therefore, is in favour of the workmen, it is always just and equitable; but it is sometimes otherwise when in favour of the masters.” Further, “When masters combine together in order to reduce the wages of their workmen, they commonly enter into a private bond or agreement, not to give more than a certain wage under a certain penalty. Were the workmen to enter into a contrary combination of the same kind, not to accept a certain wage under a certain penalty [such as a union], the law would punish them very severely; and if it dealt impartially, it would treat the masters in the same manner.”[15]</p>
<p align="justify">
These quotes by Adam Smith tend to fly in the face of the common perceptions and usage of Smith’s ideas, proving that liberal economy in practice is a far cry from the intent of its original theorist.</p>
<p align="justify">
In the 1870s, the notion of a “liberal economic order” was challenged as the major European empires undertook an incredible extension of their imperial presence across the globe, itself a mercantilist practice – the idea of obtaining colonies in order to extract its resources, create a captive market for the imperial nations manufactured goods, and deprive its economic competitors of access to that market. Between 1878 and 1913, European empires extended their control over much of the world, specifically with the Scramble for Africa, in which all of Africa, save Ethiopia, was colonized by European powers.</p>
<p align="justify">
This “new imperialism,” as it was known, proliferated throughout Europe following the rapid expansion of banking throughout the continent, and the pre-eminence of international financiers over governments.[16] The growth of the continent-wide banking networks “fed the growth of colonial empires” as it stimulated a system in which “creating debt that then had to be serviced by the purchase of more infrastructure,” and expansion of territory.[17] This led European nations to undertake a massive imperial effort across much of the globe, to find and control foreign markets and expand their capital.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>The Emergence of Marxism</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
In the 19th century, the rise of critical IPE (International/Global Political Economy) theories emerged in opposition to the growing dominance of Liberal IPE. The most profound of these criticisms arose from Karl Marx. Marxism, as Marx’s critical theory came to be known, put an extensive focus on the relations of classes within society, as the class that owns the means of production is the central and most powerful class, subverting the other classes to a submissive position. Marxists also view capitalism as being inherently exploitative. Within this theory, the political and economic realms are not seen as separate spheres of action, but are seen as intertwined and internally related. Within this theory, the purpose of the state is not to serve the interests of the broader population that inhabits it, but to secure, maintain and advance the interests of the capitalist class. Marxist theorists also put emphasis on the nature of war and conflict as being intrinsically related to the expansionary nature of capitalism, which is one of the primary roles of states in advancing the interests of the capitalist ruling class.</p>
<p align="justify">
Marx defines what he perceives as capitalism: a system which is governed by capital, which is money that has been invested in order to generate more money; production, which is dominant within capitalist society, is designed for sale, not use – in that, it moves beyond subsistence and into what we refer to today as materialism and consumption; labour is commodified, thus people, through their labour, themselves become a tradable commodity; exchange occurs with money; ownership of the means of production is in the hands of the capitalist class; and competition between various capitalist forces is the logic of interaction.</p>
<p align="justify">
Marx places a large focus on the circuit of capital, in how money transforms into capital. Money (M), is invested in purchasing a Commodity (C), and then into Labour Power (LP) and the Mean of Production (MP), which make up the Production circuit (P), which produces a new Commodity (C1), which is then sold, creating expanding money (M1), or earned profits. Capital, thus, is money that is invested into production. Marx postulates that the inherent exploitative nature of capitalism is most apparent in the Production circuit, specifically with Labour Power.</p>
<p align="justify"><em>Diverging From Marx</em></p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">M &#8211;&#62; L &#8211;&#62; I &#8211;&#62; M1 &#8211;&#62; LID &#8211;&#62; DB</p>
<p align="justify">
<p align="justify">M = Money</p>
<p align="justify">L = Loan</p>
<p align="justify">I = Interest</p>
<p align="justify">M1 = New Money</p>
<p align="justify">LID = new money Loaned to debtor to pay Interest on Debt</p>
<p align="justify">DB = debtor falls into Debt Bondage; owned by creditor</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">
Through the Marxist perspective of exploitation, there is no labour to exploit within the Circuit of Debt, so where does exploitation come into play? Exploitation comes into the process in that the debt (or loan) issued, is designed to exploit whoever the debtor is, be it an individual, a nation, or a corporation. Within this paradigm, class structure, although playing a significant part of the process of overall exploitation and exercise of power within the capitalist system is not the only, or arguably, even primary target of control and oppression within capitalism, as we know it. The target is the individual, the nation, and industry to the submission of the predatory nature of the central banking system.</p>
<p align="justify">
The central banking system has, from its inception, acted in ways which monopolize industry (thus negating Adam Smith’s concept of a “free market” and “competition”); militarize nations (financing wars and conquest, imperialism); merging the interests of both the economic and political realms into a holistic ruling class (modeled upon the dual nature of a central bank itself – holding the authority and power of a government body, but representing the interests and submitting to the ownership of private individuals). Thus, the ruling class itself is a social construct which this tiny elite formed, hardly capable of the numbers to be termed a class, especially since class is most often defined in national terms, whereas this elite is international in nature.</p>
<p align="justify">
The central bank of a nation finances monopoly industry and imperial states, both of which are created out of debt bondage to the central bank. Both the commercial/industrial elites and political elites merge their interests – the state will pursue imperial policies that have the effect of benefiting industry, while industry will support the building of a strong, powerful state (and provide a cozy job for the political elite upon leaving the public sector). This makes up the ruling class of a nation, the capitalists, or owners of the means of production, merging with the political rulers of the nation. One does not represent or overpower the other, but rather, both serve the interests and are owned through interest, by a tiny international elite.</p>
<p align="justify">
One must ask: What would capitalism look like if it were not for the advent of the central banking system?</p>
<p align="justify"><em>Accumulation by Dispossession</em></p>
<p align="justify">
In discussing Marxist theory, I am not advocating a total support of its theoretical discussion and perspective. However, it is vital to address, as historically and presently, it has served as a very powerful source of criticism against the capitalist system and its importance cannot be underestimated. Having said that, it is also important to address in that it does, as a theory, identify many accurate and important aspects of how the capitalist system functions. For that reason, many of the critiques have been and are currently prescient and justified.</p>
<p align="justify">
In Marxist theory, the nature of accumulation plays a very important part, in that it holds a dual character. One is known as accumulation as expanded reproduction, which is concerned with commodity markets and production (the circuit of capital), where money is made through the labour process. The other nature of accumulation is accumulation by dispossession, which is usually framed in terms of relations between capitalist and non-capitalist modes of production. This is accumulation derived from dispossessing someone of something. The Atlantic slave trade was an example of accumulation by dispossession, as Africans were dispossessed of their lives and freedom. Colonialism is another example, where resources are extracted, dispossessing the nation of its own resources.</p>
<p align="justify">
Perhaps it would be helpful to expand upon Marx’s ideas of accumulation by dispossession in regards to the central banking system. Central banking, not falling into the circuit of capital, and thus, accumulation as expanded reproduction, better represents an example of accumulation by dispossession. Money is given in loans at interest, to which the debtor is never meant to fully repay, and is dispossessed of its freedom and wealth through interest payments and debt bondage. Debt is just another word for slavery, therefore, the central banking system itself, functions through a system of accumulation by dispossession.</p>
<p align="justify">
However, conventional understanding of accumulation by dispossession describes it as an interaction between capitalist and non-capitalist modes of production, where the capitalist mode will dispossess the non-capitalist mode of production. Central banking, however, is the pinnacle of the capitalist system, and ultimately, the primary source and avenue of its power, so it can hardly be said to be an interaction between capitalist and non-capitalist modes, as it is an interaction between central banks and ALL modes of production which need money – including the entirety of the capitalist system. Thus, industry/commerce, governments/nations, and individuals/people, are dispossessed of their freedom through debt bondage. This cannot simply be predicated in terms of class warfare or class-centric theory, but rather, an assault against all individuals, individuality, and freedom, in any and all forms. It is within this context that class structures are created, so as to play off one against the other – to compartmentalize people into classes, and thus, better control and manipulate the masses. It is a strategy of dividing and conquering people. Class, including the upper capitalist class, is constructed in an effort to conform thought within each class, and thus direct collective action of that class accordingly. The freethinking individual is the target in all cases. Individuality is to be removed from commerce, government, and society as a whole.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>The Communist Manifesto</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
In the Communist Manifesto, published in 1848, Marx proclaims in the opening subtitle that, “The history of all society hitherto is the history of class struggles.” However, if class itself is a construct of powerful individuals, albeit throughout human history, can it not be argued instead that the history of all society is the history of the struggle of the individual against collectivity and control? Class itself is a collective grouping designed to control a mass of people, whether it is upper class or lower class. Individuals are stifled within all classes, and thus, the history of class struggles itself, is a history of the struggle between the free thinking individual and the collective form of control.</p>
<p align="justify">
Within the Communist Manifesto, Marx (and Engels) outlined an initial program for an “advanced” nation to undertake in order to create a Communist system, with ten major points. (1) Abolition of property in land and application of all rents of land to public purposes; (2) A heavy progressive or graduated income tax; (3) Abolition of all right of inheritance; (4) Confiscation of the property of all emigrants and rebels; (5) Centralization of credit in the hands of the state, by means of a national bank with state capital and an exclusive monopoly; (6) Centralization of the means of communication and transport in the hands of the state; (7) Extension of factories and instruments of production owned by the state – the bringing into cultivation of waste lands, and the improvement of the soil generally in accordance with a common plan; (8) Equal liability of all to labour – Establishment of industrial armies, especially for agriculture; (9) Combination of agriculture with manufacturing industries – gradual abolition of the distinction between town and country by a more equable distribution of the population over the country; and (10) Free education for all children in public schools – Abolition of children’s factory labour in its present form [and] Combination of education with industrial production.[18]</p>
<p align="justify">
Of particular importance is number 5, in which a central bank is advocated. If nations have the ability to create and issue a currency through a Treasury department or even on a more regional or local level, why centralize and monopolize creation of a currency to a central bank? It should be noted that the recommendation was to have it centralized “in the hands of the state,” however, central banks are today, still widely perceived as being within the purview of governmental authority, while acting and functioning totally outside of it and above it. Imposing a tax on one’s income (2), also seems to promote the commodification of labour, in that instead of industry exploiting one’s labour and extracting a profit from it, that becomes the job of the state. All property would be owned by the state (1), and virtually the entire economy is subject to the control of the state. Even education, while free, is directed by the state. With the “Confiscation of the property of all emigrants and rebels,” what room is there for dissenting thought in such a society? Dissent would not be encouraged within the “free education” system. In fact, conformity would be enshrined. Is this not a form of “accumulation by dispossession” in which the individual is dispossessed of free thought and action and submitted to the will of and restricted thinking allowed by the state? Within this paradigm the state accumulates power and authority by dispossessing people of individuality in thought and expression.</p>
<p align="justify">
The Communist Manifesto ends with the declaration of, “Workers of all countries, Unite!” This, in and of itself, promotes class divisions within society, placing focus on the need for an international mobilization of the global working class to rise up against the capitalist class. Marx outlines that any successful workers’ revolution must be international.[19] Thus, this promotes the cosmopolitical notion of an international community, at least in initial terms of a transnational class system. Essentially, Marx argues that as capitalism expands, what we will later term “Globalizes,” so too must the working class of the world “globalize” and “internationalize.” In a sense, this makes Marx, himself, an early globalist theorist, in promoting the concept of an international class uprising against the capitalist class. Ultimately, would this not simply replace the tyranny of one class for the tyranny of another? Throw out the capitalists and bring in the communists! Substituting one form of oppression for another is hardly a change in the right direction. In both systems, the individual suffers and free thought is stifled.</p>
<p align="justify">
Though much Marxist criticism is extremely pointed in analyzing the functions and structure of the capitalist system, such theory itself, even though critical, must be critically examined.</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Retaking America</strong></p>
<p align="justify">
The history of the United States from its founding through the 19th century to the early 20th century, was marked by a continual political battle revolving around the creation of a central bank of the United States. Mercantilists such as Alexander Hamilton, who was the first Treasury Secretary, were in favour of such a bank, and his advice won over George Washington, much to the dismay of Thomas Jefferson, who was a strong opponent to central banking. However, “[Alexander] Hamilton, believing that government must ally itself with the richest elements of society to make itself strong, proposed to Congress a series of laws, which it enacted, expressing this philosophy,” and that, “A Bank of the United States was set up as a partnership between the government and certain banking interests,”[20] which lasted until the charter expired in 1811.</p>
<p align="justify">
Again, during the tenure of Andrew Jackson (1829-1837), the primary political struggle was with the entrenched financial interests both domestic and from abroad (namely Western Europe), on the issue of creating a central bank of the US. Andrew Jackson stood in firm opposition to such a bank, saying that, “the bank threatened the emerging order, hoarding too much economic power in too few hands,” and referred to it as “The Monster.”[21] Congress passed the bill allowing for the creation of a Second Bank of the United States, however, Andrew Jackson vetoed the bill, much to the dismay of the banking interests.</p>
<p align="justify">
It was in the later half of the 1800s that “European financiers were in favor of an American Civil War that would return the United States to its colonial status, they admitted privately that they were not necessarily interested in preserving slavery,” as it had become unprofitable.[22] The Civil War was not based upon the liberation of slaves, it was, as Howard Zinn described it, a clash “of elites,” with the northern elite wanting “economic expansion – free land, free labor, a free market, a high protective tariff for manufacturers, [and] a bank of the United States. [Whereas] The slave interests opposed all that.”[23] The Civil War, which lasted from 1861 until 1865, resulted in hundreds of thousands of deaths, during which, “Congress also set up a national bank, putting the government into partnership with the banking interests, guaranteeing their profits.”[24]</p>
<p align="justify">
As Lincoln himself stated:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">The money powers prey on the nation in times of peace and conspire against it in times of adversity. The banking powers are more despotic than monarchy, more insolent than autocracy, more selfish than bureaucracy. They denounce as public enemies all who question their methods or throw light upon their crimes.</p>
<p align="justify">I have two great enemies, the Southern Army in front of me, and the bankers in the rear. Of the two, the one at my rear is my greatest foe. As a most undesirable consequence of the war, corporations have been enthroned, and an era of corruption in high places will follow. The money power will endeavor to prolong its reign by working upon the prejudices of the people until the wealth is aggregated in the hands of a few, and the Republic is destroyed.[25]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">Throughout much of the 1800s and into the 1900s, the United States suffered several economic crises, one of the most significant of which was the Great Depression of 1873. As Howard Zinn explained:</p>
<blockquote>
<p align="justify">The crisis was built into a system which was chaotic in its nature, in which only the very rich were secure. It was a system of periodic crises – 1837, 1857, 1873 (and later: 1893, 1907, 1919, 1929) – that wiped out small businesses and brought cold, hunger, and death to working people while the fortunes of the Astors, Vanderbilts, Rockefellers, Morgans, kept growing through war and peace, crisis and recovery. During the 1873 crisis, Carnegie was capturing the steel market, Rockefeller was wiping out his competitors in oil.[26]</p>
</blockquote>
<p align="justify">
Massive industrial consolidation by a few oligarchic elites was the rule of the day, as J.P. Morgan expanded total control over railroad and banking interests, and John D. Rockefeller took control of the oil market, and expanded into banking. Zinn explained that, “The imperial leader of the new oligarchy was the House of Morgan. In its operations it was ably assisted by the First National Bank of New York (directed by George F. Baker) and the National City Bank of New York (presided over by James Stillman, agent of the Rockefeller interests). Among them, these three men and their financial associates occupied 341 directorships in 112 corporations. The total resources of these corporations in 1912 was $22,245,000,000, more than the assessed value of all property in the twenty-two states and territories west of the Mississippi River.”[27]</p>
<p align="justify">
These banking interests, particularly those of Morgan, were very much allied with European banking interests. On the European side, specifically in Britain, the elite were largely involved in the Scramble for Africa at this time. Infamous among them was Cecil Rhodes, who made his fortune in the diamond and gold mining in Africa, as “With financial support from Lord Rothschild and Alfred Beit, he was able to monopolize the diamond mines of South Africa as De Beers Consolidated Mines and to build up a great gold mining enterprise as Consolidated Gold Fields.”[28] Interestingly, “Rhodes could not have won his near-monopoly over South African diamond production without the assistance of his friends in the City of London: in particular, the Rothschild bank, at that time the biggest concentration of financial capital in the world.”[29] As historian Niall Ferguson explained, “It is usually assumed that Rhodes owned De Beers, but this was not the case. Nathaniel de Rothschild was a bigger shareholder than Rhodes himself; indeed, by 1899 the Rothschilds’ stake was twice that of Rhodes.”[30]</p>
<p align="justify">
Cecil Rhodes was also known for his radical views regarding America, particularly in that he would “talk with total seriousness of ‘the ultimate recovery of the United States of America as an integral part of the British Empire’.”[31] Rhodes saw himself not simply as a money maker, but primarily as an “empire builder.” As historian Carroll Quigley explained, in 1891, three British elites met with the intent to create a secret society. The three men were Cecil Rhodes, William T. Stead, a prominent journalist of the day, and Reginald Baliol Brett, a “friend and confidant of Queen Victoria, and later to be the most influential adviser of King Edward VII and King George V.” Within this secret society, “real power was to be exercised by the leader, and a ‘Junta of Three.’ The leader was to be Rhodes, and the Junta was to be Stead, Brett, and Alfred Milner.”[32]</p>
<p align="justify">
In 1901, Rhodes chose Milner as his successor within the society, of which the purpose was, “The extension of British rule throughout the world, the perfecting of a system of emigration from the United Kingdom and of colonization by British subjects of all lands wherein the means of livelihood are attainable by energy, labour, and enterprise . . . [with] the ultimate recovery of the United States of America as an integral part of a British Empire, the consolidation of the whole Empire, the inauguration of a system of Colonial Representation in the Imperial Parliament which may tend to weld together the disjointed members of the Empire, and finally the foundation of so great a power as to hereafter render wars impossible and promote the best interests of humanity.”[33] Essentially, it outlined a British-led cosmopolitical world order, one global system of governance under British hegemony. Among key players within this group were the Rothschilds and other banking interests.[34]</p>
<p align="justify">
In the early 20th century, European and American banking interests achieved what they had desired for over a century within America, the creation of a privately owned central bank. It was created through collaboration of American and European bankers, primarily the Morgans, Rockefellers, Kuhn, Loebs and Warburgs.[35] After the 1907 banking panic in the US, instigated by JP Morgan, pressure was placed upon the American political establishment to create a “stable” banking system. In 1910, a secret meeting of financiers was held on Jekyll Island, where they planned for the “creation of a National Reserve Association with fifteen major regions, controlled by a board of commercial bankers but empowered by the federal government to act like a central bank – creating money and lending reserves to private banks.”[36] President Woodrow Wilson followed the plan almost exactly as outlined by the Wall Street financiers, and added to it the creation of a Federal Reserve Board in Washington, which the President would appoint.[37] The Federal Reserve, or Fed, “raised its own revenue, drafted its own operating budget and submitted neither to Congress,” while “the seven governors shared power with the presidents of the twelve Reserve Banks, each serving the private banks in its region,” and “the commercial banks held stock shares in each of the twelve Federal Reserve Banks.”[38]</p>
<p align="justify">
The retaking of the United States by international banking interests was achieved with barely a whimper of opposition. Where the British Empire failed in taking the United States militarily, international bankers succeeded covertly through the banking system. The Federal Reserve also had the effect of cementing an alliance between New York and London bankers.[39]</p>
<p align="justify"><strong>Notes</strong></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[1]        George T. Crane, Abla Amawi, The Theoretical evolution of international political economy. Oxford University Press US, 1997: pages 48-49</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[2]        George T. Crane, Abla Amawi, The Theoretical evolution of international political economy. Oxford University Press US, 1997: pages 50-51</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[3]        John Kenneth Galbraith, Money: Whence it Came, Where it Went (Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company, 1975), 31</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[4]        Donald Kagan, et. al., The Western Heritage. Volume C: Since 1789: Ninth edition: (Pearson Prentice Hall: 2007), 596</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[5]        Curtis B. Dall, F.D.R. : My Exploited Father-in-Law. (Institute for Historical Review: 1982), 172</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[6]        Carroll Quigley, Tragedy and Hope: A History of the World in Our Time (New York: Macmillan Company, 1966), 515</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">Robert Elgie and Helen Thompson, ed., The Politics of Central Banks (New York: Routledge, 1998), 97-98</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[7]        Carroll Quigley, Tragedy and Hope: A History of the World in Our Time (New York: Macmillan Company, 1966), 516</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[8]        Robert Elgie and Helen Thompson, ed., The Politics of Central Banks (New York: Routledge, 1998), 98-99</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[9]        Carroll Quigley, Tragedy and Hope: A History of the World in Our Time (New York: Macmillan Company, 1966), 516</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[10]      Sylvia Nasar, Masters of the Universe. The New York Times: January 23, 2000: </span><a href="http://query.nytimes.com/gst/fullpage.html?res=9C04E3D6123AF930A15752C0A9669C8B63"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://query.nytimes.com/gst/fullpage.html?res=9C04E3D6123AF930A15752C0A9669C8B63</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">BBC News. The Family That Bankrolled Europe. BBC News: July 9, 1999</span></p>
<p align="justify"><a href="http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/389053.stm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/389053.stm</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[11]      New Scientist. Waterloo Windfall. New Scientist Magazine: Issue 2091, July 19, 1997</span></p>
<p align="justify"><a href="http://www.newscientist.com/article/mg15520913.300-waterloo-windfall.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.newscientist.com/article/mg15520913.300-waterloo-windfall.html</span></a><span style="font-size:x-small;"><br />
</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">BBC News. The Making of a Dynasty: The Rothschilds. BBC News: January 28, 1998</span></p>
<p align="justify"><a href="http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/50997.stm"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/uk_news/50997.stm</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[12]      Carroll Quigley, Tragedy and Hope: A History of the World in Our Time (New York: Macmillan Company, 1966), 51</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[13]      Adam Smith, The Wealth of Nations. U. of Chicago Edition, 1976: Vol. IV, ch. 2: 477</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[14]      Adam Smith, An inquiry into the nature and causes of the wealth of nations. Regnery Gateway, 1998: page 152</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[15]      Adam Smith, An inquiry into the nature and causes of the wealth of nations. Regnery Gateway, 1998: pages 166-167</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[16]      Patricia Goldstone, Aaronsohn&#8217;s Maps: The Untold Story of the Man who Might Have Created Peace in the Middle East. (Harcourt Trade, 2007), 29-30</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[17]      Patricia Goldstone, Aaronsohn&#8217;s Maps: The Untold Story of the Man who Might Have Created Peace in the Middle East. (Harcourt Trade, 2007), 31</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[18]      Karl Marx, Friedrich Engels, Philip Gasper (ed.), The Communist manifesto: a road map to history&#8217;s most important political document. Haymarket Books, 2005: pages 70-71</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[19]      Karl Marx, Friedrich Engels, Philip Gasper (ed.), The Communist manifesto: a road map to history&#8217;s most important political document. Haymarket Books, 2005: page 67</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[20]      Howard Zinn, A People’s History of the United States. Harper Perennial: New York, 2003: page 101</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[21]      Michael Waldman, My Fellow Americans: The Most Important Speeches of America&#8217;s Presidents, from George Washington to George W. Bush. Longman Publishing Group: 2004: page 25</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[22]      Dr. Ellen Brown, Today We&#8217;re All Irish: Debt Serfdom Comes to America. Global Research: March 15, 2008: </span><a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=viewArticle&#38;code=BRO20080315&#38;articleId=8349"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=viewArticle&#38;code=BRO20080315&#38;articleId=8349</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[23]      Howard Zinn, A People’s History of the United States. Harper Perennial: New York, 2003: page 189</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[24]      Howard Zinn, A People’s History of the United States. Harper Perennial: New York, 2003: page 238</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[25]      Steve Bachman, Unheralded Warnings from the Founding Fathers to You. Gather: June 19, 2007:  </span><a href="http://www.gather.com/viewArticle.jsp?articleId=281474977031677"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.gather.com/viewArticle.jsp?articleId=281474977031677</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[26]      Howard Zinn, A People’s History of the United States. Harper Perennial: New York, 2003: page 242</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[27]      Howard Zinn, A People’s History of the United States. Harper Perennial: New York, 2003: page 323</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[28]      Carroll Quigley, Tragedy and Hope: A History of the World in Our Time (New York: The Macmillan Company, 1966), 130</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[29]      Niall Ferguson, Empire: The Rise and Demise of the British World Order and the Lessons for Global Power (New York: Basic Books, 2004), 186</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[30]      Niall Ferguson, Empire: The Rise and Demise of the British World Order and the Lessons for Global Power (New York: Basic Books, 2004), 186-187</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[31]      Niall Ferguson, Empire: The Rise and Demise of the British World Order and the Lessons for Global Power (New York: Basic Books, 2004), 190</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[32]      Carroll Quigley, The Anglo-American Establishment. GSG &#38; Associates, 1981: page 3</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[33]      Carroll Quigley, The Anglo-American Establishment. GSG &#38; Associates, 1981: page 33</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[34]      Carroll Quigley, The Anglo-American Establishment. GSG &#38; Associates, 1981: page 34</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[35]      Murray N. Rothbard, Wall Street, Banks, and American Foreign Policy. World Market Perspective: 1984: </span><a href="http://www.lewrockwell.com/rothbard/rothbard66.html"><span style="font-size:x-small;">http://www.lewrockwell.com/rothbard/rothbard66.html</span></a></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[36]      William Greider, Secrets of the Temple: How the Federal Reserve Runs the Country. (New York: Simon and Schuster, 1987), 276</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[37]      William Greider, Secrets of the Temple: How the Federal Reserve Runs the Country. (New York: Simon and Schuster, 1987), 277</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[38]      William Greider, Secrets of the Temple: How the Federal Reserve Runs the Country. (New York: Simon and Schuster, 1987), 50</span></p>
<p align="justify"><span style="font-size:x-small;">[39]      William Engdahl, A Century of War: Anglo-American Oil Politics and the New World Order. (London: Pluto Press, 2004), 51</span></p>
</div>
</td>
</tr>
</tbody>
</table>
]]></content:encoded>
</item>

</channel>
</rss>
